"Wrede, Patricia C - Chronicles of the Enchanted Forest 04 - Talking to Dragons UC" - читать интересную книгу автора (Wrede Patricia C)1 MOTHER
TAUGHT ME to be polite to dragons. Particularly polite,
I mean; she taught me to be ordinary polite to every- one.
Well, it makes sense. With all the enchanted Princesses and
disguised wizards and transformed Kings and so on wandering
around, you never know whom you might be talking
to. But dragons are a special case. Not
that I ever actually talked to one until after I left home.
Even around the edge of the Enchanted Forest, drag- ons
aren't exactly common. It's the principle that matters, though;
always be polite to a dragon. It's more difficult than it
sounds; dragon etiquette is incredibly complicated, and if
you make a mistake, the dragon eats you. But I was well
trained. Dragon
etiquette wasn't the only thing Mother taught me.
Reading and writing are unusual skills for a poor boy, but I
learned them. Music, too, and fighting. Don't ask me where
Mother learned to use a sword; she wouldn't tell me. Until I
was thirteen, I didn't even know we had one in the house.
I even learned a little magic. Mother wasn't exactly pleased,
but growing up on the edge of the Enchanted Forest I had
to know some things. Mother
was tall and slender, and very impressive when 1 2 Patricia C. Wrede she
wanted to be. Most of the time she wore her hair in two
black braids wound around and around her head, but when
she really wanted to impress someone she let it hang straight
to her feet. A lot of the disguised Princes who stopped
at our cottage on their way into the Enchanted Forest thought
Mother was a sorceress or something. You can't really
blame them. Who else would want to live right at the edge of
a place like that? Sometimes
I thought they were right. Mother always knew
exactly what kind of directions to give them, even if they
didn't tell her what they were looking for. I never saw Mother
do any real magic, though, so I never thought about it
much. Until the day the wizard found us. I knew
right away he was a wizard. He had the same sort of
feel of magic that the unicorns and griffins have, when
you catch a glimpse of them farther on in the forest. I was a
little surprised; we didn't get too many wizards. Most of
them preferred to go into the forest through the Gates
of Mist and Pearl at the top of the Crystal Falls, or through
the Caves of Fire and Night. The few that bothered to walk
would never think of stopping at our cottage. But this
one was unusual. He
turned off the road and walked right past me without saying
anything; I thought that was a little strange. He went straight
to the door of our cottage and banged the head of his
staff against it. The door splintered and fell apart. I decided
that I didn't like him much. Mother
was cooking rabbit stew in the big black pot over the
chimney fire. She didn't even look up when the door fell
in. The wizard stood there for a minute, and I sneaked a
little closer so I could see better. He was frowning; some- how I
got the impression he wasn't used to being ignored. Mother
kept stirring the stew. "Well,
Cimorene, I have found you," the wizard said at last. "It
took you long enough," Mother said without turning. "You're
getting slow." "You
know why I am here." Mother
shrugged. "You won't get what you want; you're sixteen
years too late. I told you, you're getting slow." 4
Patricia C. Wrede "Hah!
I can take the sword now, and the boy as well. There
is nothing you can do to stop me this time," the wizard said. I
could tell he was trying to sound menacing, but he didn't
do a very good job. Mother
finally turned around. I took one look at her face and
backed up a couple of steps. She looked at the wizard for a
minute and started to smile. "Nothing, Antorell? Are you
sure?" The
wizard laughed and raised his staff. I backed up another
couple of steps. I mean, I wanted to see what was going
on, but I'm not stupid. He paused a moment—for effect,
I think—and Mother pointed at him. He
screamed and started to collapse in on himself. "No! Not
again!" He shrank pretty quickly, all but his head. He was
shouting nearly the whole time. "I'll get you, Cimorene! I'll be
back! You can't stop me! I'll—" Then his head collapsed
and there was nothing left but a little puddle of brown
goo and his staff. I
stared at the puddle. All I could think was, I never knew
Mother could do that. Mother let me stand there for a while
before she told me to clean it up. "Be sure you don't touch
the staff," she reminded me. "And don't forget to wash
your hands before you come to dinner." I went to get a
bucket; when I came back, the staff was gone and Mother was
stirring the stew as if nothing had happened. She didn't mention
the wizard again until the next morning. I was
out by the remains of our door, trying to find some way of
fixing it. I didn't think my chances were very good. I was
trying to nail a couple of pieces together when I looked up and
saw Mother walking out of the Enchanted Forest. I was so
surprised I dropped the hammer and nearly smashed my
foot. Mother never went into the Enchanted Forest. Never.
Then I saw the sword she was carrying, and if I'd still
been holding the hammer, I'd have dropped it again. Even
from a distance, I could tell it wasn't an ordinary sword
like the one I usually practiced with. This one was about
the same size and shape as mine, but it shone a little too
brightly and looked a little too sharp to be ordinary. Mother
carried it carefully; she wasn't wearing a sheath, so there
wasn't anything else she could do with it. She brought Talking
to Dragons 5 it over
to me and set it down on top of the boards I'd been working
on. "Don't touch it," she said, and went on into the
house. I had a
hard time following Mother's instructions. The more I
looked at the sword, the more I wanted to pick it up and
try a few of the passes Mother had taught me. It was
such a beautiful weapon! Just thinking about it made me
shiver. But Mother always had good reasons for the things
she told me to do, so I waited. I
didn't have to wait long; Mother came back almost immediately.
She had a swordbelt and a sheath with her that
I'd never seen before. They were old—so old the brown leather
was turning grey—and very, very plain. I was a little
disappointed; I'd expected something a little more im- pressive. Mother
went straight to the sword and put it in the sheath. She
seemed to relax a little then, as if she'd been worried about
something. I started wondering just what that weapon did.
Mother almost never worried. I didn't have much time to
think about it, though; as soon as she had sheathed the sword,
Mother turned and gave me her you're-not-much- but-you'11-have-to-do
look. I started to wony. Mother
picked up the swordbelt. "This is for you, Day- star."
I reached for it, but she shook her head. "No, I'll do it this
time. Hold still." She bent down and buckled the belt around
my waist, then hung the sheathed sword on the belt. I felt
a little strange letting her do it, and my elbows kept getting
in the way. Finally she straightened up. "Now,
Day star, I have a few things to tell you before you
leave." "Leave?"
I was shocked. Mother had never mentioned leaving
before. It occurred to me that she'd said "you," not "we."
I swallowed hard. "By myself?" "Of
course. You're sixteen; it's time you left, and I'm certainly
not coming with you. Now pay attention." She gave me
one of her sharp looks. I shut up and paid attention. "You
have a sword, and you know nearly as much as I can
safely teach you. I don't want to see you back here again
until you can explain to me why you had to leave. Do you
understand?" I nodded. Mother went on, "You 6 Patricia C. Wrede should
probably start with the Enchanted Forest; one way or
another, things will happen more quickly there. Don't lose
your sword, and don't take it out unless you need to use it.
Oh, and watch out for Antorell. He may try to make trouble
again, but it'll be a couple of days before you have to
worry about that. It'll take that long for him to get himself back
together and find out where I put his staff. All right?" "But
you haven't explained anything!" I blurted. "Why did
that wizard come here yesterday, anyway? Why should he want
to make trouble for me? And if he's so dangerous, why are
you sending me—" "Daystar!"
I stopped in midsentence. Mother glared at me.
"What happened to the manners I've tried to teach you?" "I—I'm
sorry. Mother," I said. "I was upset." "Being
upset is no excuse for rudeness," Mother said sternly.
"If you're going to be rude, do it for a reason and get
something from it." I nodded. Mother smiled. "I know it's
hard, and it's rather short notice. This will probably be the
best chance we get, though, and I can't waste it just to give
you time to get used to the idea of leaving home." I was
more confused than ever, but I could see Mother wasn't
going to tell me anything more. She looked at me for
another moment, then turned and walked toward the cottage.
At the door. Mother stopped and looked back. "Good
luck, Daystar. And stop wasting time. You don't have
much of it." Before I could say anything, she disap- peared
inside. I
started off toward the Enchanted Forest. Mother's ad- vice
was always good; besides, I was afraid she'd melt me or
something if I hung around very long. I didn't bother to follow
the road; I just headed for the forest. The road isn't particularly
useful, anyway. It disappears as soon as you get
past the outer edge of the forest, or at least, it usually does.
At any rate, I wanted to stick to the part of the En- chanted
Forest I knew, to start with. The
Enchanted Forest comes in two parts, the Outer Forest
and the Deep Woods. Most people don't know that. I'd
gone herb gathering in the Outer Forest; it's relatively safe,
if you know what you're doing. I'd never been much more
than an hour's walk from our cottage, but I had to start
somewhere. I felt
the little tingle on my skin that marked the border between
the ordinary woods, where our cottage was, and the
outer part of the Enchanted Forest. Some people have trouble
getting in and out of the Enchanted Forest, but I never
had. I was feeling excited and adventurous, and maybe a
little scared. I mean, for years I'd watched all those Princes and
heroes and so on go into the forest, and now it was my turn. I
looked back over my shoulder to see if Mother was watching.
The cottage was gone. That
shook me. You just don't expect the place you've lived
in for sixteen years to vanish like that. I looked around. None of
the woods looked familiar, either. The trees were huge,
much larger than the ones by our cottage. I couldn't reach
more than a quarter of the way around the trunk of the
smallest one. The ground was covered with deep green moss,
which ran right up to the bases of the trees and stopped short.
I could see a couple of bushes, one that had three different
colors of flowers on it. Everything felt very dark and
green and alive. I
shivered. This wasn't the Outer Forest. This was the Deep
Woods. I stood
and waited for a couple of minutes, but nothing much
happened. Somehow, I wasn't reassured. Being lost in the
Enchanted Forest is not conducive to peace of mind. There
wasn't really anything I could do about it, though. After a
while I started walking, feeling considerably less adventurous
and considerably more scared. I
walked for a long time. After a while I quit being scared, at
least mostly. Finally I started looking for a place to rest; my feet
hurt and I was getting very tired. I was careful, though;
I didn't want to sit on a flower that used to be somebody
important or anything like that. After about fif- teen
minutes I found a spot that looked all right, and I started to sit
down. Unfortunately, I'd forgotten I was wearing the sword;
it got tangled up in my legs and I sort of fell over. Somebody
giggled. I looked around and didn't see any- one, so
I decided to get untangled first. I straightened my 8 Patricia C. Wrede legs
out and sat up, making sure the swordbelt was out of the way
this time. Then I took a second look around. I still didn't
see anyone, but the same somebody giggled again. "Sir
or madam or—" I stopped. What was the proper honorific
for something that wasn't male or female? I was pretty
sure there was one, but I couldn't remember it. "Oh,
don't bother," said a high squeaking voice. "I never cared
much for all that fancy stuff." I still
didn't see anyone. "Forgive my stupidity, but I can't
seem to find where you are," I said. The
giggle came again. "Down here, silly." I
looked down and jumped. A little gold lizard was sitting right
next to my hand. He was about twice as long as my middle
finger, and half of that was tail. "Hey, watch it!" he
said. "You might hurt someone if you keep jumping around
like that. Me, for instance. You big people are so careless." "I'm
very sorry," I said politely. The
lizard lifted his head. "You are? Yes, you are! How amazing.
Who are you, anyway?" "My
name is Daystar," I said, bowing slightly. It was a little
awkward from a sitting position, but I managed. Being polite
to a lizard felt peculiar, but there are only two rules of
behavior in the Enchanted Forest: Don't take anything for
granted, and be polite to everyone. That's if you don't live
there; the inhabitants have their own codes, which it's better
not to ask about. "You're
Daystar?" The lizard did something very tangled very
quickly and ended up balanced on his tail. "So you are!
Well, my goodness. I hadn't expected to see you around here
for a while yet." "You
were expecting me?" "Of
course." The lizard looked smug. "I know everything that
goes on in the Enchanted Forest. Absolutely everything! I know
you from your little forays in the Outer Forest; it was
only a matter of time before you got this far. I thought it
would take longer, though. I'm Suz, by the way." "Pleased
to meet you," I said. "You
are?" The lizard leaned forward and almost lost his
balance. "Yes, you really are! How positively extraor- Talking
to Dragons 9 dinary.
Whatever are you doing in the Enchanted Forest?" "I
don't know," I said. "You
don't know!" The lizard did a backflip and scurried up onto
a fat tree root, where he would have a better view. He
balanced on his tail again and looked at me thoughtfully. "If
you don't know what you're doing, why are you here?" I
thought for a moment. "Do you really know everything that
happens in this forest?" "Of
course I do." Suz looked offended. An offended lizard
is an interesting sight. "I
didn't mean to hurt your feelings or anything," I said hastily.
"I just wondered if you could tell me where this came
from." I touched the sword Mother had given me. The lizard
squinted in my general direction. "What? It's on the
wrong side of you, silly; bring it over where I can see it.
If it came from the Enchanted Forest, I can tell you about
it." I
lifted the sword, sheath and all, and twisted around so the
sword was on the same side of me as Suz. The lizard promptly
fell over backward. "Oh
dear me my gracious goodness my oh," he squeaked. "Do
you know what this is?" "I
wouldn't have asked you if I knew," I said. "It's a sword;
I think it's magic." "It's
a sword! He thinks it's magic!" Suz ran around twice
in a small circle, then did the tail-balancing trick again.
"Where did you get it?" the little lizard demanded. "My
mother gave it to me; she got it out of the Enchanted Forest
somewhere," I said. I was getting a little tired of this.
"Are you going to answer my question?" "Your
mother gave it to you. The Sword of the Sleeping King,
that everyone in the world has been looking for for fifteen
or twenty years, and your mother gave it to you." The
lizard got so agitated he fell over again. "That isn't right.
That isn't reasonable. My dear boy, that simply isn't done!
Even in the Enchanted Forest there is a proper order for
these things! Someone will have to notify Kazul im- mediately.
Oh, dear, what a stir this will cause!" "I'm
sorry; I didn't know. What's the Sword of the Sleep- ing
King?" I'd never heard of it before, which rather sur- 10
Patricia C. Wrede prised
me. After Mother made me memorize all those pages of
names and titles and peculiar weapons, I'd thought I knew
the name of every magic sword in the world. It sur- prised
Suz, too. "You
don't know?" The lizard froze in the middle of getting
back up on his tail. He looked like a golden pretzel. "No,
you don't! Oh, my. You'd better go to the castle at once.
Kazul will know what to do with you. I'd better go there
myself, right away." Suz untwisted and darted off into the
undergrowth. "Wait!"
I shouted. "What castle? Who is Kazul? And why—" The
lizard looked back. "I don't have time for that! And even if
I did, I couldn't tell you. You have to find out yourself;
magic swords always work that way. Don't you know
anything?" "Do
you want me to recite the names of the Four Hundred Minor
Swords of Korred the Spellsmith? I know lots of things;
I just don't know about this. How do I find out?" "Follow
the sword, silly," Suz said, and disappeared among
the leaves. I
DIDN'T TRY to chase the lizard. For one thing, there wasn't much
point in it; Suz was small enough to hide practically anywhere.
For another, I didn't want to go running through me
Enchanted Forest. People get killed that way, or en- chanted,
or other unpleasant things. And besides, I wanted to
think. I
settled back against the tree and looked down at the sword,
a little unhappily. "Follow the sword," Suz had said. But
Mother had told me not to take it out unless I meant to use
it, and I didn't flunk "following" it was the kind of use she
meant. Besides, I wasn't sure I wanted to draw a magic
sword in the middle of the Enchanted Forest, espe- cially
one I didn't know anything about. I decided to try something
else. I stood
up and looked around. Over on my right there was a
little gap in the trees, not enough to call a clearing, just a
place where me trees were farther apart. I went over to the
middle of it and stood there while I tried to unfasten the
sheath. It was a lot more complicated than it looked; finally
I had to take the whole belt off. I wrapped the belt around
the sheath and set the whole thing down in the middle of the
open space. I backed up a couple of steps and sat 11 12
Patricia C. Wrede down on
the ground with the hilt of the sword closest to me and
the end of the sheath pointing away from me. The
woods had gone very, very quiet. I didn't like that, but I
would have felt stupid if I'd gotten up and picked up the
sword without doing anything. Besides, leaving things half-finished
can be awfully dangerous. I took a deep breath and spoke
as steadily as I could. "Sword
of the Sleeping King, I
conjure thee: By
stream and starlight, By sun
and shadow, By song
and stormwind, Show me
thy tale!" It was
the simplest spell I knew; almost the only one, in fact.
It's supposed to let the spell-caster know more about the
nature of whatever object is named in the first line of the
chant. I didn't think the spell would work quite the same way on
a magic sword, but it shouldn't do any harm, and I was
hoping to find out something useful. I finished the spell,
and everything was quiet for about two heartbeats. Fast
heartbeats; I was nervous. Then the world turned over. That's
what it felt like. The ground started shaking, and the
part under the sword pushed up until it made a mound taller
than I was. I didn't have much of a chance to look at it; I
was being rolled all over the open space and trying to grab
hold of something. Then everything went dark, and I was
falling, and a huge, deep voice said solemnly, "All hail the
Bearer of the Sword!" And
then it was over. I was lying on the ground in the Enchanted
Forest, trying to dig my way through the moss. I
stopped and waited. Nothing else happened, so I sat up and
looked around. I was still sitting in the same not-quite- a-clearing,
with the sword and sheath in the middle. The sword... The
sword was standing upright, half-buried in a knee- high
mound that hadn't been there before. The blade was about a
handspan out of the sheath, and it glittered when the sun
got through the trees enough to hit it. I stood up Talking
to Dragons 13 and
walked out. The mound was covered with moss, just like
the rest of the forest floor; it could have been there forever.
I shivered, wondering how I was going to get the sheath
out of the ground. I put
one hand on the hilt of the sword, intending to shove
it back down into the sheath. When my hand touched the
sword, my whole arm started to tingle. I jerked my hand away
and stared at the sword. It just sat there. I reached out
again, this time for the sheath. As soon
as I touched it, the sheath slid out of the ground. The
belt was still wrapped around it, and there wasn't any dirt
clinging to either of them. I touched the hilt again. It still
made my arm tingle, but this time I was ready for it, and I
shoved it back into the sheath. Then I stuffed the swordbelt
under my arm and started walking. I was sure somebody
must have noticed what had just happened, and I
didn't want to be around when they came to find out what was
going on. I
didn't stop again until midaftemoon. By then I was hungry
as well as tired; I'd forgotten to bring any food with me, and
I certainly couldn't go back for it now. I sighed and sat
down under another tree to rest and think some more,
but I didn't get much thinking done. Mostly, I stared at the
sword. Finally,
I gave up. Sitting under a tree wasn't going to teach
me anything. I stood up and buckled on the swordbelt. As I
adjusted it, my hand touched the hilt of the sword again.
Three little tingles ran up my arm before I pulled my hand
away. I looked at the sword for a moment, then shrugged and
reached for the hilt with my right hand, as if I were going
to draw it. As soon
as my hand touched the hilt, I felt the tingling. This
time I didn't let go; I concentrated on the way it felt instead.
I got three distinct impressions. One was a low, sort of
background vibration, like a kitten purring in its sleep;
one was a deep rumbling feeling; and one was a bright buzz
like a bee in a jar. Almost as soon as I figured them out,
they started to fade. In another minute they were com- pletely
gone, and they didn't come back. I took
my hand off the sword's hilt, then put it back. I 14
Patricia C. Wrede didn't
feel anything. I tried a couple more times, but what- ever it
was had stopped. I finally gave up and started walking again.
I wasn't getting anywhere trying to figure out the sword,
and I had to find somewhere to spend the night. At
least I didn't have to worry about giants; they live farther
east, by the Mountains of Morning. It occurred to me
suddenly that I didn't know where I was; I might be in the
Mountains of Morning for all I knew. It wasn't a par- ticularly
cheerful thought. I started walking more quietly. I'd
been walking for nearly half an hour when I realized that I
knew where I was going. Unfortunately, I didn't know where
I'd be when I got there. It was very odd, and I was a
little uneasy until I realized that I didn't have to go that direction.
I could just as easily turn around and walk the other
way, or go sideways. In fact, I did for a while, just to
prove I could. After
that I felt better, so I stopped avoiding whatever it was
and. started walking toward it again. I wasn't going to get
anywhere if I kept avoiding things; I might miss something
important. Besides, there isn't any way you can avoid
everything in the Enchanted Forest. This way, at least I knew
something was coming. I was
still walking very quietly when I heard the noises; it
sounded like somebody crying. I headed toward the sound, wondering
what I was getting myself into. You can't just ignore
something like that, especially in the Enchanted For- est. On
the other hand... I stopped, staring at a thick, prickly
hedge. It was taller than my head, and impossible to see
through, much less shove through. The crying was coming
from the other side. I bent
over. The bushes were much too close together for me
to crawl through them. I could make out sunlight and
long red hair and a brown tunic on the other side, but not
much else. I stood up and walked to one side, looking for a
thin spot in the hedge. It wasn't long before I realized I was
going in a circle. Terrific, I thought. I bet it goes all the way
around without breaking. I kept walking anyway, just in
case. It
didn't take long to make the full circle. I bent over and
peered through the bushes again. Suz might be able to Talking
to Dragons 15 get
through, but I never would. I stood up and tapped lightly on the
outside of the bushes. "Excuse
me, please, but would you mind letting me through?"
I said as politely as I could. The
bushes rustled and pulled apart. I stared at them for a
minute; I hadn't really thought it would work. The bushes rustled
again; somehow they managed to sound impatient. "Ah,
thank you very much," I said, and stepped through. The
hedge closed behind me with a prim swish, and I looked
around. The inside of the hedge was a circular clear- ing
full of sunlight and the feel of magic. A red-haired girl in a
brown tunic was lying at one side of the clearing; she sat up
as I came in, and her face was tearstained. "Who
are you?" she demanded fiercely as soon as she saw me.
"And what do you want?" She looked about my age,
but I never was very good at guessing how old people are. "My
name is Daystar," I said. "I heard you, um, crying, and I
wanted to see if I could do anything." She
looked at me suspiciously. "You just walked through that
hedge? Ha! I've been trying to get out of here all day. It's
not that easy. I think you're a wizard." I noticed some scratches
on her arms and some fuzzy places in the tunic where
it might have caught on branches or trees. "I'm
not a wizard. Maybe it's easier to get in than it is to get
out," I offered. The
red-haired girl sat back. "That could be true," she said a
little less belligerently. She eyed me skeptically; I tried
to look trustworthy. "Well, you don't look like a wiz- ard,"
she said at last. "Can you get out again?" "I
don't know," I said. "Well,
try!" she said, "No, wait; I'll stand next to you so I
can get out, too. Then we'll both be rescued." She jumped
to her feet. "What are you waiting for?" "I'm
sorry, but I don't really think I need to be rescued," I said.
"I was looking for a place to spend the night and this
seems pretty safe. I'm not sure I want to leave just yet. Besides,
I don't know anything about you. Maybe I don't want to
rescue you." \ "Oh, rats." The redhead sat down
again. "I thought you 16
Patricia C. Wrede might
be a hero; you can talk them into anything. Stupid creatures." "Who
are you?" I asked. "And why are you worried about
wizards?" "I
suppose it won't matter if I tell you," she said after thinking
for a minute. "They're chasing me. My name's Shiara,"
she added. "Wizards
are chasing you? More than one?" I was im- pressed.
Wizards usually don't cooperate much, even the ones
who belong to the Society of Wizards. "What did you do?" Shiara
hesitated, then threw her hair back over her shoul- der
with a toss of her head. "I," she said defiantly, "am a fire-witch." "You're
a fire-witch?" Well, she had the red hair for it, but
that doesn't always mean someone is a fire-witch. She must
have heard the doubt in my voice, because she scowled at me. "I
am a fire-witch! I am!" "I
didn't say you weren't," I said hastily. That only seemed
to make it worse. "You
don't believe me!" she said accusingly. "But I am so a
fire-witch! I am! I am!" She was shouting by the time
she finished. She glared at me, and her hair burst into
flame. That
settled it; she really was a fire-witch. "I believe you, I
believe you," I said. "Uh, shouldn't you do something about
your hair?" Shiara
burst into tears and her hair went out. I stood there feeling
silly and useless. Finally I remembered my hand- kerchief;
Mother made me carry one all the time, even chopping
wood, so I actually had it with me. I pulled it out and
offered it to her. After a couple of sniffs, she took it and
mopped her face, but she didn't say anything. "I'm
sorry," I said finally. "I didn't mean to make you mad." "Well,
you did," she snapped. She crumpled the hand- kerchief
into a little ball and threw it at me. I
caught it and stuffed it back into my pocket. "I said I was
sorry." Talking
to Dragons 17 "I
can't help having a temper," Shiara said crossly. "All fire-witches
do." "Really?
I've never met one before. I've met heroes and Princes,
and once in a while even a wizard, but no fire- witches.
Does your hair always do that when you get mad?" "No,"
she said. She looked like she was going to cry again. "Why
are the wizards chasing you?" I asked hastily, hoping
it was a safer topic. "I
burned the Head Wizard's staff," Shiara said matter- of-factly. My jaw
dropped about a foot. A wizard's staff is the source
of his power; furthermore, most wizards store spells in
them. Sort of an emergency reserve. A lot of the staffs get
passed down from one wizard to the next, accumulating magic
as they go. They're practically indestructible. They get
lost a lot and then found in the nick of time under peculiar circumstances,
but I'd never heard of one being destroyed before.
And the Head Wizard's staff... "You
burned a wizard's staff?" I managed finally. "You
bet." Shiara's eyes glinted at the memory. "He deserved
it, too. But the rest of them got mad. So I ran away
while they were arguing about what to do with me." "And
you came to the Enchanted Forest? On purpose? Isn't
that a little extreme? I mean, you could get, well, enchanted.
Or killed, or something. This place is danger- ous." "Having
the whole Society of Wizards mad at you is just as
bad," she snapped. I
thought about it. She was right. "Why did you bum the
Head Wizard's staff?" I asked after a minute. "I
didn't like him," Shiara said shortly. I got the distinct impression
she didn't want to talk about it, so I decided to change
the subject again. Besides, my feet hurt. "Would
you mind if I sat down?" I asked. "I've been doing a
lot of walking today." She nodded. I moved the sword
out of the way and sat down; I was starting to get the
hang of it. Shiara saw the weapon and frowned. "Are
you sure you're not a hero or an apprentice hero '» or
something?" 18
Patricia C. Wrede "I
don't think I am," I said cautiously. "I'm not really sure." "You're
not sure? Don't you know who you are?" I
blinked. I'd never really thought about it that way. "I know
who I am," I said. "I just don't know what I'm supposed
to be doing. Except finding out what I'm supposed to be
doing." Shiara
stared at me. "I don't believe it. Nobody comes to the
Enchanted Forest without some kind of reason." "What's
yours, then?" I said. I was getting a little tired of
people and animals and things not believing me. "None
of your business!" Shiara said. She was glaring at me
again. Then she jumped up and glared down at me. "I
want to leave," she announced. "Right now." "All
right," I said. "But I thought you couldn't get through the
hedge." Shiara
stamped her foot, and a little flame flared up from it.
"I can't! Open it for me! Right now!" She was really mad,
but at least this time her hair wasn't burning. I was glad;
watching someone glare at you with her hair on fire is a
little unnerving. "I
don't want to open the hedge yet," I said reasonably. "I
don't even know if I can. Besides, it could be dangerous. There
are wolves in this forest. And it's getting dark; there could
be nightshades out there already. That may not bother a
fire-witch, but—" "I
hate you!" Shiara cried. She sounded like she meant it. "Just
because I don't want to get eaten by wolves or driven
mad by a nightshade or something?" I said, puzzled. "What's
wrong with that?" Shiara
didn't answer; she just turned her back on me. I watched
her for a minute, then sort of settled back on the ground.
Things were getting very complicated. I was lost in the
Enchanted Forest, with no food or water. I had a magic
sword I didn't want to use because it did strange things
to the ground. In another day or so I would probably have a
wizard looking for me. I still didn't have any idea how I
was going to figure out why Mother wanted me to leave
home. And then there was Shiara. Talking
to Dragons 19 Fire-witches
are rare. Nobody can learn to be one; you're either
bom one or you're not. They're very powerful. They can bum
anything, of course, and fire doesn't hurt them at all.
Fire-witches can leam almost any kind of magic there is.
They're immune to most spells, too, which is why wiz- ards
usually don't like them much. Fire-witches can even summon
Elementals and get them to listen. Well, some- times.
And Shiara was a fire-witch. With enough power to bum a
wizard's staff. The Head Wizard's staff. I
didn't think I wanted her to be mad at me. I
didn't know what to do about it, though. I didn't even know
what I'd done wrong, and I wasn't at all sure what to do
next. What do you say to a mad fire-witch? Right
about then I heard snuffling noises; Shiara was crying
again. I sighed and dug out my handkerchief. "I
didn't mean to make you mad," I said as I watched her mop
her face again. "I just keep doing it by accident. It'd
make things a lot easier for both of us if you would tell me what
I'm doing wrong so I can stop." Shiara
looked at me over the top of the handkerchief, which
was starting to look sort of damp and wrinkled. "You want to
talk to me? You're not scared?" She lowered the handkerchief
and stared at me. "You mean it!" "Of
course I mean it," I said. "Why shouldn't I? And why
should I be scared?" "I
guess I'd better tell you," she said with a sigh. THE
PROBLEM WAS, Shiara was a fire-witch who couldn't do
anything. On purpose, I mean. Things happened some- times
when she got mad, and once in a while she could make a
spell work, but most of the time she couldn't make anything
happen. She didn't have very many friends because everyone
was afraid of her. I could understand that. I mean, with a
temper like hers and no way of telling what would happen
when she lost it, people had reason to be nervous. On top
of that, everyone kept telling her about all the things
she ought to be able to do because she was a fire- witch.
Like not worrying about nightshades; that was why she got
mad at me. She was awfully sick of being told about what
fire-witches could do, especially when she couldn't. I
couldn't blame her for getting mad. And
then somebody told the Society of Wizards about this
fire-witch who couldn't cast spells or anything. They decided
it would be a great chance to find out more about fire-witches.
As I said, wizards don't get along with fire- witches
very well. So a whole bunch of wizards came and grabbed
Shiara right out of the middle of town. Shiara didn't like
it; she liked it even less when she found out they wanted her to
stand in the middle of a circle of wizards while they 21 22 Patricia C. Wrede threw
spells at her to see what would work. "I
said no," Shiara told me. "And they said I didn't have any
choice. That's when I burned the Head Wizard's staff." "They
don't sound like the wizards I've met," I said. Then I
remembered Antorell. "Most of them, anyway." "I
don't care; I don't like wizards," Shiara said. I couldn't blame
her, and I said so. She nodded .and went on, "Any- way, it
turned out that the wizards had brought me to the edge of
the Enchanted Forest. They said something about the
magic in the forest and fire-witches' magic being related. That
was before I got away. So I decided to see if there was
somewhere in the forest I could find out how to use my
magic. Only then I stumbled in here and I couldn't get out. I
was afraid the wizards would catch up with me, and I was
tired and hungry and mad. That's why I was crying." I
wished she hadn't mentioned being hungry; I'd almost forgotten
that I hadn't eaten since breakfast. But there wasn't anything
inside the hedge to eat, and I wasn't going to try opening
it. I thought I'd already done enough experimenting for one
day, and besides, it was getting dark. "What
are you doing in the Enchanted Forest?" Shiara asked when
I didn't say anything. "I
don't know," I said. "How
can you not know?" she demanded. "I told you why I
came!" So I
explained about Mother and the wizard. Shiara was very
interested. "I
think I want to meet your mother," she said. "After I learn
how to use my magic. Do you think she'd be willing to
teach me how to melt a wizard?" I said
I didn't know. "I
don't see how you can find out what you're supposed to be
doing just by wandering about the Enchanted Forest," Shiara
said. "Well,
you're planning to wander around until you find out how
to use your magic, aren't you?" I said. "I don't think I
really see the difference." "I
know what I'm doing!" Shiara said. "That's the dif- ference." "You
don't seem to know very much about the Enchantee \
)if«i-*>»f ••' Talking
to Dragons 23 Forest,"
I said. "Otherwise you wouldn't have gotten caught by this
hedge." Shiara
scowled, then looked suddenly thoughtful. "Is it more
dangerous to wander around the forest alone than it is with
someone?" "It
depends," I said. "Two people can attract more at- tention
than one, but sooner or later everyone in the En- chanted
Forest runs into something dangerous. And when you do
get into trouble, it's sort of nice to have someone around
to help." "Why
don't we stay together, then?" Shiara said. "After we get
out of this stupid hedge, I mean. As long as neither of us
knows exactly where we're supposed to be going, we might
as well wander in the same direction." "All
right," I said. It sounded like a good idea, especially since
it's hard to run into someone completely by accident in the
Enchanted Forest. Then
Shiara made me describe Antorell in detail. She decided
that he didn't sound like any of the wizards who had
kidnapped her. I wasn't sure whether that was good or bad. I
was beginning to like Shiara; she was sort of nice when
she wasn't mad. But if we were going to stick together, we
would have two sets of wizards looking for us, and that didn't
sound too good. Shiara was still curious, so I wound up
telling her about the sword and the lizard and everything, too. "The
Sword of the Sleeping King," she said thoughtfully when I
finished. "Well, it sounds important. Can you do that
spell again? I'd like to watch; maybe I could figure it out." "I
could do it, but I won't," I said. "Once was enough." "You
scared or something?" Shiara said scornfully. "I'm
not being scared, I'm being sensible," I said. "That was no
minor magic I set off. Are you trying to attract attention?" "No,
I suppose you're right. Will you let me see it, at least?" "Sure,
if you promise not to take it out of the sheath or say any
spells at it or anything," I said. I stood up and ,started
trying to unbuckle the belt. It was hard to do in the 24
Patricia C. Wrede daik.
Finally Shiara got tired of waiting and came and helped. It
still took a while, and my elbows got in the way again, but
finally we managed to get the swordbelt off. Shiara took the
sheath and squinted at the parts of the sword that showed. "I
can't see anything," she complained. "There
isn't much to see," I said. "Besides, it's dark. Maybe
we should wait until tomorrow." "I
wanted to see it now. Oh, all right." She handed it back,
hilt first. I took it and nearly let go again right away. The
tingling was back, the one that reminded me of a bee, and it
was a lot stronger than it had been before. "Watch
out!" Shiara said. "You almost dropped it." "It's
tingling again," I said. "It
is? Let me see." I handed the sword back, and Shiara touched
the hilt. "I don't feel anything. Are you sure?" "Of
course I'm sure." I reached out and put my hand on the
hilt, next to Shiara's. "Ow!"
I said, and Shiara went, "Oh!" and we both dropped the
sword. We looked at each other for a minute. "What
did it feel like to you?" I said finally. "Like
something pulling at me," Shiara said. She eyed the
sword. "You can have it back; I don't think I want to look at
it anymore." I
picked up the sword and put it back on. I still wanted to know
what it was doing, but I didn't want to do any more messing
around with it in the dark. Shiara and I talked about it for
a while, but we were both tired, and finally we decided to just
go to sleep. We would have plenty of time to ex- periment
in the morning if we still felt like it. Spending
the night in the Enchanted Forest sounds aw- fully
exciting, but it isn't really. Either you stay up all night so the
wolves and nightshades and things won't get you and they
don't, or you fall asleep and they do, or you find someplace
safe and sleep there and never know. We slept all
night, at least I did, and when we woke up in the morning the
hedge was still there. By that
time I was really hungry, and since there wasn't anything
to eat inside the hedge I was anxious to leave. So was
Shiara; she was still worried about the Society of Wiz- ards.
We got up and brushed the moss off our clothes, and Talking
to Dragons 25 I
checked the sword, just to be safe. "Will
you quit fussing with that and come open this stupid hedge?"
Shiara said. I
walked over to the bushes. They looked very dense and very
prickly. "Excuse me," I said to the hedge. "I would like to
thank you for keeping the wolves and things out all night,
and I would very much appreciate it if you would let me
through now." "That's
the dumbest..." Shiara began, and the bushes rustled
and parted. I grinned and stepped through. The branches
shut behind me with a snap. "Ow!" said Shiara. I
turned around. She was still on the other side of the hedge. "What
happened?" I yelled. "What
do you think happened? And you don't have to shout;
I'm not that far away." "I'm
sorry," I said. "Make
it open up again!" "I'll
try," I said doubtfully. I addressed the bushes again. "Excuse
me, but you seem to have a friend of mine inside, and she
can't get out. Will you please let her through?" The
bushes rustled smugly and didn't move apart at all. "I'd
really appreciate it if you would let her out," I said. "She's
nicer than you think." The bushes rustled again. This time
they sounded skeptical. They still didn't open. "Well?"
said Shiara's voice. I
sighed. 'They won't open up. I'm afraid you'll have to
apologize." "Apologize?
To a bush?" Shiara sounded outraged. "I won't!
I'll bum this hedge to cinders! I'll— Ow!" "I
really think you'd better apologize," I said. "Otherwise you
probably won't be able to get out until the wizards come." There
was silence for a while. Finally Shiara said, "Oh, all
right. I'm sorry I said you were a stupid hedge." She paused.
"Now will you please let me through?" Reluctantly,
the bushes pulled apart. Shiara sighed with relief
and stepped through. She almost didn't make it; the bushes
closed again so fast they caught a piece of her tunic. "Hey!"
she said. "Stop that!" i
"I hate to mention this," I said as I helped Shiara work 26
Patricia C. Wrede her
tunic free, "but you really ought to be more polite." "To
lizards and bushes? Ha!" She jerked her tunic free and
glared at the hedge. "I
mean it," I said. "It only gets you into trouble when you're
not." "I'm
a fire-witch," Shiara said sullenly. "People are sup- posed
to be polite to me." "I
thought you didn't like having everyone scared of you,"
I said. I turned to the bush. "Thank you very much," I told
it. The
branches rustled politely. I turned back to Shiara, who was
watching me with her mouth open. "If you act like
that all the time, I don't think people would like you much
even if you weren't a fire-witch. Good-bye." I turned around
and started walking. "Wait!"
I stopped. Shiara ran up beside me. "I—I'm sorry.
I guess I'm not used to being nice to people." "That
could really get you in trouble in the Enchanted Forest,"
I said. Shiara
looked back over her shoulder at the hedge and shuddered.
"I guess you're right. Well, I'll try." "All
right. Let's find something to eat." That
was easier to say than do. We found a bush that had
some berries on it, but half of them were blue and half were
red. I wasn't quite hungry enough to take a chance on
them, and neither was Shiara. She thought about it, but finally
decided not to. "If my fire-magic doesn't always work,
my immunity to magic might not always work, either," she
said. "I'd hate to turn into something awful just because of a
few berries." I thought that was very sensible. We kept going. Eventually
we found a clearing full of blackberry bram- bles.
It looked very odd sitting there in the middle of the Enchanted
Forest; it was too ordinary. The berries were full of
seeds, but we ate a lot of them anyway. I picked some extras
and tied them up in my handkerchief for later. When we
finished, we started walking again. It
wasn't a very exciting walk. The woods looked just the
same. The trees didn't get any smaller, the moss still covered
the ground, and every once in a while there was a Talking
to Dragons 27 peculiar
bush growing next to one of the trees. It would have
gotten boring after a while if Shiara hadn't been there. It was
sort of nice to have someone my own age to talk to; I'd
never had any friends. Most people didn't want their children
getting as close to the Enchanted Forest as we lived, so we
never had any visitors except the Princes and so on. I told
Shiara about living at the edge of the forest, and she told me
about the town she lived in. It was very interesting, to me,
anyway. By the
middle of the morning we were both getting hun- gry
again. Blackberries don't stick with you for long. We stopped
and got out the berries I'd saved in my handkerchief. They
were sort of squashed and messy, but they tasted fine. Then we
started walking again. It was a warm day, and by the
time we saw the stream we were both very thirsty. "Water!
Oh, great!" Shiara said as we reached the bank. It was
a small stream, ankle deep and a little too wide to jump. I
could see the pebbles on the bottom. Shiara knelt on the
bank and reached down. "Wait
a minute!" I said. "You shouldn't just drink that. You
could turn into a rabbit, or lose your memory, or disappear,
or something." Shiara
looked at me. Then she looked at the stream. "I don't
care," she said finally. "I'm thirsty." She leaned back toward
the water. "But
what if— Watch out!" I grabbed Shiara and pulled her
away just as a huge swirl of muddy water came rushing down
the stream. She scrambled back and stood up, and we
watched the stream for a minute. It was now almost a river,
deep and fast and angry. Shiara
looked at me. "Thanks." "You're
welcome. I guess we'll have to go back—" I started
to turn back toward the woods and stopped in mid- sentence.
There was dark water on that side of us, too. We were
standing on an island. A very small island. It was getting
smaller every minute. I
stared at the churning water, and my hand went to my sword.
I don't know why; swords usually aren't much good against
floods. As soon as I touched the hilt I knew that it '
wasn't in the nature of this particular stream to do this sort 28 Patricia C. Wrede of
thing. I didn't know how I knew, but I was sure someone was
creating the Hood. Right
about then I heard a chuckle. Not a nice chuckle. I was
looking around for the chuckler when Shiara grabbed my arm.
"Daystar! Over there!" I
turned. A man was leaning against one of the trees. He had
blue robes and black hair and a wizard's staff in one hand.
I'd never seen him before. He was watching Shiara. "Well,
little fire-witch, I seem to have caught you again," he
said. "You
leave me alone!" Shiara shouted. "Or I'll bum your staff,
too." The
wizard chuckled again. He really had a nasty chuckle. "Oh,
I don't think so," he said. "I've taken precautions, you
see." He waved at the water that surrounded us and smiled
patronizingly. "Or weren't you aware that fire-magic won't
cross water?" "Magic
may not cross water, but we can," I said. I was beginning
to share Shiara's dislike of wizards. "Come on, Shiara
It can't be very deep." "Where
did you find the hero?" the wizard asked. Shiara just
glared at him. The wizard laughed. I didn't like his laugh
any better than his chuckle. "I should give him some- thing
to do, don't you think? A monster, perhaps. Heroes like
monsters." He waved his staff in the general direction of the
flooding stream. Part of
the water on one side of our island started to bunch
up and solidify. Once it got started, it went pretty fast. I
didn't even have time to step back before the thing was
finished growing. It looked sort of like a giant snake's head
that dripped. The outlines kept changing because it was
made out of water that wasn't completely solid, but it was
pretty clearly a snake. It
lunged at me. I dodged and drew my sword. I almost didn't
make it. Shiara yelled, and there was a puff of steam from
the snake's head. The snake didn't seem particularly hurt;
some of the stream water bunched up around it, but that
was all. I heard the wizard laugh again. "I'm
afraid that won't work very well, young lady," he said.
"You'd have to boil the whole stream away to get rid 30
Patricia C. Wrede of my
monster, and I don't think you can. Pity, isn't it? Be patient;
you'll have your turn in another minute, and then the
Head Wizard will owe me a favor." The
head lunged again. By now I was ready for it, but it was
awfully fast. I dodged again and struck at it with the sword,
even though I wasn't sure what good it would do me to
wound something that wasn't even alive. I found out in a
hurry. The
sword made a humming noise, and I heard the wizard yell.
There was a sound like an explosion. The snake head made a
bubbly noise and collapsed in a wave of muddy water. I
got soaked. The floodwater drained away, leaving a lot
of wet moss. And Shiara yelled again. I
whirled around. Shiara was pointing; it took me a sec- ond to
realize what she was pointing at. It was the big tree that
the wizard had been leaning against. A couple of short branches
were lying at the foot of the tree. The wizard was gone. I STOOD
WHERE I was, panting and dripping. When I got my
breath back, I went over to the tree. There was no sign of the
wizard except for the "branches" I'd noticed. There were
three of mem, and they weren't branches. They were pieces
of a staff. I
looked at Shiara. "That's two wizard's staffs you've broken,"
I said. "They're really going to be after you now." "I
didn't break it," Shiara said indignantly. "You did." "I
did not," I said. We looked at each other for a minute. "If
neither of us broke it," Shiara said finally, "who did?" "Me,"
said a voice. I looked up. A little man was sitting in the
branches of the tree. He was about two feet tall and dressed
entirely in green. His eyes were black and very bright,
and his ears were slightly pointed. He had to be an elf. "I
think you mean 'I,'" I said automatically. "I
shouldn't wonder if you're right," the elf said thought- fully.
He tilted his head to one side. "Does it matter?" "Can
you get down from that tree?" Shiara said. "You're giving
me a crick in my neck." The elf
looked from me to Shiara and back to me again. "Introduce
me to your charming companion," he said. 31 32
Patricia C. Wrede "Oh,
excuse me," I said. I told the elf our names and thanked
him for taking care of the wizard. I was a little curious
about that. I'd never met an elf, but they didn't have a
reputation for altruism. I wasn't sure I wanted to trust
one, either. Elves can be very tricky. "You're
welcome," the elf said. "I've never cared much for
wizards. Unfortunately, it's very difficult to do anything permanent
to them. This one will be back in a day or two." "If
there is anything we can do for you in return, I would like to
hear what it is," I said. If someone in the Enchanted Forest
does you a favor, you have to offer to do one for them.
Well, you don't have to, but if you don't, things seem to go
wrong a lot after that. You have to be careful, though; if you
promise to do a favor before you hear what it is, you can end
up in more trouble than you started with. I wasn't going
to promise anything without finding out first what I was
promising. "Consider
the debt canceled," the elf said politely. I thought
he sounded disappointed, and I didn't like the way he was
looking at my sword. Suddenly I was very glad Mother
had told me about making promises in the Enchanted Forest. "Thank
you," I said. "You did a very neat job." He had, too;
the staff had been sliced cleanly into thirds. I began to wonder
how he had done it. I hadn't thought elves were powerful
enough to break a wizard's staff. I didn't really want to
ask, though; he might take offense or something. "You
may have the staff, if you want it," the elf said, waving
at the pieces. "What
good is a busted wizard's staff?" Shiara said. "You
can't do anything with it." "Nonsense,"
said the elf. "Wizard's staffs are just as powerful
in pieces as they are whole, and they're fairly easy to put
back together. So please, take it with you." I
didn't like the way he kept suggesting that. It sounded reasonable
enough, but as I said, I wasn't sure I wanted to trust
him. "Are you sure you don't want it?" I asked finally. "What
would an elf do with a wizard's staff? If you don't take
it, I'll just have to get rid of it somewhere." Talking
to Dragons 33 That
sounded reasonable, too. I wasn't going to commit myself,
though; he was too insistent. "Thank you for the suggestion,"
I said. "We'll think about it." "Do,"
the elf said. His black eyes twinkled. "Perhaps I'll
see you later. Good-bye." Before I could say anything he had
disappeared into the treetops. Elves move very quickly. "What
was that about?" Shiara demanded. "I
don't know about that elf," I said slowly. "I think something
funny is going on; he was trying too hard to get us to
take that staff." "Well,
we have to do something with it," Shiara said. "Why?"
I said. "We didn't break it. And I don't want to mess
with a wizard's staff, even a broken one." Shiara
frowned. I made a gesture toward the pieces and realized
that I was still holding the sword in my hand. I started
to put it back in its sheath, then stopped. The sheath was as
wet as everything else I was wearing; I couldn't put the
sword in that. I mean, not all magic swords are rustproof, and
even if you have one that is, putting your sword away without
cleaning it is a bad habit to get into. I checked my pockets,
just in case, but even my handkerchief was wet. "Shiara,
do you have anything I could borrow to dry my sword?"
I asked finally. "Everything I have is soaked." "What
does that have to do with the wizard's staff? Oh, give it
here; I'll fix it." She held out her hand, a little reluctantly.
I could see she didn't really want to take the sword.
After what had happened the last time she'd touched it, I
really couldn't blame her. "That's
all right, I'll do it," I said. "It's my job. All I need is
something dry to wipe it with." Shiara
glared at me. "All I have is my tunic, and I am not
going to take it off just so you can dry your stupid sword!
If you won't give it to me, it can rust." My face
got very hot. "I, um, I'm sorry, I didn't mean... I mean, I
didn't think..." "Oh,
shut up and give me the sword." I held
it out. Shiara took it, a little gingerly, but neither of us
felt anything unusual. While she wiped it dry on the 34 Patricia
C. Wrede Talking
to Dragons 35 front
of her tunic, I walked over to the stream. I was pretty sure,
now, that it was safe to drink from this stream. I'd swallowed
some of it when the wizard's wave had hit me, and
nothing had happened to me yet. I bent over and took a
drink. The
water was clean and cold, with just a hint of lime. It
tasted awfully good, though I prefer the lemon-flavored streams
myself. However, I wasn't exactly in a position to be
picky. I think I like lemon because Mother and I got most of
our drinking water from a lemon-flavored stream just
inside the forest. It was much nicer than the well water we used
for washing, even if it was more work to haul the buckets
that far. Shiara
came over just as I finished. She looked at me for a
minute, then handed me the sword. "Here." I took it, and she
sat down and started trying to drink out of her cupped
hands. Most of the water ran out, but she kept trying. I stood
holding the sword and wondering what I was going
to do with it. I mean, walking through the Enchanted Forest
with a sword in your hand is just asking for trouble. On the
other hand, I couldn't put it away until the sheath dried
out, and that would probably take hours. I was still trying
to figure out what to do when Shiara finished drinking and sat
up. "Now,
what are we going to do about that wizard's staff?" she
said. Neither
one of us wanted to take it. Shiara wanted to hide
the pieces before we left, and finally I agreed. We walked
back over to the tree. I started to put my sword down;
then I changed my mind. One of the easiest ways of losing
important things in the Enchanted Forest is to put them
down while you do something else; when you get back,
they're gone. Then you have to go to all the bother of
finding whoever took your things before you can get on with
whatever you really want to do. I shifted the sword into my
left hand and looked around for the nearest piece of
staff. "Daystar!
Come see!" Shiara was waving a piece of the staff
to attract my attention. "You
really shouldn't do that," I said as I walked over. "You
might set off a spell or something. This used to be a wizard's
staff, remember? We ought to at least try to be careful." "Yes,
but look what it did," Shiara said, pointing. I looked
down. There was a brown patch in the moss, just the
size and shape of the stick Shiara was holding. I bent over
and looked more closely. The moss was dry and brittle; the
stems broke as soon as I touched them. "But
this is the Enchanted Forest," I said to no one in particular.
"You aren't supposed to be able to do things like this." "Well,
this wizard's staff did," Shiara said. "I bet it'll do it
again, too." Before I could stop her, she laid the stick down on
the moss. She picked it up almost immediately. The
moss underneath it was brown and dead. I stared. "I
don't like this," I said. There aren't very many things you can
be sure of in the Enchanted Forest, but I'd never seen a
dead plant there, not even in the Outer Forest. The whole
place felt too alive to put up with that sort of thing. "I
wonder if all wizard's staffs do that." "I
don't know about other staffs, but we can check the other
pieces of this one," Shiara said. She walked toward one of
the other two sticks. I sighed and started for the last one. "This
one's the same," Shiara reported after a minute. "What
about yours?" "Just
a minute," I said. I bent over and picked it up in my
right hand. When I
woke up, Shiara was dripping water on my face. "You
can stop now," I said. "I'm wet enough already." Shiara
shook her head. "Are you all right? I mean, you're not
enchanted or anything, are you?" I
thought about it for a moment. "I don't think so, but if I
am, we'll find out pretty soon." I sat up and realized I'd
been lying on the moss at the foot of the tree. "What happened?" "How
should I know? One minute you were standing there
with that sword, and then there was some kind of explosion
and when I turned around you were lying on the ground
and that piece of the wizard's staff was over there, 36
Patricia C. Wrede burning.
I don't think anyone's going to put that staff back together
again; it was the middle piece." Shiara scowled. "But
I think you were right about that elf." "Where's
my sword?" I said. All of a sudden I was sure someone
had taken it while Shiara and I weren't paying attention. "In
your hand," Shiara said. She sounded a little exas- perated.
"You wouldn't let go of it." I
looked down. She was right; my left hand was still clenched
around the hilt. When I relaxed my hand a little, the
fingers started to tingle. I'd been holding the hilt so tightly
that my hand had fallen asleep. Well,
at least I hadn't lost it. I started to shift the sword back to
my right hand, then stopped and swallowed hard. The
hand was burned black; I couldn't even feel it. I looked away,
feeling sick. Shiara was staring, too. "Daystar,
I didn't notice, I was so worried about waking you up
I didn't even see—" She stopped. She tilted her head
back until she was looking up the tree trunk, and her eyes
flashed. "I'm going to find you somebody who can fix this,"
she said grimly. "And then I'm going to find that stupid
elf and make him sorry he ever mentioned that wiz- ard's
staff." The way she said it made me very, very glad I
wasn't an elf, particularly the elf she'd be looking for. "It
doesn't really hurt or anything," I offered. As soon as I
said it, my arm started to throb. Not the hand; it was my
wrist and arm that hurt. As far as I was concerned, that was
more than enough. "That's
bad," Shiara said. She looked worried. "I know a
little about bums, from the times when I... Are you sure you
can't feel anything?" "Not
in my hand," I said. "And I'd really rather not talk about
it. It might help me not notice the way my arm feels." "Well,
let me look at it, then, and I won't have to ask questions,"
Shiara said. I stuck
my right hand out in her direction and stared at my
sword for a couple of minutes. I didn't succeed in ignoring
the sensations that were coming from my arm, but I tried
awfully hard. Finally Shiara said, "You can put it down
now." I looked back in her direction. Talking
to Dragons 37 "It's
bad," she said. "I don't know what to do for it, either.
We have to find help, and pretty soon, too. There has to
be someone in this forest who knows something about healing!
Can you walk?" "My
legs are all right," I said. I started to stand up and discovered
I was very dizzy. I made it on the second try, but
only by using the sword as a prop. Shiara
picked a direction and we started walking. After about
twenty steps I stopped worrying about which way we were
going and concentrated on walking and hanging on to the
sword. It was hard; I was still dizzy, and I was beginning to feel
cold, too. I had to work at it. My arm felt as if it were on
fire, and I started wondering whether the wizard's staff
had done something else nasty in addition to burning my
hand. I don't
know how far we went before we stopped. By that
time, Shiara was holding my good arm, trying to help me
walk. She wasn't as much help as she could have been, because
she had to keep out of the way of the sword I was holding.
As soon as we quit walking, I sat down. "Daystar,
are you sure you can't put that sword away yet?"
Shiara asked. "It gets in the way a lot." "The
sheath is still wet," I said hazily. "Well,
can we at least put the sheath in the sun so it'll dry
faster?" Shiara said. I
looked around. I was starting to feel sort of light-headed as well
as dizzy, and on top of everything I was getting thirsty.
"We can't do that," I said. "The cat has the only patch
of sun around here." "What
cat?" "That
one." I pointed at the large, dignified, black-and- white
cat that was cleaning its face in the middle of a puddle of
sunlight. It didn't even strike me as odd that I hadn't noticed
it until I started talking about it. Shiara
turned her head. As soon as she looked at it, the cat
stopped washing itself. It stared at her for a minute, then stood
up. The tip of its tail twitched three times, and it turned
around and started walking away. After a minute, it stopped
and looked back over its shoulder. It was obviously waiting. 38 Patricia C. Wrede Shiara
jumped up. "Come on, Daystar. We're going to follow
the cat. I think somebody sent it." "That
doesn't make sense," I said, but I wasn't in very good
shape to argue. Eventually, Shiara got me back on my feet.
The cat was still waiting for us, but as soon as we moved
in its direction it started walking again. I decided Shiara
was right and concentrated OK walking. I don't
know how far we followed the cat. It seemed like a long
way, but anything would have seemed like a long way at
that point. My arm hurt, and every muscle in my body
felt shaky. I never quite dropped the sword, but a couple
of times I came close. After a while I stopped think- ing
about it. Finally
Shiara stopped moving. "I was about ready for another
rest," I said fuzzily. "Is the cat still around?" "This
isn't a rest," Shiara said. "We're here." I
looked up. We were standing in front of a neat grey house
with a wide porch and a red roof. A wisp of smoke was
coming out of the chimney; whatever was cooking smelled
delicious. Over the door was a black-and-gold sign in
block letters, which read NONE OF THIS NONSENSE, PLEASE.
I'm going to like whoever lives here, I thought. The
door of the house was closed, but the black-and- white
cat jumped up on the porch and scratched at it. A moment
later, the door swung partway open and the cat disappeared
inside. WE
STAYED WHERE we were for a minute, waiting. I don't think
either one of us really knew what to do next. Fortu- nately,
we didn't have to do anything; a few minutes after the cat
vanished, the door opened the rest of the way and the
owner of the house appeared. She was
dressed in a very loose black robe with long sleeves,
and she was wearing a small pair of glasses with rectangular
lenses. She was considerably shorter than I was, though
she obviously wasn't a dwarf. She managed to look down
her nose at both of us anyway. Standing on the porch helped,
I think. "It's about time you got here," she said. "Do
you know anything about healing?" Shiara de- manded. "Of
course I do, or I wouldn't have sent Quiz out to get you,"
said the woman. "Quiz?" "The
cat. Do you plan to stand there all day? I certainly can't
do anything for you while you're outside." So we
went inside. The porch steps didn't creak. Neither did the
porch, and the hinges of the door didn't squeak at all,
either. I didn't think they would dare. The
inside of the house seemed to consist of a single 40 Patricia C. Wrede large,
airy room, full of cats. Practically every flat surface had a
cat lying on it, except the top of the stove in the comer.
I counted five cats before I stopped. Several of the
cats had furniture under them, and there was a table in the
middle of the room and another door next to the stove. The
woman in the black robe shooed two of the cats off of
chairs, and Shiara and I sat down at the table. Shiara looked
at me. "You can put that stupid sword down now. No
one's going to take it." "No,"
I said. I didn't know why I wanted to hold on to the
sword, and I didn't have enough energy to explain it if I had
known. I just knew I wanted it in my hand. "Sword?"
said the woman in black. "Oh, that sword. It's quite
proper of you to keep it for now. Now, if I may see your
hand?" She came over next to me and examined my right
arm, while I carefully didn't watch. Oddly enough, it didn't
hurt when she touched it. After a minute or so, she nodded. "Just
as I thought. This could have been very bad, but you got
here in plenty of time." She went over to a cupboard by the
stove and took out a piece of something that looked like
dried vine. She brought it back to me and tied it around my arm,
muttering something as she did. Suddenly my head wasn't
fuzzy anymore. "That
should take care of things for the time being," she said,
"and in a little while I can take care of the magic. Then we
can pack the bums with salve. Would you like some
cider while you wait?" I nodded;
I was still thirsty. Shiara frowned. "Can't you do
anything right away?" "I
have done something," the woman said. She set three mugs on
the table, all different. "Several things, in fact. I sent
Quiz out to bring you here, and I have stopped the damage
from spreading. I have also made gingerbread, which should
finish baking any minute now. When it's done, we can get
on with things." "Why
did you send a cat out for us?" Shiara demanded. "How
did you know? Who are you, anyway?" The
woman looked through her glasses. "I didn't have Talking
to Dragons 41 a dog
to send. I'm a witch. My name is Morwen. And you?" She
stopped. The cats looked at us. "Pleased
to meet you," I said. "This is Shiara, and I'm Daystar." "Why
do we have to wait?" Shiara asked again. "It
is an extremely bad idea to mix magic and cooking," Morwen
said. "Don't worry, the gingerbread won't take very
much longer." She got out a large jug and began pour- ing the
contents into the mugs. "There!" she said as she set the jug
down. "Help yourselves; I will be back in a minute." Morwen
went over to the second door and opened it. I got a
glimpse of a small yard with a square garden, a well, and two
more cats. Then the door closed with a swish of black robe.
I stared at my mug, wondering how I was going to pick
it up without putting my sword down. Then I heard a
sniffle. I turned my head. Shiara was not crying. Much. "What's
wrong?" I said. "It's
all my f-fault!" Shiara said miserably. "If you hadn't been
with me, you wouldn't have run into that wizard at all,
and if I hadn't insisted on hiding that stupid staff, you wouldn't
have gotten your hand.. ."Her voice sort of trailed off
into snuffles. I sighed. "If
you want my handkerchief, you'll have to get it out yourself,"
I said. "And it's probably still pretty wet. But you can
have it if you want it." That
made Shiara look like she was really going to burst into
tears. Fortunately, the witch came back before she could.
Morwen was carrying an armload of plants; when she saw
Shiara, she put them down on the table and produced a large
black handkerchief from somewhere inside her sleeve. "That
is quite enough of that," she said, handing the handkerchief
to Shiara. "It does nothing constructive, it makes
everyone else feel bad, and it is extremely self- indulgent.
Drink your cider; you'll feel much better." Just
then one of the cats made a loud noise, sort of a cross
between a purr and a meow. "Good; the gingerbread is
done," Morwen said. She got it out of the oven and gave us each
a piece. Shiara looked much better by that time, even if
she still didn't seem really happy. Morwen put a large
pot of water on the stove and then started sorting 42
Patricia C. Wrede through
the plants she had brought in. After a minute, she frowned. "Two
sprays or three?" she muttered. "I suppose I'd better
look it up." She put the plants down and went out again.
A few seconds later, she came back holding a book; I saw a
roomful of shelves behind her before the door closed. I
blinked. My head didn't feel fuzzy; but I was sure that door
had led out to the yard a minute ago. I looked around the
room, but there weren't any other doors except the one we'd
come in through. Finally I decided to ask. It took me another
minute to figure out how to phrase the question. "Excuse
me, Morwen? Would you mind telling me where that
door leads?" Morwen
stuck a finger in the book and looked up. "Wher- ever I
want to get to. What good is a door if you can't get somewhere
useful by walking through it? Within reason, of course."
She went back to the book. I thought about it for a
minute. Then I decided not to think about it; I was afraid it was
going to make sense. Instead,
I looked at my cider and gingerbread. I was just about
ready to put the sword on the floor so I could eat, when
Morwen set the book down next to the plants and looked
over at me. "Daystar,
you aren't— Oh, of course, you're still hold- ing the
sword. No, don't put it down yet; this will only take a few
more minutes." She picked up a handful of plants. "Come
here, please, both of you." I got
up and walked over; so did Shiara. Morwen had me
stand next to the stove, holding the sword across the front
of my chest so that the tip of it rested on the pot of water.
Shiara was behind me, with one hand on my right arm
just above the dried vine. It took a while before Morwen was
satisfied with our positions, but finally she stepped back.
"Very good. Stay just like that until I'm finished, please." She
reached inside one of her sleeves and brought out a silver
knife. She dipped the knife in the pot of water, then began
muttering over the plants she was holding. Imme- diately,
all the cats jumped down onto the floor and formed a half
circle around the stove, with Morwen and Shiara and Talking
to Dragons 43 me in
the middle. They just sat there with their eyes glowing and
only the tips of their tails moving in tiny twitches. Suddenly,
there was a sizzling noise from my right; the water
was boiling. Morwen
gave a shout. Then she held the plants high over her
head and said loudly: "By
the darkness of the stone's heart, By the
silence of the sea's tears, By the
whisper of the sky's breath, By the
dawning of the star's flame, Do as I
will thee!" Just as
she finished she threw the plants into the boiling water. There
was a big puff of steam from the pot that smelled of
herbs and magic and gingerbread, and I sneezed. The steam
spread out around me and got thicker. It smelled more and
more like herbs and magic and less and less like gin- gerbread.
My right arm started to ache, and my left arm started
to tingle. The ache got stronger, but it stayed where it was;
the tingle spread. In another second or two I was tingling
all over, except for the arm that was aching. By now
the steam was so thick I couldn't see anything, but I
could still feel Shiara's hand and the vine Morwen had
tied around my arm. For what seemed like a long time, nothing
else happened. Then one of the cats yowled. I saw Morwen's
hand, the one holding the silver knife, come out of the
mist. "In the King's name!" Morwen's voice said, and the
knife cut the vine from my arm and pulled away. My
sword flashed once, very brightly. Most of the steam settled
on my right arm and turned black. The ache started to
creep upward, and something that felt like lightning or wind
ran up my left arm and down my right one. I heard Shiara
gasp. The black steam stuff dropped off my arm into a slimy
blob on the floor. Finally, my right arm stopped hurting,
and my other arm stopped tingling, and everything felt
normal again. I let my breath out and looked around. Morwen
was looking in my direction with an expression of
extreme distaste. "That," she said, "was an exceptionally Talking
to Dragons 45 r nasty
wizard. He deserves what's coming to him." | "What's coming to him?" Shiara
asked. "I
don't know, but he certainly deserves it," Morwen said.
"Anyone who would keep a spell like that in a staff..." She
shook her head and looked down. "I do hope it doesn't disagree
with the cats." I
followed her gaze. The cats had formed a small mob and
were playing with something I'd rather not describe in detail.
I looked up again very quickly and took a step back- ward. I
bumped into Shiara and remembered that Morwen had
said not to move until she was finished. "I'm sorry," I said
to both of them. "It's
quite all right; you can sit down again now," Morwen said.
"And if you don't want to put your sword in your sheath,
you can lean it against the wall. You won't need it anymore,
for the time being, at least." I
followed Morwen's instructions and sat down at the table
again. I didn't realize until I reached for the ginger- |,
bread that although my right hand felt better it didn't look | any
better. I didn't have time to worry about it, though; t
Morwen was already standing by my chair with some oily- ||
looking salve and bandages. She worked on my hand while H I ate
gingerbread and cider left-handed. We finished about the
same time, and I thanked her. "You're
welcome," Morwen said. "Now, perhaps you would
explain how you got into such an uncomfortable situation?
I have a general idea, but I would appreciate a few
details." I told
her about the wizard and the elf, and then Shiara explained
how the staff had exploded. "Of
course the staff exploded!" Morwen said severely. "That
sword doesn't like wizard's staffs; nearly everyone knows
that, or ought to. Next time, make sure it's sheathed before
you touch one." "I
knew it!" Shiara said angrily. "That elf was trying to get
Daystar hurt!" "Not
necessarily," Morwen said. "He may simply have been
trying to make sure the wizard found you again. If you'd
taken the pieces of the staff with you, he would have had no
trouble catching up with you once he got himself 46
Patricia C. Wrede back
together, and of course the first thing he'd do would be to
look for his staff." "If
that elf wanted the wizard after us, why'd he get rid of the
wizard in the first place?" Shiara objected. "I
doubt that he did," Morwen said calmly. "It's really more
the sort of thing the sword would do. I wouldn't depend
on it in the future, though, particularly since you haven't
really learned how to use it yet." I
wanted to ask more questions about the sword, but I was
pretty sure Morwen wouldn't answer them if I did. "What
if the wizard couldn't find his staff when he came back?"
I asked instead. "Wizards
always know where their staffs are. And it's almost
impossible to keep wizards away from their staffs for any
length of time. One can slow them down a bit by putting
the staffs somewhere hard to get at, but they usually manage
in the end." "That's
why Mother hid Antorell's staff!" I said. "I
shouldn't wonder," Morwen murmured. "Now, I strongly
suggest that you rest for a while, Daystar, and while you are
doing so I will talk with Shiara in the library." She stood
up and nodded to me. Shiara
frowned and opened her mouth, then looked at me.
"All right," she said. She looked as if she wanted to say
something else, then changed her mind at the last min- ute. Morwen
went to the door, followed by Shiara and most of the
cats. I saw the room of books again before the door closed
behind all of them. I went over to a bench that used to have
three cats on it before they went into the library with
Morwen, lay down on it, trying to be very careful of my bandaged
right hand, and fell asleep almost immedi- ately. When I
woke up, it was late afternoon. I could tell by the way
the sunlight slanted in through the windows. There wasn't
anyone else in the room, except for the black-and- white
cat that had led us to Morwen's house. It was sitting in the
middle of the table, washing its tail. Talking
to Dragons 47 "Hello,"
I said. "And thank you very much for bringing Shiara
and me here." The cat
looked up briefly, decided I was uninteresting, and
went back to cleaning its tail. I shifted a little; the bench was
hard. I wasn't quite ready to sit up and start looking for
people yet, though I felt much better. Then the back door
opened—this time it was the door to the yard—and Morwen
came in. "You're
awake; good. Shiara has been waiting for you." I sat
up just as Morwen saw the cat on the table. She frowned
at it. "Child of Scom," she said sternly, "you are not
allowed on the table." The cat
looked at Morwen. Morwen looked at the cat. After a
minute, the cat jumped down to the floor, where it did its
best to pretend that the floor was exactly where it had
wanted to be all along. Morwen shook her head. "You'll
have to excuse the Grand Inquisitor; he knows he did
me a favor when he brought you here, and he's inclined
to take advantage of it. I would have sent Cass, but I
was afraid you wouldn't pay attention to her," "Cass?" "Cassandra."
Morwen nodded at a small grey cat that I hadn't
noticed come in with her. "She has much better manners
than Quiz, but she tends to be overlooked. Nobody overlooks
Quiz." I
looked at the cats. They both ignored me. I looked back at
Morwen. "I don't think I've thanked you yet for— for
fixing my arm." I wasn't really sure what else to call whatever
she'd done. "Don't
thank me until you take the bandages off tomor- row,"
Morwen said. "Time enough for thanks if it's healed properly.
Not that I have any doubts, mind, but it's better to be
sure." "All
right, I'll wait, then," I said. "Did you say Shiara was
waiting for me?" Morwen
went over to the stove. "Yes, I did. She's out by the
garden," she said over her shoulder. She reached up and
lifted a large kettle down from a hook on the wall. "Thank
you," I said. I got up and opened the back door. 48
Patricia C. Wrede There
was a room on the other side, with a bed and a large bookshelf
and, of course, a cat. I shut the door and tried again.
This time it was the library. Morwen had more books than
anyone I'd ever heard of. I shut the door and looked back at
Morwen. "How
do I get out to the garden?" I asked. "Through
the door," Morwen said without turning. "Just be
firm; sometimes it's a little contrary with strangers, but it
won't last long." I
turned back, trying to decide how to be firm with a door. I
opened it again; it was still the library. I closed it, wondering
how long it would take me to get to the garden. I
didn't really want to spend the rest of the afternoon opening and
shutting Morwen's door, but I couldn't think of any other
way of doing it. I sighed and opened the door again. This
time it worked; the door opened onto three steps going
down into the yard. I went through it quickly, before it
could change its mind. Shiara was sitting on a stone bench by the
comer of the house. She looked a lot happier than she had
earlier, but all she would say was that she'd been talking
to Morwen. "Morwen's
nice," Shiara said. "She's been showing me some
things. And she's going to give me a kitten." "That's
nice," I said. Actually, I wasn't sure it would be a
good idea to have a pet with us while we wandered around
the Enchanted Forest. On the other hand, if it was one of
Morwen's cats, it would probably be able to take care of
itself. Shiara
and I sat and talked for the rest of the afternoon. I
discovered that somehow she and Morwen had decided that we
would be spending the night here. Shiara was very pleased
about it; evidently Morwen had promised to show her
some interesting magic. I wasn't sure we should stay, even
though I liked Morwen. It felt a little strange to be staying
with someone neither of us had ever met before. I had to
admit, though, that it sounded a lot better than trying to
sleep out in the open. We were still arguing about it when one of
the cats came to bring us in to dinner. DINNER
WAS SOME sort of stew; it didn't look like much, but it
smelled and tasted awfully good. Morwen had made a large
pot of the stuff. Half of it she put in a big pan and set on
the floor for the cats; Shiara and I ate most of the rest of
it. By the time we'd finished eating, we had somehow decided
to spend the night with Morwen and the cats. I was a
little worried, at first, about what to do with the Sword
of the Sleeping King. I didn't want to leave it leaning up
against Morwen's wall all night. Finally, I decided to keep it
with me. It wasn't that I didn't trust Morwen, but Mother
had given the sword to me and it was my respon- sibility.
Once that was settled, I started wondering where Shiara
and I were going to sleep. I
shouldn't have worried. Morwen had several extra bed- rooms
behind her magic door, and she simply put each of us in
one of them. By that time I was starting to wonder how
many rooms she had in her house and where she kept them
all when they weren't needed. That isn't the sort of question
you ask people in the Enchanted Forest, though, so I
didn't. Besides,
I was tired again. As soon as Morwen showed me to
my room, I stuck the sword under the bed and went 49 50
Patricia C. Wrede to
sleep. I couldn't think of anything else to do with it, but I was
pretty sure the sword would be safe. I was right, too When I
woke up in the morning, there was a cat asleep on top of
it. After
breakfast, Morwen took the bandages off my hand. The
bums were gone and it felt fine, but she insisted on examining
it carefully before she finally decided it was all right.
When she was finished with my hand, she helped me get my
swordbelt on. The sheath was dry, so I put the sword back in
it. While I was doing that, Morwen produced a couple
of bundles and a small black kitten with one white paw.
She gave Shiara the kitten and one bundle and turned to me. "This
is for you," she said, handing me the other bundle. "It
should make your travels a little easier. Now, come outside." Morwen
opened the front door and went out onto the porch.
I let Shiara leave next and started to follow her, but one of
the cats darted in front of me and I nearly tripped. I had
to grab for the doorframe to keep my balance. "Watch
out!" Shiara said, then, "Daystar! What's the matter?" I
almost didn't hear her. I was staring down at my sword. My hand
had brushed it when I'd tripped, and I'd felt the tingling
again. Only this time there was even more of it. I reached
over and took the hilt in my right hand. The rum- bling
tingle hadn't changed, but the buzzing tingle and the purring
tingle were considerably stronger man they had been, and
they'd been joined by a brisk vibration I hadn't felt before.
I concentrated on the new feeling, trying to figure out
where it had come from, and found myself looking at Morwen. I
looked back at the sword. I hadn't let go, and my arm was still
tingling. I tried to pick out one of the other vibra- tions.
Suddenly I was feeling mostly the purring tingle and looking
out into the woods. I blinked and tried again. This time I
got the buzz, and I was staring at Shiara. Suddenly I
understood. "It's
magic!" I said. Talking
to Dragons 51 to "Of
course it's magic," Shiara said. "It's supposed to be a magic
sword. So what?" "No,
I mean that's what it does," I said. "The Sword of the
Sleeping King finds magic!" "Among
other things," Morwen said in a satisfied voice. "Finds
magic?" Shiara said skeptically. "That's
what the tingling is," I said. I was completely sure of
myself, though I didn't know why. "Different tingles mean
different kinds of magic, and the tingles get stronger when
the sword gets closer to the magic." I looked at Shiara. "No
wonder it gave me such a jolt when we both touched it at
the same time." Shiara
had been reaching for the hilt, but she pulled her hand
back hastily. "If the sword finds magic, how come I couldn't
feel anything until you touched it? And if the tingles are the
way it finds things, why can't you feel them all the time?" "I
don't know," I said. The tingling was fading again, the
same way it had when I'd held on to the sword before, so I
let go of the hilt. Morwen
was considering me through her glasses; I couldn't
tell what she was thinking from her expression. Finally
she nodded very slightly. "I see. There is consid- erably
more to you than I had thought, Daystar," she said in a
thoughtful tone. I was
still trying to figure out what that statement meant when
Morwen turned away. "However, it is time for you to be
going," she went on briskly. "I suggest that you head north.
You see those two trees? Walk straight between them and
keep going until you get to a stream; then follow the stream.
You'll get to something eventually, and you should be able
to figure out what to do from there." My eyes
turned in the direction Morwen was pointing. It was
the same way I'd been looking when I'd been con- centrating
on the purring tingle from the sword. I looked back at
Morwen. "Exactly,"
Morwen said. "What?"
said Shiara. "Let's
go," I said. I was feeling a little unsettled by the 52
Patricia C. Wrede whole
thing, and I didn't want to talk about it anymore. Shiara
scowled at me, but she didn't insist on an explanation right
then. We said
good-bye and thank you to Morwen and started walking
toward the trees. Shiara carried the kitten for a while, but
pretty soon the kitten decided it wanted to walk. We
slowed down a lot after that, unti^ the kitten got tired enough
to let Shiara pick it up again without scratching her. Shiara
and I spent most of the walk talking. I hadn't realized
how little she knew about the Enchanted Forest, and I
wound up telling her a lot of things. Like explaining about
being polite to people, and why you shouldn't promise things
without knowing what they are first. Morwen
hadn't told us how far away the stream was, and
eventually I started wondering when we were going to get to
it. I was also curious about where we were going. I was
thinking about that when I noticed that the trees we were
walking past were larger than the ones I'd seen the previous
day. At least, I thought they were larger. I studied them as
we walked, trying to decide whether it was my imagination
or whether they really were larger. I was just getting
ready to mention it to Shiara, when I heard a cough. I
stopped and looked around. "Ahem,"
said a voice. This
time I located the speaker. It was the little gold lizard,
Suz. He was sitting on a branch at just about eye level,
watching me. "Oh,
hello, Suz," I said. Shiara was looking around; I nodded
toward the lizard and said, "Shiara, this is Suz. You remember,
I told you about him. Suz, this is my friend, Shiara." The
lizard ignored the introduction and continued staring at me.
"Why," he demanded in an aggrieved tone, "didn't you
tell me Cimorene was your mother?" "You
didn't ask," I said. Suz
looked at me reproachfully. "It would have saved me a
great deal of trouble if you'd mentioned it," he said severely. "I'm
sorry," I said. "I didn't know it mattered." Talking
to Dragons 53 "You
didn't?" Suz ran down the branch and peered at me.
"No, you really didn't! How amazing. I can't under- stand
how it happened." "What
are you talking about?" Shiara said. The
lizard appeared to see her for the first time. He leaned outward
in Shiara's direction and I thought he was going to fall
off, until I saw that his tail was wrapped tightly around
a sturdy twig on the far side of the branch. "You've brought
someone with you? Dear me, this will never do. Who is
this?" "I've
already introduced you once," I reminded him. "You
weren't listening." "You
did? Yes, of course, you did. How perfectly dread- ful."
Suz ran around the branch very fast, and for a minute I was
afraid he was going to try and stand on his tail. I was sure
he'd fall off if he did; the branch wasn't very wide. "What's
so dreadful?" Shiara demanded. "There's noth- ing
wrong with me." "No,
of course there isn't. Oh, dear, Kazul will be ter- ribly
unhappy about this." "Who
is Kazul?" I asked. Suz
looked at me in astonishment. "You don't know? No, you
don't. I haven't told you yet. Kazul is who you're going
to see." He cocked his head to one side as if that explained
everything. "Why
should I want to see Kazul?" I said. "And why should
he care about me, or Shiara, or anything?" "She,"
Suz said. "And of course you want to see her. You
have the Sword of the Sleeping King, don't you? I'm afraid
she'll be dreadfully upset if you bring someone with you,
though." "Well,
I'm not going to leave Shiara alone in the middle of the
Enchanted Forest," I said firmly. "No,
no, you couldn't possibly do that," the lizard agreed. "That
wouldn't be right at all. Dear me, whatever are we going
to do?" "You
don't have to worry about me," Shiara said indig- nantly.
"I'm a fire-witch; I can take care of myself." "You
are?" Suz turned his head and looked at Shiara so 54
Patricia C. Wrede intently
that his eyes crossed. "You really are! How con- venient!
Everything's quite all right, then; Kazul won't mind a fire-witch
at all." "Who,"
I said very slowly and carefully, "is Kazul?" The
lizard stared thoughtfully at me for a long time. "I don't
think I ought to tell you any more," he said finally. "You're
quite safe, you really are, but it wouldn't do at all for
Kazul to lose her temper with me. Oh, dear, no." "Quite
safe? In the middle of the Enchanted Forest, with wizards
after us?" Shiara said sarcastically. "You're crazy." "I
am? No, I'm not at all! How very rude." He turned his
back, looking extremely offended. Shiara stared at him. As I
said, an offended lizard is an interesting sight. I
sighed. "Shiara." Shiara
looked at me. I just stood there. After a minute, she
looked down. "Well, it is dangerous to be out here, even if
you do have that stupid sword," she said defensively. "What's
wrong with saying so?" "It
wasn't very polite," I said. "And you promised you'd try." Shiara
glanced up at me, then sighed. "Oh, all right. I'm sony,
Suz." The
lizard twisted his head around and looked at Shiara for a
minute. "You are?" He ran around the branch again and
wound up peering at her upside down from underneath the
limb. "No, you're not at all. How disappointing. I ac- cept."
He ran back up on top of the branch. "Accept?"
Shiara said. "Your
apology," the lizard said with dignity. A dignified lizard
looks even odder than an offended one. "Oh."
Shiara looked at Suz doubtfully. "If
you won't tell us who Kazul is, will you at least tell us how
to find her?" I said hastily. I didn't want Shiara to say
anything that would offend Suz again, and she looked like
she was going to. Besides, I was curious. "You
won't have any trouble," the lizard assured me. "Just
head for the castle. Kazul will—" He broke off in midsentence,
staring at the kitten Shiara was holding. "What is
that?" he asked disapprovingly. Talking
to Dragons 55 "A
kitten, of course," Shiara said. "You're
sure it's under control?" Suz seemed a little nervous.
I looked at the kitten. It was watching Suz with a great
deal of interest. "What
do you mean, under control?" Shiara said. "She's a
perfectly well-behaved kitten. Morwen wouldn't have given her to
me if she wasn't." "Cats
are not— Did you say Morwen?" Suz peered at Shiara. "Yes,
I said Morwen. Can't you finish a sentence?" Suz
ignored her. "You've been to see Morwen? I didn't know
that. Oh, dear me, I must be dreadfully behind. Why, all
sorts of things could be happening that I don't know about!
How perfectly dreadful. I must really get back to work at
once. Oh, yes, indeed I must." The
lizard ran down the branch and disappeared behind the
tree trunk. "Wait a minute!" I said. I ducked around the back of
the tree, but Suz was nowhere in sight. I shook my head and
went back to where Shiara was standing. "He's
gone again," I said. "And he still didn't tell me what
castle he's talking about." "So
what? Nobody else has been telling us anything either."
Shiara glared at the branch where Suz had been sitting.
"I don't think he's very polite. He didn't even say good-bye." "He
keeps going off like that," I said. "I think that's just how he
is." "Well,
I can't say I'm sorry he left," Shiara said. "Come on,
let's find that stream Morwen was talking about. I'm getting
thirsty." We
started walking again. Shiara put the kitten down, and we
took turns keeping an eye on it as we walked. It had a
marvelous time, jumping on leaves and attacking bushes
while Shiara and I talked about what Shiara was going to
name it. Finally she decided on Nightwitch. I didn't think
that was a very good name, but Shiara liked it, so I didn't
say anything. By the
time we found the stream, Shiara and I were tired and
hungry as well as thirsty, so we decided to stop. We 56
Patricia C. Wrede each
took a drink; then we sat down and opened the bundle Morwen
had given me. Just as I had expected, there was a packet
of food right on top—meat pies and apples and gingerbread.
Shiara and I each ate some, and we gave one of the
meat pies to Nightwitch. There was some left over, so we
wrapped it up and put it back in my bundle before we
started off down the stream. We
tried to stay close to the bank most of the time. It's easy to
get lost in the Enchanted Forest, especially if you don't
really know where you're going. If we got out of sight of the
stream, we might never find it again. In a
couple of places the trees grew in thick clumps, right
up to the water's edge, and we had to choose between wading
and going around. I didn't like the dark look of the
forest near the tree clumps, and the water was only ankle
deep, so we waded. Nightwitch did not approve of it at
all. The
.forest got darker as we went along. I was sure, now, that
the trees were bigger, and they were certainly closer together
even when they weren't growing in tight clumps. We
spent more and more time in the stream, but the water wasn't
very cold, and the pebbles on the bottom were smooth, so it
wasn't particularly unpleasant. Even so, I was glad when
the woods started to open up again. Th-ii I saw the clearing
a little ahead of us. A minute later, I saw the person sitting
in it. She was
a Princess. She had to be. Her hair was long and
golden and not tangled at all, and her eyes were very blue,
and her skin was very white, and she was very, very beautiful.
One dainty foot was peeping out from under her blue
silk gown. Her hands were folded in her lap, and she was
looking at them with a sad expression. Shiara
poked me. I realized that I was standing in a stream with my
shoes in one hand and Morwen's bundle in the other
and my mouth hanging open. I swallowed and waded over to
the bank. I wanted to put my shoes back on before we got
any closer. I had seen at least two Princesses before, that I
knew of, but both of them were enchanted and didn't look at
all like their usual selves when I met them. When Talking
to Dragons 57 I
finished with my shoes, the Princess was looking in our direction. I stood
up hastily and hurried toward her. Shiara fol- lowed.
When I was within speaking distance, I stopped and bowed.
The Princess smiled sadly. "I
bid you such poor welcome as I may," she said in a musical
voice. "Alas! That I can offer you no refreshment. For I
am in great distress." "I'm
sorry to hear that," I said. "Is there anything I can do to
help?" "I
fear not," said the Princess. "For you are yet a youth. Alas,
and woe is me! For I am in great distress." "All
right; so tell us about it," Shiara said. She sat down on the
ground and looked at the Princess expectantly. I frowned
at her; I didn't think that was the proper way to address
a Princess, though I wasn't positive. Mother had taught
me a lot more about dragons than she had about Princesses. "You
are kind to inquire of my sad tale," the Princess said.
"It is not long to tell. My father was a King, much beloved
of his people, and I his only daughter. Being lonely after
my mother's death, my father remarried to a woman comely
but proud, and under her influence have I suffered these
seven years. And now the King my father is dead, and my
stepmother hath cast me out, to wander alone and friendless
through the world. Alas! For I am—" "In
great distress; you said that before," Shiara said. "Why
didn't you throw her out when your father died? It would
have saved you a lot of trouble." The
Princess's blue eyes filled with tears and she bowed her
head. " 'Twas not within my power to work harm against her,
alas. And now I seek some Prince or hero who will take
pity on my destitute state and return me to my proper place.
Woe is me! That I should be without help in such distress." "Sounds
like a lousy excuse to me," Shiara muttered under
her breath. Fortunately, the Princess didn't hear. "I'm
afraid we can't help you get your kingdom back," I said.
"I'm very sorry. But if there's any other service I 58 Patricia C. Wrede can do
for you, I'd be happy to try." "Daystar!"
Shiara's voice was horrified, and suddenly I realized
what I'd said. I swallowed. At least I'd only prom- ised to
try.
r "There
is one thing," the Princess said. She raised her head,
and her eyes were very bright. I went cold. The Princess
smiled sweetly. "Give
me your sword," she said. I
STARED AT the Princess. Then I shut my mouth and swal- lowed
again, hard. Mother wasn't going to like this at all. I was
just about to draw the sword and give it to her, when Shiara
said, "Wait a minute, Daystar." I
stopped and looked at her. She looked at the Princess. "Daystar
hasn't got a sword." "What?"
the Princess and I said at the same time. The Princess
frowned. "I am not blind, to be so easily deceived. See,
there it is." She pointed to my scabbard. "That,"
said Shiara triumphantly, "is the Sword of the Sleeping
King. So it belongs to him, not to Daystar, and Daystar
can't give it away." The
Princess looked very puzzled. I thought for a minute. Shiara
was right, but she was wrong, too. I mean, it was obvious
what the Princess had meant, even if she hadn't said it
right. I sighed and reached for the hilt. Shiara
turned on me. "Daystar, what are you doing?" "Giving
her the sword," I said, tugging at it. The sword wouldn't
come out of the sheath. "You know as well as I do what
she meant." "Well,
if all those wizards and sorceresses can be picky about
the way people say things, why can't you?" Shiara 59 60
Patricia C. Wrede was so
mad I expected her hair to start burning any minute. "You
can't even get it out of the sheath! You only said you'd
try to do what she wanted; well, you've tried. Isn't that
enough yet?" I
sighed. "I'm sorry, Shiara, but it's my sword, and I'm not a
wizard. I just have to do it." "Daystar,
you... you..." Shiara gave up and just glared. I
tugged at the sword again; Shiara turned her back. The Princess
was still looking puzzled. I shook my head and unbuckled
the whole swordbelt. I looked at it for a minute, then
held it out toward the Princess. "Here," I said. "Take it."
My voice seemed very loud, and I realized that the woods
had gotten very quiet. The Princess smiled and took hold of
the scabbard. I let go of the sword. There
was a rumbling noise, and the Princess said, "Oh!" very
loudly and dropped the swordbelt. The point of the scabbard
hit the ground, and there was another rumble, and an
enormous geyser of water shot up into the air. I saw
the Princess cringe and Shiara fall backward. Then I
couldn't see anything but white spray. A voice said, "All hail
the Holder of the Sword!" The words echoed hollowly around
me as the fountain vanished. Shiara
and the Princess were both staring at me, wide- eyed.
All of us were dripping. The sword was standing upright
in front of me, in the middle of a pool of water about
four feet across. It was about halfway out of the sheath,
and the blade shimmered in the sun. The Princess burst
into tears. "I
knew not that this weapon was of such potency," she said
between sobs. "Alas! For I cannot hold the sword, and who now
will be my help? Alas, and woe is me!" "You
mean you don't want the sword anymore?" Shiara demanded. The
Princess nodded. She was weeping too hard to say much. "And
Daystar can have it back now?" The
Princess nodded again. She was still weeping. I sighed
and dug out my handkerchief. It was wet. I squeezed it out
and offered it to the Princess anyway. She took it without
thanking me and cried some more. Talking
to Dragons 61 "What
am I to do?" she kept saying. "Who now will be my
help? Alas! For I am in great distress!" "Oh,
help yourself," Shiara said crossly. "Daystar, are you
going to take that stupid sword?" I
hesitated; then I reached out and took hold of the hilt. The
blade flashed once, and a brief shock ran through me as the
hilt came to rest. I ignored the feeling and took hold of the
scabbard. It came free almost at once. The water closed
silently behind it. I took a closer look at the bottom part of
the sheath; I wasn't even surprised when I saw that it
wasn't wet. I
looked up. The Princess had just about stopped crying. I
looked at the sword. Then I looked back at the Princess. "Are
you sure you don't want this?" I said finally. "Daystar!"
Shiara sounded like she wasn't sure whether to be
mad or horrified. The
Princess didn't seem to hear her at all. "I cannot take
it!" she cried. "Oh, indeed, I cannot! Alas! That I am so
helpless in my time of need!" "Well,
if you didn't want the sword, why did you ask for it
in the first place?" Shiara said angrily. "I
fear I have deceived you," the Princess said tragically. "Yet
I myself have been misled. Alas! I beg of you, forgive me! For
indeed, I am, I am in great distress." "Distress?
Ha!" said Shiara. "You better tell us the truth, right
now, or you'll find out what distress is." "Shiara—"
I began. Shiara
turned. "You shut up. You obviously don't know anything
about handling Princesses, so let me do it. Now," she
said to the Princess, "explain. And it better be good." "I
am a King's daughter," the Princess said. "My father would
have me wed the Prince of a neighboring kingdom, to
bring us wealth. Yet I could not, for I do not love him, but
another. My father listened not, for all my pleading, so my love
and I fled into the forest. We wandered far, and great
was our suffering, yet were we happy, for we had each
other. But I, being unused to travel, became tired, and my love
at last set me here and bid me wait for him. And here
have I stayed these two long days, and I fear me some evil
may have befallen him. Alas! That we are parted!" 62
Patricia C. Wrede "What,"
said Shiara, "does all this have to do with Daystar's
sword?" The
Princess sighed again. "I was seated here, as you see me,
bewailing my bitter fate, when lo! A man appeared, most
wise and powerful of aspect. He told me my love was imprisoned
by a mighty sorceress, and at that news I wept bitterly.
Then he bade me desist from my grief, for the means
of delivering my love was at hand, to wit, a sword most
magical. And he himself made promise of aid, if I would
but attain the sword. And this have I attempted, and I have
failed. Alas, and woe is me!" "I
don't think I understand," I said. "Why didn't you tell us this
to begin with?" The
Princess began to weep again. "My unknown friend instructed
me in what I was to say; and told me that all would
be well once I had the sword in my own hands. And in this
he deceived me, for the touch of the sword bums so that I
cannot hold it. And the cause is that I deceived you, and
tricked you into offering me the sword, and the sword knew,
and it will not abide in my hand, and now am I utterly without
hope." "What
did this person look like?" Shiara asked unsym- pathetically.
"The one you were going to give the sword to." The
Princess seemed a lot more interested in explaining how
wise and powerful and helpful the man had been than she was
in giving a simple description, but eventually we managed
to get some idea what he looked like. Tall, dark- haired,
blue eyes, and carrying a staff.... "It
sounds a lot like Antorell," I said finally. "AntoreU?"
Shiara said. "That
wizard I told you about, that Mother melted. He must be
back; she said he might try to make trouble for me in a
day or two." "Oh,
great. All we need is another wizard looking for us." The
Princess didn't seem to be following the conversation at all.
"Alas!" she said finally. "There is nothing left for me but
grief; I have no means now to save my love, so I Talking
to Dragons 63 shall
die with him. I shall fling myself in yonder stream and
make an end." "You
are even dumber than Daystar," Shiara informed her.
"That stream isn't deep enough to drown in; you'll only get
wet. Besides, if that stupid wizard lied about the sword, how do
you know he didn't lie about your love? Who is this
person you ran off with, anyway?" "He
is a knight," the Princess said, her eyes lighting up. "Poor
in goods, yet rich in spirit, of most pleasing aspect. His
eyes are a hawk's, his arms are mighty, and his sword is
bright and—" "He
sounds like he can take care of himself," Shiara said.
"I don't think you have to worry about him." Shiara's
words had a marvelous effect on the Princess. "Truly,
you believe this?" she said, and her face lit up even more.
"Then here will I abide his coming, for surely he will
return to me. Ah, joy! That we shall soon be once more together!" Shiara
looked disgusted. "I'm sure you'll be very happy. Come
on, Daystar, let's go." She stood up. "I
don't think we should leave her here by herself," I said. "Daystar,
you're impossible!" Shiara was still mad. "She tried
to trick you! Besides, she's been here two days already, and
nothing's happened to her yet." "Alas!
I did indeed attempt to deceive you," the Princess said.
"And for that I beg forgiveness. Yet consider my unhappy
plight, and be not harsh with me." "Oh,
shut up," Shiara told her. "What
if Antorell comes back?" I said. "Somebody ought to take
care of her. Besides, I made a promise." "Well,
I didn't!" Shiara said. "And I'm not going to sit here
doing nothing just because of a stupid Princess! I'm leaving." "You
can't do that!" I said. I was really upset. Shiara didn't
know very much about the Enchanted Forest, and she was
going to go tramping off into the middle of it with no one but
Morwen's kitten. I couldn't let her do that, but I couldn't
leave the Princess sitting there alone, either. 64
Patricia C. Wrede "Want
to bet?" Shiara said. She picked up the bundle Morwen
had given her. "Come on, Nightwitch. Let's go." "Nightwitch?
What an unusual name for a cat," said a new
voice. Shiara
stopped and both of us turned. An old man was standing
at the edge of the clearing, in front of a large, scruffy
clump of bushes. His beard and what was left of his
hair were quite white, and he was stooped over and leaning
on a staff. Even without the way my skin prickled, I knew
he was a wizard. The
Princess was the first to recover from the surprise of
seeing him there. "Ah, sir, have pity on my sad state!" she
said. "Have pity, and if you have seen a knight, bright- armored,
hawk-eyed, most fair and pleasing in speech and semblance,
then tell me speedily where he may be found. For he
is my love, and we are parted, and thus am I in great distress!
Alas!" "That's
quite all right, my dear," the wizard said in a kindly
tone. "You've nothing to worry about. In fact, he should
be here before very much longer; that's why I hur- ried.
Just sit there and wait quietly, like a good girl." "Oh,
joy! Oh, bliss!" said the Princess rapturously. 'To be with
my love again!" She started happily explaining how strong
and handsome and generally wonderful her missing knight
was. Since she didn't seem to be speaking to anyone in
particular, the rest of us ignored her. Shiara,
Nightwitch, and I were edging backward. I had my
right hand on the hilt of my sword, and my whole side was
tingling with the feel of the wizard's magic. The wizard noticed
us and smiled. "Take
your hand from your sword," he said, looking at me.
"I am not here to engage in a vulgar physical contest with
you." "Are
you from the Society of Wizards?" Shiara de- manded.
Her voice sounded a little shaky, but I don't think anyone
who didn't know her would have noticed. "No,"
the wizard said. "Why? Are you looking for one of
them?" "Then
why are you here?" I said. "Why,
to assist you," the wizard said. ••Wfwstsiiy"-
• Talking
to Dragons 65 "Assist
us?" Shiara said. "But you're a wizard!" "I
am not at all concerned with your baseless prejudices," the
wizard told her. "I have come to offer to help your companion,
and I will thank you to cease interfering." I
stared at him. "I don't want to be impolite," I said before
Shiara could say anything else, "but why do you want to
help me?" "Why,
because you deserve it, of course," the wizard said.
"You made a foolish promise to this other young lady," he went
on, nodding toward the Princess, who was still talking
to the air. "You could have gotten out of it several times,
but you refused to behave dishonorably. I think that is
deserving of a reward." "Thank
you very much," I said. I didn't really know what
else to say. After all, there are people in the Enchanted Forest
who go around rewarding heroes and Princes for noble
deeds; why else would all those people come here? "Well,
what would you like?" the wizard said after a moment. "Like?" "As
a reward." He sounded a little impatient. I
thought about it for a moment. "I appreciate the offer," I said
finally. "But I really don't need anything. Thank you very
much all the same." "What?
Isn't there anything you want?" he asked sharply. He
didn't look nearly as friendly as he had at first. "No,
I don't think so," I said. For a
moment the wizard looked very disconcerted. Then he
seemed to relax a little. "Perhaps I did not make myself clear
enough," he said. "You need not ask for something material;
information will do just as well. The word for sorcery
in the tongue of the giants, or the location of the Well of
Silver Storms where the unicorns drink. There must be
something you want to know, even if there is nothing you
want to have." The
only thing I wanted to know was what I was supposed to do
in the Enchanted Forest. Somehow, I didn't think Mother
had told him. "No," I said. "I don't think there is anything." The wizard
looked at me, and his eyes narrowed. "Come, 66
Patricia C. Wrede come!
You need to know the name of your father, do you not?" "No,"
I said, puzzled. I'd never been particularly inter- ested
in knowing my father's name; I mean, he wasn't around,
so what difference did it make? Mother would have told me
if she'd thought I ought to know. And I certainly couldn't
think of any reason why I needed to know. "Why should
I?" "You're
looking for him, aren't you?" the wizard snapped. "No,
not really." That might be one of the things Mother wanted
me to do, but it certainly couldn't be all of it. Furthermore,
I couldn't see how knowing his name would help
much, even if I were looking for him. In the Enchanted Forest,
looking for someone usually isn't the best way of finding
him. You're much more likely to run into people by
accident. "You
aren't? Then you must know! She told you! Who is
it?" "I
thought you were going to tell Daystar that," Shiara said.
"Don't you know?" "Silence,
fool! I have waited too long for this." The wizard
turned back to me. "You will tell me now, or regret it
deeply: Who is your father?" "I
don't know," I said. "And if I did, I don't see why I should
tell you." "There
are other ways of learning what I wish to know," the
wizard said. He straightened abruptly. The Princess squeaked
and fell silent. Nightwitch hissed. Shiara started edging
backward again. And the wizard changed. He got
a little taller and a lot younger; his beard melted away and
his hair darkened and filled in. His eyes changed from
brown to blue, but they still glared. "Antorell!" I said, and
drew my sword. The
steel rang as it came out of the sheath, and the blade shimmered
and flashed in front of me. It made the whole clearing
seem brighter. Antorell's lips curled into a sneer. "Fool!
What use is a sword against a wizard?" He
raised his staff, and a globe of green light appeared Talking
to Dragons 67 at the
lower end of it. A thread of green, dark and bright as the
shine of a snake, reached out toward me from the staff.
I raised the sword. The
green light touched the Sword of the Sleeping King. The
sword hummed a little and the ray of light vanished, and
that was all. Antorell frowned, and another, larger ray of
green reached out. This time, the humming was a little louder,
and the light around the end of Antorell's staff vanished
along with the ray touching the sword. The jan- gling
feeling lessened a little. I was considerably relieved; Antorell
looked shocked. "You
cannot! Not possibly! That sword can't..." His eyes
moved to my face, then back to the sword, and he took a
deep breath. "So! She must have known all along. But now
I will have that weapon. I must have that weapon!" "No,"
I said. "Mother wouldn't like it." Antorell's
eyes narrowed. "Cimorene has had her way long
enough. If you will not give me that sword, I will take it."
He started to raise the staff again. The
bushes behind Antorell rustled noisily, and the wiz- ard
shifted. "You, there!" he called over his shoulder. "Show yourself
at once!" "Ach—
Ach—" said someone behind him, and the bushes rustled
again. Antorell frowned and turned around, raising his
staff. "I will teach you to interfere—" The
angry look on Antorell's face changed abruptly to one of
mingled surprise and fear. He stepped backward very quickly
and waved his staff through the air in front of him. "Achooo!"
said the voice, and a large ball of fire demol- ished
the bush and enveloped Antorell. The wizard screamed and
disappeared, and we could see the person who had been behind
the bush. It was
a dragon. IT WAS
ABOUT twelve feet tall, which is not very large as dragons
go. But it was definitely a dragon. It sneezed again, which
took care of the remains of the bush, and slid forward over
the ashes into the middle of the clearing. The Princess fainted. I
started trying to put my sword away. Walking through the
Enchanted Forest with a drawn sword is bad, but talking to a
dragon with a sword in your hand is much worse. Fortunately,
the dragon didn't seem to have noticed it yet. As soon
as the sword was sheathed, I looked up again, and my
stomach went hollow. The
dragon was eyeing Shiara, and I didn't like the gleam in its
eyes. I didn't like the militant way Shiara was glaring back,
either. There wasn't very much I could do, though; you
just don't interrupt a dragon when it's busy with some- thing
else. They don't like being distracted. The
dragon slid closer and bent its head until it was staring
at Shiara from about a foot in front of her face. Shiara
jumped. The dragon blinked. "Are
you a Princess?" it asked hopefully. "No.
I'm a fire-witch," Shiara said. "And if you bite me, I'll
bum your nose off." 69 70
Patricia C. Wrede "Oh.
I thought you were a Princess." The dragon lost interest
in Shiara. It looked around the clearing again and saw me.
Its head moved over in my direction. I
bowed. "Sir or madam," I said, trying to recall all the proper
ways of addressing a dragon, "I offer you greetings in the
name of myself and my companions, and I wish you good
fortune in all your endeavors." "I
beg your pardon?" said the dragon. Its voice reminded me of
one of those wooden wind instruments, the deep kind that
you have to stand on a chair to play. It eyed me doubt- fully.
"Are you a Princess?" "I..."
I stopped and stared. Dragons just don't beg peo- ple's
pardon. Then I realized that this must be a very young dragon,
and I relaxed a little. Dragons don't usually insist on
formality until they get old enough to decide which sex they're
going to be. "I'm very sorry, but I'm afraid I'm not a
Princess. My name is Daystar; I'm very pleased to meet you." The
dragon sat back. "I had no idea Princesses were so hard to
find." It blinked and seemed to look at me for the first
time. "I'm sorry I burned your bush, but I couldn't help
it." "Oh,
please don't worry about it," I said. "It really doesn't matter
in the least." "It
was the wizard," the dragon said confidentially. "I'm allergic
to them. All dragons are." "I'm
sorry to hear that," I said. The
dragon looked at me, "You're very polite, Daystar." Its
head swiveled back toward Shiara. "Say! You weren't polite
at all!" Nightwitch
poked her head out from behind Shiara's ankle
and hissed. The dragon started and then peered down at the
kitten. "You aren't polite, either," it said. I
nudged Shiara. "Offer to do something for him," I hissed. "What?
Why?" "If
you insult a dragon, you have to do him a favor," I said.
"Hurry up!" If she didn't say something quickly, the dragon
would probably eat both of us. Unfortunately, the dragon
might eat Shiara anyway; the favor most dragons Talking
to Dragons 71 want is
dinner. I couldn't tell Shiara that, though, without offending
the dragon. I started wondering whether I could talk
the dragon out of eating us. I didn't think so; dragons are
stubborn. The
dragon's eyes glittered. Shiara looked at it. "Can I do
anything for you?" she said finally. She sounded a little sullen,
but dragons aren't very good at tone of voice. Be- sides,
it's the offer that counts. "Find
me a Princess," the dragon said promptly. I
breathed a very quiet sigh of relief. I didn't think there was a
polite way to kill a dragon, and I hadn't been able to
think of any other way of stopping it from eating Shiara and me
if it wanted to. It was nice to know I wouldn't have to,try. "You
want a Princess?" Shiara looked thoughtful. "Why?" "Dragons
are supposed to have Princesses," the dragon explained.
"I can't be considered a proper dragon until I have
one. But I've been looking for two days, and I haven't seen
even a smell of a Princess, and I'm tired of it. So you do
it." "You
aren't going to eat her or anything, are you?" Shiara said. "Eat
her?" the dragon sounded horrified. "And waste a perfectly
good Princess? Of course not! There aren't enough of them
to go around as it is! What kind of barbarian do you
think I am?" "Well,
I've never met a dragon before," Shiara said. "How
was I supposed to know? I didn't mean to hurt your feelings." "All
right," said the dragon. "But you have to get me a Princess.
It doesn't have to be a large one." "Do
you want any particular kind of Princess?" Shiara asked.
"I want to be sure you'll be satisfied." "Oh,
young and beautiful, of course," the dragon said. "Are
there other kinds?" "There
are enchanted Princesses," Shiara pointed out. "Especially
around here." "That's
right. Say, maybe that's why I haven't been able to find
one!" "I
wouldn't be surprised," Shiara said. "But will you Patricia
C. Wrede 72 take an
enchanted Princess?" The
dragon thought for a minute. "No, I don't think so. Spells
make things too complicated." "And
does it matter how long it takes me to find her?" Shiara
went on. The
dragon considered. "I don't want to wait too long, but I
really don't want to be unreasonable, either. How about a
week? You bring the Princess here by a week from today,
otherwise you owe me another favor." It licked its lips
with a long red tongue. "That
sounds reasonable," Shiara said. "But what if I'm early?" Suddenly
I realized what Shiara was planning to do. I started
edging around the clearing, toward where the Prin- cess
was lying. I wasn't quite fast enough. "The
earlier the better," the dragon said. "Then,
there's your Princess!" Shiara said, and pointed. "My,
you do work fast," the dragon said. It turned and looked
at the Princess. "She's certainly beautiful enough, but are
you sure she isn't enchanted?" "I'm
quite sure," Shiara said. "Then
why is she asleep in the middle of the day? I didn't think
Princesses were nocturnal creatures." "She
just fainted when she saw you," Shiara said reas- suringly.
"It's nothing to worry about; it happens to Prin- cesses
all the time. Will she do?" "Quite
well." The dragon nodded. "You're very prompt. Thank
you very much." Shiara
nodded. I waited until the dragon turned away; then I
frowned at Shiara. "Why
did you do that?" I whispered. "That was a terrible thing
to do!" "Would
you rather I got eaten?" Shiara whispered back. "She
won't get eaten; the dragon said so. And I bet it won't want
her for long. Dragons are smarter than some people." I
didn't know what to say to that, so I looked back at the
dragon. It was bending its head to inspect the Princess more
closely, and I tried to decide what I ought to do. Just at that
moment, the Princess opened her eyes. She gave a small
scream, and the dragon frowned. Talking
to Dragons 73 "You
don't have to be frightened," it said. "Really. You're my
Princess now, and I'm going to take proper care of you, and you
can clean my scales and cook for me. I believe that's
the standard arrangement." The
Princess burst into tears. The dragon pulled back, eyeing
her uncomfortably. "Did I say something wrong?" The
Princess just cried harder. "Alas! Ah, woe is me! So
recently was I happy, awaiting the coming of my love to
rescue me from this dismal forest! And now am I a prisoner
of a monster, and when my love arrives he will be eaten
by this awful beast, and I abandoned to my fate! Alas, that I
should come to this!" The
dragon looked considerably taken aback. It turned to
Shiara and me. "This is a Princess?" "Yes,
she is," I said. Shiara nodded, too. The
Princess had heard the question also and she raised her
head. "Indeed, I am a Princess, and the daughter of a King,
and see to what misery I have been brought!" she said
tragically. "Alas, the day I left my father's house! Yet would I
flee again, and endure with patience all the trials and
woes which have come upon me, only to be with my love
once more!" ,. The
dragon backed up a pace. "Are you sure this is a Princess?"
he asked. "Alas!
Now even my birth is doubted, and to whom shall I turn
in my distress? Ah, pity my sad state! For I am alone and
friendless, and parted from my love. Ah, woe! That ever I
let him leave my side. For he is mighty among men, most
brave and fearsome in battle, and of a fair and pleasing appearance
in all things, and he would not leave me thus, did he
but know my fate." She went back to crying. "If
this is a Princess, I'm not sure I want one," the dragon said.
It looked at the Princess speculatively. "Maybe I could eat
her, instead." "Ah,
help!" said the Princess. "I
really don't think you should eat her," I said. "After all,
you did say you wouldn't." "That's
right, I did," the dragon said. It looked at the Princess,
who was crying again, and sighed. "Nobody told me
Princesses were like this," it said in an aggrieved tone. Patricia
C. Wrede "And
who is this love she keeps talking about?" "We
haven't met him yet, I'm afraid," I said. "She says he's a
knight that she ran away with because her father wanted
her to marry someone else." I was still trying to figure
out what to do about the Princess and the dragon. "A
knight?" The dragon backed up a little farther. "I don't
think I'm ready for knights yet. They're so unpre- dictable.
I don't suppose you could find me a Princess without
a knight?" "All
really good Princesses have knights," Shiara said firmly.
"And you wouldn't want a second-rate Princess, would
you?" "All
of them?" the dragon asked plaintively. "Well,
not all of them," I said. "Some of them have Princes
instead." "Princes
are much worse than knights," Shiara said thoughtfully.
"They tend to have magic rings and sorcer- esses
for godmothers and things like that. With knights you only
have to worry about their armor and weapons, and maybe
once in a while an enchanted sword." "My
love has no need of magic!" the Princess broke in indignantly.
"For he is most strong and skilled, and never has he
been beaten in combat with sword or spear. Woe! That he
is no longer at my side!" "I
don't think I like the sound of this," the dragon said uneasily.
"Maybe if I just—" There
was a loud crashing sound, and a rather tinny- sounding
voice said, "What ho! A dragon?" The
Princess stopped crying very suddenly and sat up quite
straight. "Hark! My love approaches! Now shall you see his
prowess for yourselves!" There
were more crashing noises. The dragon backed up a
little more, looking nervous. A moment later a knight in a
somewhat dented suit of armor fell through the middle of the
thickest clump of bushes, right in front of the dragon. "On
guard, monster!" the knight said as he picked himself up.
"Prepare to die!" He pulled out a sword and waved it at the
dragon. Well, actually, he waved it a couple of feet to one
side; his helmet had slipped a little, and evidently Talking
to Dragons 75 he
couldn't see very well. The dragon looked at him, and then
back at Shiara. "This
is a knight?" it said. "My
love is the bravest of knights!" the Princess cried. "If
this is a knight, maybe I can handle him after all," the
dragon said. "He doesn't look so bad." "Ah,
hideous reptile! No longer do I fear you, for my love
will defend me! Yea, he will defend me even unto death!" "Now,
wait a minute, Isabelle," the knight said. He pulled off his
helmet, looked at it disgustedly, and threw it on the ground
behind him. "I'm perfectly willing to kill dragons for
you, but who said anything about dying?" "You
are my knight, and my brave love!" the Princess said
dramatically. "Oh, save me from this awful monster, who
would carry me off and eat me!" She sprang up and threw
her arms around the knight. "It's
going to be a bit difficult for me to save you if you hang
about my neck like that," the knight said apologeti- cally.
"It's quite awkward. If you'll just sit down, I can see about
doing this properly." The
Princess only hung on to him more tightly, which made
his aim almost as bad as it had been when he was wearing
his helmet crooked. The dragon was watching them closely,
and its eyes were starting to glow. "You certainly aren't
very polite," it said. "My
love is the soul of courtesy!" the Princess said from behind
the knight. "For he is a knight most gentle and well spoken,
much given to—" "I
say, Isabelle, must you go on like that?" the knight said.
"It's rather embarrassing. Do, please, sit down and let me
fight the dragon. Then you won't have to worry about being
eaten, you know." The
Princess gave a small scream. "Alas!" she said in a quavery
voice. "Behold my sad state! For now must I watch a
bloody battle, and perhaps see my love slain before my eyes,
and become a captive of this monster." "This
is ridiculous," said Shiara, and before I could stop her she
marched over to stand between the dragon and the Talking
to Dragons 77 knight.
I followed her, hoping I could get her out of trouble if I
had to. "Ah,
save me!" the Princess said as we got closer. I wasn't
sure whether she wanted to be saved from the dragon or from
Shiara. Shiara glared at her. "You
shut up," she told the Princess. "You've caused enough
trouble already." "I
say," said the knight. "If we're going to discuss po- liteness
..." "We
aren't," said Shiara. "We're going to discuss battles. Battles
between dragons and knights. Why do you want to fight
this dragon?" "Knights
are sworn to do battle with the beasts which ravage
the fields, carry off innocent maidens, and generally make a
nuisance of themselves," the knight said. He sounded as if
he were reciting something, and he didn't look very pleased
about the idea, but the Princess nodded approvingly. "Well,
this dragon isn't ravaging anything, and it doesn't even
want your stupid Princess," Shiara said. "I
do, too!" the dragon broke in. "If I'm not going to carry
her off, I could eat her after all. And if I fought a knight,
no one could say I'm not a proper dragon, even if I don't
have a Princess." "I
really don't think that's a very good idea," I said. "Princesses
aren't all that common, after all." "Besides,
you promised me you wouldn't," Shiara said. "I
did not!" the dragon said. "I only said I wouldn't waste a
perfectly good Princess, and I don't think this one's so
great. Eating her wouldn't be much of a waste." "I
don't think that would be very polite," I said. "Es- pecially
when you've talked to her this long without bringing it up.
You really ought to ease into these things gradually, you
know." "Are
you sure?" the dragon said. I
nodded. "Oh,
all right," said the dragon. "I won't eat her, then. But
couldn't I fight the knight anyway? Just for practice?" "I
say, that sounds like an excellent idea," the knight said,
brightening perceptibly. "A sort of exercise for both of
us." 78
Patricia C. Wrede "A
tourney!" the Princess cried. "Oh, brave and clever, to
think of such a thing!" The
knight looked pleased. So did the dragon. It nodded, then
whispered to Shiara, "What's a tourney?" "It's
like a battle, only no one gets hurt. Usually." "Not
even a little?" the dragon said. The knight started looking
worried again. "Of
course not!" Shiara said to the dragon. "It's a show of
skill." "If
you were trying to hurt each other, it wouldn't be a tourney,"
I added. Actually, it wasn't going to be a tourney anyway;
there are very specific rules about what a tourney is, and
a practice fight between a dragon and a knight just doesn't
qualify. I decided not to say so. "Oh,
all right, then," the dragon grumbled. "I don't know why I'm
letting you talk me into this. How do we start?" THE
HARDEST PART was getting the dragon and the knight to
agree about rules. The Princess didn't help much. She kept
talking about the marvelous tourneys she'd seen, and which
knights had been wounded. The dragon would start looking
at the knight, and pretty soon it would want to know why it
couldn't bite off one of the knight's arms, or at least a hand.
The knight would get worried, and the Princess would
start crying, and Shiara and I would have to talk the dragon
out of it. As soon as the dragon agreed, the Princess would
cheer up and start talking about tourneys again. Finally,
Shiara told the Princess to shut up. It wasn't very
polite, but it worked. Well, sort of. The Princess didn't stop
talking, but as long as she was complaining about Shiara
and not talking about tourneys we didn't have any more
problems with getting the dragon and the knight to agree. When we
finally decided on the rules, we had to draw a
circle in the middle of the clearing for them to fight in. It was
harder than it sounds. For one thing, a circle has to be
pretty big if a dragon is going to fit inside it, even if it's a small
dragon. Also, the moss in the Enchanted Forest grows
awfully fast. By the time we finished drawing the 79 80
Patricia C. Wrede circle,
the first half of it had already disappeared. Shiara watched
for a minute, then looked at the knight. "Are
you sure you have to have a circle to fight?" Shiara said. "I
really do think so," the knight said apologetically. "It wouldn't
be a proper tourney without it, don't you see." "I'm
sick of proper dragons and proper Princesses and proper
tourneys," Shiara said under her breath. Fortunately, the
dragon didn't hear her. We
started redrawing the circle, trying to make the line wider
this time. The knight scratched at the moss with his sword.
Shiara used a stick. So did I; I didn't think Mother would
approve if I used the Sword of the Sleeping King to cut
moss. Nightwitch and the dragon sort of dug at the ground.
The Princess sat under a tree. Eventually
we finished, and the knight and the dragon stepped
inside the circle. "Well, what are you waiting for?" Shiara
demanded. "Someone
has to say 'Go,'" the knight said in a reason- able
tone. "Go!"
I said quickly. Shiara
gave me a disgusted look, but she didn't say anything,
because as soon as I shouted the dragon and the knight
got started. They were fairly evenly matched. The dragon
was much larger, of course, and it had a very good sense
of timing, but it didn't have much experience. The knight
was wearing armor, which helped, and he was ob- viously
used to fighting, but he was a little awkward most of the
time. They were both good at dodging, though; they each
managed to take three or fours swings without hitting the
other. The dragon was just starting to take another swipe at the
knight, when a little tree sprouted up in front of him and hit
him in the nose. I was
surprised. I mean, even in the Enchanted Forest, trees
don't usually grow that fast. The dragon was even more
surprised than I was. It sort of reared back, and its tail
came around very fast to balance it. Nightwitch was a little
too close and had to scramble back out of the way. "Hey,
watch out!" Shiara said. The
dragon jumped and swung around, looking as if it Talking
to Dragons 81 expected
another tree to pop up behind it. Its tail swung in the
other direction, and the end of it caught the knight right in the
middle of his chest plate as he was trying to back out of the
way. The dragon yelped, the Princess screamed, and the
knight fell over backward into the pool of water that my
sword had made when the Princess had tried to take it. He sank
out of sight right away; evidently the pool was a lot
deeper than it looked. The Princess screamed again and
leapt forward. I ran over, too; by the time I got to the pool,
the Princess had hold of the knight. She wasn't quite strong
enough to pull him out, but she wasn't letting go, either. Shiara
got to the pool about the same time I did, and together
the three of us managed to get the knight out of the
water. He was unconscious, and he had a large dent in his
armor where the dragon's tail had hit him. The Princess checked
to make sure he was still alive and then burst into tears. "Alas!
See now how sad is my fate! For my love has been
grievously injured and I am without protection in this awful
place. Ah, woe is me!" "Is
he dead?" asked the dragon from right behind me. I jumped
a little; I hadn't noticed it come up. It peered cu- riously
over my shoulder at the knight. "Monster!"
said the Princess. "Your base attempt to slay my love
has failed! No second chance shall you have to harm
him while I can stand between you! For if my love be
slain, I shall care not whether I live or die, and thus I now
defy you." She
threw herself across the knight's chest. The knight coughed,
moaned, and opened his eyes. "I say, Isabelle," he said
weakly. "That really is a bit uncomfortable." The princess
sat up and started weeping all over his face. It didn't
seem to make him much more comfortable. The
dragon was still peering. "That was a very good fight,"
it said to the knight. "Except for the last part. My tail
still stings; I think I sprained it. Is armor always that hard?" The knight
tried to answer and started coughing instead. The
Princess cried harder, until Shiara said pointedly, "I Patricia
C. Wrede don't
think all that water is doing him much good." The Princess
stopped crying and glared at Shiara for a minute, then turned
back to the knight. Somehow, she looked a lot more
unhappy now that she wasn't crying. I felt sort of sorry
for her. Finally
the knight managed to get his coughing under control.
He looked up at the dragon and said, "I do believe I agree
with you about the fight. That trick with the tail is quite
good; I don't believe I've seen it before. I really must remember
it." "Actually,
it was something of an accident," the dragon said
modestly. "But I think I could do it again if I tried. Did you
really think it was good?" "Oh,
quite," the knight said. I got the feeling that he would
have tried to bow if he hadn't been lying on his back. "I
think perhaps you broke one or two of my ribs." "I'm
sorry," said the dragon. "Is that bad?" "It
is certainly a bit uncomfortable," the knight said. "I don't
really blame—" A
coughing spasm interrupted him. The Princess looked alarmed,
but she didn't start crying or anything. I saw Shiara watching
the Princess with a surprised look on her face, and
right about then Nightwitch sprang up onto the knight's chest. "What
is this? Go hence, and leave my love in peace!" cried
the Princess. "You
let my kitten alone," Shiara said wamingly. The
Princess stopped in midreach and looked over at Shiara.
"And shall I neglect anything that may bring comfort to my
love in his hurt?" she said. "Nightwitch
isn't going to hurt—" Shiara started, then paused.
"I guess it doesn't matter. Go ahead." I
stared at Shiara in surprise, but she was watching the Princess
and Nightwitch. The Princess got scratched a cou- ple of
times before she finally managed to pick the kitten up and
move her. By then the knight wasn't coughing quite so hard
anymore, but he still didn't seem up to talking. Shiara
frowned at him. "You don't sound very good," she said. The
dragon stuck its head farther over my shoulder. "If Talking
to Dragons 83 you
can't fix him, can I eat him?" it asked hopefully. Nightwitch
hissed. The knight looked alarmed and tried to say
something, but all that came out was more coughing. The
Princess said, "No!" very loudly and looked as if she wanted
to throw herself on top of the knight again. "Of
course not," Shiara said. "You promised." "It
wouldn't be polite," I added. "After all, that was why you had
the tourney." The
dragon looked hurt. "I was just asking." "Ah,
what are we going to do about them?" I said hastily, waving
at the Princess and the knight. "They can't stay here,
not with the knight hurt like that." "It's
not so bad, really it isn't," the knight said, looking at the
dragon nervously. He started coughing again right away,
but it didn't sound as bad as it had before and he stopped
fairly quickly. "I
suppose you could come with us," I said after a minute. It
wasn't so much that I wanted his company, or the Prin- cess's;
it was just that I didn't see what else I could do. "That's
frightfully kind of you," the knight said. He looked
uncertainly at the dragon. "Very kind, to invite me to come
with you. All of you?" "I
don't know," I said. "I haven't asked the dragon about its
plans yet. But you're quite welcome to join us, if you want
to." "Yes,"
said Shiara. "I'm sure you'll be very useful when the
wizard comes back." "Wizard?"
said the knight. He was so alarmed he almost started
coughing again. "What wizard?" "Well,
actually, there are several of them," I said. "Every now and
then one of them shows up and tries to do something to us.
The last one left when the dragon showed up." "I'm
sure he'll be back in a little while," Shiara said. "Or
one of the others will. They've been chasing us all over the
Enchanted Forest." "You
know," the knight said, "I really don't believe it would
be a good idea for me to join you. I should almost certainly
be a bit of an inconvenience, you see. Wet armor rusts,
and with that and the ribs I'm afraid I'd be a little slow.
Thank you terribly, all the same." 84
Patricia C. Wrede Talking to Dragons 85 "If
you don't come with us, what will you do?" I said. "Mrow,"
said Nightwitch. "Morwen!"
Shiara said. "They can go to Morwen! She'll know
what to do for them." Nightwitch started purring loudly,
sort of like a pepper grinder with rocks in it. I
thought about it for a minute. "It sounds like a good idea,
but will she want to?" "Morwen
likes helping people," Shiara said. "And I'm sure
she can take care of both of them." "You
know Morwen?" said the dragon. "I like her. She used to
give me apples out of her garden." I tried
to imagine a dragon eating apples and failed. I could
imagine Morwen giving them to a dragon, though. "Who
is this Morwen?" asked the Princess, clasping her hands
in front of her. "Think you that she could help my love,
indeed?" "Morwen's
sort of a friend of ours," I explained. "She lives
back that way, with a lot of cats, and her house has kind of
a strange door." "I
didn't have any trouble with it," Shiara said. "And she has
nine cats. She told me while you were asleep." "Nine
cats?" said the Princess, looking puzzled. "But what
has that to do with my love, who is so grievously hurt?" "I
said it wasn't that bad, Isabelle," said the knight un- comfortably.
"Really, I wish you wouldn't make such a fuss. I
shall be quite all right in a little, I'm sure." "If
this woman with the many cats can help you, then shall
we go to her," the Princess declared with more spirit than
she had shown about anything else. "For you are my love,
and I will have you whole and well." "Oh,
but really, Isabelle—" "I'm
sure Morwen won't mind," Shiara put in. "She fixed Daystar
up just fine. She's even good with wet swords." The
Princess looked thoroughly confused, but the knight brightened
a little. "Are you quite sure? Because I'm fright- fully
wet, sword and armor and everything, and it would be very
nice if I could keep it all from rusting. It's rather expensive,
you see." "I'm
sure she could manage mat," Shiara said. "Of course, you
don't have to go. You could stay here and wait for the wizard
to come back." The
knight didn't argue much longer; I don't think he liked
the idea of staying around the dragon, especially if a lot of
wizards were going to show up any minute. As soon as he
agreed, the Princess started telling him how wise and brave
and wonderful he was. Shiara looked disgusted, but the
knight seemed to like it. He sat up and even managed not to
cough very much. Shiara
and I told the knight how to find Morwen's house. He and
the Princess said good-bye and started walking off down
the stream. "That's a relief!" Shiara said when they were
out of earshot. "For a while I thought you were going to make
us go with that stupid Princess! It was bad enough having
to listen to her here without following her around." I
blinked at her. "But I thought you changed your mind about
her!" I said. "You were being a lot nicer to her after the
knight got hurt." Shiara
snorted. "So I felt sorry for her. She really does care
about that klutz in the tin suit; you could tell. That doesn't
mean I like her! I still think she's dumber than you are,
but I'm glad they're going to see Morwen." I still
wasn't really sure whether Morwen would object or not,
but I didn't say anything else about it. I mean, by then it
was too late anyway; the knight and the Princess were
completely out of sight. I turned around to see where I'd put
the bundle of food and things Morwen had given me. The
dragon was staring at me. "Why,"
it said, "do you have wizards chasing you?" "It's
a rather long story," I said. "I'll be glad to explain, but you
might want to make yourself comfortable first." The
dragon sighed. "Have you ever tried to be com- fortable
with a sprained tail?" Shiara
giggled. I ignored her. We waited while the dragon tried
curling into a couple of different positions. One of them
looked sort of like Suz when he was halfway through getting
up on his tail. Finally, the dragon curled itself around the
little tree that had sprouted up in the middle of the toumey.
"That's better," it said. "Enchanted trees are always more
comfortable than regular ones." 86
Patricia C. Wrede "Enchanted
trees?" Shiara said. "Of
course," the dragon said. "What else do you expect to find
in an enchanted forest? I'm going to have to re- member
to tell someone about this, though; there haven't been
any new ones in a long time." I
looked at the tree a little more closely. It was about six feet
tall now, and it seemed to have stopped growing. It didn't
look very different from the other trees in the En- chanted
Forest, except that it was a lot smaller than any of the
ones growing around the edge of the clearing. And, of course,
none of the other trees had dragons wrapped around them. "You
were going to tell me about the wizards," said the dragon. So I
explained about Mother and Antorell, and the Sword of the
Sleeping King, and everything. It took a long time. The
dragon didn't say anything at all the whole time I was talking,
but its tail twitched a couple of times. Every time it did,
the dragon winced. "That's
very interesting," the dragon said when I stopped. "Where
are you going now?" "Morwen
told us to follow the stream," Shiara said. "And Suz
said we should go talk to someone named Kazul." "It's
the same thing," the dragon said. "What
do you mean?" I asked. "The
stream goes to the castle, and Kazul lives right outside
it. I wonder why she wants to see you?" "What
castle?" Shiara said in an exasperated voice. "And who is
this Kazul person, anyway?" "It
must have something to do with that sword," the dragon
said, ignoring her questions completely. "Especially if it
really does belong to the Sleeping King." "You
mean you know something about it?" Shiara said. "Well,
then tell us what the stupid thing does!" The
dragon looked sheepish. Dragons just weren't meant to look
sheepish. "I don't know. I'm not old enough yet," it
said. "Not
old enough?" "That's
why I wanted a Princess," the dragon said. "Otherwise,
Kazul won't tell me anything important until Talking
to Dragons 87 I'm two
hundred. She says that before then dragons are irresponsible,
unwise, and talk too much." It looked faintly indignant.
"I don't talk too much." "Who
is Kazul?" I said. I was getting a little nervous about
meeting her. I mean, I didn't think I'd ever know anyone
who could tell a dragon what to do, even a young one.
Well, Mother might be able to get away with it. "Oh,
I thought you knew," the dragon said. "Kazul is the
King of the Dragons." SHIARA
AND I looked at each other. "Terrific," Shiara said. "And
I thought wizards were bad." "Did
I say something wrong?" the dragon asked. "No,
not at all," I said hastily. "We were just a little surprised,
that's all." "Hey!"
Shiara said. "How can Kazul be King of the Dragons
if she's a she? That doesn't make sense!" "It
does too!" the dragon said. "What else would you call
her?" "How
about Queen?" Shiara said sarcastically. "Queen?"
the dragon said. "Why would you want to call her a
Queen? That's not the same thing at all! You're the one who
doesn't make sense." "I
do too make sense!" Shiara said. "Queens do the same things
Kings do." "Not
for dragons," I said hastily. I didn't want the dragon to get
offended again. "Dragons have a King, period. The King of
the Dragons is the oldest dragon who can move Colin's
Stone from the Vanishing Mountain to the Ford of the
Whispering Snakes; it doesn't matter whether the dragon is male
or female." "It's
silly to have two names for the same job," the dragon 89 90
Patricia C. Wrede said
complacently. "People might get confused." "Oh."
Shiara looked skeptical, but at least she didn't object
anymore. I decided I was going to have to talk to her
soon, before she got us both in real trouble. For about a
minute, no one said anything. Then Shiara looked over at me. "Daystar,"
she said, "why are we looking for the King of the
Dragons?" I
started to say something, then stopped because I wasn't really
sure what to say. I mean, it would sound a little odd to say
that I was looking for a dragon because a lizard told me to.
Especially since the dragon was apparently King of the
Dragons. I thought some more. "I
don't know," I said finally. "But I think we have to. At
least, I have to. It seems like the right thing to do." Shiara
sighed. "I was afraid you were going to say some- thing
like that." The
dragon looked puzzled. "What's the matter? It doesn't sound
particularly unusual to me, but I suppose it'll be at least
as interesting as running away to find a Princess." Shiara
and I looked at the dragon, then at each other, then
back at the dragon again. "You ran away?" Shiara said finally. "It
was the only way I could think of to get a Princess," the
dragon said. It sighed. "It didn't work out the way I thought
it would, though." Shiara
and I exchanged glances again. I didn't really like the
idea of meeting Kazul in the company of a runaway dragon,
but I couldn't think of a way to keep it from coming along
with us if it wanted to. "You're sure you really want to
come?" I said. "I mean, there are wizards after us, and it
might be a little inconvenient if they showed up again." The
dragon looked thoughtfully for a moment, then it shook
its head. "I'm coming with you, wizards or no wiz- ards,"
it said stubbornly. "Sneezing isn't so bad." I
sighed. It's awfully hard to talk a dragon out of doing something
it's decided to do. "We'd better go, then," I said. "I'm
sure Antorell will be back as soon as he thinks it's safe,
and I'd sort of like to be gone by the time he shows up." Talking
to Dragons 91 Shiara
grabbed Morwen's bundles and shoved one at me. "You're
absolutely right. Here. Let's go." I
nodded and started toward the stream. "Not that way!" said
the dragon. "It takes too long." "How
else are we going to find the stupid castle?" Shiara demanded.
"We don't even know what it looks like!" The dragon
looked smug. "I do," it said. "And I'm very good at
shortcuts." "Morwen
told us to follow the stream," I said doubtfully. "Morwen
didn't know you were going to meet me," the dragon
said. It looked at me for a minute. "I thought you said
you were in a hurry." "Come
on, Daystar," Shiara said. "I don't care which way we
go, but let's go!" I
decided not to argue. I still didn't like the idea of leaving the
stream, but it didn't seem worth fighting over. Not with a
dragon, anyway. Besides, if we didn't leave soon, I was sure
the wizards would catch us. We started off, following the
dragon. Traveling
with a dragon was rather nice, in a way. Noth- ing
bothered us at all. When it started to get dark, we stopped and
opened Morwen's bundles again. There was obviously something
magic about them, because the leftovers from lunch
had turned into a fresh packet of food, and there was plenty
for everyone, even the dragon. Nothing
dangerous came near us all night, either. I stayed awake for
a while, just to make sure, but evidently night- shades
and wolves and things don't like the idea of annoying a
dragon any more than people do. Finally, I went to sleep, too. We
started off again as soon as we woke up next morning. The
dragon went first because it knew the way, and we followed.
After a while, I noticed that I didn't feel quite comfortable
for some reason. I touched the hilt of the Sword of the
Sleeping King a couple of times, but I didn't feel any new
magic tingles, just the same familiar ones. I started watching
the trees as we walked. Finally, Shiara noticed. "What's
the matter, Daystar?" she said. "I
don't know," I said. "But I feel as if I'm being watched." "Watched?"
Shiara looked at the trees quickly. "Who 92
Patricia C. Wrede would
be watching us?" "I
don't know," I said. "I'm not even sure someone is. I just
feel uncomfortable." "You're
being a little slow," the dragon called back over its
shoulder, and Shiara and I stopped talking and ran to catch
up. We didn't have a chance to discuss it again, but I
noticed Shiara looking uneasily at the forest from time to time.
Even Nightwitch seemed to notice something wrong; she
stopped jumping at leaves and stayed close to Shiara. In
fact, Shiara almost stepped on her once. After that, Shiara carried
her. In
spite of all the worrying, nothing happened until late that
morning. The dragon was moving on through the forest, ignoring
all the little branches and things that happened to be in
its way. Suddenly it gave a smothered yelp and stopped. Shiara
and Nightwitch and I ran forward to see what was the
matter. The
dragon was sitting back, rubbing its nose and glaring at a
large open space in front of it. I looked around, but I didn't
see anything else. "What happened?" I asked. "I
ran into something," the dragon said, glaring at me for a
minute instead of the open space. "But
there isn't anything— Ow!" Shiara started to wave toward
the clearing, but her hand stopped about halfway through
the wave, as if it had hit something. She rubbed her
fingers, then put out her hand more cautiously. It stopped in
midair, right where it had before. Nightwitch hissed and backed
away. I
reached out, very carefully. It was a little strange to feel
something where I couldn't see anything. It was cool and
smooth, like stone, and it went up as far as I could reach.
"It's an invisible wall!" I said. "No,
it's an invisible castle," Shiara said. Then she jerked her
hand away and stared at the air in front of her as if she could
make herself see something by trying hard. "Hey! How do
I know that?" "I
don't know," I said. "When did you figure it out?" "I
didn't! I was just standing here, wanting to know what it was,
and all of a sudden I did. I even know how to do it!" Talking
to Dragons 93 ^?* !& ft "Do
what?" asked the dragon. "Put your hand on a castle?" "No,
no; how to make things invisible!" Shiara said. "I
don't want to know how to make things invisible," the
dragon said crossly. "I want to know where this invisible thing
came from. It wasn't here last time I came this way." For
once, I wasn't paying much attention to the dragon; I was
staring at Shiara. "You figured out how to turn a castle
invisible just by touching it?" I said. "No,
you have to do a lot of other things to it," Shiara said
absently. Then her face changed, as if she had just remembered
something she didn't like, and she stared at the
open area for a minute. Then she swallowed so hard I could
see it. "Let's leave, Daystar; I don't think I want to meet
anyone who would live in an invisible castle." I
looked at Shiara, and then at the open space. I looked back at
Shiara and opened my mouth to ask why we ought to
leave, but I stopped before I said anything. Shiara looked a
little white, and a little sick, and a lot scared. I hadn't ever
seen Shiara look like that before, not even when the wizard
tried to catch us with his snakey water monster. Especially
not then. I decided I could wait to find out what the
problem was. "All right," I said. "Let's go." "But
I want to know what it's doing in the middle of my shortcut,"
the dragon complained. "We
can talk about it somewhere else," I said. Shiara
was already backing into the trees; her eyes were still
fixed on the open space where the castle would be if we
could see it. I glanced back at the dragon. It sort of shrugged.
"Oh, all right," it said. "But I don't see what all the
fuss is about." Right
then Shiara yelled, sort of a half yell that stopped in the
middle. I whirled around. There was a woman stand- ing
where Shiara had been. She was very tall, and she had long
hair that was so red it was almost black. She was dressed
in something green and shining and elegant that hung
from a deep red jewel at her throat, and she was very beautiful.
More beautiful than the Princess, even. I didn't care. "Where's
Shiara?" I said. She
smiled, the same way a very satisfied cat smiles, Patricia
C. Wrede except
that cats don't look evil. Well, most cats don't. "Shiara;
is that your little friend's name? She's right here, my
dear." She stepped aside, and I went cold. Behind her, where
it had been hidden until she moved aside, was a grey stone
statue that looked exactly like Shiara. "That
can't be Shiara!" I said. I was too upset to even think
about being polite. "Shiara's a fire-witch, and fire- witches
are immune to magic!" The
woman smiled another unpleasant smile. "Not the magic
of another fire-witch," she said. "I've been waiting a long
time for someone else to come by; I need her for something." "How
is turning her into a statue going to help?" I said. I was
hoping I could talk her into changing Shiara back; then
maybe I could do something to keep Shiara that way. The
fire-witch glanced at the statue. "It's an excellent way of
storing people until you need them," she said. "I have
quite a number in my garden; they're ornamental as well as
useful." "That
doesn't sound nice," the dragon said. The
woman seemed to see it for the first time, which I
thought was a little odd. I mean, dragons aren't exactly easy to
overlook. "I am not concerned with being nice," she
said. "Why
not?" I said. The
fire-witch turned and looked at me. Suddenly her eyes
narrowed. "Who are you, boy?" she said sharply. "My
name is Daystar," I said, "and I would appreciate it if
you would change Shiara back." "No,"
she said flatly. "Why should I?" She was still staring
at me, as if she were trying to figure something out. "You're
very interesting, Daystar," she said abruptly. "I think
perhaps I'll let you go. I haven't done anything like that in
a long time; it might be an interesting experience. I think
you had better leave before I change my mind." "I'm
sorry, but I'm not leaving until you turn Shiara back,"
I said. "Then
I am afraid you will grow rather bored," the woman said.
She looked at me thoughtfully for a moment, then Talking
to Dragons 95 shook
her head. "No, I don't have any use for you, and I can't
be bothered storing things that aren't useful. Pity; you'd
make a nice fountain." She lifted one hand and snapped her
fingers. I had
just enough time to realize that I hadn't drawn my sword.
I grabbed for it and pulled, knowing I wasn't going to make
it. There was something like an explosion just in front
of me, and a wave of heat, and then I was holding the
Sword of the Sleeping King up in front of me and watching
the fire-witch cursing and stamping at something. She
didn't look at all elegant anymore. Suddenly
I realized why the fire-witch had missed. "Nightwitch!"
I yelled. A small bundle of black fur darted out
from under the witch's skirt and vanished under a bush. The
fire-witch glared after the kitten, then turned back to me.
"You'll suffer for—" Right
next to me there was a sound like someone blowing out
several very large candles all at once, and a stream of fire
shot out and enveloped the fire-witch. She laughed. "Fire,
to harm me? Even a dragon should know better! I'll
see to you in a moment; do you think I am fool enough to grow
a garden without dragonsbane?" The
dragon shuddered, and the fire-witch laughed again. Then
she looked at me, and her eyes glittered. "I want you first,
though. Now!" She pointed at me, and I raised the Sword
of the Sleeping King a little higher, holding on to the
hilt with both hands and hoping it would be able to do something. Something
hit the sword, and pain ran through my whole body.
It felt a little like the shock I'd gotten when Shiara and I
had tried to pick up the sword at the same time, except it went
on and on. The Sword of the Sleeping King began to get
hot. I felt as if boiling lead were running down the sword
and into my arms. I think I screamed; I know the fire-witch
did, because I heard her. The
Sword of the Sleeping King was glowing dull red in my
hands. It wasn't behaving at all the way it had when it
stopped Antorell's spell, and I got the distinct impression that
this wasn't very good for it. It wasn't very good for Talking
to Dragons 97 me,
either; the sensation of boiling lead was oozing farther up my
arms. I knew
I had to do something, because if I didn't I was going
to drop the sword. I yelled something and pushed. At
least, pushing is the only way I can describe what I did. I
wasn't really thinking too clearly by then; I just wanted the
lead to go back into the sword and quit hurting. I heard
a wail from the fire-witch that kind of died out, and the
pain stopped very suddenly. I noticed that the sword wasn't
glowing anymore, and then I fell over. It wasn't that I felt
particularly tired or weak; I just couldn't stand up anymore.
The last thing I remember thinking was that I had to hang
on to the sword, no matter what. I woke
up because something small and warm and rough was
rubbing my chin. I opened my eyes. Nightwitch was sitting
on the ground in front of me, licking my face. I was
lying facedown on the moss; I could feel the Sword of the
Sleeping King underneath me. It was very uncom- fortable,
but I didn't feel like moving. I closed my eyes again. Nightwitch
hissed and dug her claws into my shoulder. Kittens
have surprisingly sharp claws; I opened my eyes again
very quickly. The dragon was staring at me from beside
Nightwitch. At least, its head was beside Nightwitch; the
rest of it wouldn't fit. It blinked at me. "Are
you dead?" it asked. "No,"
I said. I thought about saying something else, but 1 I
didn't have the energy. $ "Oh." The dragon sounded almost
disappointed for a |
minute. Then it brightened. "I think that fire-witch is." (I "That's nice." I had the
feeling I should remember some- a
thing, but I didn't want to think hard enough to figure out what.
Nightwitch hissed and dug her claws into me again. "Stop
that!" I said, and I rolled onto my back to keep her from
doing it again. "What?"
said the dragon. "Nightwitch,"
I said. Rolling over had taken all the en- ergy I
had; I didn't want to talk anymore. I didn't even want to
think anymore. I wanted the dragon to just leave me 98
Patricia C. Wrede alone,
but I couldn't say so without being rude, so I closed my eyes
and started drifting off to sleep instead. Then Nightwitch
jumped onto my chest and dug her claws in hard. I
yelled and sat up. Nightwitch jumped down to the ground
and ran off. I tried to see where she'd gone and saw Morwen's
bundle instead. Suddenly I realized that I was very hungry.
I started to reach for the bundle, then remem- bered
that I was still holding the sword. I also remembered the
boiling lead, and I was almost afraid to look at my hands.
I was sure that this time I'd burned both of them worse
than when I'd picked up the wizard's staff. I
looked down. There wasn't anything wrong with me— at
least, not that I could see. I let go of the sword with one hand;
it didn't hurt. I heaved a sigh of relief and put the sword
back in its sheath, then got out some of Morwen's gingerbread
and started eating. It was a good thing the food was
right on top of the bundle; I didn't have the strength to hunt
for it. The
dragon watched me for a few minutes with a puzzled expression.
"You're a very good magician," it said finally. "Where
did you leam that spell?" "Spell?"
I was having a little trouble remembering the details
of the fight. I wasn't sure whether it was because it had
hurt so badly or because I was too busy eating. "The
one you shouted right before the witch went up in smoke,"
the dragon said. "You said: 'Power
of water, wind, and earth, Turn
the spell back to its birth.'" "Oh,
that," I said. I felt a little silly. "It's just part of a rhyme
Mother taught me when I was little. I don't know why I
said it." "Your
mother taught you? But that's a dragon spell! Your mother
couldn't teach you dragon spells!" "You
don't know my mother," I said. I'd eaten most of the
gingerbread, and I was feeling much better. "She taught me two
more lines to the rhyme," I offered. "They go: Talking
to Dragons 99 'Raise
the fire to free the lord By the
power of wood and sword.'" The
dragon looked at me suspiciously. "Where did your mother
leam dragon spells?" "I'm
afraid she didn't tell me," I said. I finished the gingerbread
and looked around. "Where did Shiara..." My voice
died in midsentence as I remembered exactly where Shiara
had been when I saw her last. I didn't want to look, but I
had to. I took a deep breath and turned my head. Sometimes,
when witches or wizards die, all their spells die
with them. If the witch or wizard is skillful, sometimes the
spells last. The fire-witch had been skillful. Shiara was still a
statue. I SAT
THERE for a minute, staring at the statue and wondering what to
do. Finally I looked at the dragon. "Do you know anything
about magic?" "Of
course I do!" the dragon said. "Everyone who lives in the
Enchanted Forest knows about magic." I
sighed. "I mean, do you know anything about turning statues
that used to be people back into people again? Be- cause I
don't, and we have to figure out some way to fix Shiara." "Oh."
The dragon looked doubtfully at the statue of Shiara. "We
could take her to the Living Spring and drop her in," it
suggested. "That would bring her back to life." "You
know where the Living Spring is?" I said in sur- prise. "No,"
said the dragon. "But I bet if we found it, it would work." I shook
my head. "I don't think we have time to look for it,"
I said. "There are wizards looking for us, remem- ber?" "Oh,
that's right," the dragon said. "I keep forgetting. I don't
like to think about wizards." It blinked. "What about your
sword? You could say that spell again." 102
Patricia C. Wrede I
nodded. I walked over to Shiara and pulled the Sword of the
Sleeping King out of its sheath. I felt a little uncom- fortable,
partly because I hadn't thought of using the sword and
partly because the dragon spell was still just one of Mother's
nursery rhymes to me. The idea of standing in the middle
of the Enchanted Forest holding a magic sword and reciting
nursery rhymes made me feel very silly. I looked at the
statue of Shiara again and decided I'd try it anyway. Slowly,
I lowered the point so that it touched the statue's shoulder
and said: "Power
of water, wind, and earth Turn
the spell back to its birth. Raise
the fire to free the lord By the
power of wood and sword." For a
minute I thought nothing had happened; then three or four
little tingles ran up my arm from the sword. I hadn't even
realized they were missing until they started again. When I
finally did notice, I was relieved. I mean. Mother wouldn't
have been at all happy with me if I'd ruined the Sword
of the Sleeping King somehow. Unfortunately,
Shiara was still a statue. "I suppose we're going
to have to look for the Living Spring," I said. "Unless you
have some other ideas." "I'm
afraid I don't," the dragon said. "I've never been on an
adventure before. How are we going to find the spring?" "I
don't know," I said. Half of the heroes who stopped at our
cottage had been looking for the Living Spring, and I'd
never heard of one of them finding it. I tried to think of
someone who might know where the spring was. "Suz!" I said
suddenly. "What?"
the dragon said. "Suz
is sort of a friend of mine," I explained. "He says he
knows everything that goes on in the Enchanted Forest; I'm
sure he'd know where the Living Spring is. I wish he were
here." "You
do?" said a squeaky voice by my right foot. "Yes, Talking
to Dragons 103 you
really do! How intriguing. Why do you?" "Suz!"
I said. I looked around until I saw him, then carefully
sat down on the ground. "I'm awfully glad to see you. Do
you know where the Living Spring is?" "The
Living Spring?" Suz said. "Dear me! Why do you want to
know?" "What's
that?" said the dragon, who had finally managed to find
the source of the squeaky voice. "It looks like a little dragon." "Oh,
I'm sony. This is Suz; I was just telling you about him.
He's not a dragon; he's a lizard." "A
lizard of extremely good family," Suz said. He frowned at the
dragon, but the dragon didn't seem to notice. Suz gave up
and looked back at me. "Now, why do you want to know
about the Living Spring?" "Because
Shiara got turned into a statue by the fire-witch who
lived in the invisible castle," I said. "She
did?" The lizard peered around until he saw the statue,
then scurried over. He cocked his head briefly and stared
upward, then ran up the grey stone in a spiral until he was
sitting on one of the statue's shoulders. "She really did!
How exceedingly distressing. What are you going to do
about it?" "We
thought if we dropped the statue into the Living Spring,
it would, well, fix Shiara," I said. "But we don't know
where the spring is." "You
don't? No, of course you don't. It's a secret." Suz peered
at me from Shiara's shoulder. "I suppose you want me to
tell you where it is." He considered for a moment. "I
couldn't possibly do that, so you don't need to bother asking." "But
Suz!" I said. "How else can we fix Shiara? I've tried
everything we could think of, and nothing worked." "That
is extremely obvious," the lizard said severely. He ran
down the side of the statue and stopped right in front of me.
"If anything had worked, she wouldn't be a statue, and you
wouldn't be asking me silly questions," he said, and did
whatever the thing was that he did to balance on his
tail. "People who are looking for things in the Enchanted 104
Patricia C. Wrede Forest
have to find them for themselves. You really ought to know
that, you really ought." "Well,
what are we going to do about Shiara if you won't tell us
where the spring is?" I said. "My
goodness gracious, you certainly are persistent," Suz
said. "Have you tried kissing her?" "Kissing
her?" I said incredulously. "Kissing
the statue," Suz explained condescendingly. "It's one of
the standard cures for being made to sleep for years, or
being turned into a frog or a statue or something else like
that. Have you tried it?" I felt
my face getting hot. "Um, well, no," I said. "Well,
then," Suz said pointedly. I
thought about it for a minute or two. I didn't know whether
Shiara would think much of my kissing her, but I didn't
really object, especially if it would break the spell. In
fact, I sort of liked the idea. At that point, I stood up very
quickly because my face was getting even hotter and I could
feel Suz staring at me. I was
standing right next to the statue, and as soon as I was all
the way standing I leaned forward and kissed it. I didn't
want to take time to look before I did it, because I
didn't really want to think about it. First I felt cold stone, but it
warmed up right away, and a second later Shiara jerked
away and said, "Hey! Daystar, what on earth do you think
you're doing?" "It
worked!" I said. I was awfully relieved. It would have been a
lot of work to carry a statue around with us, and if we
hadn't gotten Shiara turned back into Shiara, we would have
had to. Besides, having Shiara back felt good, even if she
was glaring at me. "What
worked?" Shiara demanded suspiciously. "And where
did that witch go? She was here a minute ago." "You
were a statue," the dragon informed her. "The fire- witch
did it, but Daystar got rid of her. I'm very glad he did,"
it added thoughtfully. "I didn't like her. She wasn't polite
at all, and she.. .and she..." The dragon leaned forward
and said in a loud whisper, "And she grew dra- gonsbane!" 106
Patricia C. Wrede Shiara
stared at the dragon, but before she could say anything
there was a loud squeak from behind her, and Suz's voice
started shouting. "Help! Murder! Wild beasts and dangerous
lunatics! Oh dear oh my help help goodness gra- cious
help oh!" I
turned around. Nightwitch had come out from wherever she'd
been hiding, and apparently she'd managed to sneak up on
Suz while I was, well, kissing Shiara. Suz was rolled into a
tight golden ball, and Nightwitch was batting him back
and forth between her paws in wide-eyed fascination. I
didn't think she'd ever played with a ball that yelled at her
before, which would explain the interest. I bent
over to pick up Nightwitch, but before I actually got
hold of her the lizard uncurled very quickly, slapped his
tail sharply against the kitten's nose, and curled up tight again.
He didn't stop yelling the whole time. The kitten jerked
her head back so fast that she sat down hard on her tail,
and I grabbed her. "It's
all right now, Suz," I said. The
lizard poked his nose out of the ball. "You're quite certain?"
he said. "Yes,
of course," I said. Suz
uncurled a little more. "This sort of thing is quite unsettling,"
he said. "I do not approve at all. Dear me, no, not at
all." "I'm
very sorry," I said. "I'm afraid I didn't know she was
there." "People
who keep wild animals ought to know where they
are so they don't go around eating other people," the lizard
said. He uncurled the rest of the way and lay on the moss,
peering reproachfully up at me. I bent
down, and Suz scooted back a couple of feet. "You
keep that, that beast away from me!" "Nightwitch
isn't a wild animal," Shiara said indignantly. "She's
a kitten. And I don't believe she meant to eat you; she
just wanted to play." "She's
too young to know better," I said. Shiara glared at me,
and I added hastily, "Nightwitch, I mean." "She
is?" The lizard squinted at Nightwitch from a safe distance.
"Yes, I suppose she is," he said reluctantly. "How Talking
to Dragons 107 unfortunate.
I really do think I had better leave. Dear me, yes, I
really must." Suz
nodded and headed off into the woods. "Suz, wait!" Shiara
called. The
lizard stopped and looked back over his shoulder. "What
is it?" "I'm
sorry Nightwitch scared you," Shiara said. "You
are?" Suz turned around and ran back to where Shiara
was standing. He cocked his head at her, then did his
tangled tail-balancing trick and stared up at her. "Why, you
really are! How astonishing! How extraordinary! How extremely
unexpected!" I was a
little surprised myself, but I didn't think it was quite
that unusual. I didn't mention it, though; I had a few other
things I wanted to ask Suz as long as he was still around. "Suz?"
The lizard turned his head and looked at me. "What's
the best way to get to the castle where Kazul lives from
here?" I asked. "Why,
it's—" Suz paused. "Dear me, there seems to be an
invisible castle in the way. How ridiculous. I'm afraid you'll
just have to go around." "That's
what I was afraid of," I said. "But thank you anyway." "It's
quite all right. And I really must be going now, I really
must. Good-bye." Suz bowed politely, then did a quick
backflip and scurried off into the woods. "And
thank you for telling me how to change Shiara back!"
I called. Suz
didn't answer. I turned back to find Shiara glaring at me
again. "All
right, Daystar, explain. What's all this about statues and
getting rid of witches?" "I
already told you all that," the dragon said in an injured tone.
"Why do you want him to tell you again?" "Because
I didn't understand it when you told it," Shiara said.
She sounded a lot like Mother. "And I want to know what's
been going on." She sat down on the ground and looked
at me. "So explain." I
explained. Shiara let me talk until I started to explain 108
Patricia C. Wrede how
we'd finally turned her from a statue back into Shiara, but
then she interrupted. "You don't have to keep going," she
said. She gave me an odd look. "I remember that part." "Oh.
I'm sorry," I offered. My face was getting hot again.
"But no one could think of anything else, and it did work." Shiara
wasn't paying much attention. "Daystar, did your sword
burn your hands when Antorell tried to throw that spell
at you?" she said suddenly. "No,"
I said, relieved by the change of subject. "It didn't do
anything at all." "It
did too!" Shiara said. "It ate Antorell's spell, or some- thing,
without doing anything to you. Why didn't it do that to the
fire-witch's spell?" "Who's
Antorell?" asked the dragon. "The
wizard you were sneezing at when we met," I said. "He's
not very pleasant." "Wizards
aren't," the dragon said. "Daystar,
this is important!" Shiara said. "Do you know why
your sword didn't do the sam&ming to the fire-witch that it
did to Antorell?" "Maybe
the sword works differently on wizards than it does on
fire-witches," I said. "I wish it would get rid of Antorell;
then I could stop worrying about him." Shiara
said something else, but I missed it. All of a sudden
I had the same itchy feeling I'd had earlier, as if someone
were watching me. I looked over my shoulder, but
there wasn't anyone there. Just trees. "Daystar?"
Shiara almost sounded worried. "I'm
all right," I said. "But can we get started and talk about
this more somewhere else? We still have to get to see Kazul,
and there's an invisible castle in the way." "Shouldn't
we do something about the people she turned into
statues for her garden?" Shiara said, looking nervously at the
clearing where the castle ought to be. "Why?"
said the dragon in a puzzled tone. "Because
it wouldn't be right to just leave them here," I said. No one
seemed to like the idea of going into the castle. No one
wanted to leave the fire-witch's statue people there Talking
to Dragons 109 without
trying to rescue them, either. We spent a little while trying
to figure out how to get into the castle. Shiara wanted to
climb over the wall, but I didn't think that was a very good
idea if we couldn't see the wall or what was on the other
side. Finally, she agreed to help me look for a door or a
gate or something. We
stretched our hands out in front of us and walked carefully
toward the castle. It wasn't there. We went a little farther;
it still wasn't there. We walked around the clearing for a
while, while the dragon watched with interest. Even- tually,
we gave up. "I
don't understand," Shiara said as we came back to pick up
Nightwitch and Morwen's bundles. "Where did it go?" "Maybe
the fire-witch moved it while she was talking to me,"
I said. "A
whole castle? That fast? Besides, didn't Suz say it was
still in the way? It must have moved since he left." Shiara
stopped, and her eyes widened. "Daystar, you don't think
she could still be around, do you?" "She
isn't around anywhere," the dragon said positively. "She
went up in smoke; I saw her." "Good,"
Shiara said savagely. I must have looked aw- fully
surprised, because Shiara glared at me and added, "She deserved
it. You don't know what she had to do to make that
castle invisible." "What
was it?" the dragon said curiously. Shiara
glared at it, too. "I don't want to talk about it." "Why
not?" said the dragon. "Because
she tortured people to death!" Shiara shouted. "It
was part of the spell, and I know how to do it, and I don't
want to think about it!" "I
told you she wasn't a nice person," the dragon said. Shiara
snorted. She picked up Nightwitch and her bundle and
started walking. After a couple of seconds, the dragon and I
followed her. We went straight across the clearing; I sort of
hoped we'd find the castle again, because I felt bad about
the statues, but it still wasn't there. Once we
got across the clearing, the dragon took the lead
again. Nobody said much for the rest of the morning, 110
Patricia C. Wrede which
was fine with me; I still felt like someone was watch- ing me,
and I didn't like it. Finally even the dragon noticed. "You
look a little strange," it said. "Is something wrong?" "I
don't think so," I said. "I just feel like someone's watching
me." "I
think you're imagining things," Shiara said. "I've been looking
since you told me about it this morning, and I haven't
seen anyone." "Someone's
following us?" the dragon said. It blinked at me,
then turned in a slow circle, eyeing the trees. "You're right,"
it said finally. "Someone is following us. That's not polite." Before
Shiara or I could say anything, the dragon's head shot
out toward one of the trees. I'd never seen anything move so
fast. There was a loud yell from someone who wasn't
the dragon; then the dragon yelped and a bunch of leaves
came drifting down to the ground. I heard a couple of
crashing noises and another, louder yell, and then the dragon
reappeared. Dangling by the seat of his pants from the
dragon's mouth was an elf. I
stared for a minute, trying to decide whether this was the
same elf we'd met before. He looked the same, but all elves
look alike. Besides, he was yelling and kicking, and every
now and then the dragon would shake its head, which made it
hard to get a good look at the elf. I
almost laughed; the dragon looked a lot like a very large
cat with a small mouse. Nightwitch evidently thought so,
too; she eyed the wriggling elf with some interest, then looked
at me. "Mrrow?" she said. "I'm
afraid he's too big for you," I said. "He
certainly is!" yelled the elf. "Put me down! Let me down at
once!" "Mrof!"
said the dragon through a mouthful of cloth. "I
don't think he wants to," I said to the elf. "Why were you
following us?" "Hey!"
said Shiara. "Are you the elf we ran into before? Because
if you are, I want to talk to you." The elf
stopped struggling and looked down at Shiara. Then he
twisted around and looked at the dragon. "On the other
hand, maybe I'm better off up here," he said. Talking
to Dragons 111 "Mmnuf!"
said the dragon, and shook its head violently. "Yow!"
said the elf. "Help! I surrender!" "Really?"
Shiara said skeptically. "Really!"
said the elf. "Absolutely! Completely and with- out
question. Will you put me down?" "Maybe
you should," I said to the dragon. "I don't think he can
get away from all of us, and it will be a lot easier for you
to talk." The
dragon looked at me for a minute, then slowly low- ered
its head and dropped the elf in a heap in front of us. The elf
lay there breathing hard while Shiara and the dragon and I
closed in around him. As soon as we stopped moving, he
bounced to his feet and spun rapidly in a circle, bowing to each
of us. Then he sat down cross-legged and looked up at
us with bright black eyes. "Now,"
said the elf, "what can I do for you?" WE
LOOKED AT each other and then at the elf. "What you can
do," said Shiara, "is answer some questions." "My
dear lady, I would be delighted," the elf said. "What do you want
to know?" "Why
were you following us?" the dragon rumbled. "I
thought she was asking the questions," said the elf. "We're
all asking questions," Shiara told him. "So you can
just stop dodging and answer that one." "What
one?" the elf said. The dragon growled and made a
snapping motion at the elf, who jerked back hastily. "Yes, ah, of
course," he said. "That question. I was, um, looking for
information." "Information?
Ha!" said Shiara. "What kind of infor- mation?" "Who
you are, where you're going, and what you're going
to do when you get there," the elf replied promptly. He was
pointedly not looking at the dragon. "That's
all?" Shiara said sarcastically. "It sounds a lot like
what we want to know about you." "How
nice," the elf said, beaming. "We have something in
common." "Excuse
me," I broke in. "But who exactly are you?" 113 114 Patricia
C. Wrede Talking
to Dragons 115 The elf
looked at me with a pained expression. "I'm an elf." "I
can see that," I said politely. "But would you mind telling
me your name? I mean, I'd sort of like to know to whom
I'm speaking." "My
dear boy, I would be delighted." The elf rose and bowed
with a flourish. "My name," he said, "is Janril." He sat
down again and looked at me expectantly. "Pleased
to meet you, Janril," I said. "This is Shiara, that's
Nightwitch..." I hesitated a moment. Dragons don't pick
their names until they're old enough to pick what sex they're
going to be, too, and I wasn't quite sure how to introduce
one. I couldn't leave it out, though. "This is a dragon—" "Somehow
I guessed," the elf muttered. "—and
I'm Daystar," I finished. Shiara
was frowning at me, but before she could say anything
the elf bounced to his feet and said, "Daystar! Not Cimorene's
son? My dear boy, I can't tell you how glad I am
you've finally come. It's about time things got straight- ened
out a little." "I
don't trust elves," Shiara said. "And why should we listen
to you, anyway?" "My
dear girl, if you expect me to answer questions, you're
going to have to listen to me," said the elf. "Other- wise
there's no point in it. Why don't you trust elves?" Shiara
didn't want to tell the elf anything. I was beginning to like
him, though, and I didn't see what difference it would make,
so I told him about the first elf and the wizard's staff. When I
finished, Janril nodded solemnly. "That,"
he said, "explains everything. I am afraid you ran
into one of the Darkmoming Elves; they're a rather disreputable
lot. They've been running wild since the King disappeared,
so of course they'd cause you trouble." "Why
'of course'?" said Shiara suspiciously. "And what King
are you talking about?" "The
King of the Enchanted Forest," the elf said. "The Darkmoming
Elves don't want him to come back; they like the way
things have been run since he left. Since you have his
sword, of course they would want to get rid of you. If they
could," he added thoughtfully. "Personally, I don't think
they really know what they're doing." "How
do you know about Daystar's sword?" Shiara asked suspiciously. "My
dear girl, everyone who lives in the Enchanted For- est
knows something about the Vanished King's Sword," Janril
said. "It—" "Wait
a minute!" I said. "I only have one sword, and I thought
it was called the Sword of the Sleeping King." "Sleeping,
vanished, run away—what difference does it make?"
Janril said. "He's gone." "I
don't care about the sword," the dragon said. "I want to know
why you were following us." The elf
looked annoyed. "My dear... ah... dragon," he said,
"I told you already, I wanted to find out more about you. I
believe that's the usual reason for following people around." "But
that doesn't explain anything," the dragon com- plained. Shiara's
eyes narrowed suddenly. "All right, then, why did you
want to know more about us?" she said. Janril
considered for a moment, then grinned reluctantly. "Because
I'm trying to find out what the Darkmoming Elves are up
to." "What
does that have to do with us?" I asked. "If
I knew that, I wouldn't have to follow you," the elf said
reasonably. "But the Darkmoming Elves have been very
active in this part of the woods for the past few days, and we
thought it might be you they were interested in. And of
course, if they're interested, so are we." "Who
do you mean by 'we'?" I said. "The
Goldwing-Shadowmusic Elves," Janril said with a touch
of pride. "We are on the side of the King, even if he is
missing right now. We follow the sword." "What
does that mean?" Shiara demanded. "And how many
kinds of elves are there?" "Quite
a few," said Janril. "But the only ones you have to
watch out for are the Darkmorning Elves and the Patricia
C. Wrede Silverstaff
Elves. Fortunately, the Silverstaff Elves don't know
the sword is back yet, but I doubt that your luck will hold
much longer." "How
do you know these Silverstaff Elves don't know about
Daystar's sword?" Shiara asked. "My
dear girl, if they did, you'd, have wizards all over the
place. The Silverstaff Elves are in league with them. Undiscriminating,
that's all I can call it." Janril looked prim. A prim
elf is almost as odd-looking as a dignified lizard; I found
myself wishing Suz were still around so I could com- pare
them. "How
do we know you're telling the truth?" Shiara said. "I
suppose you don't," the elf said cheerfully. "But it doesn't
really matter. We'll still be glad to help you." Shiara
snorted. "The last elf who said he was going to help us
almost got Daystar killed." "I'm
sorry about that," Janril said politely. "But I simply can't
take responsibility for the Darkmoming Elves. Now, I must
be going; I have to let the rest of the Goldwing- Shadowmusic
Elves know what's going on. We'll see you in the
castle." "Just
a minute!" Shiara said. "What makes you think we're
going to let you go?" "Can
you think of anything else we could do with him?" I said. "I
could eat him, I suppose," the dragon said. He looked dubiously
at the elf. "I don't think I want to, though; elves don't
taste very good." I
decided not to ask how the dragon knew that. "I really don't
think you have to eat him," I said. "I think we should just
let him go." "But
Daystar—" Shiara stopped and thought for a mo- ment,
biting her lip. "Oh, all right. If you want to let him go,
let's do it." "Are
you sure?" I said, surprised. "I thought you didn't like
the idea." "I
don't," Shiara said, glaring at me. "But we'll be here all day
if we start arguing. Besides, it's your sword." I
wasn't quite sure what that had to do with anything, but I
didn't ask. "All right," I said to the elf, "I think you Talking
to Dragons 117 can go.
But I don't really think you'd better follow us around anymore." "But
of course!" said the elf. He bounced to his feet again,
bowed to each of us including Nightwitch, and whisked off.
Shiara scowled after him and opened her mouth, then apparently
decided not to say anything. "Well,
let's go," I said after a minute. We picked up our bundles
and started walking again. The dragon and I both watched
the trees for a while, but the elf apparently kept his
promise to quit following us. Shiara
walked just behind the dragon, looking thoughtful. "Do
you really believe that elf?" she finally asked me. "I'm
not sure," I said. "I don't think it makes much difference,
though. I'd still be going to see Kazul, no matter what he
said. I want to find out about this sword and what it does
and what's really going on around here." I must
have sounded sort of annoyed, because Shiara frowned
at me and said, "What's the matter with you?" "I'm
getting sort of tired of people chasing my sword," I said.
"I'd like to know why they want it so badly." I was also
beginning to realize that I didn't know nearly as much about
the Enchanted Forest as I thought I did, which made me very
nervous. I wasn't going to mention that to Shiara just
yet, though. "Oh."
Shiara looked thoughtful again. "Well, you could—" The
dragon looked backward over its shoulder. "You're slowing
down," it said. "Can't you talk and walk at the same
time?" We
started walking faster, which really did make it harder to
talk. I kept watching for elves or wizards, but I didn't see
any. In between, I thought about the sword, but I didn't
come up with anything new. We made
fairly good time for the rest of the afternoon, and we
were just beginning to think about stopping for the night
when we came to the clearing. The dragon stopped right
at the edge of it, very abruptly. Fortunately, Shiara and I
were back far enough to stop before we ran into it or stepped
on its tail or something. Bumping into a dragon is not a
particularly good way to end a day. 118
Patricia C. Wrede "What's
the matter now?" asked Shiara. "This
looks just like that last clearing," the dragon said. "The
one that had the castle in it." "You
mean we've been going in circles?" Shiara said. "No!"
said the dragon. "I know my way around the Enchanted
Forest better than that! I just don't like this." "I
don't see why you're worried," Shiara said. "You're not the
one who got turned into a statue." "Well,
if you think it's fun to go banging into something you
can't see, you go first," said the dragon. I put
my hand on the hilt of my sword, and felt a nice, strong
rumble, like a cart full of bricks on a bumpy road. There
was definitely something in the clearing, or at least close
by. I said so. "If
it's invisible, I don't want anything to do with it," Shiara
said decidedly. "Can't we just go around?" "No,"
said the dragon grumpily. "I want to know who's putting
all these invisible things in my shortcut. If there's another
one here, I'm going to find out about it." It stalked cautiously
out into the clearing, heading straight through the
middle. Nothing
happened. The dragon walked all the way across, then
turned and looked at us. "Are you sure there's some- thing
here? I can't find anything." I
touched the sword again. "It feels like there is," I said. I
looked at Shiara. She looked dubiously across the clearing. "Hurry
up," said the dragon. I
sighed and started forward. I kept one hand on the hilt of my
sword, just in case, and I walked across the same part of
the clearing the dragon had. Shiara shook her head and
started around the edge of the clearing. I got
about five steps. Then there was a whooshing noise and a
wall of flames shot up around me, very hot and bright. I
yelled, because I couldn't see where I was going anymore, and I
yanked at my sword. I think I had some vague idea that
the sword might be able to keep me from burning to death;
I certainly couldn't see to fight anything. Something
hit me in the middle of my back just as the sword
came out of its sheath. I felt something from the sword;
it wasn't a tingle, it was more like a wave of anti- Talking
to Dragons 119 cipation
followed very closely by a surge of disappointment. I was
so surprised I nearly dropped it. Then I realized that it
wouldn't matter if I did drop it, because I was lying on the
ground. I was also much cooler man I had been a minute ago,
and someone was pounding on me. "Stop
it!" I said. The someone sat back, and I saw that it was
Shiara. "Are
you all right?" Shiara said. "I
think so," I said. "Why were you pounding on me?" "Your
clothes were on fire," Shiara said. "I was trying to put
them out. If I'd known you were going to fuss about it, I'd
have let them bum." I
apologized and thanked her, then looked around. Shiara and I
were sitting on the ground just inside a ring of fire. In the
center of the ring was a short, round building with a pointed
roof; it wasn't quite tall enough to call a tower, but it
wasn't short enough to call a house, either. I moved away from
the flames, which were uncomfortably warm, and looked
at Shiara. "What happened?" "How
should I know? One second you were walking across
the clearing, and the next second there was all this fire
and you were yelling," Shiara said. "And when I tried to
shove you out of it, we both got in here instead, and that thing
was sitting there." She waved at the not quite tower. "At
least it isn't invisible," I offered. Shiara gave me a disgusted
look, but she didn't say anything. "Hello?"
called the dragon's voice from the other side of the
wall of fire. "Are you there?" "We're
here," I called back "Both of us." "How
did you do that?" the dragon shouted. "I
don't know," I said. "And I don't think I want to stay here to
find out." I picked myself up off the ground and put the
sword back in its sheath. "I think maybe we'd better go,"
I said to Shiara. "Before something comes out of that house." "It
isn't a house," Shiara said. "But I think I agree with you." "Achoo!"
said the dragon from the other side of the fire. "Just
a minute, here!" a voice said behind me. I
turned around. A medium-sized man was standing about 120
Patricia C. Wrede ten
feet away, leaning on a staff that was about three feet taller
than he was. He had black hair and three rings on each
hand, and he was frowning irritably at Shiara and me." "Oh,
rats," said Shiara disgustedly. "Another wizard!" "You,"
said the man, ignoring her statement completely, "are
trespassing. I don't know how you got in here, but it was a
great mistake for you to do so." "We
didn't exactly do it on purpose," I said. "We were just
trying to get across the clearing." "Young
man, there is a reason why I surround my home with a
wall of fire," the wizard said. "And the reason is that I
do not wish to be disturbed. I wish to know how you penetrated
it, or I would not be wasting my time talking with
you." "I'm
a fire-witch, that's how!" Shiara said. "And if you don't
want to be disturbed, you ought to be more careful with
your stupid wall. We would have gone right by if it hadn't
jumped up all over Daystar when he tried to cross the
clearing!" "A
fire-witch?" the man said. He gave Shiara an ex- tremely
odd look. "You haven't mislaid an invisible castle recently,
have you?" "No!"
said Shiara. "It isn't mine!" The
wizard looked even angrier. "You know of it!" "Well,
sort of," I said. "It isn't ours, but we ran into it this
morning." "Did
you," said the wizard. He sounded skeptical and very
dangerous. I decided I didn't want to talk about the castle
anymore. "I
think we ought to be going now," I said. "We're really very
sorry to have bothered you." "I'm
not!" Shiara said. "Shiara!" "Well,
I'm not," Shiara said. "I think he ought to apol- ogize
to us, not the other way around. And anyway, I'm not
apologizing to any wizard, especially not one that messes around
with invisible castles!" The man
with the staff frowned, but this time he looked more
thoughtful than angry. "What is your complaint against wizards?" Talking
to Dragons 121 "Ha!"
said Shiara. "You should know." "No,"
said the man, "I should not. I am not a wizard." "AcAoo/"
came the dragon's voice, and the wall of the fire
bulged inward on that side. "Excuse
me, but if you're not a wizard, why are you carrying
a staff?" I said. "And why is the dragon sneezing?" The man
looked startled. "Dragon? You travel with a dragon?" "No,
it travels with us," I said. "Does it make a differ- ence/
.f" "Perhaps,"
the man said. He looked at the wall of fire and
made a pass with his staff. The flames began to die, and a
moment later we could see the clearing again. THE
DRAGON WAS still sneezing in medium-sized puffs of flame.
The man with the staff looked at it closely and shook his
head. "That certainly is a dragon." He made another pass
with his staff. The
staff vanished, and the dragon stopped sneezing abruptly.
The dragon looked extremely surprised; it sniffed a
couple of times in an experimental way, as if it were expecting
to start sneezing again any minute. I was sur- prised,
too. I mean, wizards never let go of their staffs, not willingly,
anyway. The man
bowed politely to the dragon. "I must apologize for
inconveniencing you," he said. "I offer you greetings and
welcome to my home, and I wish you good fortune when
you leave." "What?"
said the dragon. The man
looked a little startled and peered at the dragon more
closely. "Oh, I see," he said after a moment. "Well, you're
welcome; come and make yourself comfortable." Shiara
scowled at him and bent to pick up Nightwiteh, who had
come running toward her as soon as the flames had
died. The dragon looked suspiciously at the man. "I
don't like wizards," it said. "And I don't like people 123 124
Patricia C. Wrede who put
invisible things in the middle of my shortcut." "I
am not a wizard," the man said with a sigh. "And my tower
has been here for years, and it isn't invisible. Now, come in
and talk. There hasn't been a dragon by for a long time,
and I'm a bit behind on the news." "If
you're not a wizard, who are you?" Shiara said, petting
Nightwitch and glaring at the man. "I'm
a magician," the man said. "And my name is Telemain." "Pleased
to meet you," I said. "Mrrow,"
said Nightwitch, and started purring loudly. Telemain
looked at the kitten, and suddenly he began to laugh.
He had a nice laugh, sort of deep and friendly. I started
thinking that I might be able to like him after all, even if
his firewall had nearly burned me to a cinder. "I
don't believe I have ever seen a group quite like this one,"
Telemain said when he finished laughing. "Please, tell me
who you all are." I introduced
everyone, and Telemain nodded courteously to each
of us. "Welcome to my home," he said. "Some
welcome!" Shiara said. "You nearly got Daystar killed,
and you started the dragon sneezing again. And how come
the dragon was allergic to you if you aren't a wizard?" "Dragons
aren't allergic to wizards," Telemain said, sounding
surprised. "What gave you that idea?" "I
did!" the dragon said. It came forward and sat down emphatically,
right next to me. "All dragons are allergic to wizards.
I should know: I sneeze every time I get near one." It eyed
Telemain belligerently. "Oh,
I don't doubt that at all," Telemain said. "But I am afraid
it isn't wizards you're allergic to; it's their staffs. You
stopped sneezing as soon as I got rid of mine, didn't you?" The
dragon looked startled. "I did, didn't I?" it said after a
minute. "If
you aren't a wizard, what are you doing with a wiz- ard's
staff?" Shiara asked. Telemain
raised his eyebrows. "What business is it of yours,
may I ask?" "We've
been having some trouble with wizards," I said Talking
to Dragons 125 before
Shiara could answer. I didn't want her to make him angry;
we had enough people mad at us already. "Really,"
Telemain said. He looked as if he were going to
laugh again. "All of you?" "Well,
mainly just Shiara and me," I said. "We've been sort of
worried about them. Most of them are after Shiara," I
added. "What
would the Society of Wizards want with a fire- witch?"
Telemain said. "I can see that I shall have to invite you in,
if only to hear your tale." "How
do you know about the society?" Shiara said an- grily.
"And why should we trust a wizard, anyway?" "Anyone
who knows much about magic can tell you're a
fire-witch, and the only reason I can think of for a fire- witch
to have several wizards after her is if she has done something
to offend the Society of Wizards," Telemain said. He
still sounded amused. "And for the third time at least, I am a
magician, not a wizard." "What's
the difference?" Shiara demanded. "Magicians
deal with many ways of magic," Telemain said.
"Wizards with only one. Now, will you come in and sit
down?" Shiara
was still looking at him doubtfully. Telemain smiled.
"Will an oath content you? If you mean no harm, I am
not your enemy, and I will do you no harm while you are my
guests, save in self-defense. I swear by the sword." I felt
a kind of popping at my side, even though I wasn't touching
the sword, and a ripple ran through the clearing, like a
shimmer of light in the air. I thought it kept on going, out
into the forest, but I couldn't be certain. Shiara started and
dropped Nightwitch, who landed on her feet with a yowl.
The dragon stretched its neck; it looked almost as if it were
trying to purr. Telemain suddenly looked very in- tense. "That
is the way of it, then?" he said when the ripple passed.
"I don't think I blame you for your caution." He looked
pointedly at my sword. Shiara
scowled again, but I thought she looked a little more
doubtful than the last time. "If you're so smart..." she
began, and stopped. Nightwitch was rubbing against 126
Patricia C. Wrede Telemain's
leg and purring. "Nightwitch?" said Shiara. "An
intriguing name for a cat," Telemain said, bending over to
pick up Nightwitch. "Even more interesting for a kitten.
Where did you come by her?" "She
was a present," Shiara said grudgingly. "From a witch
named—" "Morwen?"
said Telemain. Nightwitch started to purr. "I
suspected as much. Now, will you come in? Or do you wish to
continue this discussion where anyone may hear?" We went
in. The door of Telemain's home looked like an
ordinary, normal-sized door, but it couldn't have been because
the dragon fit through it without any trouble. The room
inside was made of stone and very bare. In the center of the
floor were two iron staircases that twisted around each
other in a spiral and disappeared into the ceiling. The whole
place seemed much taller from the inside; if I hadn't seen it
before we came in, I would have been sure we were in a
tower. As the
door closed behind the dragon, Telemain waved his
hand. A table and three chairs materialized beside the stairs.
"Sit down," said Telemain, "and tell me more about yourselves." We sat
down, except for the dragon, who sort of curled itself
around the outer edge of the room. I started explaining about
Mother and Antorell and everything that had happened in the
Enchanted Forest. I wouldn't have mentioned the Sword
of the Sleeping King at all if I hadn't been pretty sure
from the way he looked at it that Telemain already knew
something about it. Too many people seemed to be interested
in it; I didn't think it was a good idea to keep talking
about it. There
wasn't much I could do about Telemain, though. The
questions he asked made it pretty clear that I was right: he did
know something about the sword. Maybe more than I did;
he sounded like he knew exactly what answers he expected,
and when I told him about the voice that had said, "All
hail the Bearer of the Sword," he nodded in satisfaction. Then I
explained how Shiara and I had met, and why the
wizards were after her, and about the one who'd tried to get
us at the stream. Shiara frowned at me, but she didn't Talking
to Dragons 127 interrupt.
When I told him about meeting Morwen, Tele- main
seemed very interested. "I haven't seen Morwen in years,"
he said. "How is she?" "You
know Morwen?" Shiara said. "We
grew up together," Telemain said shortly, and if Nightwitch
hadn't started purring again, there would have been an
awkward silence. After a
minute, I cleared my throat and kept going. Tetemain
asked a lot of questions about the things the Sword of the
Sleeping King had done, but he didn't seem partic- ularly
interested in the wizards. He wasn't interested in the Princess
at all. Then I told him about finding the invisible castle
and the fire-witch. "So
that's how you knew about it," Telemain said. "I was
wondering about that." "That's
how we knew," Shiara said. "How didyow know?" "The
castle landed in my clearing sometime around noon," Telemain
said dryly. "I was understandably curious as to why
someone would go to all the trouble of making a castle invisible
and then drop it on top of a magician who can't help
noticing it." "It's
not there now," Shiara said. "Of
course not! What would I want with an invisible castle?
When I found no one home, I cleaned the place up a bit
and got rid of it." "Cleaned
it up?" I said, puzzled. "The
most recent owner had a number of unattractive habits,"
Telemain said even more dryly than before. 'Turn- ing
people into statues was one of them; there were others. I don't
believe you would be at all interested in the details." "Oh."
He was right; I didn't really want to know about it.
Telemain looked at Shiara again. "I
believe I owe you an apology," he said. "I knew that the
castle was the property of a fire-witch, and I'm afraid that
when you showed up, I thought you had some con- nection
with it." "Well,
I don't, but I suppose I can see why you might have
gotten mad," Shiara said. She sounded a lot friendlier than
she had before; I think she would have been friendly to
anyone who didn't like that other fire-witch. Then she 128
Patricia C. Wrede frowned.
"How did the castle get into your clearing, any- way?" Telemain
shrugged. "As far as I can tell, it was designed to move
around the Enchanted Forest more or less randomly. It's a
rather unusual spell to put on a castle, particularly an invisible
one; it's too easy to be outside when the castle moves,
and get left behind." "Then
why on earth would anyone put a stupid spell like that on
a castle?" "Presumably
this fire-witch didn't expect to have any problems
finding the castle again. I don't believe it occurred to her
that someone else might find it first." He smiled. "I left a
few surprises for her; somehow, I doubt that she'll be
pleased." "Oh,
that's all right," the dragon said. "Daystar got rid of
her." Telemain
looked at me. "Really. How did you manage that?" "She
threw some sort of spell at me, but Nightwitch scratched
her, so she missed," I said. "And after that, I had the
sword out." "You
used the Sword of the Sleeping King on a fire- witch?"
Telemain said. He sounded somewhere between shocked
and horrified. "I
couldn't think of anything else that might work," I said
apologetically. "And it did work, sort of. I mean, it got rid
of the fire-witch." "She
went up in smoke," the dragon said with consid- erable
satisfaction. "I watched." "She
went up in smoke," Telemain repeated in tones of fascination.
"And what were you doing while this was going on?" "I
was trying to hang on to the sword," I said. "It was glowing
red, and my hands felt like they were burning or something,
so it was sort of hard to do. But as soon as the fire-witch
was gone, it stopped." "You
are extremely fortunate," Telemain said. "I don't recommend
that you try that again. Stick to wizards; that's what
the sword was meant for." Talking
to Dragons 129 "It
was?" said Shiara. "How do you know? What else does it
do?" Telemain
looked at her. "Magicians know many kinds of
magic." He turned back to me. "Please, continue." I was
curious about what the sword did, too, but Telemain obviously
didn't want to talk about it, so I didn't ask. In- stead,
I explained about fixing Shiara and not finding the castle
and meeting the second elf. Telemain listened care- fully,
then shook his head. "So
the war is beginning again," he said, half to himself. "I
had best make my own preparations." "War?"
Shiara and I said together. Telemain
looked up, almost as if he had forgotten we were
there. "The war between the dragons and the wizards," he said
in the tones of someone trying to be patient. The
dragon, who had been falling asleep, suddenly came awake.
"War with the wizards?" "What
else can it be?" Telemain said a trifle crossly. "The
elves are choosing sides, the dragons are restless, the wizards
are coming into the Enchanted Forest in large num- bers,
and the Sword of the Sleeping King has returned. What
more do you need to know? It is obvious!" "What
does the Sword of the Sleeping King have to do with a
war between the dragons and the wizards?" I asked before
the dragon could take offense. "The
sword is what started the war in the first place," Telemain
said, and then refused to say any more. "If Cimorene
didn't see fit to explain, I certainly won't," he said.
"When you meet Kazul, I am sure she will tell you whatever
you need to know. I'm afraid I don't have time at the
moment; I must see to things at once, if we are to win
this war at last." "Who
do you mean, 'we'?" Shiara said suspiciously. "The
dragons," Telemain said, "and the rest of us who follow
the sword. Now, if you will excuse me?" He rose and
started for the stairs. "Wait
a minute!" Shiara said. "What about us?" "What?
Oh, of course," Telemain said. He waved his hand
again and muttered something, and suddenly the table 130
Patricia C. Wrede was
full of plates and bowls of food. I jumped. Telemain didn't
seem to notice. "Help yourselves while I am gone," he
said. "I don't expect to be long." He
turned away and went up one of the iron staircases. Shiara
and I looked at each other. "Now what do we do?" Shiara
said. "I
think I'm going to eat," I said. "Would you like some- thing?" Shiara
snorted, but she reached for one of the bowls. There
was plenty for all of us, including Nightwitch and the
dragon. About the time we finished, Telemain came back. "I
was right," he said to no one in particular. Then he looked
at me. "I think you should all stay here for the night," he
said. "It will be much safer for everyone, and it will give me
time to look into things a little more. You've been extremely
lucky so far; there's no reason to take any more chances
until you must." I
started to nod, then looked at Shiara. Shiara looked at me,
then looked at Nightwitch, who was curled into a small ball on
Telemain's chair. She looked back at me. "Let's stay,
then," she said. "You
will find rooms upstairs, on the second floor," Telemain
said. "Just pick one and go in." He turned to the dragon.
"I think you would be more comfortable down here." "I
think you're right," said the dragon, eyeing the iron staircases
a little dubiously. "And
thank you very much for your hospitality," I said. Telemain
nodded. Shiara and I started for the stairs. Shiara
got there ahead of me and started climbing, but she didn't
get anywhere. "What's the matter?" I asked. "There's
something wrong with this stupid staircase!" Shiara
said. "I keep trying to climb up, but I don't go anywhere!" Telemain,
who had been talking quietly to the dragon, turned.
"I'm sorry; I should have warned you. You'll have to take
the other staircase. The one you're trying to use only works
going down." Talking
to Dragons 131 "That's
ridiculous!" said Shiara. "How can a staircase only
work going in one direction?" "He's
a magician," I said. "Oh,
all right." We
didn't have any trouble getting up the other stairway. Telemain's
tower really was a lot taller than it looked from the
outside, because the stairs kept going after they got to the
second floor. Shiara and I didn't climb any farther, though.
We got off on the landing at the second floor and looked
around. We were
standing on a narrow circle of wooden floor around
the hole where the two staircases came through. Around
the edge were six identical wooden doors. It looked even
barer than the room below had when we arrived. "Well, he said
to just go in," Shiara said. Each of
us picked a door and opened it. The rooms on the
other side were identical; they looked very comfortable and not
at all bare. They each had a bed, a table, a lighted lamp in
a bracket on the wall, a padded chair, and a small set of
drawers with a mirror above it. Shiara looked thought- ful.
"I wonder if he keeps lights going in all these rooms?" "He
might," I said. "I mean, he is a magician. Does it matter?" Shiara
glared at me and went into the room she'd picked, slamming
the door behind her. I stood there for a moment, wondering
whether to knock on the door and apologize. I decided
not to; I didn't even know what to apologize for. I
decided to wait until morning to talk to Shiara, since by then
she probably wouldn't be mad anymore. I kept
the Sword of the Sleeping King with me all night. It was
a little uncomfortable sleeping that way, but I felt better
knowing where it was. It wasn't that I didn't trust Telemain;
I was just getting more and more worried about the
sword. Everyone I met seemed to know about it, or want to
know about it, or something. I spent a lot of time thinking
about it instead of sleeping. Telemain
served breakfast the next morning on his magic table.
He was very quiet while we were eating, but as soon as we
finished he looked at me and said, "I have watched 132
Patricia C. Wrede the
Enchanted Forest all night, and there are some things you
should know, but I do not wish to detain you against your
will." "What
things?" Shiara demanded. Telemain
smiled slightly. "I fear you will have some difficulty
in reaching the castle," he said. "I found no less than
twelve wizards searching the area between it and you." "Oh,
great," Shiara said disgustedly. "Just what we need: more
wizards!" "I
don't think it's very good," the dragon said. "Why do you?" "I
don't," Shiara said. "Then
why did you say so?" "What
can we do about them?" I asked Telemain. "I
think you can avoid them if you go through the Caves of
Chance," Telemain replied. WE ALL
STARED. "Ha!" Shiara said finally. "The Caves of Chance
are even more dangerous than the wizards!" "I
don't think so," Telemain said. "I have been through them,
and they're not as bad as most people think. Further- more,
there is an entrance to the caves within half a day's travel,
and an exit that is very close to the castle. And once you are
inside the caves, the wizards will not be able to find
you." "Why
not?" Shiara said. "The
Caves of Chance do not welcome wizards' magic," Telemain
said. "Can
you give us directions?" I said. Telemain nodded and
pulled a large map out of his sleeve. I was extremely curious;
I'd never seen a map of the Enchanted Forest be- fore.
Most people don't bother to even try making maps, because
things change so fast that an ordinary map is only good
for a few days. This one must have been magic, because
it seemed to be fairly accurate. At least, all the things
Shiara and I had seen were in the right places. Telemain
showed us where his tower was and where the castle
was, and he pointed out the places where he'd found wizards.
I didn't ask how he knew they were there. Then he
showed us where the entrance to the caves was. It really 133 134 Patricia C. Wrede did
look a lot closer and safer than trying to get by all those wizards.
Even Shiara looked less doubtful. Then
Telemain turned the map over, and on the back was a
map of the Caves of Chance. He went over the routes from
the entrance to the exit we wanted and what to do about
some of the things we might run into inside. I was very
interested; I knew that trolk are allergic to milk, but I
hadn't known that rock snakes like mirrors enough that they'll
stop squeezing someone in order to look at their reflections.
He also told us to hold anything we really didn't want to
lose in one hand until we were out of the caves. When
Telemain was satisfied that we knew our way as well as
he could make us, he rolled the map up and put it back in
his sleeve. We went outside to say good-bye. "When
you meet Kazul, tell her I will be coming for the battle,"
Telemain said. "She should be expecting you; I sent a spell
to her last night to let her know that you're on your way." "I'll
remember," I said. "And thank you again for your help." "Yes,"
said Shiara. I looked at her, a little surprised, but she was
watching Telemain with an odd look on her face. "I
think I ought to apologize to you," she said finally. "I wasn't
very nice last night." This
time I really did stare, but she didn't seem to notice. Telemain
bowed. "Neither of us was blameless," he said. "I
shall forget it, if you will." Shiara
nodded and turned to me. "Let's go, then." I shut
my mouth and picked up the bundle Morwen had given
me. Shiara already had hers. We waved good-bye to Telemain
and started off into the forest again. Nothing
much happened all morning. Shiara and I were both
nervous anyway, thinking of all those wizards ahead of us.
The dragon didn't seem bothered, though, and Nightwitch
certainly wasn't. We found the first few land- marks
Telemain had told us about, and we were fairly close to the
entrance to the Caves of Chance when the dragon stopped
and demanded lunch. As soon
as the dragon mentioned food, Shiara and I Talking
to Dragons 135 realized
that we were hungry, too. We started looking for a good
place to sit down and eat, and we found one almost immediately.
It was a small clearing with a huge tree lying on the
ground in the middle of it. The
dragon wrapped itself around a medium-sized tree in
front of us; it said it was much more comfortable than lying
on the ground. Nightwitch wandered around investi- gating
the interesting holes and crannies around the tree. Shiara
and I sat down and started eating. "How
much farther is it to the castle?" Shiara asked the dragon,
handing it a slice of gingerbread. "Oh,
not very far," the dragon said. "About another day, if we
weren't going through the caves. I've never been in the
caves, so I don't know how long that will take." "I
thought you said this was a shortcut," Shiara said. "It
is a shortcut," the dragon said in a hurt tone. "How was I
supposed to know a fire-witch was going to get in the
way? Not to mention an elf and a magician." "Do
you think Kazul will tell us anything about the sword when we
get there?" I said. I was beginning to wonder; nobody
else seemed willing to explain anything. "I'm
sure she will," the dragon said reassuringly. "That is, if
you're polite to her. Kazul is very particular about... about...
ahh... ach.. " Shiara
and I dropped our lunches and ducked hastily to either
side. "Achoo!" said the dragon. A large spurt of flame shot
across the clearing, just missing us, and the dragon's tree
shook. "Achoo! Oh, bother. Achoo!" "Daystar!"
Shiara shouted. "Over here!" I ran
around behind the dragon, who was now sneezing almost
continuously. I pulled out my sword as I went. When my hand
touched the hilt, I felt the same jangling that I'd gotten
from Antorell earlier. Then I came around the tree, and
even before Shiara pointed, I saw the wizards. There were
two of them right in front of Shiara, leaning on their staffs
and looking from Shiara to the dragon and back. "Hurry
up," one of them said nervously. "We don't want this to
get out of hand. "I'm
afraid you'll have to wait," another voice said from 136 Patricia C. Wrede behind
him. The first wizard jumped, and Antorell stepped out of
the bushes. "You see, I want him, too." "Urn,
can't we discuss this somewhere else?" said the nervous
wizard, eyeing the dragon. "Oh,
you needn't worry about that," Antorell said, fol- lowing
his gaze. He smiled nastily. "I came prepared." He held up
his free hand so that alt of us could see the spray of
spikey, saw-edged purple leaves he was holding. "Dragonsbane,"
he said unnecessarily. The
other wizards relaxed a little. "Such forethought," murmured
the tall one. He exchanged glances with his com- panion,
then bowed to Antorell. "Under the circumstances, we will
be happy to split the reward with you." "I
am afraid that is out of the question," Antorell said over
the dragon's sneezes. "The boy and his sword are mine." "The
boy!" said the nervous wizard. "But—" The tall one
frowned at him, and he stopped. The
tall wizard turned back to Antorell. "As you say, the boy
is yours. I trust you have no objection if we take the
girl?" Antorell
frowned. He turned toward Shiara and stared at her for
a minute, then shrugged. "She's no use to me. Of course
I have no objection." I
started moving very, very slowly toward Shiara, so that when
the wizards starting throwing spells at us I could try and
stop them with the sword. The wizards didn't notice, and
neither did Shiara. By the time the wizards finished deciding
what to do with us, I was almost over to her. "It's settled,
then," Antorell said. "We help each other. The girl first?" "Ah,
why not start with the dragon?" the nervous wizard said. Antorell
smiled condescendingly. "Very well." He stepped forward
and started muttering over the dragonsbane. Right away
the dragon started yelling. "Yow!"
it said. "Achoo! I hate wizards. Ouch! Achoo! Help!" "You
stop that!" Shiara said to Antorell. The wizards Talking
to Dragons 137 ignored
her, and Antorell kept mumbling. I
started forward; if I could knock the dragonsbane out ofAntorcll's
hand, the spell would stop. I wasn't sure whether it
would be completely broken, but at least he wouldn't be able to
hurt the dragon anymore. Unfortunately, I'd for- gotten
about the other wizards. I didn't even realize one of them
had done something until my feet stuck to the ground and
suddenly I couldn't walk forward anymore. I almost lost my
balance; it was very disconcerting. Antorell was still
out of reach. I took
a quick glance back over my shoulder. The dragon was
sneezing much too hard now to be able to say anything at all.
It was also starting to lose its hold on the tree; I could see its
coils going slack. Here and there, its scales were turning
pink around the edges. Even the tree was looking wilted. "Shiara!"
I yelled. "Get the dragonsbane!" I didn't think I could
get loose in time, but the wizards wouldn't be able to stop
a fire-witch. I didn't wait to see what she did. I leaned
forward a little and tried to lay part of the Sword of the
Sleeping King across my feet. It hadn't helped Shiara when
she was a statue, but this was a wizard's spell, not a fire-witch's
spell, and Telemain had said the sword was meant
to be used on wizards. Besides, I couldn't think of anything
else. It
worked. I straightened up just in time to see a little tongue
of flame shoot up from Antorell's hand. Antorell yelled
and dropped the dragonsbane, which was burning brightly.
Before it even hit the ground, there was nothing left of
the plant except ashes. I looked behind me. Shiara was
standing with a surprised look on her face and one finger
pointing at Antorell. The dragon was still sneezing, but the
green was already starting to come back to its scales. I
sighed in relief; I sort of liked the dragon. "This
is the assistance you give us?" the tall wizard said to
Antorell, who was brushing ashes off the front of his robe.
"The dragon still lives!" "Did
I say anything about killing it?" Antorell said. I got the
feeling he was trying to sound haughty; he only managed 138 Patricia C. Wrede to
sound annoyed. "You need have no more fear of it; it will
take some time to regain its strength, and by then we shall
be finished. What next?" "The
girl, I think," said the tall wizard. "That is, if you're sure
you can handle her?" Antorell
glared. "That is the least of my problems," he said
grandly. "Ha!"
said Shiara loudly. I moved back over to her, holding
the sword in front of me. The three wizards looked at us,
then at each other. "Let us begin," said the tall one. All
three of them raised their staffs, but instead of point- ing
them directly at us, they brought them together, so that they
made a kind of star about a foot from their ends. There was a
bright flash as the three staffs touched, and I felt a shock
from my sword. I jumped, and suddenly I realized that I
could feel the forest. The magic of the forest, I mean; it was
all around me, waiting. I felt almost as if the whole Enchanted
Forest were watching me. Right
in front of me, I could feel the wizards' power growing
and building. There was a kind of pattern in it that kept
getting clearer and more complicated, and I knew I had to
do something about it before the wizards finished. I stepped
forward and swung the sword right through the middle
of the pattern. I felt
a huge jolt of power from the sword, but it didn't hurt
the way the fire-witch's spell had; in fact, it didn't hurt at all.
The pattern collapsed in an invisible tangle. Antorell's eyes
started to narrow; the other two wizards just looked stunned.
And then something exploded. I
couldn't see anything. It wasn't that things had gone dark,
and it wasn't that the light had blinded me. It was more as
if the whole world had suddenly become invisible, so
there was nothing left to see. There was a rushing noise all
around me, and I felt as if I were floating. I heard a chorus
of voices cry, "All hail the Wielder of the Sword!" and
then the noise and the voices vanished, and I was stand- ing in
the clearing with the Sword of the Sleeping King shining
in my hand and three very surprised wizards in front of me. I
stared at the wizards. The wizards stared at me. Antorell 140
Patricia C. Wrede recovered
first. "Enough of this!" he cried. He started to raise
his staff, and right then the ground in front of him humped
up a little bit. A second later, a tree shot up about twelve
feet into the air. It reminded me of someone opening an
umbrella very quickly. A moment later, it burst into bloom
with a sound like a hundred little bells tinkling. Antorell
looked even more surprised than before; then he
scowled angrily and pointed his staff at me again. The tall
wizard next to him grabbed his arm. "Wait, fool! Don't you
know what that sword is?" "What
it is?" Antorell's eyes sparked at the other wizard. "It
is mine! I will have it!" "You
will be dead, you mean," the tall wizard said, but he let
go of Antorell's arm. "This is a matter for the whole Society
of Wizards; there may still be time to stop him if we can
bring them quickly enough." "More
wizards? Achooo! Oh, no you don't! Achoo! Oh, drat,
achoo!" said the dragon. It dove out from its tree, unwinding
itself like a spool of string, very quickly. Its head shot
past me, and I got a fleeting glimpse of green scales and
golden eyes and a very, very red tongue. One of the wizards
yelled, and the dragon sneezed again. I jumped forward
just in time to see all three of the wizards vanish hastily.
Antorell was in the middle; he looked a little white and he
had one hand clutched around a dark, wet-looking spot on
his other arm. I
looked at the dragon. It snapped its teeth together twice, swallowed
something, and sat back, looking very pleased with
itself. "Wizards," it announced, "taste much better than elves." I
swallowed hard and decided I didn't really want to finish
eating lunch. The dragon looked at Shiara. Shiara scowled. "Don't
you look at me like that!" she said. "I'm not a wizard,
I'm a fire-witch." The
dragon looked thoroughly shocked. "But I wouldn't eat
you!" it said. "You're my friend; it wouldn't be polite at
all!" Shiara
looked suspiciously at the dragon, then nodded. "I
just wanted to make sure you remembered," she said. Talking
to Dragons 141 "I
think we'd better get going," I said. "Those wizards sounded
like they were going to come back with more, and now
they're after both of us." "Oh,
terrific," said Shiara. "Let's go, then. Where's Nightwitch?" "Mrow,"
said a kitten-voice from somewhere above me. I
looked up. Nightwitch was perched on a branch of the tree
that had sprouted up in the middle of the fight. She was washing
her paws. She stopped and looked down at me for
a second, then went back to washing. "Nightwitch,
come down!" Shiara said. "Those wizards might
come back any minute!" Nightwitch
ignored her. The dragon came over and peered curiously
at the tree. "Where did this come from?" it asked. "It
grew," I said. "I think you were sneezing when it happened." "Kazul
is going to be surprised about this!" the dragon said
happily. 'Two new trees in a couple of days!" "What
are you talking about?" Shiara said. "It's just a tree!" "No,
it isn't," the dragon said in an offended tone. "It's a new
tree. And it's the second new tree I've seen in two days,
so it's important. The other one hit me on the nose," it
added in an aggrieved tone. "You
mean it's been a long time since there were new trees?"
I asked. The
dragon nodded. "Kazul mentioned it once; she sounded
worried about it. / think they're a nuisance, popping up like
that." "But
where do they come from?" Shiara said. "And why do they
show up when we—" She stopped short, and we looked
at each other. "Daystar,"
said Shiara finally. "It's the wizards." "It
can't be," I said. "What about the first one?" "What
are you talking about?" said the dragon. "The
trees," Shiara said. "Both of them grew in places where a
wizard tried to throw a spell at us. But there wasn't any
tree when the first wizard tried to drown us, so it can't be
wizards." I
looked down, trying to think, and saw the Sword of 142
Patricia C. Wrede the
Sleeping King in my hand. "It's the sword!" I said. "It stopped
Antorell's spell the first time, and a little while later a tree
sprouted. This time it stopped a bigger spell, and we got a
bigger tree. It didn't stop any spells when the first wizard
made that water monster, so no new trees grew. It has to
be the sword." "You
didn't get a tree when you fought the fire-witch," Shiara
said, but she sounded half-convinced. "Telemain
said the sword was meant for wizards," I said. "It
probably only does that for wizards' spells." "Your
sword grows trees?" the dragon said. "I
suppose it sounds a little silly," I said. "Mmmm-ow!"
said Nightwitch. We all looked up. The kitten
launched herself at Shiara, who just barely managed to
catch her. I remembered that the wizards were going to come
back, so I suggested that we leave. Shiara scowled until I
mentioned the wizards, then nodded. We picked up our
things and started off again. THE
ENTRANCE TO the Caves of Chance wasn't very difficult to
find. That worried me a little, partly because Antorell and the
other wizards would probably figure out where we had
gone, and partly because it isn't usually that easy to find
something in the Enchanted Forest. Especially if you're looking
for it. Not
that the way into the Caves of Chance looked as if it
could be moved around easily. It was a large, smooth, circular
hole in the ground, with moss growing right up to the
edge of it, and it was very dark. The dragon and Shiara and I
stood around the edge and stared down into it for a while. "How
are we going to get down there?" Shiara said finally.
"I can't even tell how deep it is." "We'll
have to use the blankets Morwen gave us," I said. "We
can tie them together and climb down." "What
about me?" said the dragon. "/ can't climb down blankets." "I
don't know," I said. "Maybe we'll think of something once we
know how far down it is." "What
if you can't think of anything?" "Hey!"
Shiara had opened her bundle to get the blankets 143 144 Patricia C. Wrede out,
and now she was staring down into it as if she'd never seen it
before. "Daystar, look at this!" The
dragon looked a little put out. It usually isn't a good idea to
interrupt someone's conversation with a dragon, but for
once I decided not to say anything, because I was glad Shiara
had yelled. I didn't know what was going to happen if I
couldn't think of a way to get the dragon into the Caves of
Chance, and I didn't really want to say so. I said, "Excuse me,"
to the dragon and went over to Shiara. "What is it?" "This,"
said Shiara. She pulled a coil of rope out of the top of
the bundle. "It wasn't here before." "Are
you sure?" I said. "Of
course I'm sure!" Shiara said. "Look in your pack; maybe
you have one, too." Shiara
was right: there was another coil of rope in my bundle,
along with a little silver lamp and a set of flints, and I
didn't remember seeing any of them in there before. We tied
the ropes together, then tied one end around the tree
closest to the hole. The dragon watched, grumbling the whole
time. When we finished, Shiara and I argued about who was
going to climb down first. We wound up tossing a coin,
and I won. I stuck
the flints and the lamp into my belt, right next to the
Sword of the Sleeping King, where I could find them easily.
Then I lowered myself over the edge of the hole and started
to climb down the rope. It wasn't easy; the rope kept twisting
around, which made me dizzy, and I kept bumping into
the side of the hole. I had to keep going, though, so I did.
I'd gotten about seven feet from the top of the hole when
the lights went out. I
stopped climbing for a minute and just hung there. I couldn't
see anything except a circle of sky right above me, and
that looked much farther away than it should have. Then I
realized that I had to start climbing one way or another
because my arms were going to get tired very quickly if I
didn't move. I looked up at the sky; I knew I'd only come
down a couple of feet, and it shouldn't be difficult to
climb back up. On the other hand, I knew it could be extremely
dangerous to start things and not finish them in the
Enchanted Forest. I started down again. Talking
to Dragons 145 Climbing
in the dark is not pleasant. I couldn't see where I was
going; I couldn't even see the rope. It seemed like years
before my feet finally touched something flat below me. I
felt around to make sure what I'd found wasn't just a
narrow ledge, then let go of the rope and called to Shiara that I
was at the bottom. The
next thing I did was to get out the lamp and light it. I
had a little trouble, since I was doing everything by feel,
but I finally got it going. At first all I could see was the
tiny yellow flame; then the lamp made a popping noise and
suddenly I could see the cave. Actually,
it was more like a tunnel. Where I was stand- ing,
the walls were a smooth, speckled stone, but as soon as the
tunnel got out from under the hole the walls looked rough.
It was cool and dry, and it looked as if no one had been
there in a long, long time. "That
doesn't look so bad," said the voice above me. I looked
up. The dragon was peering over the edge of the hole.
"I can jump that far." "I
think you should wait until Shiara climbs down," I said.
"Then you can untie the rope and bring it with you." Shiara's
head appeared beside the dragon's. "You're right;
it doesn't look nearly so bad when you can see the bottom." "If
you drop the bundles Morwen gave us, I can catch them,"
I said. "Then you can climb down and we can get started." "All
right," Shiara said. Her head vanished for a few seconds,
then reappeared along with a pair of hands and a bundle.
"Ready? Catch." Nightwitch
was more of a problem than the bundles; I got a
few scratches catching her. As soon as I had every- thing,
Shiara climbed down. We picked up our things and moved
into the tunnel while the dragon took care of the rope,
and then the dragon jumped down. "That was easy!" it
said. I
thought about sliding down a rope in the dark and didn't say
anything. Shiara looked from me to the dragon and back.
"Well? Are you going to stand there until the wizards show up
again?" Patricia
C. Wrede 146 "We
have to decide what we're going to hold on to first," I said. "Daystar,
we have to carry everything ourselves any- way,"
Shiara said. "What difference does it make?" "I
don't think that's what Telemain meant," I said. "There are all
sorts of ways to lose things in the Caves of Chance if you
aren't paying attention, but if you have something in your
hand all the time and never set it down, it's less likely to
disappear." "If
you really believe that, you'd better carry the sword," Shiara
said. "The only thing / don't want to lose is Nightwitch,
and she can take care of herself." "You're
right," I said doubtfully. I didn't really want to march
through the Caves of Chance with the Sword of the Sleeping
King in my hand, but I certainly didn't want to lose
it, either. Finally I decided to take the sheath off my belt
and carry the sword and sheath together. I had some trouble
doing it, though, and Shiara had to help. "Are
you sure this is necessary?" she said. "Why can't you
just wear it?" "Magic
things are particularly easy to lose here," I said. "And
Mother told me to take care of this sword." I tucked the
sheathed sword under my arm and picked up the silver lamp
and the bundle Morwen had given me. "Let's go." The
tunnel slanted down for a long way, then leveled. Every
now and then we came to a dark opening in the wall that
led to a side passage, but we ignored all of them. Telemain
had been very specific about that. Not that they were
particularly tempting; the silver lamp had no difficulty lighting
up our part of the tunnel, but it didn't penetrate into
the side passages at all. After a
while, the tunnel we were following jogged sharply left,
then right again, and suddenly it opened out into an enormous
cave. The walls were crystal, and they seemed to have
hundreds of different-colored lights shifting behind them. I
stopped abruptly, staring, and the dragon bumped into me
from behind. "Excuse
me," I said automatically. "You
shouldn't stop so fast," the dragon complained. It craned
its neck to see around me. "Hey! This is nice!" It Talking
to Dragons 147 stretched
upward, and a minute later it was clinging to the crystal
wall several feet above us. I backed away hastily; I didn't
want to be underneath if the dragon slipped. "Where
are we supposed to go from here?" said Shiara, ignoring
the dragon. "This
must be the Cave of Crystal Lights," I said. "Telemain
said to walk straight across. There ought to be three
passageways on the other side, and we want to take the
left one." "I
see them," the dragon said. It squinted across the cave, then
climbed down and sat beside us. "They aren't straight across;
they're over that way a little." It waved toward the right. I
looked at the dragon. "I think we should follow Telemain's
directions. The Caves of Chance are even trick- ier
than the Enchanted Forest; I don't want to risk getting in
trouble if we don't have to." I didn't mention that the last
time we had taken the dragon's advice we'd run into the
fire-witch and Shiara had gotten turned into a statue, but I
was thinking it. Shiara nodded in agreement. "All
right," the dragon said sullenly. "But I think you're being
silly." We
started walking again, trying to go straight across the
cave. The walls curved in and out, and the floor humped up in
low mounds and ridges; between that and the shifting colored
lights, it was hard to be sure we were going straight. Shiara
and I went back a couple of times, just to make sure, and
every time we did the dragon grumbled. Finally
we got to the other side and saw the three open- ings.
The dragon stared at them, then looked around sus- piciously.
"Where did these come from? These aren't the ones I
saw!" "Well,
then it's a good thing we followed Telemain's directions,"
Shiara said. "Otherwise, we'd be lost. Come on,
let's go." She scowled and headed for the left-hand passageway.
I started after her, and right away I tripped and
fell. "Ow!"
I said. Shiara looked around, then came back to help me
up. "What
happened now?" she asked. 148 Patricia C. Wrede "I
tripped," I said. "I've still got the sword, but I dropped the
lamp. Where is it?" "I
don't see it," Shiara said. She sounded a little worried. She had
reason. Without the lamp, we wouldn't be able to see
anything once we got out of the Cave of Crystal Lights. "It
can't be very far away," I said, and we started hunting. Shiara
went one way and I went the other. About half a minute
later, I saw something glittering. "There it is!" "No,
it's over here," said Shiara. She bent over and picked
something up from behind a rock. "It's still burning," she
said, sounding surprised. "It
lights up more space than it ought to, too," I said over my
shoulder. "Morwen probably put a spell on it or something." "Where
are you going?" Shiara said. "I
saw something over here, and I want to know what it is,"
I said. "Especially since it obviously wasn't the lamp." Shiara
started to object, but right then I saw the glittering thing
again and I bent to pick it up. "Here it is," I said. "See?"
My fingers touched metal, and a fountain of sparks shot up
from the floor of the cave where my fingers were resting. I
yelled and fell backward. The fountain hissed and siz- zled
angrily, getting bigger and brighter and hotter every minute.
I scrambled backward. Blue and white and purple sparks
started falling around us, and all of us ran for the left-hand
tunnel. Nightwitch yowled as one of the sparks hit
her, and Shiara scooped her up and kept on running. We made
it to the tunnel, but no one stopped until we were
well inside, not even the dragon. When we finally got far
enough to be out of reach of the falling sparks, we stopped
and panted for a while. Fortunately, Shiara had remembered
to hang on to the lamp as well as Nightwitch. When
she set Nightwitch down, the kitten glared back toward
the mouth of the tunnel, then sat down and began determinedly
washing a spot on her back where the fur was a
little singed. "What
was that?" Shiara asked as soon as she had her breath
back. "I
don't know," I said. "I was just trying to—" I stopped. Talking
to Dragons 149 I was
holding something in my right hand; I didn't even remember
grabbing it. "It went off when I picked this up," I said,
and opened my fingers. I had
three pebbles of various sizes, a little sandy dirt, and a
small gold key. A tingle ran down my back as I looked at it,
and I jumped. "Now what?" said Shiara. "I
felt something," I said. "Sort of like the sword when it's
finding magic, but not the same." "Is
it magic?" the dragon asked. "I
don't know." "Well,
find out!" Shiara said impatiently. "I thought that was
what the stupid sword was for." I
sighed a little and shifted all the things I was carrying around
until I could put my left hand on the hilt of the Sword
of the Sleeping King. I didn't feel any tingles, but the key
started to glow. We all
stared at the key for a minute. "I knew it was magic!"
the dragon said happily. "I
don't feel anything from the sword, though," I said. I took
my hand off the hilt, and the key stopped glowing. "So?
The sword makes it glow, doesn't it?" Shiara said. "It
has to be magic. What are you going to do with it?" "I'm
going to keep it, at least until we talk to Kazul," I said.
"She may know what it's for, or who it belongs to." "It
b-b-belongs in the c-c-cave," something said in a bubbly
voice behind us. I
jumped and turned around. There wasn't anyone there. Shiara
and the dragon and I all peered into the darkness. Nightwitch
looked up from washing her back long enough to
hiss, then continued washing. "Who said that?" Shiara demanded. "M-m-me.
You b-better put that k-k-key back right away," said
the same voice. I still didn't see anyone. "Why?"
I said. "B-because
it b-belongs there!" the voice said. It sounded like
water hitting a hot frying pan. "Gug-give it to me, and I'll
put it back." "If
you want it, you'll have to come out here where we can see
you," Shiara said firmly. There
was an unhappy bubbling noise from the dark part 150
Patricia C. Wrede of the
tunnel, then a series of unpleasant squishing sounds. A
moment later something wobbled into the light from the silver
lamp. It was about four feet tall, and it looked like a slightly
sloppy pillar of very dark blackberry jelly. "There!"
it said. "Now, gug-give me that key!" I was
so busy trying to figure out how it could talk when it didn't
have a mouth that I didn't answer. I was still trying when
Shiara said, "How do we know it's your key?" "It
isn't my key; I just take care of it. Gug-give it to me!"
The jelly was shaking angrily, and the top part was bobbing
up and down like the lid of a teakettle. Every time it
bobbed up, the pillar of jelly stretched thin underneath it, and
when it bobbed down, the jelly made a sort of flattened lump,
and every time it moved at all, it wobbled. The dragon,
who had been standing behind Shiara, poked its head
over her shoulder to see better. "That
stuff reminds me of something," the dragon said. "I
can't think what, though. What is it?" "/,"
huffed the jelly, "am a quozzel." It leaned forward as if
it were trying to peer at us and said haughtily, "What are
you?" "It's
a dragon," Shiara said, a little nastily. "Can't you tell?" The
pillar froze in midwobble. "There are n-n-n-no drag- ons
under-gug-ground," it said. "None!" It leaned cautiously in
Shiara's direction for a minute, then started bobbing again.
"You aren't a dragon. I want that k-k-key! It belongs in the
cave, and it's g-going to stay there!" "Of
course she's not a dragon!" the dragon said. "I'm a dragon.
And I've never heard of a quozzel before." The
quozzel bent a little, then froze again. "Glurb," it said. The
dragon tilted its head to one side. "I don't think you're
very polite," it said. The
jelly burbled unhappily to itself; it looked as if it were
boiling. The dragon kept staring at it, and suddenly its
eyes started to glow. "I know what it reminds me of!" it said
triumphantly. "Dessert!" The
quozzel shrieked and collapsed backward into the darkness
just as the dragon's head shot toward it. The dragon Talking
to Dragons 151 kept
going, knocking Shiara and me out of the way as it went
past. We heard several squishing noises, and an angry snort
from the dragon, followed closely by a small puff of flame
that lit up the dark end of the tunnel. I got a brief glimpse
of the dragon before the light died, but I didn't see the
quozzel anywhere. There was a disgusted-sounding growl,
and a moment later the dragon stalked back into the light
from the silver lamp. "It got away." "Well,
I'm glad it's gone," Shiara said. She frowned. "You
shouldn't go around trying to eat things all the time, especially
if you don't know what they are. I wouldn't be surprised
if quozzels were poisonous or something." "Dragonsbane
is the only thing that poisons dragons, and the
quozzel wasn't polite, and I'm hungry," the dragon said. It
shook its head sadly. "Wizards taste good, but they aren't very
filling." Shiara
started to object again, and I put the key in my pocket
and started rummaging in Morwen's bundle. I was sure I
still had some meat pies, and I didn't like the idea of
traveling with a hungry dragon. I found the food and offered
it to the dragon, who brightened up a little and accepted. "We
ought to keep going," Shiara said as the dragon sat back
against the wall of the tunnel and started eating. "Sup- pose
that quozzel thing comes back?" "I
don't think it could really do much to us," I said. "It didn't
look very dangerous." "You
can't always tell by looking," Shiara said darkly. "And
if that marmalade mess wants the stupid key badly enough,
it'll think of something." "The
quozzel looked more like jelly to me," I said. "And I still
don't really think it's going to come back. Not while the
dragon is around." "Well,
you'd better carry the key in your hand," Shiara said.
"I think it's important, and it might fall out of your pocket
or something." "All
right, but you'll have to keep the lamp," I said, digging
the key out of my pocket again. I still wasn't sure that
the key didn't belong to the quozzel, but the more I thought
about it, the less likely it seemed. And if it did have 152
Patricia C. Wrede something
to do with the sword, I wanted to hang on to it. "I
don't think I can manage the sword and the things Morwen gave us
and the lamp, and still hold the key." "You
wouldn't have to until we started walking again, anyway,"
Shiara said, but she kept the lamp. Just
then the dragon looked up. "I'm done," it said. "Where
do we go now?" WE
CLEANED UP the remains of the dragon's meal and started
walking again. I don't know how far we went or how
long it took us. The tunnel forked and we went right, then it
forked again and we went left. We went through a large
cave with walls like black mirrors, and a damp one that
dripped water on our heads, and an unpleasant slimy one
with grey moss on the walls. I was very glad that Telemain
had told us which way to go; we would have gotten
very lost very quickly without his directions. A few
times I thought I heard squishing noises behind us, but
I wasn't sure enough to say anything. I was also worrying
a lot more about remembering all the things Te- lemain
had told us than I was about the quozzel. I was beginning
to think we had taken a wrong turn somewhere, when we
came to another cavern. This
one was long and narrow, and the floor was about a
hundred feet straight down. It was full of orange light and very
hot. A narrow path ran along one wall from where we stood
to a dark opening on the other side. "Are
you sure we're going the right way?" Shiara said, eyeing
the path dubiously. "I
am now," I said. "This was the last cave Telemain 153 154 Patricia C. Wrede mentioned;
once we're on the other side, it shouldn't take long to
get to the castle." "We
have to get to the other side first," Shiara pointed out.
"That doesn't look very safe." "The
Caves of Chance aren't supposed to be safe," I said.
"I'm surprised we haven't run into something a lot more
dangerous than the quozzel." "I
suppose— Nightwitch!" Shiara shouted a minute too late;
the kitten was already halfway across the narrow path. Shiara
sighed. "Well, now we have to go across." Shiara
insisted on going first, because Nightwitch was her
cat. I didn't argue much. I went next, and the dragon came
last. I had to hug the wall to keep from losing my balance
and falling, which was hard to do with the key in one
hand, Morwen's bundle in the other, and the sword under
one arm. The dragon didn't seem to have as much difficulty
as I did, even though it was a little too large for the
ledge. Itjust dug its claws into the rock and kept coming. When we
finally made it to the other side, Shiara and I were
covered with black rock dust. We took turns brushing each
other off, while Nightwitch sat far enough back to avoid
getting any of it on her and the dragon looked superior. Evidently
rock dust doesn't cling to dragon scales, which was
very nice for the dragon but didn't do much to improve Shiara's
temper. "How
much farther is it?" Shiara asked as we started off. "I
don't know," I said. "But it shouldn't take much longer." "I
hope not," said the dragon. "I don't like this tunnel." "Why
not?" Shiara asked. "It
isn't finished," the dragon said. I
looked around. The tunnel was a lot rougher than the others
we'd come through, and there were rocks sticking out at
odd angles from the walls and the roof and even the floor.
Every now and then it narrowed into a crooked little passage;
if the dragon had been much bigger, it wouldn't have
been able to fit through some of them. We still saw side
passages once in a while, but they seemed smaller and farther
apart than they had in the first part of the tunnel. "It
does look sort of incomplete," I said. "I think—" 156
Patricia C. Wrede "Daystar,
look out!" Shiara yelled. A large rock fell out of the
ceiling, just missing my head, along with a shower of
pebbles that didn't. I heard a creaking noise and felt more pebbles. "Get
back!" I shouted. I dropped Morwen's bundle and shoved
Shiara. "Run!" Shiara
stumbled backward. Nightwitch yowled and made a
tremendous leap right onto the dragon's nose. The dragon jerked
in surprise, and Nightwitch made another jump and vanished
into the darkness behind it. I heard more rum- blings,
and I shoved Shiara again, just as the roof came down on
top of us. When I
woke up, it was very dark. Somehow I'd man- aged to
keep hold of the sword and the key. I could feel them,
one halfway under me and the other digging into my palm. I
could feel other things, too; I ached all over. I tried to
move, but my legs were pinned under something heavy, and I
couldn't drag them free. I pushed myself up a little and
tried to stare into the darkness. "Shiara? Nightwitch? Dragon?" No one
answered. They couldn't all have gotten caught in the
cave-in; I'd been the farthest forward, and I was just at
the edge of it. I started wishing I had the lamp, and
then I remembered that the key glowed when I touched the
Sword of the Sleeping King. I felt around for the hilt, and
something very moist and heavy hit me in the middle of my
back. I
slammed back into the floor and almost lost conscious- ness
again. I heard something above me bubbling, "The k-k-key!
Let go, drop it, gug-give it to me!" Instinctively, I
grabbed for the sword. My
fingers touched the hilt, and the key started to glow. It
wasn't quite as good as the lamp, but at least I could see. I heard
a muffled shriek, and the weight left my back very suddenly.
An instant later, I saw the quozzel bending over my
hand, and I tightened my grip on the key. The
quozzel bounced angrily. "You're still alive! I don't want
you alive. I want that k-k-key. That's why I fixed the rocks." Talking
to Dragons 157 I shook
my head to clear it. "You made the tunnel cave in?
Just to get a key?" "Ofc-c-c-course!"
the quozzel spluttered. "I'm supposed to take
c-care of it. I'll get it, too. All I need is m-m-more rocks." The
quozzel wobbled forward, toward the caved-in part of the
tunnel. I twisted, trying to see what it was doing, and a
medium-sized rock came crashing down beside me. The
quozzel made an angry whistling noise. "H-hold still!" "So
you can drop rocks on me?" I said. Out of the comer of my
eye, I saw a long pile of something that seemed to end in
a tangle of red hair. Shiara hadn't been buried under the
rocks, then. Unfortunately, she didn't look like she would
be able to help me with the quozzel any time soon, and I
still didn't know where Nightwitch or the dragon were. I
shifted the key into my left hand and started trying to get the
Sword of the Sleeping King out of its sheath with my right,
in case the quozzel decided to try coming closer. There
was a sizzling noise from somewhere behind me, and a
dozen or so rocks of assorted sizes came rolling down on top
of me. I yelled; some of them hit places that had already
been battered by the cave-in. The quozzel bubbled happily,
and a few more rocks went by on one side. I shoved myself
up on my hands as far as I could and yanked the sword
out of the sheath and out from under me at the same time. I
twisted around just as two more large rocks came rolling
down at me. I swung
at the rocks with the flat of the sword, trying to
deflect them a little. There was a bright flash as the sword hit
them, and the rocks went flying toward the far wall of the
tunnel. I heard a low humming sound that changed suddenly
into a rumble, and the light in the cave went out. For
some reason, I thought of the clearing where I'd said the
spell at the Sword of the Sleeping King, when everything had
gone dark and the voice had called me the Bearer of the
Sword. This
time I didn't hear any voice, but the rumbling got louder
and louder, and suddenly I realized that my legs were free. I
curled them up under me, so I wouldn't be trapped again
if the quozzel managed to start another cave-in or 158
Patricia C. Wrede something.
The rumbling started to die down, and I heard faint
shouts mixed in with it, and the bubbling noise that the
quozzel made, and someone groaning. Then the rum- bling
stopped, and I could see again. I stood
up and looked around. I could still hear the shout- ing; it
sounded faint and far away, and after a moment it faded
completely. Shiara was the person who had groaned. She was
starting to move a little, and suddenly I felt a lot better
about things generally. Then I heard squishing noises from in
back of me, and I whirled. Behind
me, the tunnel was completely blocked by a sloping
pile of rocks and dirt. At the base of the pile, where I
had been trapped, was an empty space that looked as if
something had sliced cleanly through the rocks and lifted
them out of the way. Midway up the slope was the quozzel.
It was wobbling hastily toward the tunnel floor. I
pointed the Sword of the Sleeping King at it, and it stopped
abruptly. "Just
a minute, you!" I said. "You have some questions to
answer." "I
d-d-d-didn't know," said the quozzel. "I still don't. K-k-keep
the k-key. Nice to m-m-meet you. Glug-gug-good- bye." "Oh,
no you don't," I said. I stepped in front of it, so that if
it wobbled forward any more, it would get stuck on my
sword. "I'm
gug-gug-gug-going," said the quozzel. It seemed to be
stammering a lot more than it had before. I found myself
hoping it was even more nervous than it looked. "You
aren't going anywhere until you explain why you want
this key so badly," I said. "And maybe not then. I don't
think I ought to leave something as sneaky and treach- erous
as you running around loose." I tried to sound intim- idating,
even though I had no idea what I was going to do with
the quozzel. I didn't think I could just kill it, and I certainly
didn't want to bring it along with me. I wasn't about
to tell the quozzel any of that, though; after what it had
tried to do, it wouldn't hurt it to worry a little. "Daystar?"
Shiara's voice distracted me from the quoz- Talking
to Dragons 159 zei,
which was bubbling and popping worriedly to itself. "Daystar,
what happened?" "The
quozzel made the tunnel cave in," I said. "It was trying
to kill me so it could get the key. Are you all right?" "Of
course I'm— Yow!" said Shiara. I looked quickly around
and saw her sitting up very carefully. She looked a little
pale. "I think I broke my arm," she said. "Can
I do anything to help?" I said. "You
can keep that stupid quozzel away from me!" Shiara said.
"I'm all right as long as I don't move much." I didn't
believe her, but I couldn't have done much to help
anyway. I didn't know anything about setting broken arms,
except that you can make things a lot worse if you don't
know what you're doing. I decided not to say anything; if
Shiara wanted me to keep watching the quozzel instead of
trying to help her, she would probably get mad if I didn't. Besides,
I didn't want the quozzel to get away and try dropping
the roof on us again. "Where's
Nightwitch?" Shiara said after a while. "And the
dragon?" "I
don't know," I told her. "I haven't seen them since the
tunnel fell in." "You
miserable little blob!" I
looked around in surprise and was very relieved to see Shiara
glaring at the quozzel and not at me. "If
anything's happened to Nightwitch because of your stupid
cave-in, I'll, I'll melt you into a puddle!" she went on. "You'd
better not try," the quozzel said, starting to bounce.
"The w-w-wizard will gug-get you if you do!" "What
wizard?" I said. The
quozzel bubbled unhappily. "I can't tell you." "Oh,
no?" Shiara said. She stood up slowly and came over
beside me, holding her right arm carefully in her left one.
"I guess I'd better just melt you, then, and save some time." "N-n-no/"
said the quozzel. Little ripples ran over it, and it
seemed to shrink a little. 160
Patricia C. Wrede "Then
you'd better tell us what wizard you're talking about,"
I said. "The
one who gug-gave me the key," the quozzel said unwillingly.
"He told me to take care of it until he came back
for it." "How
long ago was that?" I asked, ignoring Shiara, who was
rubbing her bruises and muttering to herself. "A
long time," the quozzel said. "He never came back, so it's
still m-m-my responsib-b-bility." "Not
if I melt you, it isn't," Shiara said, and the quozzel subsided
very suddenly. "What
is it the key to?" I said. "And why did the wizard leave
it here?" "D-d-don't
know," the quozzel said sullenly. "He said people
would come look for it and try to take it. That's why he
wanted m-m-me to look after it. You aren't supposed to take
it. No one's supposed to take it b-b-but the wizard!" "What
did this wizard look like?" I said. I had an un- pleasant
feeling that I knew already, and I was therefore extremely
relieved when the quozzel described someone who
didn't sound at all like Antorell. Shiara didn't recognize the
description, either, but she wasn't as relieved as I was. "How
do we know this stupid thing isn't lying?" she said.
"I think we should—What's that?" I could
hear something from far down the tunnel, but it echoed
too much for me to be able to tell what it was. It seemed
to be getting louder. "I think something's coming," I said
to Shiara, then, "You stay where you are!" to the quozzel,
who had been trying to wobble a little closer to the
bottom of the rock pile. The
quozzel froze again, and Shiara gave me a disgusted look.
"I know something's coming, but what is it?" I
didn't answer. The noise came closer, and I saw a flickering
light partway down the tunnel. I shifted position so I
could watch the quozzel and still see some of the rest of the
tunnel. The light got brighter, and a moment later about a
dozen people came through one of the side passages. They
were all short and sort of squashed-looking, bigger than
the elves we'd met, but considerably shorter than a Talking
to Dragons 161 normal
person. Most of them were carrying picks or shovels or
long, pointed iron poles; a couple of them had torches. They
seemed to be following something, but they were too far
away and the light was too bad for me to be sure. "Dwarves!"
I said. They must have heard the echo, be- cause
two of them looked up and saw us. One of them shouted
something, but I couldn't make out the words. Terrific!"
Shiara muttered as they started in our direc- tion.
"What'd you have to do that for?" "They'd
have seen us anyway," I said. "I mean, we'd be sort
of difficult to miss, with the key lighting up the tunnel
like this." "I
suppose so," Shiara said. She squinted into the dark part of
the tunnel between us and the dwarves. "What's that in
front of them?" I
didn't have to answer, because a second later Nightwitoh came
bounding out of the darkness with her tail held very high.
She looked extremely proud of herself. She went straight
to Shiara and started rubbing against her legs and purring. "I'm
glad to see you, too," Shiara said. She started to bend
over and winced. "Sorry, kitten; I'm afraid you'll have to wait
to get petted until somebody does something about this
stupid arm." Nightwitch
stopped rubbing and looked up. "Mmrew?" "Well,
I said I was sorry," Shiara said. "I didn't ask to break
it." The
dwarves had reached the edge of the key's glow, and the
whole tunnel was lit up by their torches. It made things
a lot more cheerful. I could see the dragon in back of the
dwarves, looking almost as smug as Nightwitch had. "Look!"
it said when it got close enough to talk without shouting.
"I found a whole lot of dwarves!" "I
see that," I said. I bowed to the dwarves as well as I could
while trying to watch the quozzel at the same time. "My
name is Daystar, and that's Shiara. We're very pleased to meet
you." "They're
going to dig through the part of the tunnel that came
down," the dragon said. 162 Patricia C. Wrede "Hold
on just a minute!" one of the dwarves said. "I didn't
say I'd help. Not exactly. I said I'd look at this cave- in of
yours." "Me
too," said another. "Proper mess it looks, too." "Not
natural," said a female dwarf. She looked at Shiara and me
suspiciously. "How
do you know?" Shiara said belligerently. "We
made this tunnel," still another dwarf said. "And dwarf-made
tunnels don't just fall in." "Not
ever," agreed the first one. "Of
course not," I said. "The quozzel made the tunnel cave
in; it was trying to stop us from getting out of the Caves
of Chance." "The
quozzel?" the dragon said, looking interested. "That dessert
thing is back again?" "You
can't eat it until we find out if it knows anything else,"
I said. "Besides, you had plenty of lunch." The
dragon sighed. "I suppose so. All right, I'll wait." I
looked at the dwarves. "We'd be very much obliged to you
if you would help us get through this, or show us a way
around it, or something," I said. "Now,
why should we do that?" one of them said. "I
don't see any reason," said another. "Lot
of work for nothing," added a third. "And
I don't like dragons!" said a voice from the middle of the
group. The dragon glared, but it couldn't pick out the
dwarf who'd spoken. "Could
you at least set Shiara's arm?" I said. One of
the female dwarves started to reply, but she was cut off
by a yell from Shiara. "Daystar! Behind you!" I
raised the sword and spun around just as the quozzel bunched
itself together and jumped at me. It came flying through
the air, and I ducked. Something dark and purple shot
out of it toward me, and I slashed at it with the sword. I got
most of the purple stuff and part of the quozzel as well. I
heard it shriek, and then it had landed and launched itself
again, straight for the wall of the tunnel. "I'll
kill all of you!" it whistled angrily. "Key stealers! Cannibals!
I'll kill you d-d-dead!" Talking
to Dragons 163 I
lunged for it, but I was too late. The quozzel hit the tunnel
wall, and instead of bouncing, it vanished into the rock
like water being absorbed by a sponge, only faster. An
instant later a shower of rocks fell out of the roof of the tunnel,
and I heard the walls creaking ominously. "Run!"
I yelled. I started to follow my own advice and saw a
large rock shifting in the wall of the tunnel just above Shiara's
head. I shouted again and swung the sword at it, hoping
it would be deflected like the other rocks the quozzel had
tried to drop on me. The
flat of the sword hit the rock, and everything seemed to slow
down suddenly. There was a lot of creaking, and the top
of the tunnel started to sag, as if it were trying to fall in
again but couldn't quite manage it. The sword got very
heavy for a minute or two, and then there was an angry-sounding
rumble and the whole tunnel shook. The rock
that had been heading for Shiara went bouncing off the
opposite wall of the tunnel, and all the creaking and rumbling
stopped very abruptly. I
didn't move for several seconds at least. I kept thinking that
something else was going to happen; the quozzel wasn't going
to give up this easily. Then I saw a thin trickle of dark
purple stuff dripping down the wall of the tunnel, where the
quozzel had disappeared. I watched it for a minute or two and
decided that we probably didn't have to worry about the
quozzel anymore. I looked at Shiara. "Are
you all right?" "That's
a stupid question," Shiara said. "My arm is bro- ken!" "I
mean, you didn't get any more hurt than you were already,
did you?" "No,"
she said. She looked at me for a minute. "Thanks." I was
so surprised that I couldn't think of anything to say for
at least a minute. "Um, you're welcome," I said finally.
I realized suddenly that my sword still had some wet
purple stuff on it from hitting the quozzel, and I started digging
in my pocket for my handkerchief so I could wipe off the
sword. I
couldn't find it. I sighed; it had probably fallen out of 164
Patricia C. Wrede my
pocket somewhere on the trip through the caves. I didn't really
mind losing it, except that now I didn't have anything to get
the purple goo off my sword with. I turned to the dwarves.
"Excuse me, but do any of you—" I
stopped. The dwarves were standing in a tight group, and all
of them were staring at the sword. "Now, why didn't you
think to mention you had that?" one of them said. SHIARA
AND I looked at the dwarves. "He's been holding it
since before you got here!" Shiara said finally. "Why should
he have mentioned it?" "It
would have saved a lot of bother," one of the female dwarves
said in an aggrieved tone. "Time,
too," said another. "Inconsiderate,
I call it." "Well,
not inconsiderate, exactly. A little thoughtless, maybe." "After
all, we aren't elves." "Of
course you're not elves," the dragon said. "Anyone can see
that! What difference does it make?" "Elves
can recognize that sword just by looking at it," one of
the dwarves said in a resentful tone. "So
can some other people," said another darkly. "But
not dwarves." "Unless
we get a good look at it, of course. Which we couldn't,
because of the light, not to mention the fact that you
were standing there talking and distracting our atten- tion." "Which
is why you should have mentioned it," a dwarf in the
back finished triumphantly. 165 Patricia
C. Wrede 166 "I
didn't mention it because there seem to be a lot of people
who want it," I said. "One of them is a wizard." About
six of the dwarves started talking so fast it was hard to
tell whether they were all speaking at the same time or
whether they went one after another. "Of
course there are a lot of people who want it!" "Particularly
wizards." "It's
the King's sword, isn't it?" "Maybe
it isn't; he hasn't said." "It
has to be the King's sword, silly. There aren't any other
swords that the earth obeys." "What
about Delvan's blade?" "That's
not a sword, it's an ax," "And
the earth doesn't obey it, it just shakes a lot." "So
this has to be the King's sword." "Wait
a minute!" I said. "What do you know about my sword?" "It's
the King's sword," one of the dwarves said indig- nantly.
Another dwarf shushed him, and a dwarf near the front
of the crowd stepped forward and bowed. "We
follow the sword," she said, as if it explained every- thing. The
other dwarves all smiled and nodded. I sighed and gave
up. Either none of them really knew anything else, or they
weren't going to tell me, and I didn't think it mattered much
which it was. "If you aren't going to tell me about my
sword, could one of you do something about Shiara's arm?"
I said. "And after that, we'll be going." "Going
where?" the dragon said. Some of the dwarves jumped;
evidently they'd forgotten the dragon was behind them. I
was surprised; if a dragon were standing behind me, I
certainly wouldn't forget it was there. "We
have to find another way out of the Caves of Chance," I told
the dragon. "I don't really think we can dig through this
one." "That
will not be necessary," said the dwarf closest to me.
"Had we known you were the Bearer of the Sword, we would
not have objected to your request." "Not
at all," said the dwarf next to him. She turned and Talking
to Dragons 167 waved
at the others. "Lord Daystar requires this tunnel cleared.
Begin!" I stood
and stared while the dwarves all grabbed then- picks
and shovels and things and started toward the rocks that
were blocking the tunnel. In a few minutes they were all
digging furiously except for one, who came over to Shiara
and bowed. "I am Darlbrin," he announced. "That's
nice," Shiara said sarcastically. I sighed, but I didn't
say anything. You can't really expect a fire-witch with a
broken arm to be particularly polite. Darlbrin
didn't seem to notice. "I have some skill at mending
things," he said, and bowed again. "If you will permit
it, I would like to look at your arm." Darlbrin looked at
Shiara a shade anxiously and added, "To see if I can mend
it." Shiara
rolled her eyes, but she walked over to the edge of the
tunnel and sat down so the dwarf could see better. Nightwitch
followed, alternately purring reassuringly and meowing
anxiously. I watched for a minute or two, then turned
away. I couldn't do anything to help, and I wanted to
think. I
didn't get the chance. As soon as I turned, the dragon stuck
its head over a couple of dwarves and said, "I didn't know
you were a lord. Why didn't you tell me?" "Because
I'm not a lord!" I said. I think I sounded a little
desperate; I know I felt desperate. I didn't have the slightest
idea what was going on, except that it had some- thing
to do with my sword. Everything seemed to have something
to do with my sword; I was getting tired of it and
more than a little worried. "Well,
if you aren't a lord, why did they call you one?" "Because
he has the King's sword," said a dwarf, who was
walking under the dragon's chin with a boulder more than
half as big as he was. The dragon pulled its head back far
enough to eye the dwarf, who ignored it and kept walk- ing. "Oh,"
said the dragon at last. The dwarf continued to ignore
it. "I
really wish you'd explain a little more," I said to the 168
Patricia C. Wrede dwarf,
and then I thought of something. "Why did you call me the
Bearer of the Sword?" "I
didn't call you anything," the dwarf said without stop- ping.
"That was Cottlestone." He set the boulder down and headed
back toward the pile of rocks, which was beginning to look
smaller already. "Excuse
me," I said loudly in the gsneral direction of the
crowd of dwarves, "but would one of you tell me which one of
you is Cottlestone? I'd like to talk to him, please." "Cottlestone!"
shouted half a dozen voices. For a minute I
thought the roof was going to cave in again, but all that actually
happened was that one of the dwarves stepped out of the
crowd and bowed to me. He looked as if he really meant
it, not as if he were just being polite. "Don't do that," I said. "As
you wish," the dwarf said, bowing again. "What do you
want to know from me?" "Why
did you call me the Bearer of the Sword?" Cottlestone
looked surprised. "It's obvious. When the Bearer
of the Sword holds the King's sword, the earth obeys it. So
when you held up the sword and the earth obeyed, we knew
you were the Bearer of the Sword." "Oh."
I thought for a moment. "Have you ever heard of the
Holder of the Sword? Or the Wielder of the Sword?" "Who?" "Never
mind," I said. "How do you get to be the Bearer of the
Sword?" "No
one knows," Cottlestone said, looking at me curi- ously. "Oh,"
I said again. I was trying to think of something else to
ask, when there was a shout from the top of the caved-in
section of the tunnel. Cottlestone bowed again. "If you
will excuse me, I think they've gotten through to the other
side. I ought to go help. It's my job." "All
right," I said uncomfortably. Cottlestone turned away,
and I watched him melt into the crowd of dwarves. I
wasn't sure what I'd found out, except that I didn't like people
bowing to me. I found myself hoping that the rest of the
dwarves wouldn't imitate Cottlestone. "Did
he say they're almost finished?" said Shiara's voice Talking
to Dragons 169 behind
me. "Wonderful! I can't wait to get out of here." I
turned. Shiara was standing, holding Nightwitch in the crook
of her left arm. Her right arm was covered from her fingers
almost to her shoulder in something smooth and grey and
shiny. She looked a little white, but it might have been the
torchlight. "Well, what are you staring at?" she de- manded. "I
wasn't staring," I said. "I was just checking to see if you
were all right." Darlbrin
stepped up beside Shiara and bowed. "Not quite all
right," he said. "But not bad; not bad at all." "I
wouldn't call a broken arm 'not bad,'" Shiara said sourly. "Oh,
I didn't mean that!" Darlbrin said hastily. "I was referring
to the mending." "I'm
sure you did a very good job," I said. "And I really appreciate
it." "I
suppose I do, too," Shiara said. "Thanks." "It
isn't really mending yet, you know," Darlbrin said with a
touch of anxiety. "People aren't as easy to fix as ax handles.
It'll be a month or so before you can take the sheath
off." "Yes,
I know," Shiara said impatiently. "I've had a bro- ken arm
before." "Then
you're very welcome!" the dwarf said, beaming. "Happy
to be of service!" Shiara
snorted, but quietly. Darlbrin didn't notice; he bowed
to each of us and went off to help the rest of the dwarves
finish clearing the tunnel. I looked at Shiara. "I didn't
know you'd broken your arm before." "That's
because I didn't tell you about it," Shiara said. She
looked at me for a minute, then sighed. "I was stealing apples
from the Prince's gardens and fell out of the tree, all
right?" "Oh.
What Prince, and why were you taking his apples?" "The
Prince of the Ruby Throne," Shiara said after a minute.
"He had a house and garden just outside town, and he
never picked any of the apples. He just left them to rot. And I
was hungry. So I sneaked over the wall and climbed the
tree, but there was a big snake in it, with wings. So I 170 Patricia C. Wrede fell
out of the tree and broke my arm, and the snake went away." "Shiara,"
I said, and stopped. She obviously had no idea what
she had almost done. I sighed and changed what I was going to
say. "Shiara, the Prince of the Ruby Throne raises magic
apples. All kinds of people have been trying to steal them
for years and years, but he's a very powerful magician, and
there are hundreds of spells protecting his gardens." "That
must be why he was so upset," Shiara said in a tone of
sudden enlightenment. "I'm pretty sure he was the one who
told the Society of Wizards about me. I thought it was
a lot of fuss to make about a few apples, but now I understand." I
looked at her for a minute. "I don't want to be nosy or anything,
but, if you wouldn't mind telling me, I'd really appreciate
knowing if there's anyone else who's mad at you." "I
don't think so," Shiara said, frowning. "I'm
glad," I said. "I don't think I want any more power- ful
magical people chasing us. It wouldn't be so bad if you could
use your fire-magic." "She
can!" said the dragon, and Shiara and I both jumped and
turned around. "She burned the dragonsbane, and she can
make her hair bum." "When
did you see Shiara's hair burning?" I asked. The only
time I'd ever seen Shiara's hair on fire was when she'd gotten
mad at me right after we'd met, and the dragon hadn't been
there then. "Just
a few minutes ago," the dragon said. "You were fighting
that dessert thing, so you might not have noticed." I
looked at Shiara, and she blushed. "I was trying to do something
to the quozzel," she said. "I thought it would work,
because it worked with the dragonsbane." "It
worked on the dragonsbane," I repeated slowly. "And remember
that first wizard, the one who made a water mon- ster
out of the stream? You did something to it while I was fighting
it! That's at least twice that you've made your fire- magic
do something you wanted it to. Can you think of any others?
Maybe we can figure out how it works." "She
used it at that invisible castle," the dragon offered. Talking
to Dragons 171 "The
one where that other fire-witch lived." "I
did not!" Shiara said. "I didn't have time. We ran into the
castle, and she came out, and bang! I was a statue." The
dragon sat back, looking smug. "You said you wanted to know
what the castle was, and then you did. That's fire- magic,
isn't it?" "I
suppose it is," Shiara said slowly. "Then
that's three," I said. "Can you think of any more? Before
you came to the Enchanted Forest, for instance?" Shiara
frowned and was silent for a while. "No," she said
finally in a very positive tone. "Those are the only times
I've ever gotten my magic to do what I wanted it to, ever." "So
it's only been happening since you came to the Enchanted
Forest," I said. "And
met you and got bitten by that stupid sword," Shiara added,
and stopped. We looked at each other for a minute. "Not
again!" I said. I thought for a minute. "It can't be the
sword alone, or you would have been able to do some- thing
to the quozzel. There has to be something else, too." "Like
what?" "I
don't know. Did you do anything differently when it worked?" "No." "Well,
then did you do anything differently right before it
worked?" I said. "There has to be some—" I stopped, remembering.
"Oh," I said. "What
is it?" "I
think I know what makes your magic work," I said. I
didn't think Shiara was going to like it much, but I couldn't just
keep quiet about it, either. "I think you have to be polite to
people." "What?
That's stupid!" "It
makes sense," I said. "You apologized to me after we got
out of the hedge, and then when the first wizard came
along your magic worked against the snake thing. You were
nice to the Princess because you felt sorry for her, and right
after that you knew about the invisible castle. And you said
thanks to Suz and apologized to Telemain, and then you
made the dragonsbane bum." 172
Patricia C. Wrede "But
that other fire-witch wasn't polite!" Shiara objected. "I
didn't say all fire-witches have to be polite to people before
their magic will work," I said. "I only said your magic
works that way. And I'm not positive. I mean, it could
be something else." "Well,
I'm not going to go around being nice to people just so
I can do magic!" "I
don't think it would work, anyway," I said unhappily. "I
mean, I don't think you can just say things, I think you have to
really mean them. You meant it when you apolo- gized
to me, and when you were nice to the Princess, and when
you were talking to Telemain." "Oh,
great," Shiara said disgustedly. "I bet this is all that
stupid sword's fault. It sounds like something it'd do." She
glared at me for an instant, then turned her back. I sighed. "Excuse
me. Lord Daystar," said a voice by my elbow. I
looked down; the dwarf bowed as soon as I turned. "Don't
do that," I said. "Certainly,
my lord," she said, and started to bow again, then
stopped and looked confused. "The tunnel is clear; you may
continue your journey whenever you wish." I
looked around. She was right; the pile of rocks that had been
blocking the tunnel was nearly gone. A few boulders were
left along the sides, but there was plenty of room to walk
through, even for the dragon. "Thank you very much," I said.
"But I really ought to tell you: I'm not a lord." The
dwarf smiled tolerantly. "Of course not, my lord. Is
there anything else we can do for you?" "I'd
appreciate it if we could borrow one of your torches," I said.
"Our lamp got lost in the cave-in." "We
would be pleased to offer you a torch," the dwarf said.
"You can leave it by the exit, and someone will get it
later. It isn't far." We
gathered up what was left of our things, and the dwarves
did some more bowing. One of them handed Shiara a
torch. She grumbled a little because she had to put Night- witch
down in order to take it, but she was the only one of us who
could carry it. I had the sword in one hand and the key in
the other, and the dragon couldn't hold a torch. Talking
to Dragons 173 Fortunately,
Nightwitch didn't seem to mind walking. We thanked
the dwarves and said good-bye, and they all bowed again,
and finally we started off. The
tunnel started slanting upward almost as soon as we were
past the cave-in, and shortly after that we stopped seeing
side passages. Eventually we came to a flight of stairs
that curled around and around until all of us were dizzy.
Just when I didn't think I could climb anymore, the stairs
ended against a hard, rocky surface, like a trapdoor made of
stone. I
shoved against it, but it didn't budge. "It's too heavy." "Really?"
said the dragon. "It doesn't look so bad." I
looked down at the dragon, who was last on the stairs because
neither Shiara nor I had wanted to be behind it if it
slipped. "It probably isn't too heavy for you. Why don't you try
it?" The
dragon agreed, and Shiara and I squashed ourselves against
the side of the stairs so it could climb past us. There were a
couple of minutes of grunts, and the dragon's tail whipped
back and forth, which made Shiara and me retreat farther
down the stairs. Finally there was a loud noise like extremely
rusty hinges, and the dragon started moving up- ward. A
moment later, it stopped. "Uh-oh," it said. "What's
the matter?" Shiara called. The
dragon didn't answer, but it moved out of the way so we
could climb up. Shiara and I got to the head of the stairs
at almost the same time and looked around. We were
standing at the top of a small rise. The sun was starting
to set, but there was still enough light to see the castle
clearly. It was quite close, not more than a few min- utes'
walk from where I was, and it fascinated me. At first, I
thought it was made of something shimmery, like mother- of-pearl;
then I realized that it wasn't the castle that was shimmering,
it was something around the castle, like a giant soap
bubble. I was still trying to figure out what it was when
Shiara poked me, and I looked down. There were approximately
two hundred dragons sitting on the ground around
the little hill we were standing on. Watching us. I
SWALLOWED HARD, and for a moment I wished I were wearing
my sword instead of carrying it under my arm. Every
dragon in the Enchanted Forest had to be there, and quite a
few from outside it. They were spread out in all directions,
so that I couldn't even see the ground, and I realized
suddenly that there was a lot of open space around the
castle. The forest circled the castle at a distance, and there
seemed to be something wrong about it. I couldn't tell what,
though, and besides, I had other things to worry about right
then. Two hundred dragons, for instance. I
stepped forward and bowed carefully in all directions. One of
the first things Mother taught me about dragons was that
dragons expect a new arrival to make the first move. They
always allow you one chance to convince them that you're
too polite or too important to eat. I was going to have to
rely on being polite; I didn't think I could convince two
hundred dragons that I was particularly important, es- pecially
since I didn't believe it myself. I took a deep breath. "Sirs
and madams, I apologize most profoundly for in- truding
upon you in this fashion, and I hope we have not inconvenienced
you in any way," I said, trying to talk loudly enough
for all the dragons to hear me and still sound polite. 175 Talking
to Dragons 177 "Nevertheless,
I offer you greetings in the name of myself and my
companions, and I wish you good fortune in what- ever
endeavors are most important to you." The
dragons stirred briefly, then settled back again. After a
moment, an old, grey-green male slid forward. "We greet ( you, and wish you well," he said.
"May we know your names?" I bowed
again, the half bow of respect for a dragon of great
age and uncertain status. "I thank you for your greet- ; ing," I said. "I am called
Daystar, and my companions are Shiara
and Nightwitch." I didn't ask for the dragons' names. It's
perfectly acceptable not to, and I didn't feel like standing there
through two hundred introductions, especially since the
dragons would expect me to remember them all. "Well
met, Daystar," the old dragon rumbled. "We've been
expecting you since early this afternoon; I'm glad you finally
got here." "I'm
sorry if I kept you waiting," I said. "We had prob- lems
with some wizards, and a cave-in, and a quozzel, and I
didn't really know you were waiting. I hope it hasn't been long." "Of
course not; Telemain only told Kazul yesterday that you
were coming. Silly way to do things, making everyone gather
in such a hurry." He looked at me for a minute, then I nodded approvingly. "Well, come
along; no sense wasting | any more time. You might as well bring
the girl and the ' cat, too; this way." Our
dragon lifted its head. "What about me?" it de- manded.
It looked much smaller next to the full-grown dragons
all around us, and it sounded considerably younger as
well. "You
had better keep quiet," the older dragon said in- dulgently.
"You're in quite a bit of trouble already; I wouldn't make it
worse if I were you." "I
don't have to keep quiet!" our dragon said. "I found a
Princess, even if I did decide not to keep her, and I fought a
knight and bit a wizard. I can talk if I want to!" The
crowd of dragons shifted again, very slightly. Shiara , shivered and held Nightwitch closer; I
thought about wiping , my hands on my tunic, then decided it
would be too no- 178
Patricia C. Wrede ticeable.
The older dragon ignored all of us; he just stood and
stared at our dragon, which finally shook its head and settled
back, watching the crowd below us with a sulky expression.
The old dragon smiled slightly and turned his head.
"What do you think?" he asked the crowd of dragons behind
him. All of
the dragons roared at once. I couldn't tell what they
were saying, or even if they were saying anything, but the old
dragon nodded again and looked at the little dragon. "You'll
get your wish, then. Well, don't just stand there." I
nodded and stepped forward as the old dragon turned. Shiara
followed behind me, very closely, and our dragon came
behind her. "Where are we going?" Shiara whispered to me. The old
dragon looked back over his shoulder, and his eyes
glinted with amusement. "You're going to see Kazul." "Oh,"
Shiara said. We stepped down from the little hill, and
there was a loud clattering and rumbling as the dragons moved
out of our way. I stopped short in shock. The
ground around the hill was dry and brown and bare. It
looked even worse than it would have normally, because I'd
spent several days looking at the rich moss in the Enchanted
Forest. Then I remembered that we were still in the
Enchanted Forest, and I started being worried as well as
shocked. I knew from experience how fast the moss grew, and how
hard it was to clear off even a small strip of ground; I
didn't like to think about what had stripped the moss from the
area around the castle. Shiara
poked me, and I started moving forward again. Fortunately,
the dragon ahead of us hadn't noticed my pause. A few
of the ones at the edge of the crowd had, but they seemed
more amused than anything. I decided not to worry about
it and walked a little faster, trying to ignore the large shapes
on either side of me. With two hundred dragons around,
I could waste a lot of time worrying if I wasn't careful. The old
dragon led us toward the castle. As we got closer, I could
see that there were two shimmerings in the air around the
castle, one a few feet inside the other. The outer one looked
like a shifting, green-and-silver veil, very thin and Talking
to Dragons 179 transparent.
The inner one seemed to be a pale golden glow, but I
couldn't be sure because of the way the one on the outside
shifted around; it seemed to interfere with my seeing the
inner one clearly. After a few minutes, I gave up on trying
to look at the shimmerings and tried looking through them
instead. The
shimmerings didn't seem to get in the way at all; I discovered
that I could see quite a bit of the castle. Part of the
reason was that there was no wall around it, only the shimmerings
and a water-filled moat just inside them. The castle
itself was a wonderful, rambling-looking place, with about
six towers of various sizes and large square windows and
four balconies. I could see several stairways running up to
oddly shaped doors or around the outside of the towers, and a
lot of walls that seemed to be there just to confuse people.
I was so busy studying the castle and the shim- merings
that I almost didn't notice when the dragon stopped; I was
lucky not to step on his tail. We were
about halfway around the castle, and there seemed
to be fewer dragons around. I was trying to guess which
one was Kazul, when the old dragon who had been leading
us stepped a little to one side and bobbed his head respectfully.
"King Kazul, these are the travelers who wish to see
you. That one's Daystar, the other one's Shiara, and the cat
is Nightwitch." Right
away I bowed very deeply, and so did Shiara. I was
relieved; I hadn't been completely sure she would do any of
the things I'd suggested. As I straightened up, I got my
first look at Kazul. Even
lying on the ground, she looked large for a dragon. Her
scales were just beginning to turn grey around the edges, which
surprised me; I'd expected someone older. Her eyes were
hypnotic, green-gold ovals. She was the most dan- gerous-looking
dragon I'd ever seen. Kazul smiled broadly. Dragons
have a lot of teeth. "So,"
she said, "you are the people Telemain sent through the
Caves of Chance, and you have the Sword of the Sleep- ing
King." "Yes,
Your Majesty," I said. I took the sword out from under
my arm and held it up so she could see it better. Talking
to Dragons 181 "Mother
gave it to me a few days ago, and I was told you would
want to know about it." "Ahhhhhh."
Kazul's eyes glowed as she looked at the sword.
Literally; the light from them was a little like fire- light,
except it didn't flicker. After a minute, she transferred her
gaze to me. "And you got it here safely. Well done, Cimorene's
son." "Thank
you. Your Majesty," I said. "You knew my mother?" Kazul
smiled again. "Cimorene was the best Princess I ever
had." Shiara
choked. My jaw dropped; the little dragon said, "That's
how she knew dragon magic!" in a pleased tone. I
closed my mouth, swallowed hard, and bowed to Kazul. "Excuse
me, Your Majesty. I was, urn, startled. Mother is a
Princess?" "She
certainly was once," Kazul said. She looked at the sword
again. "I'm glad she managed to keep it safe. We didn't
have a lot of choice at the time, but it's still worrying to have
to take a risk like that." I
wasn't certain what to say to that; Kazul didn't seem to be
talking to me, but it isn't a good idea to ignore a dragon.
I decided not to say anything and bowed again. Kazul
looked up from the sword. "You needn't bother being
quite so formal," she said. "I have a lot to tell you, and it
will make the conversation a lot easier if you're not quite so
stiff." Before
I could reply, Kazul turned toward the old dragon, who was
still standing beside me. "It will be tomorrow morning.
Let everyone know; the preparations must be fin- ished
by then." The old
dragon nodded and left. Kazul looked back at us.
"Come with me." She started to rise. "What
about me?" the little dragon demanded. Kazul
sighed. "Yes, you may come, too." She stood, which
made her look twice as big as she had before, and started
walking. Shiara and I looked at each other and fol- lowed.
There wasn't anything else we could do; after all, Kazul
was King of the Dragons. By this
time the sun was completely down, but there was 182
Patricia C. Wrede still
enough light in the sky that we could see where we were
going. Kazul led us a little farther around the castle, then
turned away from it. As we walked along, the other dragons
would slide out of the way for Kazul and bow their heads
respectfully to her; then Shiara and I would walk by and bow
respectfully to the dragons. It kept us too busy to see
much of where we were going. Kazul
led us to what looked like a jumbled pike of rocks a
little way from the castle. There was a dark opening at one
side of the pile, and Kazul went right in. Shiara and the
dragon and I followed. It was
very dark inside, almost as black as the Caves of Chance.
I stopped immediately; I didn't want to step on Kazul's
tail in the dark or run into her accidentally. Shiara bumped
into me, squeezing Nightwitch between us. Night- witch
said, "Mrowww!" in a complaining tone, and Kazul's voice
came out of the darkness. "I
suppose you human people need some light." "Only
if it won't be inconvenient," I said hastily. "Not
at all," Kazul replied, and added about five hissing words. Silvery
light sprang up all around us. I had to squint for a
minute; then I blinked. The inside of the pile of rocks looked
a lot like a cave. I looked for the source of the light and
realized with a shiver that the light was coming from the rocks. That
shook me. Dragons don't usually do magic casually; they
take it too seriously. In particular, the King of the Dragons
wouldn't normally work a spell just for a visitor's convenience.
I looked at Kazul, wondering exactly what was
going on. "Sit
down," said Kazul, nodding toward a row of rocks. We did.
The little dragon sat down by the entrance, looking half-sulky
and half-defiant. Kazul ignored it. "I
think you had better tell me your story first," she said, looking
at me intently. "Start at the beginning, when Cimorene
gave you the sword." "I'm
sorry," I said. "I'll start with the sword if you want me to,
but I think the beginning is the wizard." "Wizard?"
said Kazul. Talking
to Dragons 183 "His
name's Antorell; he came to our cottage the day before
Mother gave me the sword, and Mother melted him." "Oh,
him." Kazul shook her head. "Sounds like he hasn't learned
anything since the last time he tangled with Cimorene. Yes,
start with him, by all means." So I
told Kazul everything that had happened to me since Antorell
had walked up to our cottage and knocked the door in. It
took a long time, especially the part after Shiara and I met
the dragon, because the dragon kept adding things. Finally,
Kazul told it to either be quiet or go away. It looked terribly
offended, but it quit talking. Kazul
didn't ask any questions at all. Once, when I mentioned
finding the key in the Caves of Chance, she made a noise
that sounded like an astonished snort, but she apol- ogized
for interrupting and told me to go on. I did, once I got
over the shock of having the King of the Dragons apol- ogize
to me. When I
finished, there was silence for a minute or two. Then
Kazul stirred. "So. You have accomplished a great deal in
a short time, Daystar." "It
doesn't really seem like it to me," I said. "A
great deal," Kazul repeated. She sounded as if she were
talking to herself. Shiara
shifted restlessly. "Are you going to explain about Daystar's
sword?" she demanded. "Shiara!"
I said, horrified. Nobody talks to the King of the
Dragons in that tone of voice. Except
Shiara. "No," said Kazul. "Or at least, I'm not going
to tell you as much as you want to know. It's one of the
problems with that sword right now. The Society of Wizards
has more than a hundred spells hunting for it, and all of
them depend on finding someone who knows what he's
carrying; the sword itself is invisible to wizards' magic. If
Daystar knows too much about that sword too soon, we'll be up
to our wings in wizards right away. I don't want that to
happen yet." "I
don't like wizards," the little dragon said suddenly. "They
make me sneeze." Kazul's
head turned and she eyed the little dragon for a minute.
"I think it is time you made yourself useful," she 184 Patricia C. Wrede said at
last. "Go find Marchak and tell him to bring us dinner.
Then go back to your teacher and apologize for running
off, and after that you can start getting ready for tomorrow." "What
happens tomorrow?" the little dragon said sus- piciously. "We
have a war," Kazul said. "Which you might manage to live
through, if you're ready for it. So go!" "Yes,
ma'am!" The little dragon disappeared out the door of the
cave. Kazul
looked after it for a minute, then shook her head. "That
is undoubtedly the most irritating grandchild I have." "Who
are you going to be fight— Grandchild?" said Shiara. "Yes,
of course," said Kazul, looking mildly surprised. "It's
an annoying youngster, but precocious children fre- quently
are. I'm hoping it will grow out of it." "Oh,"
said Shiara. She stared out the entrance thought- fully. "I
enjoyed its company, most of the time," I said hon- estly. "I'm
glad," Kazul said. "Um,
if you wouldn't mind telling us, I'm sort of curious about
whom you expect to be fighting tomorrow," I said after
another minute. I was also wondering whether Kazul thought
Shiara and I were going to be included in this. I wasn't
particularly anxious to get involved in a war between dragons. Kazul
smiled; I got the feeling she knew what I was thinking.
"Wizards," she said. "There will be a few elves, of
course, and maybe some ogres and trolls, but mostly we'll
be fighting wizards." "Oh,"
I said. I was even less interested in getting involved in a
war between dragons and wizards. Dragons alone might overlook
Shiara and Nightwitch and me, but wizards cer- tainly
wouldn't. "I'm
afraid you already are involved," Kazul said. "Because
of the sword?" Shiara asked while I tried to remember
whether I'd said anything out loud about not wanting
to get involved. Talking
to Dragons 185 "Yes,"
said Kazul. "The sword, and other things. It's a long
story; I hope you're comfortable." We both
nodded, and Kazul smiled again. "Well, then. There
are two types of magic in the world: the kind you're born
with, and the kind you get from something else. Drag- ons"—Kazul
looked smug—"elves, unicorns, and fire- witches
are bom with magic, to name a few. Ordinary witches
and magicians get their magic from objects or from rituals
involving things that have magic; it works quite well and
doesn't upset things. "Wizards,
on the other hand, get their magic from every- thing
around them that happens to have magic. Those staffs of
theirs absorb little bits of it constantly and it gets worse every
time a wizard stores a new spell in his staff. That, by the
way, is why dragons are allergic to them; whenever those
staffs get near us, they start trying to soak up some of our
magic. It creates other problems, too." "You
mean those stupid wizards have been grabbing my magic
every time they come near me?" Shiara said indig- nantly. "Not
yours," Kazul said. "Wizards can't use fire-witches' magic;
it's too different. Their staffs explode if they try." "Good!"
said Shiara vindictively. Her face grew thought- ful.
"I wonder if I could leam to do it on purpose?" Kazul
looked as if she agreed with Shiara. "Wizards get most of
their magic from the Enchanted Forest, but if they absorb
too much magic in any one place, things die." "The
moss!" I said. "That's why it turns brown when a wizard's
staff touches it." "Yes,"
said Kazul. "The Kings of the Enchanted Forest had a
way of reversing the process, taking magic out of a wizard's
staff and putting it back in the forest, so wizards weren't
too much of a problem until about seventeen or eighteen
years ago, when one of the wizards managed to steal
some rather important items from the King's castle. One of
them in particular was critical to the King's control of the
wizards." Kazul paused and looked at me expectantly. "The
sword?" I said. 'Telemain said it was supposed to be used
on wizards." "Telemain
talks too much," Kazul said a little sourly. 186 Patricia C. Wrede "The
wizard who stole the sword didn't know exactly what he had,
at first, but he knew enough to convince the rest of the
wizards to attack the castle. They were trying to kill the
King and take his place, but before they succeeded, the sword
was stolen again. A few wizards managed to get inside
the castle, but without the sword they didn't have enough
power to actually kill the King. The best they could do was
find a way of keeping him out of action while they hunted
for the sword." "They
put the King to sleep?" I said doubtfully. It sounded a bit
unlikely. Sleeping spells are very effective on guards and
Princesses, and even a kingdom now and then, but they can't
usually do much against a good magician, and what- ever
else he was, I was sure the King of the Enchanted Forest
had to be a master magician. "We
don't know exactly what they did," Kazul admitted. "We
know the King isn't dead, because the Enchanted For- est
reacts very strongly when a King dies. We know they did
something, though, because the seal they have around the
castle wouldn't hold the King in by itself." "You
mean those shimmerings around the castle?" I said. "The
outer one is ours," Kazul said with a grim smile. "The
wizards put up a spell to keep everyone but themselves out of
the castle, so we put one to keep the wizards out. Without
the sword, there wasn't anything more we could do." "Then
how did Daystar's mother get hold of the sword?" Shiara
asked. Kazul
smiled again. "Cimorene was the one who stole it back
from the wizards in the first place. They've been trying
to get hold of it again ever since. They'll show up as soon
as we break through their barrier tomorrow, but by then we
should be ready for them." "Uh,
you expect Shiara and me to help you fight the wizards?"
I said. "Of
course not," Kazul replied. "You're going to get into the
castle and break whatever spell the wizards put on the King
seventeen years ago." THAT
TOOK SOME explanation. What Kazul meant was, the dragons
would lower the barrier they had put up around the castle.
Then I would draw the Sword of the Sleeping King and put
it into the wizards' barrier, which, according to Kazul,
would break their spell. The wizards would know immediately
that something was happening, and they would start
trying to get to the castle. The dragons and their various allies
would hold off the wizards and whomever they brought to help
them, while I ran into the castle, found the King, and
broke the spell. I
didn't like the sound of it at all, but I couldn't say much.
Mother had given me the sword, and I was pretty sure
this was what she'd wanted me to do with it. Besides, Kazul
seemed to think I was the only one who could use the
sword to break the spell, and how do you tell the King of the
Dragons that you won't do something she wants you to do? Shiara,
on the other hand, had a lot to say. She thought it
would be stupid for me to go into the castle by myself. Kazul
asked if she was volunteering, and Shiara said that she
wasn't going to be left out just when things were getting interesting.
Kazul pointed out that Shiara's arm was broken, 187 188
Patricia C. Wrede and
Shiara told her that being inside the castle with me sounded
safer than being outside with a lot of wizards and dragons
fighting each other. Finally,
Kazul said Shiara could go with me if she wanted to.
Shiara said good, and were the dragons going to be able to keep
all of the wizards out of the castle, or were some of them
going to sneak in after us? They kept on like that for
quite a while. I was very glad when a middle-sized dragon
arrived with dinner and interrupted. I couldn't see why
Kazul was being so patient with Shiara, and I was getting
worried that it wouldn't last much longer. Dinner
was excellent. Kazul didn't eat with us; she spent most of
the meal lying on the floor and watching us in- scrutably.
Dragons are very good at being inscrutable. I found
it a bit unsettling, but it didn't seem to bother Shiara or
Nightwitch much. After
dinner we talked some more. Kazul told us about the
castle and what the floor plan was. She also told us about a
lot of things to watch out for; most of them were magical
items that would only be dangerous if we acciden- tally
did something to them, but there were a few traps, too. "This
castle sounds awfully big," Shiara said after a while.
"How are we supposed to find this King, anyway?" "You
look for him," Kazul said. "I'm afraid I can't tell you
exactly where. The only people who knew where the King
was were the wizards who went in and put the spell on him,
and as far as I know they're all dead." "As
far as you know?" I said. "Some
of them didn't come out of the castle," Kazul said. "But
you're sure that the ones who did come out are dead?"
I said. "Positive,"
said Kazul. "So
what?" said Shiara. Kazul and I looked at her. "I don't
care about the wizards who came out," she said de- fensively.
"I'm worried about the ones who might still be in
there." "They
have to be either dead or enchanted," Kazul said. "Even
a wizard can't live seventeen years without food." Talking
to Dragons 189 "I
suppose so," Shiara said. "Well, what does this King look
like?" "You'll
know him when you see him," Kazul said. "Be- sides,
he's the only other person in there." "Oh,
great," said Shiara. "We have to hunt through an empty
castle for someone we don't even know, while a bunch
of wizards are trying to get in and stop us." "It
shouldn't be that bad," Kazul said. "The sword and the key
should both help considerably." "The
key?" I said. "Of
course the key!" Kazul said impatiently. "For one thing,
it'll make it a lot easier for you to get into the castle; you
could have done it with the sword alone, but it will be much
faster with the key as well." "Are
you saying I just picked up the key to the castle by accident?'
I said. "Accidents
like that happen all the time in the Caves of Chance,"
Kazul said dryly. "Where do you think they got their
name?" "How
do you know it's the right key?" Shiara demanded. "The
quozzel said some wizard put it there." "It
was one of the things that were stolen along with the sword,"
Kazul replied. "But if it will make you more com- fortable,
I can look at it." I dug
the key out of my pocket and held it out to Kazul. Kazul
glanced at it and started to nod, then stopped suddenly and
stared at the key very intently. "That
wizard's done something to it," she said after a moment.
She sounded outraged. "Wonderful,"
said Shiara disgustedly. "All we need is another
wizard to get mixed up in this." "He
isn't another wizard," Kazul said. "He's the same one who
stole the key in the first place, and he's dead." "You're
sure he's not one of the wizards who didn't come
out?" Shiara said. Kazul nodded, and Shiara frowned. "Can
you tell what he did?" Kazul
didn't answer. She stared at the key instead, and her
eyes started glowing again. The key began getting wanner and
wanner in my hands. Just before it got too hot for me to
hold, the key jerked in the direction of the castle outside; 190 Patricia C. Wrede a
second later, I dropped it. I stood shaking my fingers, while
Kazul and Shiara stared down at the key, and Night- witch
walked over and sniffed at it. "Nightwitch!"
said Shiara. "Stop that; you'll get en- chanted
or something." She bent over and grabbed awk- wardly
for Nightwitch with her left hand. The kitten jumped away,
and Shiara's fingers brushed the key. A look of sur- prise
came over her face, and she picked the key up. "It feels
like fire," she said. "I
know," I said. "It burned my fingers." "No,
I don't mean it's hot," Shiara said. "It just feels like
fire." "It
shouldn't," Kazul said, sounding interested. "Bring it over
here." Shiara
took the key to Kazul, who looked at it for a few minutes
and handed it back. "I thought so. It's part of what that
wizard did." "But
what's it for?" Shiara said. "I
don't know," Kazul admitted. "The spell is connected to
something inside the castle, but I can't tell what with the barriers
around the outside. He may have set a trap with it; he was
one of the wizards who got inside during the battle, you
know." "No,
I didn't," Shiara said. "And how could he use the key
inside the castle if it was sitting down in the Caves of Chance
the whole time?" "He
couldn't have," Kazul said calmly. "He probably left
the key there after he got out of the castle; he was the last
one of the wizards we caught, and he had plenty of time to
do it." "May
I have my key back, please?" I said. Kazul and Shiara
both looked at me, and Shiara handed me the key. "Thank
you," I said, and put it in my pocket. I wasn't quite sure
why I wanted it; I only knew that it felt right, somehow. "Is
there anything else we ought to know about right now?"
I asked after a minute. "I mean, we've walked a long
way today, and been in a cave-in, and Shiara has a broken
arm, and if we're going to do all of these things tomorrow,
I would sort of like to get some rest." Talking
to Dragons 191 "Mrrrroww!"
said Nightwitch emphatically. Kazul
chuckled. "It seems you aren't the only one who would
like rest. Very well. Marchak!" The
middle-sized dragon who had brought us dinner ap- peared,
and Kazul had him show us to our rooms. They turned
out to be normal, human-sized rooms, and quite comfortable.
I was surprised until it occurred to me that the King of
the Dragons would probably have occasional human visitors,
who would need a place to stay. I wondered how many
human magicians kept a special place for visiting dragons
in their castles and towers and things, and right in the middle
of wondering, I fell asleep. A loud
pounding noise woke me; someone, probably a dragon,
was knocking on the door of my room. "Just a minute,
please," I called, and the pounding stopped. I got
out of the bed, which I couldn't remember having gotten
into, and picked up my swordbelt. I checked my pockets
to make sure I had the key, started for the door, and
stopped suddenly in the middle of the room. If the dragons
expected me to do things with the Sword of the Sleeping
King. I wasn't going to carry it under my arm like a bag
of laundry. I put the swordbelt on and opened the door. "It's
about time," said the little dragon in the hall. Shiara and
Nightwitch were already there. "I'm
sorry," I said. "I didn't know you were in a hurry." The
dragon snorted and started off down the hall. "Come on." We went
after it. It didn't seem to be in a particularly good
mood, and I didn't understand why until Shiara told me that
it wanted to come into the castle with us, but Kazul wouldn't
let it. I couldn't see why it wanted to come; there weren't
supposed to be any wizards inside the castle, and I
thought the little dragon wanted to fight wizards. I didn't say
anything, though. Arguing with a grouchy dragon isn't safe,
even if it's a small dragon. The
dragon brought us back to the cave where we'd talked to
Kazul the previous night. Kazul wasn't there, but break- fast
was, and we sat down right away. We were almost 192 Patricia C. Wrede done
with it when Kazul arrived. "Go
on, finish," she said when she saw we were still eating. "Urn,
that's all right," Shiara said hastily. "I don't want any
more." "I've
had plenty, too," I said. "It's very good." Kazul
nodded absently. "Well, if you're finished, let us begin." I stood
up from the table, wishing suddenly that I hadn't eaten
quite so much. My stomach felt as if it were full of lead,
and my head was very light. "How do we start?" I said. "Follow
me." Kazul slid out of the cave without looking back at
us. Shiara and I followed, and Nightwitch and the little
dragon came behind us. Kazul
led us back across the hard, brown ground toward the
castle. All around us, dragons were polishing their teeth and
sharpening their claws; some of them were muttering spells
under their breath. A couple of times, I saw elves hurrying
through the crowd, and once I saw a group of intense-looking
red-haired people who had to be fire-witches. Everyone
was very serious and grim. None of
us said anything until we got to the castle. Kazul led us
around the outside of the shimmerings until we were at the
front of the castle; if I concentrated on looking through the
barriers, I could see a flat wooden bridge across the moat
and a large door with steps leading up to it. Kazul stopped
and turned to the little dragon. "You'd better go find
your place now," she said. "But
I want to—" "Go!" The
little dragon went. Shiara and I looked at each other, and
then at Kazul. Kazul smiled. "Are you ready?" I nodded
jerkily. Shiara bent and picked up Nightwitch. Kazul's
smile widened. "When I tell you 'now,' draw your sword
and run for the castle. Don't look back, and don't stop
for anything." I
nodded again, because I didn't trust my voice just then. Kazul
turned to the crowd of dragons, and suddenly every- thing
was completely silent. A shiver ran down my back, Talking
to Dragons 193 and I
put my hand on the hilt of the Sword of the Sleeping King. I felt
the bee-in-the-jar buzz that was Shiara's magic, and a
strong humming from all the dragons, but the strongest feeling
of all was the purring I'd felt from the first time the sword
made my arm tingle. It was coming from the castle. Not
from the shimmerings around the castle; they just got in the
way. What I was feeling was the magic of the castle itself. I took
a tighter grip on the hilt of the sword. The tingling from
the dragons got stronger and more positive, and abruptly Kazul
turned and shouted, "Now!" As she spoke, the silver- and-green
shimmering around the castle vanished. I
yanked the Sword of the Sleeping King out of its sheath and
swung it at the golden glow that was still left between me and
the castle. I felt a shock like a lightning bolt as the sword
hit, and then the shimmering vanished in an explosion of
golden light. I shook my head and heard Kazul shout, "Run!" I took
two steps and almost lost my balance. The ground wasn't
hard and bare anymore; it was covered with slippery green
fuzz. Shiara grabbed my arm just as I heard a series of
explosions from behind us. We ran.
I could feel the jangling from the sword that meant
there were wizards around somewhere, but I didn't stop to
look for them. I was too busy trying to keep up with Shiara,
hang on to the sword, and dig the key out of my pocket,
all at the same time. It didn't work very well. Shiara
was standing in front of the door, panting, when I got
up to it with the key. I didn't see a keyhole, but as soon as
my foot touched the top step of the stairs, the door swung
open. "Daystar,"
Shiara said, "are you sure—" Something
hit the stone of the castle next to the door and exploded,
showering us with little chips of rock. Shiara and I dove
through the door and landed on the floor inside with Nightwitch
on top of us. I sat up just as the door closed silently
behind us. "Hey!"
Shiara said. "Watch what you're doing with that sword!" 194
Patricia C. Wrede "I'm
sorry," I said. I stood up, stuck the key in my pocket
again, and held out a hand to help Shiara up. "Is your
arm all right?" "I
think so," she said absently. "At least, it doesn't hurt any
more than it did already. Now which way do we go?" "I
don't know," I said. The door shook as something hit it, and
a moment later there was a muffled explosion. "I think
we should get out of here, though." "Aren't
you going to put that stupid sword away first?" "No,"
I said. "I'd rather have it in my hand, in case some of
the wizards do get into the castle." Shiara
scowled, but she didn't object again, and we started hunting
through the castle. The
castle was even more confusing on the inside than it was
on the outside. Rooms opened into more rooms and then
suddenly into a hallway or a flight of stairs. All of them
were full of chairs and tables and books and suits of armor,
and everything was dusty. The wizards' spell seemed to have
kept spiderwebs and cobwebs out of the castle, but it
hadn't done anything at all about the dust. Nightwitch didn't
like it at all; she kept sneezing. Finally, Shiara picked her up
and carried her, which helped a little. It took
a lot longer to figure out where we were going than
I'd expected. I could feel the sword pulling me toward the
center of the castle, but it was very hard to just go in that
direction. In spite of Kazul's instructions, Shiara and I kept
getting into hallways that curved the wrong way and chains
of rooms that ended with nowhere else to go. It was very
discouraging. Finally,
we came to a large door at the end of a long hall.
It was about three times as wide as a normal door and much
taller, and it was made of gold with designs on it in relief.
There was a staff lying on the floor in front of it; I could
tell from the jangling of the sword that it was a wizard's
staff. When I stopped to look at it, the sword jerked impatiently
toward the door. "I think this is the place we've been
looking for," I said. Shiara
tried the door. "It's locked. Where's that key?" "Just
a minute," I said, and dug for it. "Hey!" I said. Talking
to Dragons 195 As soon
as I touched it, I felt the key pulling at me, the same
way the sword was. "What
is it?" Shiara said. "Come on, hurry up!" "It's
this key," I said as I unlocked the door. "It feels almost
like the sword, except—" I
stopped as the door swung open. The room inside was very
large and very high. It was fall of light and not dusty at all.
In the center of the floor was something like a shallow iron
brazier, about three feet high and nearly five feet across, full of
glowing coals. On the other side of the brazier was a
couch, and lying on the couch was a man. He was
dressed in expensive-looking clothes, but there were
tears in them, as if he had been in a fight. He didn't look
old, even though his beard was long and grey. His head
was bare, and at his side was a jeweled scabbard, empty.
He was asleep. Shiara
took a deep breath. "That must be him; come on, Daystar,
let's get this over with." I
stepped into the room and walked slowly toward the couch.
As I came around the brazier, I saw that there was another
wizard's staff lying beside the couch. I slowed down even
more; something felt wrong. I stopped, standing next to the
couch with the key in one hand and the sword in the other. "Well,
now that we're here, how do we break the spell?" Shiara
said, coming up on one side of me. "Something's
wrong," I said, and as I spoke I realized what it
was. The key was still pulling at me, but as soon as I
had stepped into the room, the pulling from the sword had
stopped. All I could feel from the sword was the jangling of the
magic in the wizard's staffs. "Maybe
if you lay the sword on him it'll work," Shiara said,
ignoring me. "Come on; you have to try something or
we'll be here all day." "I
wouldn't try anything at all, if I were you," said a voice
behind us. Shiara and I spun to look backward. The doorway
of the room was fall of wizards. I
STARED AT the wizards for an instant, then turned and jumped
for the couch, hoping I could break the spell before the
wizards could do anything. I didn't make it. As I brought the
flat of the sword down, the sleeping man vanished. The sword
clanged softly against the couch, and I spun back to face the
wizards. Something
hit me as I turned, and suddenly I couldn't move my
body at all. I could turn my head far enough to see
Shiara, but that was all. Shiara looked as if she were concentrating
on something, so I turned my head back to the
wizards. They were standing around the sleeping man, who was
now lying on the floor in front of the doorway. "Well
done," said one of the wizards to another. "Thank
you," the second wizard said. "It was a mere trifle." There
was a stir at the back of the group of wizards, and a
moment later Antorell pushed forward to the front. He had a
bandage around one arm, probably where the dragon had
bitten him. "I want the boy!" he said. "Now!" The
wizard in front, who seemed to be the leader of the group, looked
at Antorell coldly. "You were permitted to join us
in order to give you an opportunity to repair some 197 198
Patricia C. Wrede of the
damage you did seventeen years ago. Not to further your
private ambitions." "But
you said I could have the boy!" "Antorell,
you're a fool," the leader said. "You may have the
boy, but after we have possession of the sword, not before." "I'll
give you the sword, then!" Antorell said angrily. He
strode around the edge of the brazier and reached for the
hilt of the sword, just above my hand. I wanted to jerk away,
but I still couldn't move. There
was a flash of blue-and-gold light as Antorell touched
the sword, and he was flung backward onto the floor;
if he'd fallen a few inches to the other side, he'd have gone
into the brazier. I found myself wishing he had, then found
myself staring at the brazier. There was something about
it that nibbled at my mind, but I couldn't make it come
clear. I didn't have time to think about it, because the
wizards started talking again. Antorell
was picking himself up off the floor, and the leader
of the wizards smiled at him nastily. "You see?" "You
knew this would happen!" Antorell said furiously. "Of
course I knew," the leader said. "Had you spent your time
hunting that sword instead of trying to get some sort of
ridiculous revenge on Cimorene, you, too, would know." "Then
demonstrate the proper method for me," Antorell said
sarcastically. "If you know so much, you take the sword." "I
am not so foolish," the other wizard replied. "No one save
the King of the Enchanted Forest can take that sword from a
Bearer who is not willing to give it up, especially not
inside this castle." "Then
how do you expect to get it?" Antorell said even more
sarcastically than before. "We
kill the King," the wizard said, gesturing at the sleeping
figure on the floor in front of him. "When the line of the
Kings of the Enchanted Forest is ended, one of us can
take up the rule of the castle." "What
good will that do?" Antorell said. "The boy will still
have the sword. And, as you have reminded me so 199 Talking
to Dragons many
times in the past two days, he seems to be able to use
it." The
leader shrugged. "If your tale is true, I shall admit to some
surprise; I thought no one but the King could use the
sword. Which is why one of us must become King." "You
accuse me of lying?" "Why
should I bother?" Antorell
scowled and started to raise his staff, then seemed to
change his mind. "When the boy blows your own spells back at
you, perhaps you will see what I mean." "Nonsense!"
the leader of the wizards replied. "You ob- viously
know little of what you speak." "No,
of course not; I have only seen the boy in action," Antorell
said with awful sarcasm. The
leader shrugged again. "What the boy has learned matters
little. The power of the sword passes to the ruler of the
castle, and there is nothing he can do about it. He will be
easy enough to take care of then." Out of
the comer of my eye, I saw a flicker of movement; Shiara
was edging toward me. I had to force myself not to turn my
head. The wizards seemed to have forgotten both of us,
and I didn't want to remind them. I hoped they wouldn't
remember until after Shiara had done whatever she was
planning to do. I also hoped Shiara was planning to do
something; I certainly couldn't, and I didn't think Nightwitch
would be much help against all those wizards. "Stop
talking and let's get on with it," one of the wizards in the
back said. "An
excellent suggestion. That is, if you are quite sat- isfied,
Antorell?" said the leader. Antorell
glared and stalked over to the rest of the wizards. The
leader looked around and nodded. "Begin." Under
other circumstances, the spell-casting would have been
very interesting to watch. The wizards spent quite a bit of
time arguing about where each of them should stand, and
exactly what the correct angle was for each staff, and in what
order the spells should be said. The leader seemed particularly
concerned that things be done right; evidently there
was something about the castle that would cause prob- 200 Patricia C. Wrede lems if
everything wasn't perfect. Finally, they agreed on what
they were going to do, and they got started. As the
wizards started chanting, something touched my arm; if
I could have moved, I'd have jumped. It was Shiara. "Do
something before they finish!" I whispered. "I've
been trying!" Shiara whispered back. "But it isn't working." "Oh,
no." I was so upset that I spoke the words in a normal
tone of voice; fortunately, the wizards were too busy chanting
to notice. "You haven't been polite to anyone since you
apologized to Telemain, and you used that up on the last
bunch of wizards." Shiara
looked stricken. "Daystar, I'm sorry!" "There
isn't anything we can do about it now," I said. "If
you—" I
stopped, because the wizards had stopped chanting. Shiara
and I both looked at them, but the wizards didn't seem to
be finished with what they were doing. They looked more
like they'd been interrupted in the middle of things. The
leader was bending over the man on the floor, who was
still sleeping. A moment later the wizard straightened with an
exclamation and stretched his staff out over the man's
body. The
figure dissolved into sparkles, leaving a little blob of mud
on the floor, and the wizards stirred in surprise. "A simulacrum!"
said someone at the back of the wizards. I let
out my breath in relief. Simulacra are very hard to make;
like most major spells, earth, air, fire, and water have to be
properly mixed in order to get a good one, and that's fairly
tricky. A really good magician can make a simulacrum that
looks exactly like someone, but it doesn't have any connection
to the actual person at all. As a result, a si- mulacrum
can't be used against someone the way other types of
magic can; what they're mainly good for is confusing people. This
one seemed to have done an excellent job. The wizards
were glaring at each other accusingly. "If that was a
simulacrum," one of them said finally, "where's the King? Who put
it there, anyway?" "Old
Zemenar, probably," an older-looking wizard said. Talking
to Dragons 201 "It
looked like him, and setting up a decoy is just the sort of
thing he would do." "That
doesn't make sense! He started this whole affair in the
first place; why would he put a false King in the castle
to distract us?" "Zemenar
never trusted anybody. He probably wanted to do
this himself, so he made it as hard as he could for anyone
else to finish the job. Or maybe he was just being omery."
The older wizard shrugged. "Either way, I doubt that he
expected to get eaten by a dragon." "We
have wasted enough time here," the leader of the wizards
said with sudden decision. "Silvarex, take three others
and begin searching for the King at once. We cannot allow
him to escape again." He went
on giving instructions, but I stopped paying attention.
He wasn't talking to me, and I had other things to
worry about. I was still holding the key in my left hand, and as
soon as the simulacrum disappeared, the key stopped tugging
me and started getting warm. My other arm, the one
with the sword, was tingling under the jangling of the wizards,
and my head felt very light. I had a sudden, strong feeling
that there was something important I ought to re- member,
but the jangling of the wizards' magic kept dis- tracting
me just before I could figure out what it was. "Daystar!"
Shiara hissed, practically in my ear. I
jumped a little and realized that the wizard's spell hold- ing me
was beginning to weaken. I couldn't move very much or
very fast, though, and if the wizards noticed, they'd just
throw the spell at me again. I decided not to move at all
until I was sure I could move the sword fast enough to block
another spell if they threw one at me, then whispered to
Shiara, "Don't do that. They might notice." Shiara
snorted. "If you don't want them to notice, you'd better
try to notice sooner. That was the third time I called you." "I'm
sorry," I said. "So
am I. What are we going to do?" "If
you could— Nightwitch!" I broke off in midsentence as a
small black streak darted toward the group of wizards. One of
them raised his staff; Shiara cried out and Nightwitch 202 Patricia C. Wrede dodged.
The spell hit the marble floor in a ball of light, and a
moment later the kitten was among the wizards' feet. I couldn't
see what was happening, but I could hear the wiz- ards
shouting. "There
it goes!" "Stop
it!" "It
got away." "Find
it," the leader of the wizards commanded. "You, Grineran,
go after it; it may lead you to the one we seek." One of
the wizards nodded and left, and I blinked. There were
only three wizards left now: a short, round wizard, the
wizard who was giving orders, and Antorell. Antorell
was staring at Shiara and me. "What about them?" he said
suddenly. "They may know something." The
leader of the wizards looked thoughtful. "For once, Antorell,
you may have made a useful suggestion. Per- suading
them to explain what they know may be difficult, however." Antorell
grinned nastily. "I think I can manage it." "Really."
The leader sounded skeptical. "The girl is a fire-witch,
and the boy has the sword, remember." "Sword
or no, he cannot be immune to spells or Silvarex would
never have been able to bind him," Antorell said. "What
did you have in mind?" "Something
like this." Antorell
waved his staff casually in my direction as he spoke.
Even if I'd been able to move, I wouldn't have been able to
twist the sword into a position to block the spell before
it hit me, especially since I didn't realize what he was
doing until the pain struck. It felt as if I were fighting the
fire-witch again, only this time the pain was all through my body
instead of just in my arms. It was worse than anything
I'd ever felt. I think I screamed, but I'm not sure. Beside
me, Shiara shouted, and a long ribbon of fire shot through
the air in front of me, straight at Antorell. The pain stopped
abruptly and the key in my left hand got even hotter. Antorell
was on fire; he was slapping at his clothes and his staff,
trying to put out the flames. Neither of the other wizards
was helping; they were staring toward Shiara and me. Talking
to Dragons 203 The
ribbon of fire still hung in the air above the brazier, making
a curtain of flames between us and the wizards. Slowly,
reluctantly, it began to fade, and as it died, the heat from
the key in my left hand faded along with it. Fire, I thought.
Fire in the brazier, fire in the key; Kazul had said something
about the key and fire.... I
lifted my left hand, fighting the remnant of the wizard's spell,
and threw the key forward into the brazier. There
was a whoosh of flame that leapt all the way to the
ceiling, then died. I thought I saw something in it, but it
vanished before I could be sure. The brazier began to glow, and
the whole room was suddenly full of magic, the magic
of the castle and the Enchanted Forest. It seemed to be
getting ready for something, or perhaps waiting; I was sure
there was something else I should do, but I couldn't think
what. "Stop
them!" the leader of the wizards shouted. "Move,
Daystar!" Shiara cried, and ducked down behind the
brazier. I tried
to follow her, but I couldn't move fast enough because
of the remains of the binding spell and because I was
worrying about what else I was supposed to do in order to
finish the spell I'd started with the key. I saw Antorell and the
other wizards bring their staffs up, and I tried des- perately
to move the sword far enough to block whatever they
were throwing at me. I made it, but only just. There
was a flash as the wizards' spell hit the sword, and a
tingle ran through me. The spell that had been binding me
vanished; I could feel what was left of it flowing through the
sword along with the rest of the magic the wizards had thrown
at me. It felt a lot like the jolt of power I'd gotten in the
forest, when I'd used the sword on the spell the wizards
had tried to throw at Shiara, except that this time I could
tell where the power was going. The
power was flowing through me, into the magic of the
Enchanted Forest itself. Back where it had come from in the
first place, if Kazul was right about where wizards got
most of their magic. Back to... I felt
my eyes widening and almost missed blocking the next
spell. Then I saw more wizards appearing behind the 204 Patricia C. Wrede three m
the doorway; if I didn't do something soon, I wouldn' be able
to do anything except block spells. There was nu way to
find out whether I was right except to try. I
stepped up to the edge of the brazier, took a deep breath and
said loudly: "Power
of water, wind, and earth, Turn
the spell back to its birth. Raise
the fire to free the lord By the
power of wood and sword." As I
spoke the last word, I thrust the Sword of the Sleeping King
into the middle of the coals in the brazier. As the
sword touched the coals, I felt the magic of the forest
surge forward around me. Fire shot up to the ceiling, the
same way it had when I threw the key into the brazier, but
this time the flames didn't fade. They got brighter and brighter
until all I could see was fire. I heard a rumbling sound
like the roof of the Caves of Chance falling in, and the
floor shook under me. A voice said loudly, "All hail the
Waker of the Sword! Hail!" and voices all around me shouted,
"Hail!" Echoes
from the shout rolled around the room, like thun- der
rolling back and forth across the sky. I felt very light- headed;
I couldn't see anything except fire, I couldn't hear anything
except echoes, and I couldn't feel anything at all Then
something in my head seemed to snap into place, and the
noise stopped abruptly. I let
go of the sword and stepped back a pace. The light in my
eyes started to dwindle into flames again, but now I could
see things in them, outlined in fire: dragons fighting wizards
outside the castle, and dwarves fighting elves, and elves
fighting wizards and other elves. I couldn't tell who was
winning; sometimes it seemed to be one set of fiery little
shapes, and sometimes it seemed to be the other. As I
stared at the fire, I realized that I could feel the jangling
from all the wizard's staffs and the deep rumbling of the
magic of the Enchanted Forest and the purring of the castle
itself, even though I wasn't holding the sword any- Talking
to Dragons 205 more. I
could even feel the shape of the wizards' spells inside
and outside of the castle, including the one around and
over the brazier. I could feel the magic of the sword, too,
weaving a bright pattern through all the other types of magic.
I followed the pattern until I saw how it worked, and
then I reached out toward all the different kinds of magic
and twisted. The
jangling of the wizard's staffs stopped abruptly as the
power of the Enchanted Forest swallowed up the power of the
staffs. Immediately, the flames in front of me swirled and
pulled together, so that the pictures I'd been watching disappeared,
and I found myself staring at a crowd of very angry
ex-wizards through a shifting curtain of fire. At
least two of the wizards were wearing swords, and they
were reaching for them. The leader started to point in my
direction, and I ducked instinctively. Almost every wiz- ard
who's any good carries a spell or two outside his staff, just in
case the staff gets stolen. The wizards at the castle didn't
have any magic in their staffs anymore, but they might still
be able to make trouble with their spare spells. I got
behind the brazier just in time to avoid being hit by something
like a large lightning bolt. I swallowed, hoping these
wizards didn't have very many more spells like that. I heard
shouts, and I rolled to my feet, expecting to see the wizards
with the swords coming after me. Wizards
were running in several directions, but none of them
seemed to be heading for me. For a moment, I was puzzled;
then I saw Morwen, Telemain, and a couple of elves
charging into the room from the hallway. I didn't stop to
worry about how they had gotten there. I turned back to the
brazier, to pull the Sword of the Sleeping King out of it so I
could join the fight, and stopped. The
flames were still swirling in the air above the brazier, but
they were denser somehow, and brighter. All I could see was
a mass of white-and-yellow light, shot with power. Then
something flashed so brightly that I had to cover my eyes.
When I could see again, there was a door in the center of the
brazier, right on top of the place where I had thrown the key
and facing the point of the sword. The door was 206
Patricia C. Wrede hung
between two pillars that looked as if they were made of
solid light, and I couldn't see anything in back of it except
light and flames. I
stared at the door for a moment as it grew even more solid.
I wasn't sure I wanted to find out what was on the other
side. Doors like that are even worse than the one in Morwen's
house; they can go anywhere. I reached for the Sword
of the Sleeping King, but before my hand touched it, the
door opened and a man stepped through. He
didn't look at all like the simulacrum; he was taller, with
black hair and tired-looking grey eyes, and he didn't have a
beard. He was dressed in plain clothes, but there was a
feeling of strength about him, and power. Even with- out the
thin gold circlet he wore I would have guessed who he was.
I took a deep breath of relief as he stepped down from
the brazier and onto the marble floor in front of me. As he
did, the doorway behind him melted back into leaping
flames, which faded quickly until there was nothing there
except the brazier and the glowing coals. The room was
utterly silent. I looked up at the King of the Enchanted Forest
for a moment, then turned to the brazier and reached for the
hilt of the Sword of the Sleeping King. The
sword wasn't even warm from the fire, but the blade shone
even more brightly than it had the day Mother brought it out
of the Enchanted Forest and gave it to me. I looked at it
for a minute, then turned back to the King and held it out. "I've
come to return your sword, Father," I said. FOR A
LONG moment the King of the Enchanted Forest looked
at me over the hilt of the sword. Then he reached out and
took it. He held it up for a moment, then turned and
brought it down hard on the edge of the brazier. The
brazier split and fell apart, scattering embers. As soon as
it hit the floor, it started to melt and vanish, and in a
few seconds there was nothing left of it except the key. The
King bent and picked it up, then turned back to me and smiled.
"Thank you, Daystar." "You're
welcome," I said automatically. Then I noticed Shiara
sitting on the floor, where she had dived when the wizards
started throwing spells around. She was looking from me
to the King and back, as if she couldn't believe what
she was seeing. "Oh, I'm sorry," I said. "Shiara, this is the
King of the Enchanted Forest. Father, this is my friend,
Shiara. She's a fire-witch." Father
bowed. Shiara looked at him and cleared her throat, then cleared
it again and said, "Hey, urn, are you really Daystar's
father?" The
King smiled slightly and nodded. "Of course. Only the
Kings of the Enchanted Forest can use the sword." He raised
it so that the light flashing from the blade filled the 209 210 Patricia C. Wrede room,
then in one fluid motion he sheathed it. He looked at me
and smiled again. Shiara
blinked, then turned her head and glared at me "Why
didn't you tell me the King of the Enchanted Forest was
your father?" she demanded. "I'm
sorry, but I didn't know it myself until just now," I said. "Ha!"
said Shiara. "Why—" Before
she could finish her sentence, Nightwitch pounced on her.
I was just as surprised as Shiara; I hadn't seen the kitten
coming. "Nightwitch!" Shiara said. "Where did you come
from?" "I
believe she came with them," Father said, nodding toward
the doorway. Shiara
and I turned. A dozen wizards were sprawled on the
floor in a tangled pile. Some of them were wrapped in vines,
some of them seemed to be frozen, and some of them had
elves and cats sitting on them. As soon as we turned to look
at them, the elves all got up and bowed, then ^at down
again quickly before the wizards could get up and do anything.
The cats just sat and blinked at us. "I
don't think you need to be quite so careful," the King said to
the elves. "If you'll let them up one at a time, I'll decide
what to do with them." The
elves nodded, and one of them stood up and bowed politely
to the King. Father walked over to the wizard the elf had
been sitting on and started asking him questions The
wizard didn't answer. Finally, Father shrugged and waved a
hand. The wizard disappeared, and Father went on to the
next one. As soon
as they got off of the wizards, the elves started gathering
up the staffs into a big bundle; most of the cats just
sat down and washed their paws. None of the wizards would
say anything to Father, and he didn't waste much time on
any of them. In a few minutes, there were only three
wizards left. I was watching them when Shiara poked me. "Daystar,
where's Morwen?" she said when I turned around.
"Those are her cats; she has to be around some- where." Talking
to Dragons 211 "I
don't know," I said. "I remember seeing her right before
Father showed up, and Telemain was with her." I looked
toward the door, where the last few wizards were, and
blinked. "Shiara, where's Antorell?" "Didn't
he disappear already?" "No,
he didn't. I was watching," I said. Shiara and I looked
at each other for an instant, then headed for the doorway. No one
tried to stop us. One of the elves gave us an odd look,
but another elf grabbed his arm and whispered some- thing
to him, and he only bowed deeply as we passed. It made me
feel almost as uncomfortable as I felt when the dwarves
bowed to me; I didn't like it at all. Outside
in the hallway we found Morwen, kneeling on the
floor beside Telemain and wrapping long strips of black cloth
around his right shoulder. There were pieces of odd- looking
plants all over the floor, and a little way down the hall
was a puddle of something dark and slimy. The puddle had a
wizard's staff lying across it, and a wizard's robe was sort of
crumpled up under the staff; I got the distinct feeling that
the puddle used to be a wizard. "Morwen!"
Shiara said. "What happened? Can I help?" "What
happened was a battle," Morwen said. "I should think
that would be obvious enough." "But
how did—" Shiara stopped, because Telemain was stirring.
A moment later he opened his eyes and looked up at all
of us. "What
was that?" he said rather hazily. "That,"
said Morwen, "was a sword. They are usually long,
very sharp, and pointed. You're lucky it didn't take your
head off." Telemain
started to shake his head, then winced. "A plain sword.
No wonder I couldn't block it; I thought it was a spell." Morwen
snorted. "You may be one of the greatest mag- ical
theoreticians in the world, but you don't have a particle of
common sense," she said acidly. "Why, in heaven's name,
didn't you duck?" "I
did duck!" Telemain said, looking startled and indig- nant.
"He wasn't aiming for my shoulder, he was aiming 212 Patricia
C. Wrede for my
chest. And if you think I'm going to put up with you and
your—" "You,"
Morwen said firmly, "are going to put up with me
until that shoulder is healed. Which, may I remind you, means
that I will have to put up with you for the same period of
time. Fortunately, it shouldn't take very long; a few days, at
most." "A
few days!" Telemain said. "Woman, are you mad? It'll
take at least a week!" "Not
if I change herbs twice a day," Morwen said in an irritated
tone. "I should know; it's my field." "Well,
it's my shoulder!" "I'm
so glad you noticed," Morwen said. "Stop fussing, or
you'll make things worse and I will have to put up with you for
a week." Telemain
stopped talking and just glared. It didn't seem to
bother Morwen in the least. She dusted her hands and began
picking up some of the plants that were scattered all over
the floor. When he saw that Morwen wasn't even watching
him, Telemain stopped glaring and tried to sit up. Right
away, Morwen was beside him, pushing him back down on
the floor. "Didn't
you hear what I just said?" Morwen asked. "Stop jumping
around like that." "I'm
quite capable of sitting up," Telemain said. He didn't
look as if he were telling the truth; he was too pale, and he
was having a lot of trouble pushing himself upright even
before Morwen started pushing in the opposite direc- tion. "You
are too stubborn to know what is good for you," Morwen
informed him. Telemain
glared at her again. "This floor is cold, hard, and
extremely uncomfortable. Do you expect me to lie here all
day?" "That
would be far too much to ask," the King of the Enchanted
Forest said from the doorway behind us. "But I believe
I can do something about it." Morwen
stood up and nodded, then frowned at Telemain, who was
trying to sit up again. "I told you to stay there, and I
meant it, Kings or no Kings. Excuse me, Mendanbar," Talking
to Dragons 213 she
added, looking at the King. "Morwen,
you are incorrigible," Father said, smil- ing. He
looked at Telemain. "You may as well do as she says;
Cimorene's the only person I've ever met who has more
determination than Morwen. Which room do you want?" "The
brown one," Morwen said before Telemain could answer.
"He'll need a firm bed to support that shoulder." Father
laughed. "Of course." He started to lift his hand, and I
cleared my throat. "I
would like to ask them something before they go," I said
when Father turned toward me. He nodded, and I looked at
Morwen. "Did you happen to notice what happened to the
wizard who was halfway around the brazier when you came
in? I didn't see him afterward." "You
mean Antorell? Yes, I thought I saw him," Morwen said.
"I'm afraid I don't recall. He wasn't the one I melted, if
that's what you're asking." "Could
he have gotten away?" Shiara asked. Morwen
glanced at the King. "If you will allow me, I can
find out fairly quickly." Father nodded, and Morwen made a
chuckling sort of sound. Two of the cats poked their heads
around the comer of the doorframe. "Daystar
wants to know what's become of one of the wizards,"
Morwen said to the cats. "The one named An- torell." The
cats looked at each other, and one of them twitched its
tail. The other one looked back at Morwen and said, "Rroowww!"
and they both pulled their heads back out of sight. "He
got away," Morwen said, turning back to the King. "Scom
says he ducked down the hall while Telemain and I were
busy with the rest of them." Father
frowned in concentration. "Well, he isn't inside the
castle anymore," he said after a moment. "I suppose I'd better
go find him; he might still be able to cause trouble, and I
think it's about time we checked on things outside, anyway."
He looked at me. "Is there anything else you need to ask
right now?" "No,"
I said. There were still a lot of things I wanted to 214 Patricia C. Wrede know
about, but I couldn't really say I needed to know any of
them. Father nodded and looked back at Morwen. "The brown
room, I think you said?" Morwen
nodded, and Father waved his hand. Morwen and
Telemain disappeared. Father raised his hand for an- other
gesture, then paused and looked at Shiara and me. "I suppose
you want to come, too?" "Yes,
we do. That is, if it isn't going to cause problems," I said. I hadn't
quite finished my sentence when the castle dis- solved
into mist around us. The mist cleared immediately, and we
were standing on springy green moss with the trees of the
Enchanted Forest all around us. At first I thought Father
had taken us to a place a long way from the castle; then I
saw all the dragons and elves among the trees. I looked
back over my shoulder and saw the castle right behind
us. "Hey,
where did all the trees come from?" Shiara said. "They
came from the wizards' magic," Father said. "When Day
star released the magic they had stored in their staffs, it went
back into the forest, and things got back to normal in a
hurry." "When
Daystar did what?" Shiara said. "It
was part of the sword and the fire and the brazier," I said
hastily. "I think you were busy ducking." "Oh,"
said Shiara. By that
time the dragons and elves had seen us, and everyone
started cheering and bowing. In the middle of the cheering
and bowing, one of the dragons came over. "It is good to
see Your Majesty again," she said. "It
is good to be here again," the King replied. "How goes
the battle?" "It
is quite finished," the dragon said. "There are a few still
out herding prisoners together, but that's about all. Oh, yes, we
won," she added. "Excellent!"
the King said, but he was watching the trees out of
the comers of his eyes, and there was a tiny crease between
his eyebrows. "If King Kazul is about, I would like to
speak with her." Talking
to Dragons 215 The dragon
smiled and her eyes glittered as if she were enjoying
a private joke. "Kazul will be here in a moment." Father
nodded, managing to look impatient and polite at the
same time. Suddenly the cheering got much louder, and then
the dragons drew apart and Kazul came through the trees
toward us. She was smiling, and she looked very large and
green and shining. She was so magnificent that none of us
saw the figure with her until they were both quite close
to us. I was
the first to notice that Kazul had someone with her.
When I saw who it was, I blinked and swallowed hard. "Mother?" "Cimorene!"
shouted Father. He took three strides for- ward
and took her in his arms. Kazul smiled and sat back, looking
smug. Mother
was laughing and crying at the same time; I'd never
seen her react like that to anything before. Not ever. I was
still staring when Shiara poked me. "Don't
stare," she whispered when I turned. "It's not polite." I
looked at Shiara for a minute, and my face got hot. I couldn't
really say anything, though; she was right. I felt very
peculiar, but fortunately Mother and the King stopped hugging
each other just then and started paying attention to the
rest of us instead. Father
went to talk to Kazul, and Mother came over to us. She
looked at me for a moment, then put her hands on my
shoulders and said, "You've done very well, Daystar. For the
most part, that is." I
didn't say anything, because I was sure she meant the way I
had almost lost the Sword of the Sleeping King to the
Princess. Then Shiara shifted uncomfortably, and I re- membered
that I hadn't introduced her. "Mother, this is my friend,
Shiara," I said. "She's a fire-witch." "I
can tell that by looking at her," Mother said. She smiled
at Shiara. "You'll stay with us for at least a few days,
won't you?" Shiara
nodded. "Good," Mother said. "Now, if you will excuse
me, there are still a few things I have to attend to." Talking
to Dragons 217 "Mother,"
I said, and she turned. "That wizard, Antorell. He was
in the castle, but he got away; I thought you should know." "He
did not get away!" said a familiar voice behind me. "I
caught him myself. Do you want him for anything, or can I
eat him?" We all
turned. The little dragon was sitting on the other side of
the bridge, holding on to one of Antorell's arms. Antorell's
robe was dirty and he didn't have his staff any- more.
He looked very tattered and very unhappy; the dragon looked
extremely pleased with itself. "Well?" it said. "Can I eat
him?" I
looked at Mother, and she shook her head. "I don't think
you should eat him," I said to the dragon. "The King talked
to all the other wizards, and he'll probably want to talk to
this one, too." "Well,
I want him back when the King gets finished with him,"
the little dragon said. "I caught him, and I'm going to eat
him." "He'll
probably give you a stomachache," Shiara said. I
stopped listening to the conversation, because Antorell had
straightened and was glaring past me, at Mother. He looked
more powerful, somehow, but no one else seemed to have
noticed anything unusual. I looked uneasily over my
shoulder and saw Father, still talking to Kazul. I looked back,
wondering whether I really had anything to worry about
Without his staff, all Antorell had were his extra spells,
and he'd probably used them up in the battle. At least,
I hoped he had. Shiara
and the dragon were still arguing. Suddenly, An- torell
twisted and made a throwing motion with his left hand. The
dragon shrieked in pain and let go of him, and he ran toward
the bridge, waving his hands and shouting. I felt a sudden,
intense surge of magic around him, and an instant later
the demon appeared. It
materialized right in front of us, all purple scales and orange
claws and silver-green teeth. Fortunately for them, demons
are color-blind. Antorell shouted again, in a lan- guage I
didn't understand, and pointed at Mother. The de- 218 Patricia C. Wrede mon
nodded, and on" arm darted out. I
grabbed something I couldn't see out of the air in front of me
and pulled. The demon vanished, and Antorell cried out in
surprise. I yanked at the something again and sent Antorell
after the demon; after what he'd been trying to do, I didn't
care whether the King wanted to talk to him or not. Then I
saw that the little dragon was turning pink around the
edges again. I let go of whatever it was, grabbed a different
one, and twisted. The dragon gave a surprised- sounding
squeak and turned green again, all at once. I
dropped the piece of nothing I'd been holding and turned.
Mother was shaking her head. "That was a bit ex- treme,
Daystar," she said, but her expression was proud. "Daystar,
what did you... I mean, how did you..." Shiara
gave up and just stared at me. "I
don't know," I said. I was at least as surprised as she was.
"I'm not even sure what I did." "What
happened?" the little dragon asked. It looked around
suspiciously. "Is that wizard dead?" "No,
but he probably wishes he were," Mother said. "Demons
do not like surprise visitors." "Oh,
is that what Daystar did with him?" said Father's voice
from behind me. "I was wondering." I
jumped and turned around to see the King and Kazul standing
there. The King was looking at Mother; Kazul was looking
at the little dragon. "Where have you been?" Kazul said in
a resigned voice. "I've
been catching wizards!" the little dragon said proudly.
"Well, one of them, anyway. He threw dragons- bane at
me again and called a demon and Daystar got rid of both
of them. I didn't even get to eat him," the dragon finished
sadly. "I
see," Kazul said, shaking her head. "I think you'd better
spend the rest of the day with me. It may, just pos- sibly,
keep you out of trouble." "I
don't understand!" Shiara burst out. "How could An- torell
do any magic without his staff? And how could Daystar
do any magic at all? And what did Antorell have to do
with the sword and everything?" Talking
to Dragons 219 The
King smiled at Mother, then looked at Shiara and me.
"As long as things seem to be quiet out here, why don't we go
inside? That way, we can be comfortable while I explain." Shiara
and I nodded. Father waved his hand, and the Enchanted
Forest dissolved into mist around us. -»& ','A* '» i» WE
APPEARED IN one ofthe rooms inside the castle, a small, cozy-looking
place with lots of bookshelves It was just as dusty
as all the other rooms Shiara and I had been through, but
when Father waved all the dust vanished Mother mut- tered
something about instant cleaning being no excuse for letting
things get into such a state, and we all sat down The
King looked at us "I
believe this should begin with you, Cimorene," he said
Mother looked thoughtful for a moment, then nodded and
started talking Apparently,
Mother really was a Princess She was the youngest
daughter of the ruler of a very large kingdom on the
other side of the Mountains of Morning It sounded like a nice
place, unfortunately. Mother thought it was bonng So,
when she was about sixteen, she ran away She went straight
to the Mountains of Morning, to the Pass of Silver Ice
that the dragons guard, and demanded that the surprised dragons
make her a prisoner The dragons
weren't quite sure what to do, but finally Kazul
agreed to take her Although Kazul wasn't King of the
Dragons then, she was fairly important, and she and 221 222 Patricia C. Wrede Mother
got along very well. A couple of knights from her father's
court showed up after a while, but Mother told them in no
uncertain terms that she didn't want to be rescued. The
knights went away, and Mother stayed with the dragons. Mother
spent a long time as Kazul's Princess. After a while,
Kazul started teaching her dragon magic, and Mother got
very good at it. She made quite a few friends in the Enchanted
Forest, too, because Kazul traveled a lot. And then
the old King of the Dragons died, and all the dragons went to
the Ford of Whispering Snakes to try and move Colin's
Stone, and Kazul was the one who did. That
was how Mother met my father. The dragons had been
friends of the rulers of the Enchanted Forest for cen- turies,
so when he heard that the dragons had a new King, the
King of the Enchanted Forest came to pay his respects. He also
wanted to talk to Kazul about the Society of Wiz- ards;
they were getting a little out of hand, and he was trying to
decide whether to use the sword on them. "The
sword can do quite a few different things," Father explained.
"One of them is to drain off the power in a wizard's
staff gradually, over a period of time; another is to
empty a staff of magic all at once. Most of the time, I used
the sword to keep wizards from draining too much magic
out of the Enchanted Forest, not to destroy their staffs completely,
but the Society of Wizards was becoming a problem
in spite of what I was doing with the sword." "Then
why didn't you empty their staffs?" Shiara de- manded.
"It would have saved us an awful lot of trouble." "It
would have saved me some trouble, too," Father said. "But
I couldn't destroy their magic completely like that without
a very good reason. Which was why I went to talk to
Kazul." Mother
and Kazul both liked Father very much, and he started
visiting them more often. The wizards kept making problems,
so he had lots of reasons. Finally, he and Mother decided
to get married, but before they could even announce it,
someone stole the sword. The
King and Mother dropped everything else to find out who
had it and where it was. It didn't take long; evidently the
sword does strange things when it's taken outside the Talking
to Dragons 223 Enchanted
Forest, so it wasn't hard to locate. One of the wizards
had it, of course, and he'd put it in a tower well away
from the forest, with a lot of spells around it to keep the
King from getting to it. That
was when the argument started. Father and Mother both
wanted to go steal the sword back, and neither of them wanted
the other to go. Kazul was the one who settled it; she
said that the wizards were expecting Father to try to get the
sword back, but they weren't expecting Mother. The King
still objected. He said the sword might do something awful to
Mother, because she wasn't one of his family. Kazul
told him that if that was all he was worrying about, he
should many Mother right away, so she'd be a member of his
family. Apparently, he still didn't like the idea of Mother
going off to steal the sword back, but he could see that he
wasn't going to be able to out-argue Mother and Kazul.
So he and Mother got married. Kazul
performed the ceremony, and a few days later Kazul
and Mother flew off to the tower where the sword was. It
took them nearly three days to get there. By the time
they arrived, most of the wizards had left for the En- chanted
Forest, but the sword was still there. The only wizard
in the tower was Antorell. Mother
knew Antorell fairly well. He was the son of Zemenar,
the wizard who'd stolen the sword, and he'd been courting
her for several years. Mother found out that he didn't
know what the sword was; he'd been left to watch it
without being told anything, and he was very sulky about it.
Mother managed to talk him into letting her inside the tower
to see the sword, then she broke the last of the spells guarding
it and took it. Right away, Antorell tried to kill her and
take the sword himself; evidently, he'd let her into the
tower because he knew she could break the last warding spell
and he couldn't. So Mother melted him. On
their way back to the Enchanted Forest, Kazul and Mother
were met by one of the dragons, who told them about
the wizards' attack on the castle. Kazul flew straight there,
but by the time they arrived the battle was over, and the
dragons had put their own shield up around the castle. Kazul
sent some of the dragons out to look for the wizards 224
Patricia C. Wrede who had
gotten away, and then she and Mother had a long talk
about what to do next. Both of
them were sure that the wizards had put a spell on the
King, and they were just as sure that the sword could break
the spell. Unfortunately, the sword could only be used by one
of the Kings of the Enchanted Forest or his children, and
then only when the earth, air, and water of the En- chanted
Forest and the fire of the sword itself had recognized the
person holding it as a rightful heir of the sword. And the
only way to be recognized was to go out in the Enchanted Forest
and hope you would do the right things at the right times. Mother
and Kazul spent a lot of time trying to figure out a way
to get the sword to work for someone besides the King,
but they never did. Then Mother found out she was going
to have a baby, and about that time Antorell found her. He
blamed her for his father's death, because she'd taken
the sword, and he tried to kill her. Mother had to melt him
again. After
that. Mother decided that she'd better find some- where
to hide until I was old enough to use the sword. The wizards
were hunting for the sword, but as long as it stayed inside
the Enchanted Forest it was invisible to them. Mother, however,
wasn't, and she knew that if she stayed in the Enchanted
Forest, one of the wizards' spells would find her eventually.
On the other hand, she couldn't take the sword out of
the forest and still keep it hidden, any more than the wizards
could. So
Mother hid the sword inside the forest, then left and never
went back until the day she gave the sword to me. She put
up some good spells to keep Antorell from finding us,
then waited. She taught me very carefully, without ever telling
me anything about the sword or the King of the Enchanted
Forest or the war with the wizards, so that I would
have a chance of being recognized by the sword and reaching
the castle without getting caught by one of the wizards'
spells. "I'm
afraid it was rather hard on you, Daystar," she said. "But
we couldn't think of anything else that had a chance of
working." Talking
to Dragons 225 "Well,
/ think we were lucky," Shiara said. The
King smiled at me. "Kings of the Enchanted Forest are
supposed to be lucky." Shiara
blinked. "You weren't very lucky, were you? What
did those wizards do to you, anyway?" The
King shook his head. "Zemenar made a bad mistake when he
attacked the castle without bringing the sword with him. He
and about ten others broke into the castle during the
battle. I got a couple of them, but without the sword I was
outnumbered a little too badly. They wanted to kill me, but
they couldn't do it inside the castle without the sword, and
they couldn't take me outside the castle because of the dragons.
So Zemenar decided to put me in storage, in a manner
of speaking, while he went back for the sword. The simulacrum
was a decoy, in case someone managed to get into
the castle while he was gone." "But
where were you for seventeen years?" Shiara said. "There
are... places that can be reached through the proper
doors, places that can't be gotten into or out of except through
such a door. Some of them are very large; some aren't.
Zemenar found one that suited him and put me in it,
then hid the door. Without the sword or the key, I couldn't get out
until someone put the door back up." "But
I still don't understand about Antorell. He acted as if he
wanted to do something to Daystar a lot more than he wanted
the sword." "Antorell
never knew what the sword was," Mother said. "Zemenar
and the Head Wizard were the only ones who knew
the whole story, and after the way Antorell failed to guard
the sword, the Head Wizard wouldn't tell him any- thing." "Ha!"
said Shiara. "Served him right. But what did Day- star do
to Antorell, anyway? And how? He never did any- thing
like it before." "He
couldn't do it before," Father said. "The Kings of the
Enchanted Forest can use the magic of the forest directly, but
only after the sword has acknowledged them. Daystar wasn't
acknowledged until he put the sword into the fire." "Oh."
Shiara sat back, looking thoughtful. There
was a moment's silence, then I thought of some- 226
Patricia C. Wrede thing
else I wanted to ask about. "Mother," I said, "do you know
anything about fire-witches' magic?" "Yes,
of course," she said. "Why do you want to know?" "Could
you teach Shiara how to do things?" I said. "She helped
me a lot, and I think she ought to have some sort of
reward, and that's why she came to the Enchanted Forest in the
first place." "I
didn't do very much," Shiara objected. "You kept me from
staying a statue, and I think you saved my life when the
roof of the Caves of Chance fell in. You're the one who deserves
a reward." "I
think," Mother broke in before I could answer Shiara, "that
it is time you told us what you have been doing these past
few days. I have a general idea, but I would like a few more
details, and Mendanbar hasn't heard anything about it
yet." I
looked at Father, and he nodded, so Shiara and I went through
our story again. I did most of the talking, with Shiara
putting in a comment now and then when she thought I was
leaving something out. I finished by explaining about Shiara's
magic. Both Mother and the King looked rather startled,
and then the King began to smile. "A
polite fire-witch," he said thoughtfully. "Very un- usual." "I
don't want to have to be polite to people!" Shiara said angrily. "Why
not?" I said. "You're getting much better at it." "Especially
not to youF Shiara said. "I
can understand that," Father said. "It's his fault, after all." "What?"
said Shiara and I together. "It's
Daystar's fault that you have to be polite," Father repeated.
"His and the sword's. One of the things the sword does
besides controlling wizards is unlocking people's tal- ents,
particularly magical talents. When you met Day star, both of
you touched the sword at the same time. You wanted to be
able to use your magic and Daystar wanted you to be more
polite; I think the sword did the best it could, under the
circumstances." "I
knew it!" Shiara glared at me. "I said it sounded like Talking
to Dragons 227 something
that stupid sword would do!" "I'm
sorry," I said. "I didn't know. But at least you can use
your magic now, sometimes; isn't that better than not being
able to use it at all?" "No!"
said Shiara. "It's worse! I have to go home and be nice
to people, and it probably won't work most of the time
because I have to mean it, and how can I mean it if I'm
always thinking about being able to do magic? And it's boring
at home, and people will still keep expecting me to do
things I can't do. I don't even know anyone who could teach
me about magic even if I could get it to work all the time.
I'll never leam anything!" Little
flickers of flame started running down Shiara's cheeks.
It took me a minute to realize that she was crying fire,
and when I did, I didn't know what to do about it. "That
is quite enough of that," Mother said while I was still
thinking. Shiara looked up. "You
don't know what it's like! It's horrible." "On
the contrary, I know quite well what it's like," Mother
said. "And the solution is quite obvious. In fact, it's
the same one I used." "What?"
Shiara blinked, and the flame-tears stopped run- ning
down her face. "What do you mean?" "You
can become Kazul's Princess," Mother said. "She doesn't
have one at the moment. It would have a great many advantages
on both sides. You will leam considerably more about
magic, dragons, and the Enchanted Forest than you would
anywhere else, and Kazul will get a Princess who can't
be accidentally roasted if one of the other dragons gets out of
hand. And you'll be living nearby, which will give Daystar
and Mendanbar a chance to figure out how to re- verse
that ridiculous politeness spell." "But
I'm not a Princess!" Shiara said. "If
Kazul says you are a Princess, then you are a Prin- cess,"
Mother said firmly. "Besides, it will be excellent experience
for you later." I opened
my mouth to ask what Mother meant by that, and
Shiara said, "But are you sure Kazul would be willing to do
it?" "Kazul
will have no objection whatever to training the 228
Patricia C. Wrede next
Queen of the Enchanted Forest," Mother said calmly. "You
don't need to worry about that." I
closed my mouth very quickly and looked at the floor, feeling
my face getting hot. I heard Shiara say, "Oh," in a small
voice, and then the King laughed. "Cimorene,
I think you're going a little fast," he said, still
chuckling. "If Shiara wants to go live with Kazul, I'm sure we
can make the arrangements, but there's no reason to
hurry. She can stay here until she decides; there's plenty of
room. Now, if you don't mind, I think we should go back
outside; Kazul said something about a feast, and I haven't
had a good meal in seventeen years." Mother
didn't object, so the King moved us all to the feast
with another wave. Everyone was there: dwarves and dragons
and elves and cats, and even a few wizards who had
been on the King's side. Morwen was there, too, but she
spent quite a bit of time popping back to the castle to make
sure Telemain wasn't doing anything she disapproved of. Mother
and the King sat at one end of a long table, and Kazul sat
at the other. Shiara and I sat in the middle. The people
in between us kept changing, and all of them wanted to hear
about how the King and Mother had gotten married, and how
Mother had stolen the sword back, and how Shiara and I
had gotten into the castle and broken the spell on the King. "I'm
getting tired of this," Shiara whispered to me while some of
the people next to us were changing seats. "Let's go
someplace else for a while, and let them tell each other about
the stupid wizards. I don't want to talk about it any- more." "I
don't, either, but I don't think we should leave," I said. "You
don't? No, of course you don't. How very tire- some,"
said a squeaky voice from the ground by my left foot. "Suz!"
I said, looking down. "Where did you come from?" "The
forest, of course," said the lizard. He ran up the leg of
the table in a thin gold streak, then stopped and looked around
nervously. "Is that—that kitten anywhere close by?" Talking
to Dragons 229 "No,
she's inside," said Shiara. "I don't think she likes the
crowd. Why?" The
lizard looked at her. "If you'd ever been jumped on by
something four times as big as you are, and been rolled around
until you were dizzy, not to mention bruised, you wouldn't
have to ask." He balanced on his tail and peered over
the edge of a bowl of nuts. "Would
you like something to eat?" I said. "I
believe I would," said Suz. He made a very fast bounc- ing
motion, and a moment later he was holding one of the nuts.
"What are you going to do now that the wizards are gone?" "They
aren't all gone," I said. "Some of them were on our
side, and I think some of the others actually got away." "They
did?" Suz considered for a moment. "I suppose they
did. How very annoying. But what are you going to do?"
He looked from me to Shiara and back. "I'm
going to be Kazul's Princess," Shiara said before I could
answer. Suz
fell over backward, just missing a silver bowl full of
cranberry jelly. "Oh my gracious goodness my oh!" he squeaked.
"However did that happen?" "Mother
suggested it," I said. I looked at Shiara. "But I
thought you hadn't made up your mind yet." "I
just decided," Shiara said. "Home is boring, and this way I
can leam things, and maybe even stop having to be polite
to get my magic to work." I
suspected Shiara was more interested in not having to be
polite than she was in learning things, but I didn't say so.
"I'm glad you're going to be staying," I said instead. "You
are?" Suz said skeptically. He peered up at me. "Why,
you really are! How amazing." I
didn't know what to say to that, but fortunately I didn't have
time to think about it. Father and Mother and Kazul all
stood up just then and everyone else got very quiet. Father
looked around for a moment, smiled, and started speaking. First
he thanked everyone for coming to help with the wizards,
and then he introduced Mother formally as "my wife,
Cimorene." All the dragons and elves and other people 230 Patricia C. Wrede shouted
and applauded; the din was tremendous. Then he introduced
me, and I had to stand up and be clapped at. After
that, Kazul said that the dragons were pleased to be of
assistance, and everyone sat down and started talking again.
The whole thing didn't take very much time, which surprised
me. I'd thought speeches at feasts were supposed to be
longer. Even
with short speeches, the feast lasted longer than I expected.
Shiara left after a while, to go find Nightwitch and
talk to the little dragon. I stayed at the table. I didn't have
much choice; every time I tried to get up, someone new
would pounce on me and start asking questions. I got very
tired of it after a while, but I couldn't seem to get away. I
was glad when it was finally over. The
next few days were a little hectic, but then the elves and
dragons who'd been in the battle went home and things started
to settle down a little. Morwen and Telemain were almost
the last to leave, because of Telemain's shoulder. Morwen
had to stay to take care of it, and she wouldn't let Telemain
go anywhere until he was well. "It's
simply ridiculous," Telemain grumbled at breakfast on the
third morning after the battle. "I am quite capable of
traveling with my arm in a sling." "Yes,
and the first time you ran across a slowstone or a pool of
transformation-water you'd take your arm out of the sling
and start tinkering with it," Morwen said. "Which would
not be good for that shoulder." Telemain
glared at her. "I disagree." "You
may disagree all you wish, but you aren't leaving the
castle for another two days," Morwen said. She picked up a
basket of muffins, took one, and passed the rest to Mother. "Two
days!" Mother
raised an eyebrow. "Is our hospitality unwel- come?" "No,
of course not, but... Cimorene, I have a tremen- dous
amount to do if I'm to be ready for the wedding in time." I
hadn't heard about any weddings being planned, but I Talking
to Dragons 231 was
carefully not looking at Shiara anyway. Then Father looked
up. "Wedding?"
he said. Morwen
smiled. "Telemain and I are getting married." Shiara
and Father and I all said, "What!?" at the same time,
but we were nearly drowned out by a chorus of startled meows
from Morwen's cats. "Yes,
married," Morwen said to one of them. "And it has
nothing to do with you, so you may as well be quiet and
accept it." The
cats made unhappy noises for another minute, until Morwen
frowned at them. Then they all got up and went over to
a comer of the room, where they sat muttering to each
other with their tails twitching. Morwen watched for a
moment before she nodded and turned back to the table. "They'll
get used to the idea," she said. "Urn,
congratulations to both of you," I said. Father
was looking at Mother. "Cimorene, did you know about
this?" "Not
exactly," Mother said, and smiled. "I
see." Father shook his head. "Well, congratulations." "Thank
you," Telemain said. He started to reach for a plate
of sausages with his bad arm, and Morwen stopped him. Two
days later, Morwen announced that Telemain's arm was
well enough for him to travel. She promised to invite all of
us to the wedding, even the dragons, and then she and
Telemain left the castle, followed by a string of dis- approving
cats. Shiara
and Kazul were the last to leave. I was a little taken
aback when I heard. It hadn't occurred to me that Kazul
lived in the Mountains of Morning, and that if Shiara was
going to be Kazul's Princess, she would have to live there,
too. I didn't say anything about it, though; I felt too silly
for not having realized it before. Father
and Mother and I went out to see them off. Mother gave
Shiara some advice about princessing, and Father told her
that if she was going to glare at dragons, she'd have to leam to
glare politely. Then they both went to talk to Kazul. 232 Patricia C. Wrede Shiara
looked at me. "I'm
beginning to wonder whether I really want to do this or
not," she said. "Does he really expect me to practice glaring
at people?" "No,
just at dragons," I said. "If he wanted you to glare at
everyone, he would have said so." "Well,
I think it's— Nightwitch!" Shiara bent to retrieve the
kitten, who had been investigating one of Shiara's bun- dles a
little too vigorously. "Where
did you get all of this, anyway?" I asked as she straightened
up. There were at least three bundles in the heap
Nightwitch had been climbing, and I knew Shiara hadn't
had any of them when we'd arrived at the castle. "Morwen
gave me that one, and Cimorene gave me the others,"
Shiara said. "She said I would need them if I was going
to live with Kazul. I don't even know what's in all of them
yet." "Oh."
I couldn't think of anything else to say because just
then I realized how much I was going to miss having Shiara
around. The Mountains of Morning weren't exactly close
to the castle, and I didn't think Kazul would be in- terested
in flying back and forth every day. Shiara
frowned. "What's the matter with you?" "I
was just wishing you were going to be living a little closer
to the castle," I said. "I
don't see why. I'm going to have to come here a lot anyway,
at least until you get that stupid politeness spell off of
me so I can use my fire-magic. So what difference does it
make? I'm the one who has to do all the traveling back
and forth." Shiara looked toward Kazul. "I think they're ready
to go. Come on, Daystar." She
picked up one of the bundles and started walking. I didn't
say anything, but I felt a lot happier than I had a few minutes
earlier. Getting rid of that spell didn't sound easy, and
until it was gone Shiara would have to spend quite a bit of
time at the castle. I was sure that if I had enough time, I
could think of some reason for her to keep visiting after
the spell was gone, and even if I couldn't, Mother would
be able to. Smiling, I picked up the other two bundles and
started after Shiara. 1 MOTHER
TAUGHT ME to be polite to dragons. Particularly polite,
I mean; she taught me to be ordinary polite to every- one.
Well, it makes sense. With all the enchanted Princesses and
disguised wizards and transformed Kings and so on wandering
around, you never know whom you might be talking
to. But dragons are a special case. Not
that I ever actually talked to one until after I left home.
Even around the edge of the Enchanted Forest, drag- ons
aren't exactly common. It's the principle that matters, though;
always be polite to a dragon. It's more difficult than it
sounds; dragon etiquette is incredibly complicated, and if
you make a mistake, the dragon eats you. But I was well
trained. Dragon
etiquette wasn't the only thing Mother taught me.
Reading and writing are unusual skills for a poor boy, but I
learned them. Music, too, and fighting. Don't ask me where
Mother learned to use a sword; she wouldn't tell me. Until I
was thirteen, I didn't even know we had one in the house.
I even learned a little magic. Mother wasn't exactly pleased,
but growing up on the edge of the Enchanted Forest I had
to know some things. Mother
was tall and slender, and very impressive when 1 2 Patricia C. Wrede she
wanted to be. Most of the time she wore her hair in two
black braids wound around and around her head, but when
she really wanted to impress someone she let it hang straight
to her feet. A lot of the disguised Princes who stopped
at our cottage on their way into the Enchanted Forest thought
Mother was a sorceress or something. You can't really
blame them. Who else would want to live right at the edge of
a place like that? Sometimes
I thought they were right. Mother always knew
exactly what kind of directions to give them, even if they
didn't tell her what they were looking for. I never saw Mother
do any real magic, though, so I never thought about it
much. Until the day the wizard found us. I knew
right away he was a wizard. He had the same sort of
feel of magic that the unicorns and griffins have, when
you catch a glimpse of them farther on in the forest. I was a
little surprised; we didn't get too many wizards. Most of
them preferred to go into the forest through the Gates
of Mist and Pearl at the top of the Crystal Falls, or through
the Caves of Fire and Night. The few that bothered to walk
would never think of stopping at our cottage. But this
one was unusual. He
turned off the road and walked right past me without saying
anything; I thought that was a little strange. He went straight
to the door of our cottage and banged the head of his
staff against it. The door splintered and fell apart. I decided
that I didn't like him much. Mother
was cooking rabbit stew in the big black pot over the
chimney fire. She didn't even look up when the door fell
in. The wizard stood there for a minute, and I sneaked a
little closer so I could see better. He was frowning; some- how I
got the impression he wasn't used to being ignored. Mother
kept stirring the stew. "Well,
Cimorene, I have found you," the wizard said at last. "It
took you long enough," Mother said without turning. "You're
getting slow." "You
know why I am here." Mother
shrugged. "You won't get what you want; you're sixteen
years too late. I told you, you're getting slow." 4
Patricia C. Wrede "Hah!
I can take the sword now, and the boy as well. There
is nothing you can do to stop me this time," the wizard said. I
could tell he was trying to sound menacing, but he didn't
do a very good job. Mother
finally turned around. I took one look at her face and
backed up a couple of steps. She looked at the wizard for a
minute and started to smile. "Nothing, Antorell? Are you
sure?" The
wizard laughed and raised his staff. I backed up another
couple of steps. I mean, I wanted to see what was going
on, but I'm not stupid. He paused a moment—for effect,
I think—and Mother pointed at him. He
screamed and started to collapse in on himself. "No! Not
again!" He shrank pretty quickly, all but his head. He was
shouting nearly the whole time. "I'll get you, Cimorene! I'll be
back! You can't stop me! I'll—" Then his head collapsed
and there was nothing left but a little puddle of brown
goo and his staff. I
stared at the puddle. All I could think was, I never knew
Mother could do that. Mother let me stand there for a while
before she told me to clean it up. "Be sure you don't touch
the staff," she reminded me. "And don't forget to wash
your hands before you come to dinner." I went to get a
bucket; when I came back, the staff was gone and Mother was
stirring the stew as if nothing had happened. She didn't mention
the wizard again until the next morning. I was
out by the remains of our door, trying to find some way of
fixing it. I didn't think my chances were very good. I was
trying to nail a couple of pieces together when I looked up and
saw Mother walking out of the Enchanted Forest. I was so
surprised I dropped the hammer and nearly smashed my
foot. Mother never went into the Enchanted Forest. Never.
Then I saw the sword she was carrying, and if I'd still
been holding the hammer, I'd have dropped it again. Even
from a distance, I could tell it wasn't an ordinary sword
like the one I usually practiced with. This one was about
the same size and shape as mine, but it shone a little too
brightly and looked a little too sharp to be ordinary. Mother
carried it carefully; she wasn't wearing a sheath, so there
wasn't anything else she could do with it. She brought Talking
to Dragons 5 it over
to me and set it down on top of the boards I'd been working
on. "Don't touch it," she said, and went on into the
house. I had a
hard time following Mother's instructions. The more I
looked at the sword, the more I wanted to pick it up and
try a few of the passes Mother had taught me. It was
such a beautiful weapon! Just thinking about it made me
shiver. But Mother always had good reasons for the things
she told me to do, so I waited. I
didn't have to wait long; Mother came back almost immediately.
She had a swordbelt and a sheath with her that
I'd never seen before. They were old—so old the brown leather
was turning grey—and very, very plain. I was a little
disappointed; I'd expected something a little more im- pressive. Mother
went straight to the sword and put it in the sheath. She
seemed to relax a little then, as if she'd been worried about
something. I started wondering just what that weapon did.
Mother almost never worried. I didn't have much time to
think about it, though; as soon as she had sheathed the sword,
Mother turned and gave me her you're-not-much- but-you'11-have-to-do
look. I started to wony. Mother
picked up the swordbelt. "This is for you, Day- star."
I reached for it, but she shook her head. "No, I'll do it this
time. Hold still." She bent down and buckled the belt around
my waist, then hung the sheathed sword on the belt. I felt
a little strange letting her do it, and my elbows kept getting
in the way. Finally she straightened up. "Now,
Day star, I have a few things to tell you before you
leave." "Leave?"
I was shocked. Mother had never mentioned leaving
before. It occurred to me that she'd said "you," not "we."
I swallowed hard. "By myself?" "Of
course. You're sixteen; it's time you left, and I'm certainly
not coming with you. Now pay attention." She gave me
one of her sharp looks. I shut up and paid attention. "You
have a sword, and you know nearly as much as I can
safely teach you. I don't want to see you back here again
until you can explain to me why you had to leave. Do you
understand?" I nodded. Mother went on, "You 6 Patricia C. Wrede should
probably start with the Enchanted Forest; one way or
another, things will happen more quickly there. Don't lose
your sword, and don't take it out unless you need to use it.
Oh, and watch out for Antorell. He may try to make trouble
again, but it'll be a couple of days before you have to
worry about that. It'll take that long for him to get himself back
together and find out where I put his staff. All right?" "But
you haven't explained anything!" I blurted. "Why did
that wizard come here yesterday, anyway? Why should he want
to make trouble for me? And if he's so dangerous, why are
you sending me—" "Daystar!"
I stopped in midsentence. Mother glared at me.
"What happened to the manners I've tried to teach you?" "I—I'm
sorry. Mother," I said. "I was upset." "Being
upset is no excuse for rudeness," Mother said sternly.
"If you're going to be rude, do it for a reason and get
something from it." I nodded. Mother smiled. "I know it's
hard, and it's rather short notice. This will probably be the
best chance we get, though, and I can't waste it just to give
you time to get used to the idea of leaving home." I was
more confused than ever, but I could see Mother wasn't
going to tell me anything more. She looked at me for
another moment, then turned and walked toward the cottage.
At the door. Mother stopped and looked back. "Good
luck, Daystar. And stop wasting time. You don't have
much of it." Before I could say anything, she disap- peared
inside. I
started off toward the Enchanted Forest. Mother's ad- vice
was always good; besides, I was afraid she'd melt me or
something if I hung around very long. I didn't bother to follow
the road; I just headed for the forest. The road isn't particularly
useful, anyway. It disappears as soon as you get
past the outer edge of the forest, or at least, it usually does.
At any rate, I wanted to stick to the part of the En- chanted
Forest I knew, to start with. The
Enchanted Forest comes in two parts, the Outer Forest
and the Deep Woods. Most people don't know that. I'd
gone herb gathering in the Outer Forest; it's relatively safe,
if you know what you're doing. I'd never been much more
than an hour's walk from our cottage, but I had to start
somewhere. I felt
the little tingle on my skin that marked the border between
the ordinary woods, where our cottage was, and the
outer part of the Enchanted Forest. Some people have trouble
getting in and out of the Enchanted Forest, but I never
had. I was feeling excited and adventurous, and maybe a
little scared. I mean, for years I'd watched all those Princes and
heroes and so on go into the forest, and now it was my turn. I
looked back over my shoulder to see if Mother was watching.
The cottage was gone. That
shook me. You just don't expect the place you've lived
in for sixteen years to vanish like that. I looked around. None of
the woods looked familiar, either. The trees were huge,
much larger than the ones by our cottage. I couldn't reach
more than a quarter of the way around the trunk of the
smallest one. The ground was covered with deep green moss,
which ran right up to the bases of the trees and stopped short.
I could see a couple of bushes, one that had three different
colors of flowers on it. Everything felt very dark and
green and alive. I
shivered. This wasn't the Outer Forest. This was the Deep
Woods. I stood
and waited for a couple of minutes, but nothing much
happened. Somehow, I wasn't reassured. Being lost in the
Enchanted Forest is not conducive to peace of mind. There
wasn't really anything I could do about it, though. After a
while I started walking, feeling considerably less adventurous
and considerably more scared. I
walked for a long time. After a while I quit being scared, at
least mostly. Finally I started looking for a place to rest; my feet
hurt and I was getting very tired. I was careful, though;
I didn't want to sit on a flower that used to be somebody
important or anything like that. After about fif- teen
minutes I found a spot that looked all right, and I started to sit
down. Unfortunately, I'd forgotten I was wearing the sword;
it got tangled up in my legs and I sort of fell over. Somebody
giggled. I looked around and didn't see any- one, so
I decided to get untangled first. I straightened my 8 Patricia C. Wrede legs
out and sat up, making sure the swordbelt was out of the way
this time. Then I took a second look around. I still didn't
see anyone, but the same somebody giggled again. "Sir
or madam or—" I stopped. What was the proper honorific
for something that wasn't male or female? I was pretty
sure there was one, but I couldn't remember it. "Oh,
don't bother," said a high squeaking voice. "I never cared
much for all that fancy stuff." I still
didn't see anyone. "Forgive my stupidity, but I can't
seem to find where you are," I said. The
giggle came again. "Down here, silly." I
looked down and jumped. A little gold lizard was sitting right
next to my hand. He was about twice as long as my middle
finger, and half of that was tail. "Hey, watch it!" he
said. "You might hurt someone if you keep jumping around
like that. Me, for instance. You big people are so careless." "I'm
very sorry," I said politely. The
lizard lifted his head. "You are? Yes, you are! How amazing.
Who are you, anyway?" "My
name is Daystar," I said, bowing slightly. It was a little
awkward from a sitting position, but I managed. Being polite
to a lizard felt peculiar, but there are only two rules of
behavior in the Enchanted Forest: Don't take anything for
granted, and be polite to everyone. That's if you don't live
there; the inhabitants have their own codes, which it's better
not to ask about. "You're
Daystar?" The lizard did something very tangled very
quickly and ended up balanced on his tail. "So you are!
Well, my goodness. I hadn't expected to see you around here
for a while yet." "You
were expecting me?" "Of
course." The lizard looked smug. "I know everything that
goes on in the Enchanted Forest. Absolutely everything! I know
you from your little forays in the Outer Forest; it was
only a matter of time before you got this far. I thought it
would take longer, though. I'm Suz, by the way." "Pleased
to meet you," I said. "You
are?" The lizard leaned forward and almost lost his
balance. "Yes, you really are! How positively extraor- Talking
to Dragons 9 dinary.
Whatever are you doing in the Enchanted Forest?" "I
don't know," I said. "You
don't know!" The lizard did a backflip and scurried up onto
a fat tree root, where he would have a better view. He
balanced on his tail again and looked at me thoughtfully. "If
you don't know what you're doing, why are you here?" I
thought for a moment. "Do you really know everything that
happens in this forest?" "Of
course I do." Suz looked offended. An offended lizard
is an interesting sight. "I
didn't mean to hurt your feelings or anything," I said hastily.
"I just wondered if you could tell me where this came
from." I touched the sword Mother had given me. The lizard
squinted in my general direction. "What? It's on the
wrong side of you, silly; bring it over where I can see it.
If it came from the Enchanted Forest, I can tell you about
it." I
lifted the sword, sheath and all, and twisted around so the
sword was on the same side of me as Suz. The lizard promptly
fell over backward. "Oh
dear me my gracious goodness my oh," he squeaked. "Do
you know what this is?" "I
wouldn't have asked you if I knew," I said. "It's a sword;
I think it's magic." "It's
a sword! He thinks it's magic!" Suz ran around twice
in a small circle, then did the tail-balancing trick again.
"Where did you get it?" the little lizard demanded. "My
mother gave it to me; she got it out of the Enchanted Forest
somewhere," I said. I was getting a little tired of this.
"Are you going to answer my question?" "Your
mother gave it to you. The Sword of the Sleeping King,
that everyone in the world has been looking for for fifteen
or twenty years, and your mother gave it to you." The
lizard got so agitated he fell over again. "That isn't right.
That isn't reasonable. My dear boy, that simply isn't done!
Even in the Enchanted Forest there is a proper order for
these things! Someone will have to notify Kazul im- mediately.
Oh, dear, what a stir this will cause!" "I'm
sorry; I didn't know. What's the Sword of the Sleep- ing
King?" I'd never heard of it before, which rather sur- 10
Patricia C. Wrede prised
me. After Mother made me memorize all those pages of
names and titles and peculiar weapons, I'd thought I knew
the name of every magic sword in the world. It sur- prised
Suz, too. "You
don't know?" The lizard froze in the middle of getting
back up on his tail. He looked like a golden pretzel. "No,
you don't! Oh, my. You'd better go to the castle at once.
Kazul will know what to do with you. I'd better go there
myself, right away." Suz untwisted and darted off into the
undergrowth. "Wait!"
I shouted. "What castle? Who is Kazul? And why—" The
lizard looked back. "I don't have time for that! And even if
I did, I couldn't tell you. You have to find out yourself;
magic swords always work that way. Don't you know
anything?" "Do
you want me to recite the names of the Four Hundred Minor
Swords of Korred the Spellsmith? I know lots of things;
I just don't know about this. How do I find out?" "Follow
the sword, silly," Suz said, and disappeared among
the leaves. I
DIDN'T TRY to chase the lizard. For one thing, there wasn't much
point in it; Suz was small enough to hide practically anywhere.
For another, I didn't want to go running through me
Enchanted Forest. People get killed that way, or en- chanted,
or other unpleasant things. And besides, I wanted to
think. I
settled back against the tree and looked down at the sword,
a little unhappily. "Follow the sword," Suz had said. But
Mother had told me not to take it out unless I meant to use
it, and I didn't flunk "following" it was the kind of use she
meant. Besides, I wasn't sure I wanted to draw a magic
sword in the middle of the Enchanted Forest, espe- cially
one I didn't know anything about. I decided to try something
else. I stood
up and looked around. Over on my right there was a
little gap in the trees, not enough to call a clearing, just a
place where me trees were farther apart. I went over to the
middle of it and stood there while I tried to unfasten the
sheath. It was a lot more complicated than it looked; finally
I had to take the whole belt off. I wrapped the belt around
the sheath and set the whole thing down in the middle of the
open space. I backed up a couple of steps and sat 11 12
Patricia C. Wrede down on
the ground with the hilt of the sword closest to me and
the end of the sheath pointing away from me. The
woods had gone very, very quiet. I didn't like that, but I
would have felt stupid if I'd gotten up and picked up the
sword without doing anything. Besides, leaving things half-finished
can be awfully dangerous. I took a deep breath and spoke
as steadily as I could. "Sword
of the Sleeping King, I
conjure thee: By
stream and starlight, By sun
and shadow, By song
and stormwind, Show me
thy tale!" It was
the simplest spell I knew; almost the only one, in fact.
It's supposed to let the spell-caster know more about the
nature of whatever object is named in the first line of the
chant. I didn't think the spell would work quite the same way on
a magic sword, but it shouldn't do any harm, and I was
hoping to find out something useful. I finished the spell,
and everything was quiet for about two heartbeats. Fast
heartbeats; I was nervous. Then the world turned over. That's
what it felt like. The ground started shaking, and the
part under the sword pushed up until it made a mound taller
than I was. I didn't have much of a chance to look at it; I
was being rolled all over the open space and trying to grab
hold of something. Then everything went dark, and I was
falling, and a huge, deep voice said solemnly, "All hail the
Bearer of the Sword!" And
then it was over. I was lying on the ground in the Enchanted
Forest, trying to dig my way through the moss. I
stopped and waited. Nothing else happened, so I sat up and
looked around. I was still sitting in the same not-quite- a-clearing,
with the sword and sheath in the middle. The sword... The
sword was standing upright, half-buried in a knee- high
mound that hadn't been there before. The blade was about a
handspan out of the sheath, and it glittered when the sun
got through the trees enough to hit it. I stood up Talking
to Dragons 13 and
walked out. The mound was covered with moss, just like
the rest of the forest floor; it could have been there forever.
I shivered, wondering how I was going to get the sheath
out of the ground. I put
one hand on the hilt of the sword, intending to shove
it back down into the sheath. When my hand touched the
sword, my whole arm started to tingle. I jerked my hand away
and stared at the sword. It just sat there. I reached out
again, this time for the sheath. As soon
as I touched it, the sheath slid out of the ground. The
belt was still wrapped around it, and there wasn't any dirt
clinging to either of them. I touched the hilt again. It still
made my arm tingle, but this time I was ready for it, and I
shoved it back into the sheath. Then I stuffed the swordbelt
under my arm and started walking. I was sure somebody
must have noticed what had just happened, and I
didn't want to be around when they came to find out what was
going on. I
didn't stop again until midaftemoon. By then I was hungry
as well as tired; I'd forgotten to bring any food with me, and
I certainly couldn't go back for it now. I sighed and sat
down under another tree to rest and think some more,
but I didn't get much thinking done. Mostly, I stared at the
sword. Finally,
I gave up. Sitting under a tree wasn't going to teach
me anything. I stood up and buckled on the swordbelt. As I
adjusted it, my hand touched the hilt of the sword again.
Three little tingles ran up my arm before I pulled my hand
away. I looked at the sword for a moment, then shrugged and
reached for the hilt with my right hand, as if I were going
to draw it. As soon
as my hand touched the hilt, I felt the tingling. This
time I didn't let go; I concentrated on the way it felt instead.
I got three distinct impressions. One was a low, sort of
background vibration, like a kitten purring in its sleep;
one was a deep rumbling feeling; and one was a bright buzz
like a bee in a jar. Almost as soon as I figured them out,
they started to fade. In another minute they were com- pletely
gone, and they didn't come back. I took
my hand off the sword's hilt, then put it back. I 14
Patricia C. Wrede didn't
feel anything. I tried a couple more times, but what- ever it
was had stopped. I finally gave up and started walking again.
I wasn't getting anywhere trying to figure out the sword,
and I had to find somewhere to spend the night. At
least I didn't have to worry about giants; they live farther
east, by the Mountains of Morning. It occurred to me
suddenly that I didn't know where I was; I might be in the
Mountains of Morning for all I knew. It wasn't a par- ticularly
cheerful thought. I started walking more quietly. I'd
been walking for nearly half an hour when I realized that I
knew where I was going. Unfortunately, I didn't know where
I'd be when I got there. It was very odd, and I was a
little uneasy until I realized that I didn't have to go that direction.
I could just as easily turn around and walk the other
way, or go sideways. In fact, I did for a while, just to
prove I could. After
that I felt better, so I stopped avoiding whatever it was
and. started walking toward it again. I wasn't going to get
anywhere if I kept avoiding things; I might miss something
important. Besides, there isn't any way you can avoid
everything in the Enchanted Forest. This way, at least I knew
something was coming. I was
still walking very quietly when I heard the noises; it
sounded like somebody crying. I headed toward the sound, wondering
what I was getting myself into. You can't just ignore
something like that, especially in the Enchanted For- est. On
the other hand... I stopped, staring at a thick, prickly
hedge. It was taller than my head, and impossible to see
through, much less shove through. The crying was coming
from the other side. I bent
over. The bushes were much too close together for me
to crawl through them. I could make out sunlight and
long red hair and a brown tunic on the other side, but not
much else. I stood up and walked to one side, looking for a
thin spot in the hedge. It wasn't long before I realized I was
going in a circle. Terrific, I thought. I bet it goes all the way
around without breaking. I kept walking anyway, just in
case. It
didn't take long to make the full circle. I bent over and
peered through the bushes again. Suz might be able to Talking
to Dragons 15 get
through, but I never would. I stood up and tapped lightly on the
outside of the bushes. "Excuse
me, please, but would you mind letting me through?"
I said as politely as I could. The
bushes rustled and pulled apart. I stared at them for a
minute; I hadn't really thought it would work. The bushes rustled
again; somehow they managed to sound impatient. "Ah,
thank you very much," I said, and stepped through. The
hedge closed behind me with a prim swish, and I looked
around. The inside of the hedge was a circular clear- ing
full of sunlight and the feel of magic. A red-haired girl in a
brown tunic was lying at one side of the clearing; she sat up
as I came in, and her face was tearstained. "Who
are you?" she demanded fiercely as soon as she saw me.
"And what do you want?" She looked about my age,
but I never was very good at guessing how old people are. "My
name is Daystar," I said. "I heard you, um, crying, and I
wanted to see if I could do anything." She
looked at me suspiciously. "You just walked through that
hedge? Ha! I've been trying to get out of here all day. It's
not that easy. I think you're a wizard." I noticed some scratches
on her arms and some fuzzy places in the tunic where
it might have caught on branches or trees. "I'm
not a wizard. Maybe it's easier to get in than it is to get
out," I offered. The
red-haired girl sat back. "That could be true," she said a
little less belligerently. She eyed me skeptically; I tried
to look trustworthy. "Well, you don't look like a wiz- ard,"
she said at last. "Can you get out again?" "I
don't know," I said. "Well,
try!" she said, "No, wait; I'll stand next to you so I
can get out, too. Then we'll both be rescued." She jumped
to her feet. "What are you waiting for?" "I'm
sorry, but I don't really think I need to be rescued," I said.
"I was looking for a place to spend the night and this
seems pretty safe. I'm not sure I want to leave just yet. Besides,
I don't know anything about you. Maybe I don't want to
rescue you." \ "Oh, rats." The redhead sat down
again. "I thought you 16
Patricia C. Wrede might
be a hero; you can talk them into anything. Stupid creatures." "Who
are you?" I asked. "And why are you worried about
wizards?" "I
suppose it won't matter if I tell you," she said after thinking
for a minute. "They're chasing me. My name's Shiara,"
she added. "Wizards
are chasing you? More than one?" I was im- pressed.
Wizards usually don't cooperate much, even the ones
who belong to the Society of Wizards. "What did you do?" Shiara
hesitated, then threw her hair back over her shoul- der
with a toss of her head. "I," she said defiantly, "am a fire-witch." "You're
a fire-witch?" Well, she had the red hair for it, but
that doesn't always mean someone is a fire-witch. She must
have heard the doubt in my voice, because she scowled at me. "I
am a fire-witch! I am!" "I
didn't say you weren't," I said hastily. That only seemed
to make it worse. "You
don't believe me!" she said accusingly. "But I am so a
fire-witch! I am! I am!" She was shouting by the time
she finished. She glared at me, and her hair burst into
flame. That
settled it; she really was a fire-witch. "I believe you, I
believe you," I said. "Uh, shouldn't you do something about
your hair?" Shiara
burst into tears and her hair went out. I stood there feeling
silly and useless. Finally I remembered my hand- kerchief;
Mother made me carry one all the time, even chopping
wood, so I actually had it with me. I pulled it out and
offered it to her. After a couple of sniffs, she took it and
mopped her face, but she didn't say anything. "I'm
sorry," I said finally. "I didn't mean to make you mad." "Well,
you did," she snapped. She crumpled the hand- kerchief
into a little ball and threw it at me. I
caught it and stuffed it back into my pocket. "I said I was
sorry." Talking
to Dragons 17 "I
can't help having a temper," Shiara said crossly. "All fire-witches
do." "Really?
I've never met one before. I've met heroes and Princes,
and once in a while even a wizard, but no fire- witches.
Does your hair always do that when you get mad?" "No,"
she said. She looked like she was going to cry again. "Why
are the wizards chasing you?" I asked hastily, hoping
it was a safer topic. "I
burned the Head Wizard's staff," Shiara said matter- of-factly. My jaw
dropped about a foot. A wizard's staff is the source
of his power; furthermore, most wizards store spells in
them. Sort of an emergency reserve. A lot of the staffs get
passed down from one wizard to the next, accumulating magic
as they go. They're practically indestructible. They get
lost a lot and then found in the nick of time under peculiar circumstances,
but I'd never heard of one being destroyed before.
And the Head Wizard's staff... "You
burned a wizard's staff?" I managed finally. "You
bet." Shiara's eyes glinted at the memory. "He deserved
it, too. But the rest of them got mad. So I ran away
while they were arguing about what to do with me." "And
you came to the Enchanted Forest? On purpose? Isn't
that a little extreme? I mean, you could get, well, enchanted.
Or killed, or something. This place is danger- ous." "Having
the whole Society of Wizards mad at you is just as
bad," she snapped. I
thought about it. She was right. "Why did you bum the
Head Wizard's staff?" I asked after a minute. "I
didn't like him," Shiara said shortly. I got the distinct impression
she didn't want to talk about it, so I decided to change
the subject again. Besides, my feet hurt. "Would
you mind if I sat down?" I asked. "I've been doing a
lot of walking today." She nodded. I moved the sword
out of the way and sat down; I was starting to get the
hang of it. Shiara saw the weapon and frowned. "Are
you sure you're not a hero or an apprentice hero '» or
something?" 18
Patricia C. Wrede "I
don't think I am," I said cautiously. "I'm not really sure." "You're
not sure? Don't you know who you are?" I
blinked. I'd never really thought about it that way. "I know
who I am," I said. "I just don't know what I'm supposed
to be doing. Except finding out what I'm supposed to be
doing." Shiara
stared at me. "I don't believe it. Nobody comes to the
Enchanted Forest without some kind of reason." "What's
yours, then?" I said. I was getting a little tired of
people and animals and things not believing me. "None
of your business!" Shiara said. She was glaring at me
again. Then she jumped up and glared down at me. "I
want to leave," she announced. "Right now." "All
right," I said. "But I thought you couldn't get through the
hedge." Shiara
stamped her foot, and a little flame flared up from it.
"I can't! Open it for me! Right now!" She was really mad,
but at least this time her hair wasn't burning. I was glad;
watching someone glare at you with her hair on fire is a
little unnerving. "I
don't want to open the hedge yet," I said reasonably. "I
don't even know if I can. Besides, it could be dangerous. There
are wolves in this forest. And it's getting dark; there could
be nightshades out there already. That may not bother a
fire-witch, but—" "I
hate you!" Shiara cried. She sounded like she meant it. "Just
because I don't want to get eaten by wolves or driven
mad by a nightshade or something?" I said, puzzled. "What's
wrong with that?" Shiara
didn't answer; she just turned her back on me. I watched
her for a minute, then sort of settled back on the ground.
Things were getting very complicated. I was lost in the
Enchanted Forest, with no food or water. I had a magic
sword I didn't want to use because it did strange things
to the ground. In another day or so I would probably have a
wizard looking for me. I still didn't have any idea how I
was going to figure out why Mother wanted me to leave
home. And then there was Shiara. Talking
to Dragons 19 Fire-witches
are rare. Nobody can learn to be one; you're either
bom one or you're not. They're very powerful. They can bum
anything, of course, and fire doesn't hurt them at all.
Fire-witches can leam almost any kind of magic there is.
They're immune to most spells, too, which is why wiz- ards
usually don't like them much. Fire-witches can even summon
Elementals and get them to listen. Well, some- times.
And Shiara was a fire-witch. With enough power to bum a
wizard's staff. The Head Wizard's staff. I
didn't think I wanted her to be mad at me. I
didn't know what to do about it, though. I didn't even know
what I'd done wrong, and I wasn't at all sure what to do
next. What do you say to a mad fire-witch? Right
about then I heard snuffling noises; Shiara was crying
again. I sighed and dug out my handkerchief. "I
didn't mean to make you mad," I said as I watched her mop
her face again. "I just keep doing it by accident. It'd
make things a lot easier for both of us if you would tell me what
I'm doing wrong so I can stop." Shiara
looked at me over the top of the handkerchief, which
was starting to look sort of damp and wrinkled. "You want to
talk to me? You're not scared?" She lowered the handkerchief
and stared at me. "You mean it!" "Of
course I mean it," I said. "Why shouldn't I? And why
should I be scared?" "I
guess I'd better tell you," she said with a sigh. THE
PROBLEM WAS, Shiara was a fire-witch who couldn't do
anything. On purpose, I mean. Things happened some- times
when she got mad, and once in a while she could make a
spell work, but most of the time she couldn't make anything
happen. She didn't have very many friends because everyone
was afraid of her. I could understand that. I mean, with a
temper like hers and no way of telling what would happen
when she lost it, people had reason to be nervous. On top
of that, everyone kept telling her about all the things
she ought to be able to do because she was a fire- witch.
Like not worrying about nightshades; that was why she got
mad at me. She was awfully sick of being told about what
fire-witches could do, especially when she couldn't. I
couldn't blame her for getting mad. And
then somebody told the Society of Wizards about this
fire-witch who couldn't cast spells or anything. They decided
it would be a great chance to find out more about fire-witches.
As I said, wizards don't get along with fire- witches
very well. So a whole bunch of wizards came and grabbed
Shiara right out of the middle of town. Shiara didn't like
it; she liked it even less when she found out they wanted her to
stand in the middle of a circle of wizards while they 21 22 Patricia C. Wrede threw
spells at her to see what would work. "I
said no," Shiara told me. "And they said I didn't have any
choice. That's when I burned the Head Wizard's staff." "They
don't sound like the wizards I've met," I said. Then I
remembered Antorell. "Most of them, anyway." "I
don't care; I don't like wizards," Shiara said. I couldn't blame
her, and I said so. She nodded .and went on, "Any- way, it
turned out that the wizards had brought me to the edge of
the Enchanted Forest. They said something about the
magic in the forest and fire-witches' magic being related. That
was before I got away. So I decided to see if there was
somewhere in the forest I could find out how to use my
magic. Only then I stumbled in here and I couldn't get out. I
was afraid the wizards would catch up with me, and I was
tired and hungry and mad. That's why I was crying." I
wished she hadn't mentioned being hungry; I'd almost forgotten
that I hadn't eaten since breakfast. But there wasn't anything
inside the hedge to eat, and I wasn't going to try opening
it. I thought I'd already done enough experimenting for one
day, and besides, it was getting dark. "What
are you doing in the Enchanted Forest?" Shiara asked when
I didn't say anything. "I
don't know," I said. "How
can you not know?" she demanded. "I told you why I
came!" So I
explained about Mother and the wizard. Shiara was very
interested. "I
think I want to meet your mother," she said. "After I learn
how to use my magic. Do you think she'd be willing to
teach me how to melt a wizard?" I said
I didn't know. "I
don't see how you can find out what you're supposed to be
doing just by wandering about the Enchanted Forest," Shiara
said. "Well,
you're planning to wander around until you find out how
to use your magic, aren't you?" I said. "I don't think I
really see the difference." "I
know what I'm doing!" Shiara said. "That's the dif- ference." "You
don't seem to know very much about the Enchantee \
)if«i-*>»f ••' Talking
to Dragons 23 Forest,"
I said. "Otherwise you wouldn't have gotten caught by this
hedge." Shiara
scowled, then looked suddenly thoughtful. "Is it more
dangerous to wander around the forest alone than it is with
someone?" "It
depends," I said. "Two people can attract more at- tention
than one, but sooner or later everyone in the En- chanted
Forest runs into something dangerous. And when you do
get into trouble, it's sort of nice to have someone around
to help." "Why
don't we stay together, then?" Shiara said. "After we get
out of this stupid hedge, I mean. As long as neither of us
knows exactly where we're supposed to be going, we might
as well wander in the same direction." "All
right," I said. It sounded like a good idea, especially since
it's hard to run into someone completely by accident in the
Enchanted Forest. Then
Shiara made me describe Antorell in detail. She decided
that he didn't sound like any of the wizards who had
kidnapped her. I wasn't sure whether that was good or bad. I
was beginning to like Shiara; she was sort of nice when
she wasn't mad. But if we were going to stick together, we
would have two sets of wizards looking for us, and that didn't
sound too good. Shiara was still curious, so I wound up
telling her about the sword and the lizard and everything, too. "The
Sword of the Sleeping King," she said thoughtfully when I
finished. "Well, it sounds important. Can you do that
spell again? I'd like to watch; maybe I could figure it out." "I
could do it, but I won't," I said. "Once was enough." "You
scared or something?" Shiara said scornfully. "I'm
not being scared, I'm being sensible," I said. "That was no
minor magic I set off. Are you trying to attract attention?" "No,
I suppose you're right. Will you let me see it, at least?" "Sure,
if you promise not to take it out of the sheath or say any
spells at it or anything," I said. I stood up and ,started
trying to unbuckle the belt. It was hard to do in the 24
Patricia C. Wrede daik.
Finally Shiara got tired of waiting and came and helped. It
still took a while, and my elbows got in the way again, but
finally we managed to get the swordbelt off. Shiara took the
sheath and squinted at the parts of the sword that showed. "I
can't see anything," she complained. "There
isn't much to see," I said. "Besides, it's dark. Maybe
we should wait until tomorrow." "I
wanted to see it now. Oh, all right." She handed it back,
hilt first. I took it and nearly let go again right away. The
tingling was back, the one that reminded me of a bee, and it
was a lot stronger than it had been before. "Watch
out!" Shiara said. "You almost dropped it." "It's
tingling again," I said. "It
is? Let me see." I handed the sword back, and Shiara touched
the hilt. "I don't feel anything. Are you sure?" "Of
course I'm sure." I reached out and put my hand on the
hilt, next to Shiara's. "Ow!"
I said, and Shiara went, "Oh!" and we both dropped the
sword. We looked at each other for a minute. "What
did it feel like to you?" I said finally. "Like
something pulling at me," Shiara said. She eyed the
sword. "You can have it back; I don't think I want to look at
it anymore." I
picked up the sword and put it back on. I still wanted to know
what it was doing, but I didn't want to do any more messing
around with it in the dark. Shiara and I talked about it for
a while, but we were both tired, and finally we decided to just
go to sleep. We would have plenty of time to ex- periment
in the morning if we still felt like it. Spending
the night in the Enchanted Forest sounds aw- fully
exciting, but it isn't really. Either you stay up all night so the
wolves and nightshades and things won't get you and they
don't, or you fall asleep and they do, or you find someplace
safe and sleep there and never know. We slept all
night, at least I did, and when we woke up in the morning the
hedge was still there. By that
time I was really hungry, and since there wasn't anything
to eat inside the hedge I was anxious to leave. So was
Shiara; she was still worried about the Society of Wiz- ards.
We got up and brushed the moss off our clothes, and Talking
to Dragons 25 I
checked the sword, just to be safe. "Will
you quit fussing with that and come open this stupid hedge?"
Shiara said. I
walked over to the bushes. They looked very dense and very
prickly. "Excuse me," I said to the hedge. "I would like to
thank you for keeping the wolves and things out all night,
and I would very much appreciate it if you would let me
through now." "That's
the dumbest..." Shiara began, and the bushes rustled
and parted. I grinned and stepped through. The branches
shut behind me with a snap. "Ow!" said Shiara. I
turned around. She was still on the other side of the hedge. "What
happened?" I yelled. "What
do you think happened? And you don't have to shout;
I'm not that far away." "I'm
sorry," I said. "Make
it open up again!" "I'll
try," I said doubtfully. I addressed the bushes again. "Excuse
me, but you seem to have a friend of mine inside, and she
can't get out. Will you please let her through?" The
bushes rustled smugly and didn't move apart at all. "I'd
really appreciate it if you would let her out," I said. "She's
nicer than you think." The bushes rustled again. This time
they sounded skeptical. They still didn't open. "Well?"
said Shiara's voice. I
sighed. 'They won't open up. I'm afraid you'll have to
apologize." "Apologize?
To a bush?" Shiara sounded outraged. "I won't!
I'll bum this hedge to cinders! I'll— Ow!" "I
really think you'd better apologize," I said. "Otherwise you
probably won't be able to get out until the wizards come." There
was silence for a while. Finally Shiara said, "Oh, all
right. I'm sorry I said you were a stupid hedge." She paused.
"Now will you please let me through?" Reluctantly,
the bushes pulled apart. Shiara sighed with relief
and stepped through. She almost didn't make it; the bushes
closed again so fast they caught a piece of her tunic. "Hey!"
she said. "Stop that!" i
"I hate to mention this," I said as I helped Shiara work 26
Patricia C. Wrede her
tunic free, "but you really ought to be more polite." "To
lizards and bushes? Ha!" She jerked her tunic free and
glared at the hedge. "I
mean it," I said. "It only gets you into trouble when you're
not." "I'm
a fire-witch," Shiara said sullenly. "People are sup- posed
to be polite to me." "I
thought you didn't like having everyone scared of you,"
I said. I turned to the bush. "Thank you very much," I told
it. The
branches rustled politely. I turned back to Shiara, who was
watching me with her mouth open. "If you act like
that all the time, I don't think people would like you much
even if you weren't a fire-witch. Good-bye." I turned around
and started walking. "Wait!"
I stopped. Shiara ran up beside me. "I—I'm sorry.
I guess I'm not used to being nice to people." "That
could really get you in trouble in the Enchanted Forest,"
I said. Shiara
looked back over her shoulder at the hedge and shuddered.
"I guess you're right. Well, I'll try." "All
right. Let's find something to eat." That
was easier to say than do. We found a bush that had
some berries on it, but half of them were blue and half were
red. I wasn't quite hungry enough to take a chance on
them, and neither was Shiara. She thought about it, but finally
decided not to. "If my fire-magic doesn't always work,
my immunity to magic might not always work, either," she
said. "I'd hate to turn into something awful just because of a
few berries." I thought that was very sensible. We kept going. Eventually
we found a clearing full of blackberry bram- bles.
It looked very odd sitting there in the middle of the Enchanted
Forest; it was too ordinary. The berries were full of
seeds, but we ate a lot of them anyway. I picked some extras
and tied them up in my handkerchief for later. When we
finished, we started walking again. It
wasn't a very exciting walk. The woods looked just the
same. The trees didn't get any smaller, the moss still covered
the ground, and every once in a while there was a Talking
to Dragons 27 peculiar
bush growing next to one of the trees. It would have
gotten boring after a while if Shiara hadn't been there. It was
sort of nice to have someone my own age to talk to; I'd
never had any friends. Most people didn't want their children
getting as close to the Enchanted Forest as we lived, so we
never had any visitors except the Princes and so on. I told
Shiara about living at the edge of the forest, and she told me
about the town she lived in. It was very interesting, to me,
anyway. By the
middle of the morning we were both getting hun- gry
again. Blackberries don't stick with you for long. We stopped
and got out the berries I'd saved in my handkerchief. They
were sort of squashed and messy, but they tasted fine. Then we
started walking again. It was a warm day, and by the
time we saw the stream we were both very thirsty. "Water!
Oh, great!" Shiara said as we reached the bank. It was
a small stream, ankle deep and a little too wide to jump. I
could see the pebbles on the bottom. Shiara knelt on the
bank and reached down. "Wait
a minute!" I said. "You shouldn't just drink that. You
could turn into a rabbit, or lose your memory, or disappear,
or something." Shiara
looked at me. Then she looked at the stream. "I don't
care," she said finally. "I'm thirsty." She leaned back toward
the water. "But
what if— Watch out!" I grabbed Shiara and pulled her
away just as a huge swirl of muddy water came rushing down
the stream. She scrambled back and stood up, and we
watched the stream for a minute. It was now almost a river,
deep and fast and angry. Shiara
looked at me. "Thanks." "You're
welcome. I guess we'll have to go back—" I started
to turn back toward the woods and stopped in mid- sentence.
There was dark water on that side of us, too. We were
standing on an island. A very small island. It was getting
smaller every minute. I
stared at the churning water, and my hand went to my sword.
I don't know why; swords usually aren't much good against
floods. As soon as I touched the hilt I knew that it '
wasn't in the nature of this particular stream to do this sort 28 Patricia C. Wrede of
thing. I didn't know how I knew, but I was sure someone was
creating the Hood. Right
about then I heard a chuckle. Not a nice chuckle. I was
looking around for the chuckler when Shiara grabbed my arm.
"Daystar! Over there!" I
turned. A man was leaning against one of the trees. He had
blue robes and black hair and a wizard's staff in one hand.
I'd never seen him before. He was watching Shiara. "Well,
little fire-witch, I seem to have caught you again," he
said. "You
leave me alone!" Shiara shouted. "Or I'll bum your staff,
too." The
wizard chuckled again. He really had a nasty chuckle. "Oh,
I don't think so," he said. "I've taken precautions, you
see." He waved at the water that surrounded us and smiled
patronizingly. "Or weren't you aware that fire-magic won't
cross water?" "Magic
may not cross water, but we can," I said. I was beginning
to share Shiara's dislike of wizards. "Come on, Shiara
It can't be very deep." "Where
did you find the hero?" the wizard asked. Shiara just
glared at him. The wizard laughed. I didn't like his laugh
any better than his chuckle. "I should give him some- thing
to do, don't you think? A monster, perhaps. Heroes like
monsters." He waved his staff in the general direction of the
flooding stream. Part of
the water on one side of our island started to bunch
up and solidify. Once it got started, it went pretty fast. I
didn't even have time to step back before the thing was
finished growing. It looked sort of like a giant snake's head
that dripped. The outlines kept changing because it was
made out of water that wasn't completely solid, but it was
pretty clearly a snake. It
lunged at me. I dodged and drew my sword. I almost didn't
make it. Shiara yelled, and there was a puff of steam from
the snake's head. The snake didn't seem particularly hurt;
some of the stream water bunched up around it, but that
was all. I heard the wizard laugh again. "I'm
afraid that won't work very well, young lady," he said.
"You'd have to boil the whole stream away to get rid 30
Patricia C. Wrede of my
monster, and I don't think you can. Pity, isn't it? Be patient;
you'll have your turn in another minute, and then the
Head Wizard will owe me a favor." The
head lunged again. By now I was ready for it, but it was
awfully fast. I dodged again and struck at it with the sword,
even though I wasn't sure what good it would do me to
wound something that wasn't even alive. I found out in a
hurry. The
sword made a humming noise, and I heard the wizard yell.
There was a sound like an explosion. The snake head made a
bubbly noise and collapsed in a wave of muddy water. I
got soaked. The floodwater drained away, leaving a lot
of wet moss. And Shiara yelled again. I
whirled around. Shiara was pointing; it took me a sec- ond to
realize what she was pointing at. It was the big tree that
the wizard had been leaning against. A couple of short branches
were lying at the foot of the tree. The wizard was gone. I STOOD
WHERE I was, panting and dripping. When I got my
breath back, I went over to the tree. There was no sign of the
wizard except for the "branches" I'd noticed. There were
three of mem, and they weren't branches. They were pieces
of a staff. I
looked at Shiara. "That's two wizard's staffs you've broken,"
I said. "They're really going to be after you now." "I
didn't break it," Shiara said indignantly. "You did." "I
did not," I said. We looked at each other for a minute. "If
neither of us broke it," Shiara said finally, "who did?" "Me,"
said a voice. I looked up. A little man was sitting in the
branches of the tree. He was about two feet tall and dressed
entirely in green. His eyes were black and very bright,
and his ears were slightly pointed. He had to be an elf. "I
think you mean 'I,'" I said automatically. "I
shouldn't wonder if you're right," the elf said thought- fully.
He tilted his head to one side. "Does it matter?" "Can
you get down from that tree?" Shiara said. "You're giving
me a crick in my neck." The elf
looked from me to Shiara and back to me again. "Introduce
me to your charming companion," he said. 31 32
Patricia C. Wrede "Oh,
excuse me," I said. I told the elf our names and thanked
him for taking care of the wizard. I was a little curious
about that. I'd never met an elf, but they didn't have a
reputation for altruism. I wasn't sure I wanted to trust
one, either. Elves can be very tricky. "You're
welcome," the elf said. "I've never cared much for
wizards. Unfortunately, it's very difficult to do anything permanent
to them. This one will be back in a day or two." "If
there is anything we can do for you in return, I would like to
hear what it is," I said. If someone in the Enchanted Forest
does you a favor, you have to offer to do one for them.
Well, you don't have to, but if you don't, things seem to go
wrong a lot after that. You have to be careful, though; if you
promise to do a favor before you hear what it is, you can end
up in more trouble than you started with. I wasn't going
to promise anything without finding out first what I was
promising. "Consider
the debt canceled," the elf said politely. I thought
he sounded disappointed, and I didn't like the way he was
looking at my sword. Suddenly I was very glad Mother
had told me about making promises in the Enchanted Forest. "Thank
you," I said. "You did a very neat job." He had, too;
the staff had been sliced cleanly into thirds. I began to wonder
how he had done it. I hadn't thought elves were powerful
enough to break a wizard's staff. I didn't really want to
ask, though; he might take offense or something. "You
may have the staff, if you want it," the elf said, waving
at the pieces. "What
good is a busted wizard's staff?" Shiara said. "You
can't do anything with it." "Nonsense,"
said the elf. "Wizard's staffs are just as powerful
in pieces as they are whole, and they're fairly easy to put
back together. So please, take it with you." I
didn't like the way he kept suggesting that. It sounded reasonable
enough, but as I said, I wasn't sure I wanted to trust
him. "Are you sure you don't want it?" I asked finally. "What
would an elf do with a wizard's staff? If you don't take
it, I'll just have to get rid of it somewhere." Talking
to Dragons 33 That
sounded reasonable, too. I wasn't going to commit myself,
though; he was too insistent. "Thank you for the suggestion,"
I said. "We'll think about it." "Do,"
the elf said. His black eyes twinkled. "Perhaps I'll
see you later. Good-bye." Before I could say anything he had
disappeared into the treetops. Elves move very quickly. "What
was that about?" Shiara demanded. "I
don't know about that elf," I said slowly. "I think something
funny is going on; he was trying too hard to get us to
take that staff." "Well,
we have to do something with it," Shiara said. "Why?"
I said. "We didn't break it. And I don't want to mess
with a wizard's staff, even a broken one." Shiara
frowned. I made a gesture toward the pieces and realized
that I was still holding the sword in my hand. I started
to put it back in its sheath, then stopped. The sheath was as
wet as everything else I was wearing; I couldn't put the
sword in that. I mean, not all magic swords are rustproof, and
even if you have one that is, putting your sword away without
cleaning it is a bad habit to get into. I checked my pockets,
just in case, but even my handkerchief was wet. "Shiara,
do you have anything I could borrow to dry my sword?"
I asked finally. "Everything I have is soaked." "What
does that have to do with the wizard's staff? Oh, give it
here; I'll fix it." She held out her hand, a little reluctantly.
I could see she didn't really want to take the sword.
After what had happened the last time she'd touched it, I
really couldn't blame her. "That's
all right, I'll do it," I said. "It's my job. All I need is
something dry to wipe it with." Shiara
glared at me. "All I have is my tunic, and I am not
going to take it off just so you can dry your stupid sword!
If you won't give it to me, it can rust." My face
got very hot. "I, um, I'm sorry, I didn't mean... I mean, I
didn't think..." "Oh,
shut up and give me the sword." I held
it out. Shiara took it, a little gingerly, but neither of us
felt anything unusual. While she wiped it dry on the 34 Patricia
C. Wrede Talking
to Dragons 35 front
of her tunic, I walked over to the stream. I was pretty sure,
now, that it was safe to drink from this stream. I'd swallowed
some of it when the wizard's wave had hit me, and
nothing had happened to me yet. I bent over and took a
drink. The
water was clean and cold, with just a hint of lime. It
tasted awfully good, though I prefer the lemon-flavored streams
myself. However, I wasn't exactly in a position to be
picky. I think I like lemon because Mother and I got most of
our drinking water from a lemon-flavored stream just
inside the forest. It was much nicer than the well water we used
for washing, even if it was more work to haul the buckets
that far. Shiara
came over just as I finished. She looked at me for a
minute, then handed me the sword. "Here." I took it, and she
sat down and started trying to drink out of her cupped
hands. Most of the water ran out, but she kept trying. I stood
holding the sword and wondering what I was going
to do with it. I mean, walking through the Enchanted Forest
with a sword in your hand is just asking for trouble. On the
other hand, I couldn't put it away until the sheath dried
out, and that would probably take hours. I was still trying
to figure out what to do when Shiara finished drinking and sat
up. "Now,
what are we going to do about that wizard's staff?" she
said. Neither
one of us wanted to take it. Shiara wanted to hide
the pieces before we left, and finally I agreed. We walked
back over to the tree. I started to put my sword down;
then I changed my mind. One of the easiest ways of losing
important things in the Enchanted Forest is to put them
down while you do something else; when you get back,
they're gone. Then you have to go to all the bother of
finding whoever took your things before you can get on with
whatever you really want to do. I shifted the sword into my
left hand and looked around for the nearest piece of
staff. "Daystar!
Come see!" Shiara was waving a piece of the staff
to attract my attention. "You
really shouldn't do that," I said as I walked over. "You
might set off a spell or something. This used to be a wizard's
staff, remember? We ought to at least try to be careful." "Yes,
but look what it did," Shiara said, pointing. I looked
down. There was a brown patch in the moss, just the
size and shape of the stick Shiara was holding. I bent over
and looked more closely. The moss was dry and brittle; the
stems broke as soon as I touched them. "But
this is the Enchanted Forest," I said to no one in particular.
"You aren't supposed to be able to do things like this." "Well,
this wizard's staff did," Shiara said. "I bet it'll do it
again, too." Before I could stop her, she laid the stick down on
the moss. She picked it up almost immediately. The
moss underneath it was brown and dead. I stared. "I
don't like this," I said. There aren't very many things you can
be sure of in the Enchanted Forest, but I'd never seen a
dead plant there, not even in the Outer Forest. The whole
place felt too alive to put up with that sort of thing. "I
wonder if all wizard's staffs do that." "I
don't know about other staffs, but we can check the other
pieces of this one," Shiara said. She walked toward one of
the other two sticks. I sighed and started for the last one. "This
one's the same," Shiara reported after a minute. "What
about yours?" "Just
a minute," I said. I bent over and picked it up in my
right hand. When I
woke up, Shiara was dripping water on my face. "You
can stop now," I said. "I'm wet enough already." Shiara
shook her head. "Are you all right? I mean, you're not
enchanted or anything, are you?" I
thought about it for a moment. "I don't think so, but if I
am, we'll find out pretty soon." I sat up and realized I'd
been lying on the moss at the foot of the tree. "What happened?" "How
should I know? One minute you were standing there
with that sword, and then there was some kind of explosion
and when I turned around you were lying on the ground
and that piece of the wizard's staff was over there, 36
Patricia C. Wrede burning.
I don't think anyone's going to put that staff back together
again; it was the middle piece." Shiara scowled. "But
I think you were right about that elf." "Where's
my sword?" I said. All of a sudden I was sure someone
had taken it while Shiara and I weren't paying attention. "In
your hand," Shiara said. She sounded a little exas- perated.
"You wouldn't let go of it." I
looked down. She was right; my left hand was still clenched
around the hilt. When I relaxed my hand a little, the
fingers started to tingle. I'd been holding the hilt so tightly
that my hand had fallen asleep. Well,
at least I hadn't lost it. I started to shift the sword back to
my right hand, then stopped and swallowed hard. The
hand was burned black; I couldn't even feel it. I looked away,
feeling sick. Shiara was staring, too. "Daystar,
I didn't notice, I was so worried about waking you up
I didn't even see—" She stopped. She tilted her head
back until she was looking up the tree trunk, and her eyes
flashed. "I'm going to find you somebody who can fix this,"
she said grimly. "And then I'm going to find that stupid
elf and make him sorry he ever mentioned that wiz- ard's
staff." The way she said it made me very, very glad I
wasn't an elf, particularly the elf she'd be looking for. "It
doesn't really hurt or anything," I offered. As soon as I
said it, my arm started to throb. Not the hand; it was my
wrist and arm that hurt. As far as I was concerned, that was
more than enough. "That's
bad," Shiara said. She looked worried. "I know a
little about bums, from the times when I... Are you sure you
can't feel anything?" "Not
in my hand," I said. "And I'd really rather not talk about
it. It might help me not notice the way my arm feels." "Well,
let me look at it, then, and I won't have to ask questions,"
Shiara said. I stuck
my right hand out in her direction and stared at my
sword for a couple of minutes. I didn't succeed in ignoring
the sensations that were coming from my arm, but I tried
awfully hard. Finally Shiara said, "You can put it down
now." I looked back in her direction. Talking
to Dragons 37 "It's
bad," she said. "I don't know what to do for it, either.
We have to find help, and pretty soon, too. There has to
be someone in this forest who knows something about healing!
Can you walk?" "My
legs are all right," I said. I started to stand up and discovered
I was very dizzy. I made it on the second try, but
only by using the sword as a prop. Shiara
picked a direction and we started walking. After about
twenty steps I stopped worrying about which way we were
going and concentrated on walking and hanging on to the
sword. It was hard; I was still dizzy, and I was beginning to feel
cold, too. I had to work at it. My arm felt as if it were on
fire, and I started wondering whether the wizard's staff
had done something else nasty in addition to burning my
hand. I don't
know how far we went before we stopped. By that
time, Shiara was holding my good arm, trying to help me
walk. She wasn't as much help as she could have been, because
she had to keep out of the way of the sword I was holding.
As soon as we quit walking, I sat down. "Daystar,
are you sure you can't put that sword away yet?"
Shiara asked. "It gets in the way a lot." "The
sheath is still wet," I said hazily. "Well,
can we at least put the sheath in the sun so it'll dry
faster?" Shiara said. I
looked around. I was starting to feel sort of light-headed as well
as dizzy, and on top of everything I was getting thirsty.
"We can't do that," I said. "The cat has the only patch
of sun around here." "What
cat?" "That
one." I pointed at the large, dignified, black-and- white
cat that was cleaning its face in the middle of a puddle of
sunlight. It didn't even strike me as odd that I hadn't noticed
it until I started talking about it. Shiara
turned her head. As soon as she looked at it, the cat
stopped washing itself. It stared at her for a minute, then stood
up. The tip of its tail twitched three times, and it turned
around and started walking away. After a minute, it stopped
and looked back over its shoulder. It was obviously waiting. 38 Patricia C. Wrede Shiara
jumped up. "Come on, Daystar. We're going to follow
the cat. I think somebody sent it." "That
doesn't make sense," I said, but I wasn't in very good
shape to argue. Eventually, Shiara got me back on my feet.
The cat was still waiting for us, but as soon as we moved
in its direction it started walking again. I decided Shiara
was right and concentrated OK walking. I don't
know how far we followed the cat. It seemed like a long
way, but anything would have seemed like a long way at
that point. My arm hurt, and every muscle in my body
felt shaky. I never quite dropped the sword, but a couple
of times I came close. After a while I stopped think- ing
about it. Finally
Shiara stopped moving. "I was about ready for another
rest," I said fuzzily. "Is the cat still around?" "This
isn't a rest," Shiara said. "We're here." I
looked up. We were standing in front of a neat grey house
with a wide porch and a red roof. A wisp of smoke was
coming out of the chimney; whatever was cooking smelled
delicious. Over the door was a black-and-gold sign in
block letters, which read NONE OF THIS NONSENSE, PLEASE.
I'm going to like whoever lives here, I thought. The
door of the house was closed, but the black-and- white
cat jumped up on the porch and scratched at it. A moment
later, the door swung partway open and the cat disappeared
inside. WE
STAYED WHERE we were for a minute, waiting. I don't think
either one of us really knew what to do next. Fortu- nately,
we didn't have to do anything; a few minutes after the cat
vanished, the door opened the rest of the way and the
owner of the house appeared. She was
dressed in a very loose black robe with long sleeves,
and she was wearing a small pair of glasses with rectangular
lenses. She was considerably shorter than I was, though
she obviously wasn't a dwarf. She managed to look down
her nose at both of us anyway. Standing on the porch helped,
I think. "It's about time you got here," she said. "Do
you know anything about healing?" Shiara de- manded. "Of
course I do, or I wouldn't have sent Quiz out to get you,"
said the woman. "Quiz?" "The
cat. Do you plan to stand there all day? I certainly can't
do anything for you while you're outside." So we
went inside. The porch steps didn't creak. Neither did the
porch, and the hinges of the door didn't squeak at all,
either. I didn't think they would dare. The
inside of the house seemed to consist of a single 40 Patricia C. Wrede large,
airy room, full of cats. Practically every flat surface had a
cat lying on it, except the top of the stove in the comer.
I counted five cats before I stopped. Several of the
cats had furniture under them, and there was a table in the
middle of the room and another door next to the stove. The
woman in the black robe shooed two of the cats off of
chairs, and Shiara and I sat down at the table. Shiara looked
at me. "You can put that stupid sword down now. No
one's going to take it." "No,"
I said. I didn't know why I wanted to hold on to the
sword, and I didn't have enough energy to explain it if I had
known. I just knew I wanted it in my hand. "Sword?"
said the woman in black. "Oh, that sword. It's quite
proper of you to keep it for now. Now, if I may see your
hand?" She came over next to me and examined my right
arm, while I carefully didn't watch. Oddly enough, it didn't
hurt when she touched it. After a minute or so, she nodded. "Just
as I thought. This could have been very bad, but you got
here in plenty of time." She went over to a cupboard by the
stove and took out a piece of something that looked like
dried vine. She brought it back to me and tied it around my arm,
muttering something as she did. Suddenly my head wasn't
fuzzy anymore. "That
should take care of things for the time being," she said,
"and in a little while I can take care of the magic. Then we
can pack the bums with salve. Would you like some
cider while you wait?" I nodded;
I was still thirsty. Shiara frowned. "Can't you do
anything right away?" "I
have done something," the woman said. She set three mugs on
the table, all different. "Several things, in fact. I sent
Quiz out to bring you here, and I have stopped the damage
from spreading. I have also made gingerbread, which should
finish baking any minute now. When it's done, we can get
on with things." "Why
did you send a cat out for us?" Shiara demanded. "How
did you know? Who are you, anyway?" The
woman looked through her glasses. "I didn't have Talking
to Dragons 41 a dog
to send. I'm a witch. My name is Morwen. And you?" She
stopped. The cats looked at us. "Pleased
to meet you," I said. "This is Shiara, and I'm Daystar." "Why
do we have to wait?" Shiara asked again. "It
is an extremely bad idea to mix magic and cooking," Morwen
said. "Don't worry, the gingerbread won't take very
much longer." She got out a large jug and began pour- ing the
contents into the mugs. "There!" she said as she set the jug
down. "Help yourselves; I will be back in a minute." Morwen
went over to the second door and opened it. I got a
glimpse of a small yard with a square garden, a well, and two
more cats. Then the door closed with a swish of black robe.
I stared at my mug, wondering how I was going to pick
it up without putting my sword down. Then I heard a
sniffle. I turned my head. Shiara was not crying. Much. "What's
wrong?" I said. "It's
all my f-fault!" Shiara said miserably. "If you hadn't been
with me, you wouldn't have run into that wizard at all,
and if I hadn't insisted on hiding that stupid staff, you wouldn't
have gotten your hand.. ."Her voice sort of trailed off
into snuffles. I sighed. "If
you want my handkerchief, you'll have to get it out yourself,"
I said. "And it's probably still pretty wet. But you can
have it if you want it." That
made Shiara look like she was really going to burst into
tears. Fortunately, the witch came back before she could.
Morwen was carrying an armload of plants; when she saw
Shiara, she put them down on the table and produced a large
black handkerchief from somewhere inside her sleeve. "That
is quite enough of that," she said, handing the handkerchief
to Shiara. "It does nothing constructive, it makes
everyone else feel bad, and it is extremely self- indulgent.
Drink your cider; you'll feel much better." Just
then one of the cats made a loud noise, sort of a cross
between a purr and a meow. "Good; the gingerbread is
done," Morwen said. She got it out of the oven and gave us each
a piece. Shiara looked much better by that time, even if
she still didn't seem really happy. Morwen put a large
pot of water on the stove and then started sorting 42
Patricia C. Wrede through
the plants she had brought in. After a minute, she frowned. "Two
sprays or three?" she muttered. "I suppose I'd better
look it up." She put the plants down and went out again.
A few seconds later, she came back holding a book; I saw a
roomful of shelves behind her before the door closed. I
blinked. My head didn't feel fuzzy; but I was sure that door
had led out to the yard a minute ago. I looked around the
room, but there weren't any other doors except the one we'd
come in through. Finally I decided to ask. It took me another
minute to figure out how to phrase the question. "Excuse
me, Morwen? Would you mind telling me where that
door leads?" Morwen
stuck a finger in the book and looked up. "Wher- ever I
want to get to. What good is a door if you can't get somewhere
useful by walking through it? Within reason, of course."
She went back to the book. I thought about it for a
minute. Then I decided not to think about it; I was afraid it was
going to make sense. Instead,
I looked at my cider and gingerbread. I was just about
ready to put the sword on the floor so I could eat, when
Morwen set the book down next to the plants and looked
over at me. "Daystar,
you aren't— Oh, of course, you're still hold- ing the
sword. No, don't put it down yet; this will only take a few
more minutes." She picked up a handful of plants. "Come
here, please, both of you." I got
up and walked over; so did Shiara. Morwen had me
stand next to the stove, holding the sword across the front
of my chest so that the tip of it rested on the pot of water.
Shiara was behind me, with one hand on my right arm
just above the dried vine. It took a while before Morwen was
satisfied with our positions, but finally she stepped back.
"Very good. Stay just like that until I'm finished, please." She
reached inside one of her sleeves and brought out a silver
knife. She dipped the knife in the pot of water, then began
muttering over the plants she was holding. Imme- diately,
all the cats jumped down onto the floor and formed a half
circle around the stove, with Morwen and Shiara and Talking
to Dragons 43 me in
the middle. They just sat there with their eyes glowing and
only the tips of their tails moving in tiny twitches. Suddenly,
there was a sizzling noise from my right; the water
was boiling. Morwen
gave a shout. Then she held the plants high over her
head and said loudly: "By
the darkness of the stone's heart, By the
silence of the sea's tears, By the
whisper of the sky's breath, By the
dawning of the star's flame, Do as I
will thee!" Just as
she finished she threw the plants into the boiling water. There
was a big puff of steam from the pot that smelled of
herbs and magic and gingerbread, and I sneezed. The steam
spread out around me and got thicker. It smelled more and
more like herbs and magic and less and less like gin- gerbread.
My right arm started to ache, and my left arm started
to tingle. The ache got stronger, but it stayed where it was;
the tingle spread. In another second or two I was tingling
all over, except for the arm that was aching. By now
the steam was so thick I couldn't see anything, but I
could still feel Shiara's hand and the vine Morwen had
tied around my arm. For what seemed like a long time, nothing
else happened. Then one of the cats yowled. I saw Morwen's
hand, the one holding the silver knife, come out of the
mist. "In the King's name!" Morwen's voice said, and the
knife cut the vine from my arm and pulled away. My
sword flashed once, very brightly. Most of the steam settled
on my right arm and turned black. The ache started to
creep upward, and something that felt like lightning or wind
ran up my left arm and down my right one. I heard Shiara
gasp. The black steam stuff dropped off my arm into a slimy
blob on the floor. Finally, my right arm stopped hurting,
and my other arm stopped tingling, and everything felt
normal again. I let my breath out and looked around. Morwen
was looking in my direction with an expression of
extreme distaste. "That," she said, "was an exceptionally Talking
to Dragons 45 r nasty
wizard. He deserves what's coming to him." | "What's coming to him?" Shiara
asked. "I
don't know, but he certainly deserves it," Morwen said.
"Anyone who would keep a spell like that in a staff..." She
shook her head and looked down. "I do hope it doesn't disagree
with the cats." I
followed her gaze. The cats had formed a small mob and
were playing with something I'd rather not describe in detail.
I looked up again very quickly and took a step back- ward. I
bumped into Shiara and remembered that Morwen had
said not to move until she was finished. "I'm sorry," I said
to both of them. "It's
quite all right; you can sit down again now," Morwen said.
"And if you don't want to put your sword in your sheath,
you can lean it against the wall. You won't need it anymore,
for the time being, at least." I
followed Morwen's instructions and sat down at the table
again. I didn't realize until I reached for the ginger- |,
bread that although my right hand felt better it didn't look | any
better. I didn't have time to worry about it, though; t
Morwen was already standing by my chair with some oily- ||
looking salve and bandages. She worked on my hand while H I ate
gingerbread and cider left-handed. We finished about the
same time, and I thanked her. "You're
welcome," Morwen said. "Now, perhaps you would
explain how you got into such an uncomfortable situation?
I have a general idea, but I would appreciate a few
details." I told
her about the wizard and the elf, and then Shiara explained
how the staff had exploded. "Of
course the staff exploded!" Morwen said severely. "That
sword doesn't like wizard's staffs; nearly everyone knows
that, or ought to. Next time, make sure it's sheathed before
you touch one." "I
knew it!" Shiara said angrily. "That elf was trying to get
Daystar hurt!" "Not
necessarily," Morwen said. "He may simply have been
trying to make sure the wizard found you again. If you'd
taken the pieces of the staff with you, he would have had no
trouble catching up with you once he got himself 46
Patricia C. Wrede back
together, and of course the first thing he'd do would be to
look for his staff." "If
that elf wanted the wizard after us, why'd he get rid of the
wizard in the first place?" Shiara objected. "I
doubt that he did," Morwen said calmly. "It's really more
the sort of thing the sword would do. I wouldn't depend
on it in the future, though, particularly since you haven't
really learned how to use it yet." I
wanted to ask more questions about the sword, but I was
pretty sure Morwen wouldn't answer them if I did. "What
if the wizard couldn't find his staff when he came back?"
I asked instead. "Wizards
always know where their staffs are. And it's almost
impossible to keep wizards away from their staffs for any
length of time. One can slow them down a bit by putting
the staffs somewhere hard to get at, but they usually manage
in the end." "That's
why Mother hid Antorell's staff!" I said. "I
shouldn't wonder," Morwen murmured. "Now, I strongly
suggest that you rest for a while, Daystar, and while you are
doing so I will talk with Shiara in the library." She stood
up and nodded to me. Shiara
frowned and opened her mouth, then looked at me.
"All right," she said. She looked as if she wanted to say
something else, then changed her mind at the last min- ute. Morwen
went to the door, followed by Shiara and most of the
cats. I saw the room of books again before the door closed
behind all of them. I went over to a bench that used to have
three cats on it before they went into the library with
Morwen, lay down on it, trying to be very careful of my bandaged
right hand, and fell asleep almost immedi- ately. When I
woke up, it was late afternoon. I could tell by the way
the sunlight slanted in through the windows. There wasn't
anyone else in the room, except for the black-and- white
cat that had led us to Morwen's house. It was sitting in the
middle of the table, washing its tail. Talking
to Dragons 47 "Hello,"
I said. "And thank you very much for bringing Shiara
and me here." The cat
looked up briefly, decided I was uninteresting, and
went back to cleaning its tail. I shifted a little; the bench was
hard. I wasn't quite ready to sit up and start looking for
people yet, though I felt much better. Then the back door
opened—this time it was the door to the yard—and Morwen
came in. "You're
awake; good. Shiara has been waiting for you." I sat
up just as Morwen saw the cat on the table. She frowned
at it. "Child of Scom," she said sternly, "you are not
allowed on the table." The cat
looked at Morwen. Morwen looked at the cat. After a
minute, the cat jumped down to the floor, where it did its
best to pretend that the floor was exactly where it had
wanted to be all along. Morwen shook her head. "You'll
have to excuse the Grand Inquisitor; he knows he did
me a favor when he brought you here, and he's inclined
to take advantage of it. I would have sent Cass, but I
was afraid you wouldn't pay attention to her," "Cass?" "Cassandra."
Morwen nodded at a small grey cat that I hadn't
noticed come in with her. "She has much better manners
than Quiz, but she tends to be overlooked. Nobody overlooks
Quiz." I
looked at the cats. They both ignored me. I looked back at
Morwen. "I don't think I've thanked you yet for— for
fixing my arm." I wasn't really sure what else to call whatever
she'd done. "Don't
thank me until you take the bandages off tomor- row,"
Morwen said. "Time enough for thanks if it's healed properly.
Not that I have any doubts, mind, but it's better to be
sure." "All
right, I'll wait, then," I said. "Did you say Shiara was
waiting for me?" Morwen
went over to the stove. "Yes, I did. She's out by the
garden," she said over her shoulder. She reached up and
lifted a large kettle down from a hook on the wall. "Thank
you," I said. I got up and opened the back door. 48
Patricia C. Wrede There
was a room on the other side, with a bed and a large bookshelf
and, of course, a cat. I shut the door and tried again.
This time it was the library. Morwen had more books than
anyone I'd ever heard of. I shut the door and looked back at
Morwen. "How
do I get out to the garden?" I asked. "Through
the door," Morwen said without turning. "Just be
firm; sometimes it's a little contrary with strangers, but it
won't last long." I
turned back, trying to decide how to be firm with a door. I
opened it again; it was still the library. I closed it, wondering
how long it would take me to get to the garden. I
didn't really want to spend the rest of the afternoon opening and
shutting Morwen's door, but I couldn't think of any other
way of doing it. I sighed and opened the door again. This
time it worked; the door opened onto three steps going
down into the yard. I went through it quickly, before it
could change its mind. Shiara was sitting on a stone bench by the
comer of the house. She looked a lot happier than she had
earlier, but all she would say was that she'd been talking
to Morwen. "Morwen's
nice," Shiara said. "She's been showing me some
things. And she's going to give me a kitten." "That's
nice," I said. Actually, I wasn't sure it would be a
good idea to have a pet with us while we wandered around
the Enchanted Forest. On the other hand, if it was one of
Morwen's cats, it would probably be able to take care of
itself. Shiara
and I sat and talked for the rest of the afternoon. I
discovered that somehow she and Morwen had decided that we
would be spending the night here. Shiara was very pleased
about it; evidently Morwen had promised to show her
some interesting magic. I wasn't sure we should stay, even
though I liked Morwen. It felt a little strange to be staying
with someone neither of us had ever met before. I had to
admit, though, that it sounded a lot better than trying to
sleep out in the open. We were still arguing about it when one of
the cats came to bring us in to dinner. DINNER
WAS SOME sort of stew; it didn't look like much, but it
smelled and tasted awfully good. Morwen had made a large
pot of the stuff. Half of it she put in a big pan and set on
the floor for the cats; Shiara and I ate most of the rest of
it. By the time we'd finished eating, we had somehow decided
to spend the night with Morwen and the cats. I was a
little worried, at first, about what to do with the Sword
of the Sleeping King. I didn't want to leave it leaning up
against Morwen's wall all night. Finally, I decided to keep it
with me. It wasn't that I didn't trust Morwen, but Mother
had given the sword to me and it was my respon- sibility.
Once that was settled, I started wondering where Shiara
and I were going to sleep. I
shouldn't have worried. Morwen had several extra bed- rooms
behind her magic door, and she simply put each of us in
one of them. By that time I was starting to wonder how
many rooms she had in her house and where she kept them
all when they weren't needed. That isn't the sort of question
you ask people in the Enchanted Forest, though, so I
didn't. Besides,
I was tired again. As soon as Morwen showed me to
my room, I stuck the sword under the bed and went 49 50
Patricia C. Wrede to
sleep. I couldn't think of anything else to do with it, but I was
pretty sure the sword would be safe. I was right, too When I
woke up in the morning, there was a cat asleep on top of
it. After
breakfast, Morwen took the bandages off my hand. The
bums were gone and it felt fine, but she insisted on examining
it carefully before she finally decided it was all right.
When she was finished with my hand, she helped me get my
swordbelt on. The sheath was dry, so I put the sword back in
it. While I was doing that, Morwen produced a couple
of bundles and a small black kitten with one white paw.
She gave Shiara the kitten and one bundle and turned to me. "This
is for you," she said, handing me the other bundle. "It
should make your travels a little easier. Now, come outside." Morwen
opened the front door and went out onto the porch.
I let Shiara leave next and started to follow her, but one of
the cats darted in front of me and I nearly tripped. I had
to grab for the doorframe to keep my balance. "Watch
out!" Shiara said, then, "Daystar! What's the matter?" I
almost didn't hear her. I was staring down at my sword. My hand
had brushed it when I'd tripped, and I'd felt the tingling
again. Only this time there was even more of it. I reached
over and took the hilt in my right hand. The rum- bling
tingle hadn't changed, but the buzzing tingle and the purring
tingle were considerably stronger man they had been, and
they'd been joined by a brisk vibration I hadn't felt before.
I concentrated on the new feeling, trying to figure out
where it had come from, and found myself looking at Morwen. I
looked back at the sword. I hadn't let go, and my arm was still
tingling. I tried to pick out one of the other vibra- tions.
Suddenly I was feeling mostly the purring tingle and looking
out into the woods. I blinked and tried again. This time I
got the buzz, and I was staring at Shiara. Suddenly I
understood. "It's
magic!" I said. Talking
to Dragons 51 to "Of
course it's magic," Shiara said. "It's supposed to be a magic
sword. So what?" "No,
I mean that's what it does," I said. "The Sword of the
Sleeping King finds magic!" "Among
other things," Morwen said in a satisfied voice. "Finds
magic?" Shiara said skeptically. "That's
what the tingling is," I said. I was completely sure of
myself, though I didn't know why. "Different tingles mean
different kinds of magic, and the tingles get stronger when
the sword gets closer to the magic." I looked at Shiara. "No
wonder it gave me such a jolt when we both touched it at
the same time." Shiara
had been reaching for the hilt, but she pulled her hand
back hastily. "If the sword finds magic, how come I couldn't
feel anything until you touched it? And if the tingles are the
way it finds things, why can't you feel them all the time?" "I
don't know," I said. The tingling was fading again, the
same way it had when I'd held on to the sword before, so I
let go of the hilt. Morwen
was considering me through her glasses; I couldn't
tell what she was thinking from her expression. Finally
she nodded very slightly. "I see. There is consid- erably
more to you than I had thought, Daystar," she said in a
thoughtful tone. I was
still trying to figure out what that statement meant when
Morwen turned away. "However, it is time for you to be
going," she went on briskly. "I suggest that you head north.
You see those two trees? Walk straight between them and
keep going until you get to a stream; then follow the stream.
You'll get to something eventually, and you should be able
to figure out what to do from there." My eyes
turned in the direction Morwen was pointing. It was
the same way I'd been looking when I'd been con- centrating
on the purring tingle from the sword. I looked back at
Morwen. "Exactly,"
Morwen said. "What?"
said Shiara. "Let's
go," I said. I was feeling a little unsettled by the 52
Patricia C. Wrede whole
thing, and I didn't want to talk about it anymore. Shiara
scowled at me, but she didn't insist on an explanation right
then. We said
good-bye and thank you to Morwen and started walking
toward the trees. Shiara carried the kitten for a while, but
pretty soon the kitten decided it wanted to walk. We
slowed down a lot after that, unti^ the kitten got tired enough
to let Shiara pick it up again without scratching her. Shiara
and I spent most of the walk talking. I hadn't realized
how little she knew about the Enchanted Forest, and I
wound up telling her a lot of things. Like explaining about
being polite to people, and why you shouldn't promise things
without knowing what they are first. Morwen
hadn't told us how far away the stream was, and
eventually I started wondering when we were going to get to
it. I was also curious about where we were going. I was
thinking about that when I noticed that the trees we were
walking past were larger than the ones I'd seen the previous
day. At least, I thought they were larger. I studied them as
we walked, trying to decide whether it was my imagination
or whether they really were larger. I was just getting
ready to mention it to Shiara, when I heard a cough. I
stopped and looked around. "Ahem,"
said a voice. This
time I located the speaker. It was the little gold lizard,
Suz. He was sitting on a branch at just about eye level,
watching me. "Oh,
hello, Suz," I said. Shiara was looking around; I nodded
toward the lizard and said, "Shiara, this is Suz. You remember,
I told you about him. Suz, this is my friend, Shiara." The
lizard ignored the introduction and continued staring at me.
"Why," he demanded in an aggrieved tone, "didn't you
tell me Cimorene was your mother?" "You
didn't ask," I said. Suz
looked at me reproachfully. "It would have saved me a
great deal of trouble if you'd mentioned it," he said severely. "I'm
sorry," I said. "I didn't know it mattered." Talking
to Dragons 53 "You
didn't?" Suz ran down the branch and peered at me.
"No, you really didn't! How amazing. I can't under- stand
how it happened." "What
are you talking about?" Shiara said. The
lizard appeared to see her for the first time. He leaned outward
in Shiara's direction and I thought he was going to fall
off, until I saw that his tail was wrapped tightly around
a sturdy twig on the far side of the branch. "You've brought
someone with you? Dear me, this will never do. Who is
this?" "I've
already introduced you once," I reminded him. "You
weren't listening." "You
did? Yes, of course, you did. How perfectly dread- ful."
Suz ran around the branch very fast, and for a minute I was
afraid he was going to try and stand on his tail. I was sure
he'd fall off if he did; the branch wasn't very wide. "What's
so dreadful?" Shiara demanded. "There's noth- ing
wrong with me." "No,
of course there isn't. Oh, dear, Kazul will be ter- ribly
unhappy about this." "Who
is Kazul?" I asked. Suz
looked at me in astonishment. "You don't know? No, you
don't. I haven't told you yet. Kazul is who you're going
to see." He cocked his head to one side as if that explained
everything. "Why
should I want to see Kazul?" I said. "And why should
he care about me, or Shiara, or anything?" "She,"
Suz said. "And of course you want to see her. You
have the Sword of the Sleeping King, don't you? I'm afraid
she'll be dreadfully upset if you bring someone with you,
though." "Well,
I'm not going to leave Shiara alone in the middle of the
Enchanted Forest," I said firmly. "No,
no, you couldn't possibly do that," the lizard agreed. "That
wouldn't be right at all. Dear me, whatever are we going
to do?" "You
don't have to worry about me," Shiara said indig- nantly.
"I'm a fire-witch; I can take care of myself." "You
are?" Suz turned his head and looked at Shiara so 54
Patricia C. Wrede intently
that his eyes crossed. "You really are! How con- venient!
Everything's quite all right, then; Kazul won't mind a fire-witch
at all." "Who,"
I said very slowly and carefully, "is Kazul?" The
lizard stared thoughtfully at me for a long time. "I don't
think I ought to tell you any more," he said finally. "You're
quite safe, you really are, but it wouldn't do at all for
Kazul to lose her temper with me. Oh, dear, no." "Quite
safe? In the middle of the Enchanted Forest, with wizards
after us?" Shiara said sarcastically. "You're crazy." "I
am? No, I'm not at all! How very rude." He turned his
back, looking extremely offended. Shiara stared at him. As I
said, an offended lizard is an interesting sight. I
sighed. "Shiara." Shiara
looked at me. I just stood there. After a minute, she
looked down. "Well, it is dangerous to be out here, even if
you do have that stupid sword," she said defensively. "What's
wrong with saying so?" "It
wasn't very polite," I said. "And you promised you'd try." Shiara
glanced up at me, then sighed. "Oh, all right. I'm sony,
Suz." The
lizard twisted his head around and looked at Shiara for a
minute. "You are?" He ran around the branch again and
wound up peering at her upside down from underneath the
limb. "No, you're not at all. How disappointing. I ac- cept."
He ran back up on top of the branch. "Accept?"
Shiara said. "Your
apology," the lizard said with dignity. A dignified lizard
looks even odder than an offended one. "Oh."
Shiara looked at Suz doubtfully. "If
you won't tell us who Kazul is, will you at least tell us how
to find her?" I said hastily. I didn't want Shiara to say
anything that would offend Suz again, and she looked like
she was going to. Besides, I was curious. "You
won't have any trouble," the lizard assured me. "Just
head for the castle. Kazul will—" He broke off in midsentence,
staring at the kitten Shiara was holding. "What is
that?" he asked disapprovingly. Talking
to Dragons 55 "A
kitten, of course," Shiara said. "You're
sure it's under control?" Suz seemed a little nervous.
I looked at the kitten. It was watching Suz with a great
deal of interest. "What
do you mean, under control?" Shiara said. "She's a
perfectly well-behaved kitten. Morwen wouldn't have given her to
me if she wasn't." "Cats
are not— Did you say Morwen?" Suz peered at Shiara. "Yes,
I said Morwen. Can't you finish a sentence?" Suz
ignored her. "You've been to see Morwen? I didn't know
that. Oh, dear me, I must be dreadfully behind. Why, all
sorts of things could be happening that I don't know about!
How perfectly dreadful. I must really get back to work at
once. Oh, yes, indeed I must." The
lizard ran down the branch and disappeared behind the
tree trunk. "Wait a minute!" I said. I ducked around the back of
the tree, but Suz was nowhere in sight. I shook my head and
went back to where Shiara was standing. "He's
gone again," I said. "And he still didn't tell me what
castle he's talking about." "So
what? Nobody else has been telling us anything either."
Shiara glared at the branch where Suz had been sitting.
"I don't think he's very polite. He didn't even say good-bye." "He
keeps going off like that," I said. "I think that's just how he
is." "Well,
I can't say I'm sorry he left," Shiara said. "Come on,
let's find that stream Morwen was talking about. I'm getting
thirsty." We
started walking again. Shiara put the kitten down, and we
took turns keeping an eye on it as we walked. It had a
marvelous time, jumping on leaves and attacking bushes
while Shiara and I talked about what Shiara was going to
name it. Finally she decided on Nightwitch. I didn't think
that was a very good name, but Shiara liked it, so I didn't
say anything. By the
time we found the stream, Shiara and I were tired and
hungry as well as thirsty, so we decided to stop. We 56
Patricia C. Wrede each
took a drink; then we sat down and opened the bundle Morwen
had given me. Just as I had expected, there was a packet
of food right on top—meat pies and apples and gingerbread.
Shiara and I each ate some, and we gave one of the
meat pies to Nightwitch. There was some left over, so we
wrapped it up and put it back in my bundle before we
started off down the stream. We
tried to stay close to the bank most of the time. It's easy to
get lost in the Enchanted Forest, especially if you don't
really know where you're going. If we got out of sight of the
stream, we might never find it again. In a
couple of places the trees grew in thick clumps, right
up to the water's edge, and we had to choose between wading
and going around. I didn't like the dark look of the
forest near the tree clumps, and the water was only ankle
deep, so we waded. Nightwitch did not approve of it at
all. The
.forest got darker as we went along. I was sure, now, that
the trees were bigger, and they were certainly closer together
even when they weren't growing in tight clumps. We
spent more and more time in the stream, but the water wasn't
very cold, and the pebbles on the bottom were smooth, so it
wasn't particularly unpleasant. Even so, I was glad when
the woods started to open up again. Th-ii I saw the clearing
a little ahead of us. A minute later, I saw the person sitting
in it. She was
a Princess. She had to be. Her hair was long and
golden and not tangled at all, and her eyes were very blue,
and her skin was very white, and she was very, very beautiful.
One dainty foot was peeping out from under her blue
silk gown. Her hands were folded in her lap, and she was
looking at them with a sad expression. Shiara
poked me. I realized that I was standing in a stream with my
shoes in one hand and Morwen's bundle in the other
and my mouth hanging open. I swallowed and waded over to
the bank. I wanted to put my shoes back on before we got
any closer. I had seen at least two Princesses before, that I
knew of, but both of them were enchanted and didn't look at
all like their usual selves when I met them. When Talking
to Dragons 57 I
finished with my shoes, the Princess was looking in our direction. I stood
up hastily and hurried toward her. Shiara fol- lowed.
When I was within speaking distance, I stopped and bowed.
The Princess smiled sadly. "I
bid you such poor welcome as I may," she said in a musical
voice. "Alas! That I can offer you no refreshment. For I
am in great distress." "I'm
sorry to hear that," I said. "Is there anything I can do to
help?" "I
fear not," said the Princess. "For you are yet a youth. Alas,
and woe is me! For I am in great distress." "All
right; so tell us about it," Shiara said. She sat down on the
ground and looked at the Princess expectantly. I frowned
at her; I didn't think that was the proper way to address
a Princess, though I wasn't positive. Mother had taught
me a lot more about dragons than she had about Princesses. "You
are kind to inquire of my sad tale," the Princess said.
"It is not long to tell. My father was a King, much beloved
of his people, and I his only daughter. Being lonely after
my mother's death, my father remarried to a woman comely
but proud, and under her influence have I suffered these
seven years. And now the King my father is dead, and my
stepmother hath cast me out, to wander alone and friendless
through the world. Alas! For I am—" "In
great distress; you said that before," Shiara said. "Why
didn't you throw her out when your father died? It would
have saved you a lot of trouble." The
Princess's blue eyes filled with tears and she bowed her
head. " 'Twas not within my power to work harm against her,
alas. And now I seek some Prince or hero who will take
pity on my destitute state and return me to my proper place.
Woe is me! That I should be without help in such distress." "Sounds
like a lousy excuse to me," Shiara muttered under
her breath. Fortunately, the Princess didn't hear. "I'm
afraid we can't help you get your kingdom back," I said.
"I'm very sorry. But if there's any other service I 58 Patricia C. Wrede can do
for you, I'd be happy to try." "Daystar!"
Shiara's voice was horrified, and suddenly I realized
what I'd said. I swallowed. At least I'd only prom- ised to
try.
r "There
is one thing," the Princess said. She raised her head,
and her eyes were very bright. I went cold. The Princess
smiled sweetly. "Give
me your sword," she said. I
STARED AT the Princess. Then I shut my mouth and swal- lowed
again, hard. Mother wasn't going to like this at all. I was
just about to draw the sword and give it to her, when Shiara
said, "Wait a minute, Daystar." I
stopped and looked at her. She looked at the Princess. "Daystar
hasn't got a sword." "What?"
the Princess and I said at the same time. The Princess
frowned. "I am not blind, to be so easily deceived. See,
there it is." She pointed to my scabbard. "That,"
said Shiara triumphantly, "is the Sword of the Sleeping
King. So it belongs to him, not to Daystar, and Daystar
can't give it away." The
Princess looked very puzzled. I thought for a minute. Shiara
was right, but she was wrong, too. I mean, it was obvious
what the Princess had meant, even if she hadn't said it
right. I sighed and reached for the hilt. Shiara
turned on me. "Daystar, what are you doing?" "Giving
her the sword," I said, tugging at it. The sword wouldn't
come out of the sheath. "You know as well as I do what
she meant." "Well,
if all those wizards and sorceresses can be picky about
the way people say things, why can't you?" Shiara 59 60
Patricia C. Wrede was so
mad I expected her hair to start burning any minute. "You
can't even get it out of the sheath! You only said you'd
try to do what she wanted; well, you've tried. Isn't that
enough yet?" I
sighed. "I'm sorry, Shiara, but it's my sword, and I'm not a
wizard. I just have to do it." "Daystar,
you... you..." Shiara gave up and just glared. I
tugged at the sword again; Shiara turned her back. The Princess
was still looking puzzled. I shook my head and unbuckled
the whole swordbelt. I looked at it for a minute, then
held it out toward the Princess. "Here," I said. "Take it."
My voice seemed very loud, and I realized that the woods
had gotten very quiet. The Princess smiled and took hold of
the scabbard. I let go of the sword. There
was a rumbling noise, and the Princess said, "Oh!" very
loudly and dropped the swordbelt. The point of the scabbard
hit the ground, and there was another rumble, and an
enormous geyser of water shot up into the air. I saw
the Princess cringe and Shiara fall backward. Then I
couldn't see anything but white spray. A voice said, "All hail
the Holder of the Sword!" The words echoed hollowly around
me as the fountain vanished. Shiara
and the Princess were both staring at me, wide- eyed.
All of us were dripping. The sword was standing upright
in front of me, in the middle of a pool of water about
four feet across. It was about halfway out of the sheath,
and the blade shimmered in the sun. The Princess burst
into tears. "I
knew not that this weapon was of such potency," she said
between sobs. "Alas! For I cannot hold the sword, and who now
will be my help? Alas, and woe is me!" "You
mean you don't want the sword anymore?" Shiara demanded. The
Princess nodded. She was weeping too hard to say much. "And
Daystar can have it back now?" The
Princess nodded again. She was still weeping. I sighed
and dug out my handkerchief. It was wet. I squeezed it out
and offered it to the Princess anyway. She took it without
thanking me and cried some more. Talking
to Dragons 61 "What
am I to do?" she kept saying. "Who now will be my
help? Alas! For I am in great distress!" "Oh,
help yourself," Shiara said crossly. "Daystar, are you
going to take that stupid sword?" I
hesitated; then I reached out and took hold of the hilt. The
blade flashed once, and a brief shock ran through me as the
hilt came to rest. I ignored the feeling and took hold of the
scabbard. It came free almost at once. The water closed
silently behind it. I took a closer look at the bottom part of
the sheath; I wasn't even surprised when I saw that it
wasn't wet. I
looked up. The Princess had just about stopped crying. I
looked at the sword. Then I looked back at the Princess. "Are
you sure you don't want this?" I said finally. "Daystar!"
Shiara sounded like she wasn't sure whether to be
mad or horrified. The
Princess didn't seem to hear her at all. "I cannot take
it!" she cried. "Oh, indeed, I cannot! Alas! That I am so
helpless in my time of need!" "Well,
if you didn't want the sword, why did you ask for it
in the first place?" Shiara said angrily. "I
fear I have deceived you," the Princess said tragically. "Yet
I myself have been misled. Alas! I beg of you, forgive me! For
indeed, I am, I am in great distress." "Distress?
Ha!" said Shiara. "You better tell us the truth, right
now, or you'll find out what distress is." "Shiara—"
I began. Shiara
turned. "You shut up. You obviously don't know anything
about handling Princesses, so let me do it. Now," she
said to the Princess, "explain. And it better be good." "I
am a King's daughter," the Princess said. "My father would
have me wed the Prince of a neighboring kingdom, to
bring us wealth. Yet I could not, for I do not love him, but
another. My father listened not, for all my pleading, so my love
and I fled into the forest. We wandered far, and great
was our suffering, yet were we happy, for we had each
other. But I, being unused to travel, became tired, and my love
at last set me here and bid me wait for him. And here
have I stayed these two long days, and I fear me some evil
may have befallen him. Alas! That we are parted!" 62
Patricia C. Wrede "What,"
said Shiara, "does all this have to do with Daystar's
sword?" The
Princess sighed again. "I was seated here, as you see me,
bewailing my bitter fate, when lo! A man appeared, most
wise and powerful of aspect. He told me my love was imprisoned
by a mighty sorceress, and at that news I wept bitterly.
Then he bade me desist from my grief, for the means
of delivering my love was at hand, to wit, a sword most
magical. And he himself made promise of aid, if I would
but attain the sword. And this have I attempted, and I have
failed. Alas, and woe is me!" "I
don't think I understand," I said. "Why didn't you tell us this
to begin with?" The
Princess began to weep again. "My unknown friend instructed
me in what I was to say; and told me that all would
be well once I had the sword in my own hands. And in this
he deceived me, for the touch of the sword bums so that I
cannot hold it. And the cause is that I deceived you, and
tricked you into offering me the sword, and the sword knew,
and it will not abide in my hand, and now am I utterly without
hope." "What
did this person look like?" Shiara asked unsym- pathetically.
"The one you were going to give the sword to." The
Princess seemed a lot more interested in explaining how
wise and powerful and helpful the man had been than she was
in giving a simple description, but eventually we managed
to get some idea what he looked like. Tall, dark- haired,
blue eyes, and carrying a staff.... "It
sounds a lot like Antorell," I said finally. "AntoreU?"
Shiara said. "That
wizard I told you about, that Mother melted. He must be
back; she said he might try to make trouble for me in a
day or two." "Oh,
great. All we need is another wizard looking for us." The
Princess didn't seem to be following the conversation at all.
"Alas!" she said finally. "There is nothing left for me but
grief; I have no means now to save my love, so I Talking
to Dragons 63 shall
die with him. I shall fling myself in yonder stream and
make an end." "You
are even dumber than Daystar," Shiara informed her.
"That stream isn't deep enough to drown in; you'll only get
wet. Besides, if that stupid wizard lied about the sword, how do
you know he didn't lie about your love? Who is this
person you ran off with, anyway?" "He
is a knight," the Princess said, her eyes lighting up. "Poor
in goods, yet rich in spirit, of most pleasing aspect. His
eyes are a hawk's, his arms are mighty, and his sword is
bright and—" "He
sounds like he can take care of himself," Shiara said.
"I don't think you have to worry about him." Shiara's
words had a marvelous effect on the Princess. "Truly,
you believe this?" she said, and her face lit up even more.
"Then here will I abide his coming, for surely he will
return to me. Ah, joy! That we shall soon be once more together!" Shiara
looked disgusted. "I'm sure you'll be very happy. Come
on, Daystar, let's go." She stood up. "I
don't think we should leave her here by herself," I said. "Daystar,
you're impossible!" Shiara was still mad. "She tried
to trick you! Besides, she's been here two days already, and
nothing's happened to her yet." "Alas!
I did indeed attempt to deceive you," the Princess said.
"And for that I beg forgiveness. Yet consider my unhappy
plight, and be not harsh with me." "Oh,
shut up," Shiara told her. "What
if Antorell comes back?" I said. "Somebody ought to take
care of her. Besides, I made a promise." "Well,
I didn't!" Shiara said. "And I'm not going to sit here
doing nothing just because of a stupid Princess! I'm leaving." "You
can't do that!" I said. I was really upset. Shiara didn't
know very much about the Enchanted Forest, and she was
going to go tramping off into the middle of it with no one but
Morwen's kitten. I couldn't let her do that, but I couldn't
leave the Princess sitting there alone, either. 64
Patricia C. Wrede "Want
to bet?" Shiara said. She picked up the bundle Morwen
had given her. "Come on, Nightwitch. Let's go." "Nightwitch?
What an unusual name for a cat," said a new
voice. Shiara
stopped and both of us turned. An old man was standing
at the edge of the clearing, in front of a large, scruffy
clump of bushes. His beard and what was left of his
hair were quite white, and he was stooped over and leaning
on a staff. Even without the way my skin prickled, I knew
he was a wizard. The
Princess was the first to recover from the surprise of
seeing him there. "Ah, sir, have pity on my sad state!" she
said. "Have pity, and if you have seen a knight, bright- armored,
hawk-eyed, most fair and pleasing in speech and semblance,
then tell me speedily where he may be found. For he
is my love, and we are parted, and thus am I in great distress!
Alas!" "That's
quite all right, my dear," the wizard said in a kindly
tone. "You've nothing to worry about. In fact, he should
be here before very much longer; that's why I hur- ried.
Just sit there and wait quietly, like a good girl." "Oh,
joy! Oh, bliss!" said the Princess rapturously. 'To be with
my love again!" She started happily explaining how strong
and handsome and generally wonderful her missing knight
was. Since she didn't seem to be speaking to anyone in
particular, the rest of us ignored her. Shiara,
Nightwitch, and I were edging backward. I had my
right hand on the hilt of my sword, and my whole side was
tingling with the feel of the wizard's magic. The wizard noticed
us and smiled. "Take
your hand from your sword," he said, looking at me.
"I am not here to engage in a vulgar physical contest with
you." "Are
you from the Society of Wizards?" Shiara de- manded.
Her voice sounded a little shaky, but I don't think anyone
who didn't know her would have noticed. "No,"
the wizard said. "Why? Are you looking for one of
them?" "Then
why are you here?" I said. "Why,
to assist you," the wizard said. ••Wfwstsiiy"-
• Talking
to Dragons 65 "Assist
us?" Shiara said. "But you're a wizard!" "I
am not at all concerned with your baseless prejudices," the
wizard told her. "I have come to offer to help your companion,
and I will thank you to cease interfering." I
stared at him. "I don't want to be impolite," I said before
Shiara could say anything else, "but why do you want to
help me?" "Why,
because you deserve it, of course," the wizard said.
"You made a foolish promise to this other young lady," he went
on, nodding toward the Princess, who was still talking
to the air. "You could have gotten out of it several times,
but you refused to behave dishonorably. I think that is
deserving of a reward." "Thank
you very much," I said. I didn't really know what
else to say. After all, there are people in the Enchanted Forest
who go around rewarding heroes and Princes for noble
deeds; why else would all those people come here? "Well,
what would you like?" the wizard said after a moment. "Like?" "As
a reward." He sounded a little impatient. I
thought about it for a moment. "I appreciate the offer," I said
finally. "But I really don't need anything. Thank you very
much all the same." "What?
Isn't there anything you want?" he asked sharply. He
didn't look nearly as friendly as he had at first. "No,
I don't think so," I said. For a
moment the wizard looked very disconcerted. Then he
seemed to relax a little. "Perhaps I did not make myself clear
enough," he said. "You need not ask for something material;
information will do just as well. The word for sorcery
in the tongue of the giants, or the location of the Well of
Silver Storms where the unicorns drink. There must be
something you want to know, even if there is nothing you
want to have." The
only thing I wanted to know was what I was supposed to do
in the Enchanted Forest. Somehow, I didn't think Mother
had told him. "No," I said. "I don't think there is anything." The wizard
looked at me, and his eyes narrowed. "Come, 66
Patricia C. Wrede come!
You need to know the name of your father, do you not?" "No,"
I said, puzzled. I'd never been particularly inter- ested
in knowing my father's name; I mean, he wasn't around,
so what difference did it make? Mother would have told me
if she'd thought I ought to know. And I certainly couldn't
think of any reason why I needed to know. "Why should
I?" "You're
looking for him, aren't you?" the wizard snapped. "No,
not really." That might be one of the things Mother wanted
me to do, but it certainly couldn't be all of it. Furthermore,
I couldn't see how knowing his name would help
much, even if I were looking for him. In the Enchanted Forest,
looking for someone usually isn't the best way of finding
him. You're much more likely to run into people by
accident. "You
aren't? Then you must know! She told you! Who is
it?" "I
thought you were going to tell Daystar that," Shiara said.
"Don't you know?" "Silence,
fool! I have waited too long for this." The wizard
turned back to me. "You will tell me now, or regret it
deeply: Who is your father?" "I
don't know," I said. "And if I did, I don't see why I should
tell you." "There
are other ways of learning what I wish to know," the
wizard said. He straightened abruptly. The Princess squeaked
and fell silent. Nightwitch hissed. Shiara started edging
backward again. And the wizard changed. He got
a little taller and a lot younger; his beard melted away and
his hair darkened and filled in. His eyes changed from
brown to blue, but they still glared. "Antorell!" I said, and
drew my sword. The
steel rang as it came out of the sheath, and the blade shimmered
and flashed in front of me. It made the whole clearing
seem brighter. Antorell's lips curled into a sneer. "Fool!
What use is a sword against a wizard?" He
raised his staff, and a globe of green light appeared Talking
to Dragons 67 at the
lower end of it. A thread of green, dark and bright as the
shine of a snake, reached out toward me from the staff.
I raised the sword. The
green light touched the Sword of the Sleeping King. The
sword hummed a little and the ray of light vanished, and
that was all. Antorell frowned, and another, larger ray of
green reached out. This time, the humming was a little louder,
and the light around the end of Antorell's staff vanished
along with the ray touching the sword. The jan- gling
feeling lessened a little. I was considerably relieved; Antorell
looked shocked. "You
cannot! Not possibly! That sword can't..." His eyes
moved to my face, then back to the sword, and he took a
deep breath. "So! She must have known all along. But now
I will have that weapon. I must have that weapon!" "No,"
I said. "Mother wouldn't like it." Antorell's
eyes narrowed. "Cimorene has had her way long
enough. If you will not give me that sword, I will take it."
He started to raise the staff again. The
bushes behind Antorell rustled noisily, and the wiz- ard
shifted. "You, there!" he called over his shoulder. "Show yourself
at once!" "Ach—
Ach—" said someone behind him, and the bushes rustled
again. Antorell frowned and turned around, raising his
staff. "I will teach you to interfere—" The
angry look on Antorell's face changed abruptly to one of
mingled surprise and fear. He stepped backward very quickly
and waved his staff through the air in front of him. "Achooo!"
said the voice, and a large ball of fire demol- ished
the bush and enveloped Antorell. The wizard screamed and
disappeared, and we could see the person who had been behind
the bush. It was
a dragon. IT WAS
ABOUT twelve feet tall, which is not very large as dragons
go. But it was definitely a dragon. It sneezed again, which
took care of the remains of the bush, and slid forward over
the ashes into the middle of the clearing. The Princess fainted. I
started trying to put my sword away. Walking through the
Enchanted Forest with a drawn sword is bad, but talking to a
dragon with a sword in your hand is much worse. Fortunately,
the dragon didn't seem to have noticed it yet. As soon
as the sword was sheathed, I looked up again, and my
stomach went hollow. The
dragon was eyeing Shiara, and I didn't like the gleam in its
eyes. I didn't like the militant way Shiara was glaring back,
either. There wasn't very much I could do, though; you
just don't interrupt a dragon when it's busy with some- thing
else. They don't like being distracted. The
dragon slid closer and bent its head until it was staring
at Shiara from about a foot in front of her face. Shiara
jumped. The dragon blinked. "Are
you a Princess?" it asked hopefully. "No.
I'm a fire-witch," Shiara said. "And if you bite me, I'll
bum your nose off." 69 70
Patricia C. Wrede "Oh.
I thought you were a Princess." The dragon lost interest
in Shiara. It looked around the clearing again and saw me.
Its head moved over in my direction. I
bowed. "Sir or madam," I said, trying to recall all the proper
ways of addressing a dragon, "I offer you greetings in the
name of myself and my companions, and I wish you good
fortune in all your endeavors." "I
beg your pardon?" said the dragon. Its voice reminded me of
one of those wooden wind instruments, the deep kind that
you have to stand on a chair to play. It eyed me doubt- fully.
"Are you a Princess?" "I..."
I stopped and stared. Dragons just don't beg peo- ple's
pardon. Then I realized that this must be a very young dragon,
and I relaxed a little. Dragons don't usually insist on
formality until they get old enough to decide which sex they're
going to be. "I'm very sorry, but I'm afraid I'm not a
Princess. My name is Daystar; I'm very pleased to meet you." The
dragon sat back. "I had no idea Princesses were so hard to
find." It blinked and seemed to look at me for the first
time. "I'm sorry I burned your bush, but I couldn't help
it." "Oh,
please don't worry about it," I said. "It really doesn't matter
in the least." "It
was the wizard," the dragon said confidentially. "I'm allergic
to them. All dragons are." "I'm
sorry to hear that," I said. The
dragon looked at me, "You're very polite, Daystar." Its
head swiveled back toward Shiara. "Say! You weren't polite
at all!" Nightwitch
poked her head out from behind Shiara's ankle
and hissed. The dragon started and then peered down at the
kitten. "You aren't polite, either," it said. I
nudged Shiara. "Offer to do something for him," I hissed. "What?
Why?" "If
you insult a dragon, you have to do him a favor," I said.
"Hurry up!" If she didn't say something quickly, the dragon
would probably eat both of us. Unfortunately, the dragon
might eat Shiara anyway; the favor most dragons Talking
to Dragons 71 want is
dinner. I couldn't tell Shiara that, though, without offending
the dragon. I started wondering whether I could talk
the dragon out of eating us. I didn't think so; dragons are
stubborn. The
dragon's eyes glittered. Shiara looked at it. "Can I do
anything for you?" she said finally. She sounded a little sullen,
but dragons aren't very good at tone of voice. Be- sides,
it's the offer that counts. "Find
me a Princess," the dragon said promptly. I
breathed a very quiet sigh of relief. I didn't think there was a
polite way to kill a dragon, and I hadn't been able to
think of any other way of stopping it from eating Shiara and me
if it wanted to. It was nice to know I wouldn't have to,try. "You
want a Princess?" Shiara looked thoughtful. "Why?" "Dragons
are supposed to have Princesses," the dragon explained.
"I can't be considered a proper dragon until I have
one. But I've been looking for two days, and I haven't seen
even a smell of a Princess, and I'm tired of it. So you do
it." "You
aren't going to eat her or anything, are you?" Shiara said. "Eat
her?" the dragon sounded horrified. "And waste a perfectly
good Princess? Of course not! There aren't enough of them
to go around as it is! What kind of barbarian do you
think I am?" "Well,
I've never met a dragon before," Shiara said. "How
was I supposed to know? I didn't mean to hurt your feelings." "All
right," said the dragon. "But you have to get me a Princess.
It doesn't have to be a large one." "Do
you want any particular kind of Princess?" Shiara asked.
"I want to be sure you'll be satisfied." "Oh,
young and beautiful, of course," the dragon said. "Are
there other kinds?" "There
are enchanted Princesses," Shiara pointed out. "Especially
around here." "That's
right. Say, maybe that's why I haven't been able to find
one!" "I
wouldn't be surprised," Shiara said. "But will you Patricia
C. Wrede 72 take an
enchanted Princess?" The
dragon thought for a minute. "No, I don't think so. Spells
make things too complicated." "And
does it matter how long it takes me to find her?" Shiara
went on. The
dragon considered. "I don't want to wait too long, but I
really don't want to be unreasonable, either. How about a
week? You bring the Princess here by a week from today,
otherwise you owe me another favor." It licked its lips
with a long red tongue. "That
sounds reasonable," Shiara said. "But what if I'm early?" Suddenly
I realized what Shiara was planning to do. I started
edging around the clearing, toward where the Prin- cess
was lying. I wasn't quite fast enough. "The
earlier the better," the dragon said. "Then,
there's your Princess!" Shiara said, and pointed. "My,
you do work fast," the dragon said. It turned and looked
at the Princess. "She's certainly beautiful enough, but are
you sure she isn't enchanted?" "I'm
quite sure," Shiara said. "Then
why is she asleep in the middle of the day? I didn't think
Princesses were nocturnal creatures." "She
just fainted when she saw you," Shiara said reas- suringly.
"It's nothing to worry about; it happens to Prin- cesses
all the time. Will she do?" "Quite
well." The dragon nodded. "You're very prompt. Thank
you very much." Shiara
nodded. I waited until the dragon turned away; then I
frowned at Shiara. "Why
did you do that?" I whispered. "That was a terrible thing
to do!" "Would
you rather I got eaten?" Shiara whispered back. "She
won't get eaten; the dragon said so. And I bet it won't want
her for long. Dragons are smarter than some people." I
didn't know what to say to that, so I looked back at the
dragon. It was bending its head to inspect the Princess more
closely, and I tried to decide what I ought to do. Just at that
moment, the Princess opened her eyes. She gave a small
scream, and the dragon frowned. Talking
to Dragons 73 "You
don't have to be frightened," it said. "Really. You're my
Princess now, and I'm going to take proper care of you, and you
can clean my scales and cook for me. I believe that's
the standard arrangement." The
Princess burst into tears. The dragon pulled back, eyeing
her uncomfortably. "Did I say something wrong?" The
Princess just cried harder. "Alas! Ah, woe is me! So
recently was I happy, awaiting the coming of my love to
rescue me from this dismal forest! And now am I a prisoner
of a monster, and when my love arrives he will be eaten
by this awful beast, and I abandoned to my fate! Alas, that I
should come to this!" The
dragon looked considerably taken aback. It turned to
Shiara and me. "This is a Princess?" "Yes,
she is," I said. Shiara nodded, too. The
Princess had heard the question also and she raised her
head. "Indeed, I am a Princess, and the daughter of a King,
and see to what misery I have been brought!" she said
tragically. "Alas, the day I left my father's house! Yet would I
flee again, and endure with patience all the trials and
woes which have come upon me, only to be with my love
once more!" ,. The
dragon backed up a pace. "Are you sure this is a Princess?"
he asked. "Alas!
Now even my birth is doubted, and to whom shall I turn
in my distress? Ah, pity my sad state! For I am alone and
friendless, and parted from my love. Ah, woe! That ever I
let him leave my side. For he is mighty among men, most
brave and fearsome in battle, and of a fair and pleasing appearance
in all things, and he would not leave me thus, did he
but know my fate." She went back to crying. "If
this is a Princess, I'm not sure I want one," the dragon said.
It looked at the Princess speculatively. "Maybe I could eat
her, instead." "Ah,
help!" said the Princess. "I
really don't think you should eat her," I said. "After all,
you did say you wouldn't." "That's
right, I did," the dragon said. It looked at the Princess,
who was crying again, and sighed. "Nobody told me
Princesses were like this," it said in an aggrieved tone. Patricia
C. Wrede "And
who is this love she keeps talking about?" "We
haven't met him yet, I'm afraid," I said. "She says he's a
knight that she ran away with because her father wanted
her to marry someone else." I was still trying to figure
out what to do about the Princess and the dragon. "A
knight?" The dragon backed up a little farther. "I don't
think I'm ready for knights yet. They're so unpre- dictable.
I don't suppose you could find me a Princess without
a knight?" "All
really good Princesses have knights," Shiara said firmly.
"And you wouldn't want a second-rate Princess, would
you?" "All
of them?" the dragon asked plaintively. "Well,
not all of them," I said. "Some of them have Princes
instead." "Princes
are much worse than knights," Shiara said thoughtfully.
"They tend to have magic rings and sorcer- esses
for godmothers and things like that. With knights you only
have to worry about their armor and weapons, and maybe
once in a while an enchanted sword." "My
love has no need of magic!" the Princess broke in indignantly.
"For he is most strong and skilled, and never has he
been beaten in combat with sword or spear. Woe! That he
is no longer at my side!" "I
don't think I like the sound of this," the dragon said uneasily.
"Maybe if I just—" There
was a loud crashing sound, and a rather tinny- sounding
voice said, "What ho! A dragon?" The
Princess stopped crying very suddenly and sat up quite
straight. "Hark! My love approaches! Now shall you see his
prowess for yourselves!" There
were more crashing noises. The dragon backed up a
little more, looking nervous. A moment later a knight in a
somewhat dented suit of armor fell through the middle of the
thickest clump of bushes, right in front of the dragon. "On
guard, monster!" the knight said as he picked himself up.
"Prepare to die!" He pulled out a sword and waved it at the
dragon. Well, actually, he waved it a couple of feet to one
side; his helmet had slipped a little, and evidently Talking
to Dragons 75 he
couldn't see very well. The dragon looked at him, and then
back at Shiara. "This
is a knight?" it said. "My
love is the bravest of knights!" the Princess cried. "If
this is a knight, maybe I can handle him after all," the
dragon said. "He doesn't look so bad." "Ah,
hideous reptile! No longer do I fear you, for my love
will defend me! Yea, he will defend me even unto death!" "Now,
wait a minute, Isabelle," the knight said. He pulled off his
helmet, looked at it disgustedly, and threw it on the ground
behind him. "I'm perfectly willing to kill dragons for
you, but who said anything about dying?" "You
are my knight, and my brave love!" the Princess said
dramatically. "Oh, save me from this awful monster, who
would carry me off and eat me!" She sprang up and threw
her arms around the knight. "It's
going to be a bit difficult for me to save you if you hang
about my neck like that," the knight said apologeti- cally.
"It's quite awkward. If you'll just sit down, I can see about
doing this properly." The
Princess only hung on to him more tightly, which made
his aim almost as bad as it had been when he was wearing
his helmet crooked. The dragon was watching them closely,
and its eyes were starting to glow. "You certainly aren't
very polite," it said. "My
love is the soul of courtesy!" the Princess said from behind
the knight. "For he is a knight most gentle and well spoken,
much given to—" "I
say, Isabelle, must you go on like that?" the knight said.
"It's rather embarrassing. Do, please, sit down and let me
fight the dragon. Then you won't have to worry about being
eaten, you know." The
Princess gave a small scream. "Alas!" she said in a quavery
voice. "Behold my sad state! For now must I watch a
bloody battle, and perhaps see my love slain before my eyes,
and become a captive of this monster." "This
is ridiculous," said Shiara, and before I could stop her she
marched over to stand between the dragon and the Talking
to Dragons 77 knight.
I followed her, hoping I could get her out of trouble if I
had to. "Ah,
save me!" the Princess said as we got closer. I wasn't
sure whether she wanted to be saved from the dragon or from
Shiara. Shiara glared at her. "You
shut up," she told the Princess. "You've caused enough
trouble already." "I
say," said the knight. "If we're going to discuss po- liteness
..." "We
aren't," said Shiara. "We're going to discuss battles. Battles
between dragons and knights. Why do you want to fight
this dragon?" "Knights
are sworn to do battle with the beasts which ravage
the fields, carry off innocent maidens, and generally make a
nuisance of themselves," the knight said. He sounded as if
he were reciting something, and he didn't look very pleased
about the idea, but the Princess nodded approvingly. "Well,
this dragon isn't ravaging anything, and it doesn't even
want your stupid Princess," Shiara said. "I
do, too!" the dragon broke in. "If I'm not going to carry
her off, I could eat her after all. And if I fought a knight,
no one could say I'm not a proper dragon, even if I don't
have a Princess." "I
really don't think that's a very good idea," I said. "Princesses
aren't all that common, after all." "Besides,
you promised me you wouldn't," Shiara said. "I
did not!" the dragon said. "I only said I wouldn't waste a
perfectly good Princess, and I don't think this one's so
great. Eating her wouldn't be much of a waste." "I
don't think that would be very polite," I said. "Es- pecially
when you've talked to her this long without bringing it up.
You really ought to ease into these things gradually, you
know." "Are
you sure?" the dragon said. I
nodded. "Oh,
all right," said the dragon. "I won't eat her, then. But
couldn't I fight the knight anyway? Just for practice?" "I
say, that sounds like an excellent idea," the knight said,
brightening perceptibly. "A sort of exercise for both of
us." 78
Patricia C. Wrede "A
tourney!" the Princess cried. "Oh, brave and clever, to
think of such a thing!" The
knight looked pleased. So did the dragon. It nodded, then
whispered to Shiara, "What's a tourney?" "It's
like a battle, only no one gets hurt. Usually." "Not
even a little?" the dragon said. The knight started looking
worried again. "Of
course not!" Shiara said to the dragon. "It's a show of
skill." "If
you were trying to hurt each other, it wouldn't be a tourney,"
I added. Actually, it wasn't going to be a tourney anyway;
there are very specific rules about what a tourney is, and
a practice fight between a dragon and a knight just doesn't
qualify. I decided not to say so. "Oh,
all right, then," the dragon grumbled. "I don't know why I'm
letting you talk me into this. How do we start?" THE
HARDEST PART was getting the dragon and the knight to
agree about rules. The Princess didn't help much. She kept
talking about the marvelous tourneys she'd seen, and which
knights had been wounded. The dragon would start looking
at the knight, and pretty soon it would want to know why it
couldn't bite off one of the knight's arms, or at least a hand.
The knight would get worried, and the Princess would
start crying, and Shiara and I would have to talk the dragon
out of it. As soon as the dragon agreed, the Princess would
cheer up and start talking about tourneys again. Finally,
Shiara told the Princess to shut up. It wasn't very
polite, but it worked. Well, sort of. The Princess didn't stop
talking, but as long as she was complaining about Shiara
and not talking about tourneys we didn't have any more
problems with getting the dragon and the knight to agree. When we
finally decided on the rules, we had to draw a
circle in the middle of the clearing for them to fight in. It was
harder than it sounds. For one thing, a circle has to be
pretty big if a dragon is going to fit inside it, even if it's a small
dragon. Also, the moss in the Enchanted Forest grows
awfully fast. By the time we finished drawing the 79 80
Patricia C. Wrede circle,
the first half of it had already disappeared. Shiara watched
for a minute, then looked at the knight. "Are
you sure you have to have a circle to fight?" Shiara said. "I
really do think so," the knight said apologetically. "It wouldn't
be a proper tourney without it, don't you see." "I'm
sick of proper dragons and proper Princesses and proper
tourneys," Shiara said under her breath. Fortunately, the
dragon didn't hear her. We
started redrawing the circle, trying to make the line wider
this time. The knight scratched at the moss with his sword.
Shiara used a stick. So did I; I didn't think Mother would
approve if I used the Sword of the Sleeping King to cut
moss. Nightwitch and the dragon sort of dug at the ground.
The Princess sat under a tree. Eventually
we finished, and the knight and the dragon stepped
inside the circle. "Well, what are you waiting for?" Shiara
demanded. "Someone
has to say 'Go,'" the knight said in a reason- able
tone. "Go!"
I said quickly. Shiara
gave me a disgusted look, but she didn't say anything,
because as soon as I shouted the dragon and the knight
got started. They were fairly evenly matched. The dragon
was much larger, of course, and it had a very good sense
of timing, but it didn't have much experience. The knight
was wearing armor, which helped, and he was ob- viously
used to fighting, but he was a little awkward most of the
time. They were both good at dodging, though; they each
managed to take three or fours swings without hitting the
other. The dragon was just starting to take another swipe at the
knight, when a little tree sprouted up in front of him and hit
him in the nose. I was
surprised. I mean, even in the Enchanted Forest, trees
don't usually grow that fast. The dragon was even more
surprised than I was. It sort of reared back, and its tail
came around very fast to balance it. Nightwitch was a little
too close and had to scramble back out of the way. "Hey,
watch out!" Shiara said. The
dragon jumped and swung around, looking as if it Talking
to Dragons 81 expected
another tree to pop up behind it. Its tail swung in the
other direction, and the end of it caught the knight right in the
middle of his chest plate as he was trying to back out of the
way. The dragon yelped, the Princess screamed, and the
knight fell over backward into the pool of water that my
sword had made when the Princess had tried to take it. He sank
out of sight right away; evidently the pool was a lot
deeper than it looked. The Princess screamed again and
leapt forward. I ran over, too; by the time I got to the pool,
the Princess had hold of the knight. She wasn't quite strong
enough to pull him out, but she wasn't letting go, either. Shiara
got to the pool about the same time I did, and together
the three of us managed to get the knight out of the
water. He was unconscious, and he had a large dent in his
armor where the dragon's tail had hit him. The Princess checked
to make sure he was still alive and then burst into tears. "Alas!
See now how sad is my fate! For my love has been
grievously injured and I am without protection in this awful
place. Ah, woe is me!" "Is
he dead?" asked the dragon from right behind me. I jumped
a little; I hadn't noticed it come up. It peered cu- riously
over my shoulder at the knight. "Monster!"
said the Princess. "Your base attempt to slay my love
has failed! No second chance shall you have to harm
him while I can stand between you! For if my love be
slain, I shall care not whether I live or die, and thus I now
defy you." She
threw herself across the knight's chest. The knight coughed,
moaned, and opened his eyes. "I say, Isabelle," he said
weakly. "That really is a bit uncomfortable." The princess
sat up and started weeping all over his face. It didn't
seem to make him much more comfortable. The
dragon was still peering. "That was a very good fight,"
it said to the knight. "Except for the last part. My tail
still stings; I think I sprained it. Is armor always that hard?" The knight
tried to answer and started coughing instead. The
Princess cried harder, until Shiara said pointedly, "I Patricia
C. Wrede don't
think all that water is doing him much good." The Princess
stopped crying and glared at Shiara for a minute, then turned
back to the knight. Somehow, she looked a lot more
unhappy now that she wasn't crying. I felt sort of sorry
for her. Finally
the knight managed to get his coughing under control.
He looked up at the dragon and said, "I do believe I agree
with you about the fight. That trick with the tail is quite
good; I don't believe I've seen it before. I really must remember
it." "Actually,
it was something of an accident," the dragon said
modestly. "But I think I could do it again if I tried. Did you
really think it was good?" "Oh,
quite," the knight said. I got the feeling that he would
have tried to bow if he hadn't been lying on his back. "I
think perhaps you broke one or two of my ribs." "I'm
sorry," said the dragon. "Is that bad?" "It
is certainly a bit uncomfortable," the knight said. "I don't
really blame—" A
coughing spasm interrupted him. The Princess looked alarmed,
but she didn't start crying or anything. I saw Shiara watching
the Princess with a surprised look on her face, and
right about then Nightwitch sprang up onto the knight's chest. "What
is this? Go hence, and leave my love in peace!" cried
the Princess. "You
let my kitten alone," Shiara said wamingly. The
Princess stopped in midreach and looked over at Shiara.
"And shall I neglect anything that may bring comfort to my
love in his hurt?" she said. "Nightwitch
isn't going to hurt—" Shiara started, then paused.
"I guess it doesn't matter. Go ahead." I
stared at Shiara in surprise, but she was watching the Princess
and Nightwitch. The Princess got scratched a cou- ple of
times before she finally managed to pick the kitten up and
move her. By then the knight wasn't coughing quite so hard
anymore, but he still didn't seem up to talking. Shiara
frowned at him. "You don't sound very good," she said. The
dragon stuck its head farther over my shoulder. "If Talking
to Dragons 83 you
can't fix him, can I eat him?" it asked hopefully. Nightwitch
hissed. The knight looked alarmed and tried to say
something, but all that came out was more coughing. The
Princess said, "No!" very loudly and looked as if she wanted
to throw herself on top of the knight again. "Of
course not," Shiara said. "You promised." "It
wouldn't be polite," I added. "After all, that was why you had
the tourney." The
dragon looked hurt. "I was just asking." "Ah,
what are we going to do about them?" I said hastily, waving
at the Princess and the knight. "They can't stay here,
not with the knight hurt like that." "It's
not so bad, really it isn't," the knight said, looking at the
dragon nervously. He started coughing again right away,
but it didn't sound as bad as it had before and he stopped
fairly quickly. "I
suppose you could come with us," I said after a minute. It
wasn't so much that I wanted his company, or the Prin- cess's;
it was just that I didn't see what else I could do. "That's
frightfully kind of you," the knight said. He looked
uncertainly at the dragon. "Very kind, to invite me to come
with you. All of you?" "I
don't know," I said. "I haven't asked the dragon about its
plans yet. But you're quite welcome to join us, if you want
to." "Yes,"
said Shiara. "I'm sure you'll be very useful when the
wizard comes back." "Wizard?"
said the knight. He was so alarmed he almost started
coughing again. "What wizard?" "Well,
actually, there are several of them," I said. "Every now and
then one of them shows up and tries to do something to us.
The last one left when the dragon showed up." "I'm
sure he'll be back in a little while," Shiara said. "Or
one of the others will. They've been chasing us all over the
Enchanted Forest." "You
know," the knight said, "I really don't believe it would
be a good idea for me to join you. I should almost certainly
be a bit of an inconvenience, you see. Wet armor rusts,
and with that and the ribs I'm afraid I'd be a little slow.
Thank you terribly, all the same." 84
Patricia C. Wrede Talking to Dragons 85 "If
you don't come with us, what will you do?" I said. "Mrow,"
said Nightwitch. "Morwen!"
Shiara said. "They can go to Morwen! She'll know
what to do for them." Nightwitch started purring loudly,
sort of like a pepper grinder with rocks in it. I
thought about it for a minute. "It sounds like a good idea,
but will she want to?" "Morwen
likes helping people," Shiara said. "And I'm sure
she can take care of both of them." "You
know Morwen?" said the dragon. "I like her. She used to
give me apples out of her garden." I tried
to imagine a dragon eating apples and failed. I could
imagine Morwen giving them to a dragon, though. "Who
is this Morwen?" asked the Princess, clasping her hands
in front of her. "Think you that she could help my love,
indeed?" "Morwen's
sort of a friend of ours," I explained. "She lives
back that way, with a lot of cats, and her house has kind of
a strange door." "I
didn't have any trouble with it," Shiara said. "And she has
nine cats. She told me while you were asleep." "Nine
cats?" said the Princess, looking puzzled. "But what
has that to do with my love, who is so grievously hurt?" "I
said it wasn't that bad, Isabelle," said the knight un- comfortably.
"Really, I wish you wouldn't make such a fuss. I
shall be quite all right in a little, I'm sure." "If
this woman with the many cats can help you, then shall
we go to her," the Princess declared with more spirit than
she had shown about anything else. "For you are my love,
and I will have you whole and well." "Oh,
but really, Isabelle—" "I'm
sure Morwen won't mind," Shiara put in. "She fixed Daystar
up just fine. She's even good with wet swords." The
Princess looked thoroughly confused, but the knight brightened
a little. "Are you quite sure? Because I'm fright- fully
wet, sword and armor and everything, and it would be very
nice if I could keep it all from rusting. It's rather expensive,
you see." "I'm
sure she could manage mat," Shiara said. "Of course, you
don't have to go. You could stay here and wait for the wizard
to come back." The
knight didn't argue much longer; I don't think he liked
the idea of staying around the dragon, especially if a lot of
wizards were going to show up any minute. As soon as he
agreed, the Princess started telling him how wise and brave
and wonderful he was. Shiara looked disgusted, but the
knight seemed to like it. He sat up and even managed not to
cough very much. Shiara
and I told the knight how to find Morwen's house. He and
the Princess said good-bye and started walking off down
the stream. "That's a relief!" Shiara said when they were
out of earshot. "For a while I thought you were going to make
us go with that stupid Princess! It was bad enough having
to listen to her here without following her around." I
blinked at her. "But I thought you changed your mind about
her!" I said. "You were being a lot nicer to her after the
knight got hurt." Shiara
snorted. "So I felt sorry for her. She really does care
about that klutz in the tin suit; you could tell. That doesn't
mean I like her! I still think she's dumber than you are,
but I'm glad they're going to see Morwen." I still
wasn't really sure whether Morwen would object or not,
but I didn't say anything else about it. I mean, by then it
was too late anyway; the knight and the Princess were
completely out of sight. I turned around to see where I'd put
the bundle of food and things Morwen had given me. The
dragon was staring at me. "Why,"
it said, "do you have wizards chasing you?" "It's
a rather long story," I said. "I'll be glad to explain, but you
might want to make yourself comfortable first." The
dragon sighed. "Have you ever tried to be com- fortable
with a sprained tail?" Shiara
giggled. I ignored her. We waited while the dragon tried
curling into a couple of different positions. One of them
looked sort of like Suz when he was halfway through getting
up on his tail. Finally, the dragon curled itself around the
little tree that had sprouted up in the middle of the toumey.
"That's better," it said. "Enchanted trees are always more
comfortable than regular ones." 86
Patricia C. Wrede "Enchanted
trees?" Shiara said. "Of
course," the dragon said. "What else do you expect to find
in an enchanted forest? I'm going to have to re- member
to tell someone about this, though; there haven't been
any new ones in a long time." I
looked at the tree a little more closely. It was about six feet
tall now, and it seemed to have stopped growing. It didn't
look very different from the other trees in the En- chanted
Forest, except that it was a lot smaller than any of the
ones growing around the edge of the clearing. And, of course,
none of the other trees had dragons wrapped around them. "You
were going to tell me about the wizards," said the dragon. So I
explained about Mother and Antorell, and the Sword of the
Sleeping King, and everything. It took a long time. The
dragon didn't say anything at all the whole time I was talking,
but its tail twitched a couple of times. Every time it did,
the dragon winced. "That's
very interesting," the dragon said when I stopped. "Where
are you going now?" "Morwen
told us to follow the stream," Shiara said. "And Suz
said we should go talk to someone named Kazul." "It's
the same thing," the dragon said. "What
do you mean?" I asked. "The
stream goes to the castle, and Kazul lives right outside
it. I wonder why she wants to see you?" "What
castle?" Shiara said in an exasperated voice. "And who is
this Kazul person, anyway?" "It
must have something to do with that sword," the dragon
said, ignoring her questions completely. "Especially if it
really does belong to the Sleeping King." "You
mean you know something about it?" Shiara said. "Well,
then tell us what the stupid thing does!" The
dragon looked sheepish. Dragons just weren't meant to look
sheepish. "I don't know. I'm not old enough yet," it
said. "Not
old enough?" "That's
why I wanted a Princess," the dragon said. "Otherwise,
Kazul won't tell me anything important until Talking
to Dragons 87 I'm two
hundred. She says that before then dragons are irresponsible,
unwise, and talk too much." It looked faintly indignant.
"I don't talk too much." "Who
is Kazul?" I said. I was getting a little nervous about
meeting her. I mean, I didn't think I'd ever know anyone
who could tell a dragon what to do, even a young one.
Well, Mother might be able to get away with it. "Oh,
I thought you knew," the dragon said. "Kazul is the
King of the Dragons." SHIARA
AND I looked at each other. "Terrific," Shiara said. "And
I thought wizards were bad." "Did
I say something wrong?" the dragon asked. "No,
not at all," I said hastily. "We were just a little surprised,
that's all." "Hey!"
Shiara said. "How can Kazul be King of the Dragons
if she's a she? That doesn't make sense!" "It
does too!" the dragon said. "What else would you call
her?" "How
about Queen?" Shiara said sarcastically. "Queen?"
the dragon said. "Why would you want to call her a
Queen? That's not the same thing at all! You're the one who
doesn't make sense." "I
do too make sense!" Shiara said. "Queens do the same things
Kings do." "Not
for dragons," I said hastily. I didn't want the dragon to get
offended again. "Dragons have a King, period. The King of
the Dragons is the oldest dragon who can move Colin's
Stone from the Vanishing Mountain to the Ford of the
Whispering Snakes; it doesn't matter whether the dragon is male
or female." "It's
silly to have two names for the same job," the dragon 89 90
Patricia C. Wrede said
complacently. "People might get confused." "Oh."
Shiara looked skeptical, but at least she didn't object
anymore. I decided I was going to have to talk to her
soon, before she got us both in real trouble. For about a
minute, no one said anything. Then Shiara looked over at me. "Daystar,"
she said, "why are we looking for the King of the
Dragons?" I
started to say something, then stopped because I wasn't really
sure what to say. I mean, it would sound a little odd to say
that I was looking for a dragon because a lizard told me to.
Especially since the dragon was apparently King of the
Dragons. I thought some more. "I
don't know," I said finally. "But I think we have to. At
least, I have to. It seems like the right thing to do." Shiara
sighed. "I was afraid you were going to say some- thing
like that." The
dragon looked puzzled. "What's the matter? It doesn't sound
particularly unusual to me, but I suppose it'll be at least
as interesting as running away to find a Princess." Shiara
and I looked at the dragon, then at each other, then
back at the dragon again. "You ran away?" Shiara said finally. "It
was the only way I could think of to get a Princess," the
dragon said. It sighed. "It didn't work out the way I thought
it would, though." Shiara
and I exchanged glances again. I didn't really like the
idea of meeting Kazul in the company of a runaway dragon,
but I couldn't think of a way to keep it from coming along
with us if it wanted to. "You're sure you really want to
come?" I said. "I mean, there are wizards after us, and it
might be a little inconvenient if they showed up again." The
dragon looked thoughtfully for a moment, then it shook
its head. "I'm coming with you, wizards or no wiz- ards,"
it said stubbornly. "Sneezing isn't so bad." I
sighed. It's awfully hard to talk a dragon out of doing something
it's decided to do. "We'd better go, then," I said. "I'm
sure Antorell will be back as soon as he thinks it's safe,
and I'd sort of like to be gone by the time he shows up." Talking
to Dragons 91 Shiara
grabbed Morwen's bundles and shoved one at me. "You're
absolutely right. Here. Let's go." I
nodded and started toward the stream. "Not that way!" said
the dragon. "It takes too long." "How
else are we going to find the stupid castle?" Shiara demanded.
"We don't even know what it looks like!" The dragon
looked smug. "I do," it said. "And I'm very good at
shortcuts." "Morwen
told us to follow the stream," I said doubtfully. "Morwen
didn't know you were going to meet me," the dragon
said. It looked at me for a minute. "I thought you said
you were in a hurry." "Come
on, Daystar," Shiara said. "I don't care which way we
go, but let's go!" I
decided not to argue. I still didn't like the idea of leaving the
stream, but it didn't seem worth fighting over. Not with a
dragon, anyway. Besides, if we didn't leave soon, I was sure
the wizards would catch us. We started off, following the
dragon. Traveling
with a dragon was rather nice, in a way. Noth- ing
bothered us at all. When it started to get dark, we stopped and
opened Morwen's bundles again. There was obviously something
magic about them, because the leftovers from lunch
had turned into a fresh packet of food, and there was plenty
for everyone, even the dragon. Nothing
dangerous came near us all night, either. I stayed awake for
a while, just to make sure, but evidently night- shades
and wolves and things don't like the idea of annoying a
dragon any more than people do. Finally, I went to sleep, too. We
started off again as soon as we woke up next morning. The
dragon went first because it knew the way, and we followed.
After a while, I noticed that I didn't feel quite comfortable
for some reason. I touched the hilt of the Sword of the
Sleeping King a couple of times, but I didn't feel any new
magic tingles, just the same familiar ones. I started watching
the trees as we walked. Finally, Shiara noticed. "What's
the matter, Daystar?" she said. "I
don't know," I said. "But I feel as if I'm being watched." "Watched?"
Shiara looked at the trees quickly. "Who 92
Patricia C. Wrede would
be watching us?" "I
don't know," I said. "I'm not even sure someone is. I just
feel uncomfortable." "You're
being a little slow," the dragon called back over its
shoulder, and Shiara and I stopped talking and ran to catch
up. We didn't have a chance to discuss it again, but I
noticed Shiara looking uneasily at the forest from time to time.
Even Nightwitch seemed to notice something wrong; she
stopped jumping at leaves and stayed close to Shiara. In
fact, Shiara almost stepped on her once. After that, Shiara carried
her. In
spite of all the worrying, nothing happened until late that
morning. The dragon was moving on through the forest, ignoring
all the little branches and things that happened to be in
its way. Suddenly it gave a smothered yelp and stopped. Shiara
and Nightwitch and I ran forward to see what was the
matter. The
dragon was sitting back, rubbing its nose and glaring at a
large open space in front of it. I looked around, but I didn't
see anything else. "What happened?" I asked. "I
ran into something," the dragon said, glaring at me for a
minute instead of the open space. "But
there isn't anything— Ow!" Shiara started to wave toward
the clearing, but her hand stopped about halfway through
the wave, as if it had hit something. She rubbed her
fingers, then put out her hand more cautiously. It stopped in
midair, right where it had before. Nightwitch hissed and backed
away. I
reached out, very carefully. It was a little strange to feel
something where I couldn't see anything. It was cool and
smooth, like stone, and it went up as far as I could reach.
"It's an invisible wall!" I said. "No,
it's an invisible castle," Shiara said. Then she jerked her
hand away and stared at the air in front of her as if she could
make herself see something by trying hard. "Hey! How do
I know that?" "I
don't know," I said. "When did you figure it out?" "I
didn't! I was just standing here, wanting to know what it was,
and all of a sudden I did. I even know how to do it!" Talking
to Dragons 93 ^?* !& ft "Do
what?" asked the dragon. "Put your hand on a castle?" "No,
no; how to make things invisible!" Shiara said. "I
don't want to know how to make things invisible," the
dragon said crossly. "I want to know where this invisible thing
came from. It wasn't here last time I came this way." For
once, I wasn't paying much attention to the dragon; I was
staring at Shiara. "You figured out how to turn a castle
invisible just by touching it?" I said. "No,
you have to do a lot of other things to it," Shiara said
absently. Then her face changed, as if she had just remembered
something she didn't like, and she stared at the
open area for a minute. Then she swallowed so hard I could
see it. "Let's leave, Daystar; I don't think I want to meet
anyone who would live in an invisible castle." I
looked at Shiara, and then at the open space. I looked back at
Shiara and opened my mouth to ask why we ought to
leave, but I stopped before I said anything. Shiara looked a
little white, and a little sick, and a lot scared. I hadn't ever
seen Shiara look like that before, not even when the wizard
tried to catch us with his snakey water monster. Especially
not then. I decided I could wait to find out what the
problem was. "All right," I said. "Let's go." "But
I want to know what it's doing in the middle of my shortcut,"
the dragon complained. "We
can talk about it somewhere else," I said. Shiara
was already backing into the trees; her eyes were still
fixed on the open space where the castle would be if we
could see it. I glanced back at the dragon. It sort of shrugged.
"Oh, all right," it said. "But I don't see what all the
fuss is about." Right
then Shiara yelled, sort of a half yell that stopped in the
middle. I whirled around. There was a woman stand- ing
where Shiara had been. She was very tall, and she had long
hair that was so red it was almost black. She was dressed
in something green and shining and elegant that hung
from a deep red jewel at her throat, and she was very beautiful.
More beautiful than the Princess, even. I didn't care. "Where's
Shiara?" I said. She
smiled, the same way a very satisfied cat smiles, Patricia
C. Wrede except
that cats don't look evil. Well, most cats don't. "Shiara;
is that your little friend's name? She's right here, my
dear." She stepped aside, and I went cold. Behind her, where
it had been hidden until she moved aside, was a grey stone
statue that looked exactly like Shiara. "That
can't be Shiara!" I said. I was too upset to even think
about being polite. "Shiara's a fire-witch, and fire- witches
are immune to magic!" The
woman smiled another unpleasant smile. "Not the magic
of another fire-witch," she said. "I've been waiting a long
time for someone else to come by; I need her for something." "How
is turning her into a statue going to help?" I said. I was
hoping I could talk her into changing Shiara back; then
maybe I could do something to keep Shiara that way. The
fire-witch glanced at the statue. "It's an excellent way of
storing people until you need them," she said. "I have
quite a number in my garden; they're ornamental as well as
useful." "That
doesn't sound nice," the dragon said. The
woman seemed to see it for the first time, which I
thought was a little odd. I mean, dragons aren't exactly easy to
overlook. "I am not concerned with being nice," she
said. "Why
not?" I said. The
fire-witch turned and looked at me. Suddenly her eyes
narrowed. "Who are you, boy?" she said sharply. "My
name is Daystar," I said, "and I would appreciate it if
you would change Shiara back." "No,"
she said flatly. "Why should I?" She was still staring
at me, as if she were trying to figure something out. "You're
very interesting, Daystar," she said abruptly. "I think
perhaps I'll let you go. I haven't done anything like that in
a long time; it might be an interesting experience. I think
you had better leave before I change my mind." "I'm
sorry, but I'm not leaving until you turn Shiara back,"
I said. "Then
I am afraid you will grow rather bored," the woman said.
She looked at me thoughtfully for a moment, then Talking
to Dragons 95 shook
her head. "No, I don't have any use for you, and I can't
be bothered storing things that aren't useful. Pity; you'd
make a nice fountain." She lifted one hand and snapped her
fingers. I had
just enough time to realize that I hadn't drawn my sword.
I grabbed for it and pulled, knowing I wasn't going to make
it. There was something like an explosion just in front
of me, and a wave of heat, and then I was holding the
Sword of the Sleeping King up in front of me and watching
the fire-witch cursing and stamping at something. She
didn't look at all elegant anymore. Suddenly
I realized why the fire-witch had missed. "Nightwitch!"
I yelled. A small bundle of black fur darted out
from under the witch's skirt and vanished under a bush. The
fire-witch glared after the kitten, then turned back to me.
"You'll suffer for—" Right
next to me there was a sound like someone blowing out
several very large candles all at once, and a stream of fire
shot out and enveloped the fire-witch. She laughed. "Fire,
to harm me? Even a dragon should know better! I'll
see to you in a moment; do you think I am fool enough to grow
a garden without dragonsbane?" The
dragon shuddered, and the fire-witch laughed again. Then
she looked at me, and her eyes glittered. "I want you first,
though. Now!" She pointed at me, and I raised the Sword
of the Sleeping King a little higher, holding on to the
hilt with both hands and hoping it would be able to do something. Something
hit the sword, and pain ran through my whole body.
It felt a little like the shock I'd gotten when Shiara and I
had tried to pick up the sword at the same time, except it went
on and on. The Sword of the Sleeping King began to get
hot. I felt as if boiling lead were running down the sword
and into my arms. I think I screamed; I know the fire-witch
did, because I heard her. The
Sword of the Sleeping King was glowing dull red in my
hands. It wasn't behaving at all the way it had when it
stopped Antorell's spell, and I got the distinct impression that
this wasn't very good for it. It wasn't very good for Talking
to Dragons 97 me,
either; the sensation of boiling lead was oozing farther up my
arms. I knew
I had to do something, because if I didn't I was going
to drop the sword. I yelled something and pushed. At
least, pushing is the only way I can describe what I did. I
wasn't really thinking too clearly by then; I just wanted the
lead to go back into the sword and quit hurting. I heard
a wail from the fire-witch that kind of died out, and the
pain stopped very suddenly. I noticed that the sword wasn't
glowing anymore, and then I fell over. It wasn't that I felt
particularly tired or weak; I just couldn't stand up anymore.
The last thing I remember thinking was that I had to hang
on to the sword, no matter what. I woke
up because something small and warm and rough was
rubbing my chin. I opened my eyes. Nightwitch was sitting
on the ground in front of me, licking my face. I was
lying facedown on the moss; I could feel the Sword of the
Sleeping King underneath me. It was very uncom- fortable,
but I didn't feel like moving. I closed my eyes again. Nightwitch
hissed and dug her claws into my shoulder. Kittens
have surprisingly sharp claws; I opened my eyes again
very quickly. The dragon was staring at me from beside
Nightwitch. At least, its head was beside Nightwitch; the
rest of it wouldn't fit. It blinked at me. "Are
you dead?" it asked. "No,"
I said. I thought about saying something else, but 1 I
didn't have the energy. $ "Oh." The dragon sounded almost
disappointed for a |
minute. Then it brightened. "I think that fire-witch is." (I "That's nice." I had the
feeling I should remember some- a
thing, but I didn't want to think hard enough to figure out what.
Nightwitch hissed and dug her claws into me again. "Stop
that!" I said, and I rolled onto my back to keep her from
doing it again. "What?"
said the dragon. "Nightwitch,"
I said. Rolling over had taken all the en- ergy I
had; I didn't want to talk anymore. I didn't even want to
think anymore. I wanted the dragon to just leave me 98
Patricia C. Wrede alone,
but I couldn't say so without being rude, so I closed my eyes
and started drifting off to sleep instead. Then Nightwitch
jumped onto my chest and dug her claws in hard. I
yelled and sat up. Nightwitch jumped down to the ground
and ran off. I tried to see where she'd gone and saw Morwen's
bundle instead. Suddenly I realized that I was very hungry.
I started to reach for the bundle, then remem- bered
that I was still holding the sword. I also remembered the
boiling lead, and I was almost afraid to look at my hands.
I was sure that this time I'd burned both of them worse
than when I'd picked up the wizard's staff. I
looked down. There wasn't anything wrong with me— at
least, not that I could see. I let go of the sword with one hand;
it didn't hurt. I heaved a sigh of relief and put the sword
back in its sheath, then got out some of Morwen's gingerbread
and started eating. It was a good thing the food was
right on top of the bundle; I didn't have the strength to hunt
for it. The
dragon watched me for a few minutes with a puzzled expression.
"You're a very good magician," it said finally. "Where
did you leam that spell?" "Spell?"
I was having a little trouble remembering the details
of the fight. I wasn't sure whether it was because it had
hurt so badly or because I was too busy eating. "The
one you shouted right before the witch went up in smoke,"
the dragon said. "You said: 'Power
of water, wind, and earth, Turn
the spell back to its birth.'" "Oh,
that," I said. I felt a little silly. "It's just part of a rhyme
Mother taught me when I was little. I don't know why I
said it." "Your
mother taught you? But that's a dragon spell! Your mother
couldn't teach you dragon spells!" "You
don't know my mother," I said. I'd eaten most of the
gingerbread, and I was feeling much better. "She taught me two
more lines to the rhyme," I offered. "They go: Talking
to Dragons 99 'Raise
the fire to free the lord By the
power of wood and sword.'" The
dragon looked at me suspiciously. "Where did your mother
leam dragon spells?" "I'm
afraid she didn't tell me," I said. I finished the gingerbread
and looked around. "Where did Shiara..." My voice
died in midsentence as I remembered exactly where Shiara
had been when I saw her last. I didn't want to look, but I
had to. I took a deep breath and turned my head. Sometimes,
when witches or wizards die, all their spells die
with them. If the witch or wizard is skillful, sometimes the
spells last. The fire-witch had been skillful. Shiara was still a
statue. I SAT
THERE for a minute, staring at the statue and wondering what to
do. Finally I looked at the dragon. "Do you know anything
about magic?" "Of
course I do!" the dragon said. "Everyone who lives in the
Enchanted Forest knows about magic." I
sighed. "I mean, do you know anything about turning statues
that used to be people back into people again? Be- cause I
don't, and we have to figure out some way to fix Shiara." "Oh."
The dragon looked doubtfully at the statue of Shiara. "We
could take her to the Living Spring and drop her in," it
suggested. "That would bring her back to life." "You
know where the Living Spring is?" I said in sur- prise. "No,"
said the dragon. "But I bet if we found it, it would work." I shook
my head. "I don't think we have time to look for it,"
I said. "There are wizards looking for us, remem- ber?" "Oh,
that's right," the dragon said. "I keep forgetting. I don't
like to think about wizards." It blinked. "What about your
sword? You could say that spell again." 102
Patricia C. Wrede I
nodded. I walked over to Shiara and pulled the Sword of the
Sleeping King out of its sheath. I felt a little uncom- fortable,
partly because I hadn't thought of using the sword and
partly because the dragon spell was still just one of Mother's
nursery rhymes to me. The idea of standing in the middle
of the Enchanted Forest holding a magic sword and reciting
nursery rhymes made me feel very silly. I looked at the
statue of Shiara again and decided I'd try it anyway. Slowly,
I lowered the point so that it touched the statue's shoulder
and said: "Power
of water, wind, and earth Turn
the spell back to its birth. Raise
the fire to free the lord By the
power of wood and sword." For a
minute I thought nothing had happened; then three or four
little tingles ran up my arm from the sword. I hadn't even
realized they were missing until they started again. When I
finally did notice, I was relieved. I mean. Mother wouldn't
have been at all happy with me if I'd ruined the Sword
of the Sleeping King somehow. Unfortunately,
Shiara was still a statue. "I suppose we're going
to have to look for the Living Spring," I said. "Unless you
have some other ideas." "I'm
afraid I don't," the dragon said. "I've never been on an
adventure before. How are we going to find the spring?" "I
don't know," I said. Half of the heroes who stopped at our
cottage had been looking for the Living Spring, and I'd
never heard of one of them finding it. I tried to think of
someone who might know where the spring was. "Suz!" I said
suddenly. "What?"
the dragon said. "Suz
is sort of a friend of mine," I explained. "He says he
knows everything that goes on in the Enchanted Forest; I'm
sure he'd know where the Living Spring is. I wish he were
here." "You
do?" said a squeaky voice by my right foot. "Yes, Talking
to Dragons 103 you
really do! How intriguing. Why do you?" "Suz!"
I said. I looked around until I saw him, then carefully
sat down on the ground. "I'm awfully glad to see you. Do
you know where the Living Spring is?" "The
Living Spring?" Suz said. "Dear me! Why do you want to
know?" "What's
that?" said the dragon, who had finally managed to find
the source of the squeaky voice. "It looks like a little dragon." "Oh,
I'm sony. This is Suz; I was just telling you about him.
He's not a dragon; he's a lizard." "A
lizard of extremely good family," Suz said. He frowned at the
dragon, but the dragon didn't seem to notice. Suz gave up
and looked back at me. "Now, why do you want to know
about the Living Spring?" "Because
Shiara got turned into a statue by the fire-witch who
lived in the invisible castle," I said. "She
did?" The lizard peered around until he saw the statue,
then scurried over. He cocked his head briefly and stared
upward, then ran up the grey stone in a spiral until he was
sitting on one of the statue's shoulders. "She really did!
How exceedingly distressing. What are you going to do
about it?" "We
thought if we dropped the statue into the Living Spring,
it would, well, fix Shiara," I said. "But we don't know
where the spring is." "You
don't? No, of course you don't. It's a secret." Suz peered
at me from Shiara's shoulder. "I suppose you want me to
tell you where it is." He considered for a moment. "I
couldn't possibly do that, so you don't need to bother asking." "But
Suz!" I said. "How else can we fix Shiara? I've tried
everything we could think of, and nothing worked." "That
is extremely obvious," the lizard said severely. He ran
down the side of the statue and stopped right in front of me.
"If anything had worked, she wouldn't be a statue, and you
wouldn't be asking me silly questions," he said, and did
whatever the thing was that he did to balance on his
tail. "People who are looking for things in the Enchanted 104
Patricia C. Wrede Forest
have to find them for themselves. You really ought to know
that, you really ought." "Well,
what are we going to do about Shiara if you won't tell us
where the spring is?" I said. "My
goodness gracious, you certainly are persistent," Suz
said. "Have you tried kissing her?" "Kissing
her?" I said incredulously. "Kissing
the statue," Suz explained condescendingly. "It's one of
the standard cures for being made to sleep for years, or
being turned into a frog or a statue or something else like
that. Have you tried it?" I felt
my face getting hot. "Um, well, no," I said. "Well,
then," Suz said pointedly. I
thought about it for a minute or two. I didn't know whether
Shiara would think much of my kissing her, but I didn't
really object, especially if it would break the spell. In
fact, I sort of liked the idea. At that point, I stood up very
quickly because my face was getting even hotter and I could
feel Suz staring at me. I was
standing right next to the statue, and as soon as I was all
the way standing I leaned forward and kissed it. I didn't
want to take time to look before I did it, because I
didn't really want to think about it. First I felt cold stone, but it
warmed up right away, and a second later Shiara jerked
away and said, "Hey! Daystar, what on earth do you think
you're doing?" "It
worked!" I said. I was awfully relieved. It would have been a
lot of work to carry a statue around with us, and if we
hadn't gotten Shiara turned back into Shiara, we would have
had to. Besides, having Shiara back felt good, even if she
was glaring at me. "What
worked?" Shiara demanded suspiciously. "And where
did that witch go? She was here a minute ago." "You
were a statue," the dragon informed her. "The fire- witch
did it, but Daystar got rid of her. I'm very glad he did,"
it added thoughtfully. "I didn't like her. She wasn't polite
at all, and she.. .and she..." The dragon leaned forward
and said in a loud whisper, "And she grew dra- gonsbane!" 106
Patricia C. Wrede Shiara
stared at the dragon, but before she could say anything
there was a loud squeak from behind her, and Suz's voice
started shouting. "Help! Murder! Wild beasts and dangerous
lunatics! Oh dear oh my help help goodness gra- cious
help oh!" I
turned around. Nightwitch had come out from wherever she'd
been hiding, and apparently she'd managed to sneak up on
Suz while I was, well, kissing Shiara. Suz was rolled into a
tight golden ball, and Nightwitch was batting him back
and forth between her paws in wide-eyed fascination. I
didn't think she'd ever played with a ball that yelled at her
before, which would explain the interest. I bent
over to pick up Nightwitch, but before I actually got
hold of her the lizard uncurled very quickly, slapped his
tail sharply against the kitten's nose, and curled up tight again.
He didn't stop yelling the whole time. The kitten jerked
her head back so fast that she sat down hard on her tail,
and I grabbed her. "It's
all right now, Suz," I said. The
lizard poked his nose out of the ball. "You're quite certain?"
he said. "Yes,
of course," I said. Suz
uncurled a little more. "This sort of thing is quite unsettling,"
he said. "I do not approve at all. Dear me, no, not at
all." "I'm
very sorry," I said. "I'm afraid I didn't know she was
there." "People
who keep wild animals ought to know where they
are so they don't go around eating other people," the lizard
said. He uncurled the rest of the way and lay on the moss,
peering reproachfully up at me. I bent
down, and Suz scooted back a couple of feet. "You
keep that, that beast away from me!" "Nightwitch
isn't a wild animal," Shiara said indignantly. "She's
a kitten. And I don't believe she meant to eat you; she
just wanted to play." "She's
too young to know better," I said. Shiara glared at me,
and I added hastily, "Nightwitch, I mean." "She
is?" The lizard squinted at Nightwitch from a safe distance.
"Yes, I suppose she is," he said reluctantly. "How Talking
to Dragons 107 unfortunate.
I really do think I had better leave. Dear me, yes, I
really must." Suz
nodded and headed off into the woods. "Suz, wait!" Shiara
called. The
lizard stopped and looked back over his shoulder. "What
is it?" "I'm
sorry Nightwitch scared you," Shiara said. "You
are?" Suz turned around and ran back to where Shiara
was standing. He cocked his head at her, then did his
tangled tail-balancing trick and stared up at her. "Why, you
really are! How astonishing! How extraordinary! How extremely
unexpected!" I was a
little surprised myself, but I didn't think it was quite
that unusual. I didn't mention it, though; I had a few other
things I wanted to ask Suz as long as he was still around. "Suz?"
The lizard turned his head and looked at me. "What's
the best way to get to the castle where Kazul lives from
here?" I asked. "Why,
it's—" Suz paused. "Dear me, there seems to be an
invisible castle in the way. How ridiculous. I'm afraid you'll
just have to go around." "That's
what I was afraid of," I said. "But thank you anyway." "It's
quite all right. And I really must be going now, I really
must. Good-bye." Suz bowed politely, then did a quick
backflip and scurried off into the woods. "And
thank you for telling me how to change Shiara back!"
I called. Suz
didn't answer. I turned back to find Shiara glaring at me
again. "All
right, Daystar, explain. What's all this about statues and
getting rid of witches?" "I
already told you all that," the dragon said in an injured tone.
"Why do you want him to tell you again?" "Because
I didn't understand it when you told it," Shiara said.
She sounded a lot like Mother. "And I want to know what's
been going on." She sat down on the ground and looked
at me. "So explain." I
explained. Shiara let me talk until I started to explain 108
Patricia C. Wrede how
we'd finally turned her from a statue back into Shiara, but
then she interrupted. "You don't have to keep going," she
said. She gave me an odd look. "I remember that part." "Oh.
I'm sorry," I offered. My face was getting hot again.
"But no one could think of anything else, and it did work." Shiara
wasn't paying much attention. "Daystar, did your sword
burn your hands when Antorell tried to throw that spell
at you?" she said suddenly. "No,"
I said, relieved by the change of subject. "It didn't do
anything at all." "It
did too!" Shiara said. "It ate Antorell's spell, or some- thing,
without doing anything to you. Why didn't it do that to the
fire-witch's spell?" "Who's
Antorell?" asked the dragon. "The
wizard you were sneezing at when we met," I said. "He's
not very pleasant." "Wizards
aren't," the dragon said. "Daystar,
this is important!" Shiara said. "Do you know why
your sword didn't do the sam&ming to the fire-witch that it
did to Antorell?" "Maybe
the sword works differently on wizards than it does on
fire-witches," I said. "I wish it would get rid of Antorell;
then I could stop worrying about him." Shiara
said something else, but I missed it. All of a sudden
I had the same itchy feeling I'd had earlier, as if someone
were watching me. I looked over my shoulder, but
there wasn't anyone there. Just trees. "Daystar?"
Shiara almost sounded worried. "I'm
all right," I said. "But can we get started and talk about
this more somewhere else? We still have to get to see Kazul,
and there's an invisible castle in the way." "Shouldn't
we do something about the people she turned into
statues for her garden?" Shiara said, looking nervously at the
clearing where the castle ought to be. "Why?"
said the dragon in a puzzled tone. "Because
it wouldn't be right to just leave them here," I said. No one
seemed to like the idea of going into the castle. No one
wanted to leave the fire-witch's statue people there Talking
to Dragons 109 without
trying to rescue them, either. We spent a little while trying
to figure out how to get into the castle. Shiara wanted to
climb over the wall, but I didn't think that was a very good
idea if we couldn't see the wall or what was on the other
side. Finally, she agreed to help me look for a door or a
gate or something. We
stretched our hands out in front of us and walked carefully
toward the castle. It wasn't there. We went a little farther;
it still wasn't there. We walked around the clearing for a
while, while the dragon watched with interest. Even- tually,
we gave up. "I
don't understand," Shiara said as we came back to pick up
Nightwitch and Morwen's bundles. "Where did it go?" "Maybe
the fire-witch moved it while she was talking to me,"
I said. "A
whole castle? That fast? Besides, didn't Suz say it was
still in the way? It must have moved since he left." Shiara
stopped, and her eyes widened. "Daystar, you don't think
she could still be around, do you?" "She
isn't around anywhere," the dragon said positively. "She
went up in smoke; I saw her." "Good,"
Shiara said savagely. I must have looked aw- fully
surprised, because Shiara glared at me and added, "She deserved
it. You don't know what she had to do to make that
castle invisible." "What
was it?" the dragon said curiously. Shiara
glared at it, too. "I don't want to talk about it." "Why
not?" said the dragon. "Because
she tortured people to death!" Shiara shouted. "It
was part of the spell, and I know how to do it, and I don't
want to think about it!" "I
told you she wasn't a nice person," the dragon said. Shiara
snorted. She picked up Nightwitch and her bundle and
started walking. After a couple of seconds, the dragon and I
followed her. We went straight across the clearing; I sort of
hoped we'd find the castle again, because I felt bad about
the statues, but it still wasn't there. Once we
got across the clearing, the dragon took the lead
again. Nobody said much for the rest of the morning, 110
Patricia C. Wrede which
was fine with me; I still felt like someone was watch- ing me,
and I didn't like it. Finally even the dragon noticed. "You
look a little strange," it said. "Is something wrong?" "I
don't think so," I said. "I just feel like someone's watching
me." "I
think you're imagining things," Shiara said. "I've been looking
since you told me about it this morning, and I haven't
seen anyone." "Someone's
following us?" the dragon said. It blinked at me,
then turned in a slow circle, eyeing the trees. "You're right,"
it said finally. "Someone is following us. That's not polite." Before
Shiara or I could say anything, the dragon's head shot
out toward one of the trees. I'd never seen anything move so
fast. There was a loud yell from someone who wasn't
the dragon; then the dragon yelped and a bunch of leaves
came drifting down to the ground. I heard a couple of
crashing noises and another, louder yell, and then the dragon
reappeared. Dangling by the seat of his pants from the
dragon's mouth was an elf. I
stared for a minute, trying to decide whether this was the
same elf we'd met before. He looked the same, but all elves
look alike. Besides, he was yelling and kicking, and every
now and then the dragon would shake its head, which made it
hard to get a good look at the elf. I
almost laughed; the dragon looked a lot like a very large
cat with a small mouse. Nightwitch evidently thought so,
too; she eyed the wriggling elf with some interest, then looked
at me. "Mrrow?" she said. "I'm
afraid he's too big for you," I said. "He
certainly is!" yelled the elf. "Put me down! Let me down at
once!" "Mrof!"
said the dragon through a mouthful of cloth. "I
don't think he wants to," I said to the elf. "Why were you
following us?" "Hey!"
said Shiara. "Are you the elf we ran into before? Because
if you are, I want to talk to you." The elf
stopped struggling and looked down at Shiara. Then he
twisted around and looked at the dragon. "On the other
hand, maybe I'm better off up here," he said. Talking
to Dragons 111 "Mmnuf!"
said the dragon, and shook its head violently. "Yow!"
said the elf. "Help! I surrender!" "Really?"
Shiara said skeptically. "Really!"
said the elf. "Absolutely! Completely and with- out
question. Will you put me down?" "Maybe
you should," I said to the dragon. "I don't think he can
get away from all of us, and it will be a lot easier for you
to talk." The
dragon looked at me for a minute, then slowly low- ered
its head and dropped the elf in a heap in front of us. The elf
lay there breathing hard while Shiara and the dragon and I
closed in around him. As soon as we stopped moving, he
bounced to his feet and spun rapidly in a circle, bowing to each
of us. Then he sat down cross-legged and looked up at
us with bright black eyes. "Now,"
said the elf, "what can I do for you?" WE
LOOKED AT each other and then at the elf. "What you can
do," said Shiara, "is answer some questions." "My
dear lady, I would be delighted," the elf said. "What do you want
to know?" "Why
were you following us?" the dragon rumbled. "I
thought she was asking the questions," said the elf. "We're
all asking questions," Shiara told him. "So you can
just stop dodging and answer that one." "What
one?" the elf said. The dragon growled and made a
snapping motion at the elf, who jerked back hastily. "Yes, ah, of
course," he said. "That question. I was, um, looking for
information." "Information?
Ha!" said Shiara. "What kind of infor- mation?" "Who
you are, where you're going, and what you're going
to do when you get there," the elf replied promptly. He was
pointedly not looking at the dragon. "That's
all?" Shiara said sarcastically. "It sounds a lot like
what we want to know about you." "How
nice," the elf said, beaming. "We have something in
common." "Excuse
me," I broke in. "But who exactly are you?" 113 114 Patricia
C. Wrede Talking
to Dragons 115 The elf
looked at me with a pained expression. "I'm an elf." "I
can see that," I said politely. "But would you mind telling
me your name? I mean, I'd sort of like to know to whom
I'm speaking." "My
dear boy, I would be delighted." The elf rose and bowed
with a flourish. "My name," he said, "is Janril." He sat
down again and looked at me expectantly. "Pleased
to meet you, Janril," I said. "This is Shiara, that's
Nightwitch..." I hesitated a moment. Dragons don't pick
their names until they're old enough to pick what sex they're
going to be, too, and I wasn't quite sure how to introduce
one. I couldn't leave it out, though. "This is a dragon—" "Somehow
I guessed," the elf muttered. "—and
I'm Daystar," I finished. Shiara
was frowning at me, but before she could say anything
the elf bounced to his feet and said, "Daystar! Not Cimorene's
son? My dear boy, I can't tell you how glad I am
you've finally come. It's about time things got straight- ened
out a little." "I
don't trust elves," Shiara said. "And why should we listen
to you, anyway?" "My
dear girl, if you expect me to answer questions, you're
going to have to listen to me," said the elf. "Other- wise
there's no point in it. Why don't you trust elves?" Shiara
didn't want to tell the elf anything. I was beginning to like
him, though, and I didn't see what difference it would make,
so I told him about the first elf and the wizard's staff. When I
finished, Janril nodded solemnly. "That,"
he said, "explains everything. I am afraid you ran
into one of the Darkmoming Elves; they're a rather disreputable
lot. They've been running wild since the King disappeared,
so of course they'd cause you trouble." "Why
'of course'?" said Shiara suspiciously. "And what King
are you talking about?" "The
King of the Enchanted Forest," the elf said. "The Darkmoming
Elves don't want him to come back; they like the way
things have been run since he left. Since you have his
sword, of course they would want to get rid of you. If they
could," he added thoughtfully. "Personally, I don't think
they really know what they're doing." "How
do you know about Daystar's sword?" Shiara asked suspiciously. "My
dear girl, everyone who lives in the Enchanted For- est
knows something about the Vanished King's Sword," Janril
said. "It—" "Wait
a minute!" I said. "I only have one sword, and I thought
it was called the Sword of the Sleeping King." "Sleeping,
vanished, run away—what difference does it make?"
Janril said. "He's gone." "I
don't care about the sword," the dragon said. "I want to know
why you were following us." The elf
looked annoyed. "My dear... ah... dragon," he said,
"I told you already, I wanted to find out more about you. I
believe that's the usual reason for following people around." "But
that doesn't explain anything," the dragon com- plained. Shiara's
eyes narrowed suddenly. "All right, then, why did you
want to know more about us?" she said. Janril
considered for a moment, then grinned reluctantly. "Because
I'm trying to find out what the Darkmoming Elves are up
to." "What
does that have to do with us?" I asked. "If
I knew that, I wouldn't have to follow you," the elf said
reasonably. "But the Darkmoming Elves have been very
active in this part of the woods for the past few days, and we
thought it might be you they were interested in. And of
course, if they're interested, so are we." "Who
do you mean by 'we'?" I said. "The
Goldwing-Shadowmusic Elves," Janril said with a touch
of pride. "We are on the side of the King, even if he is
missing right now. We follow the sword." "What
does that mean?" Shiara demanded. "And how many
kinds of elves are there?" "Quite
a few," said Janril. "But the only ones you have to
watch out for are the Darkmorning Elves and the Patricia
C. Wrede Silverstaff
Elves. Fortunately, the Silverstaff Elves don't know
the sword is back yet, but I doubt that your luck will hold
much longer." "How
do you know these Silverstaff Elves don't know about
Daystar's sword?" Shiara asked. "My
dear girl, if they did, you'd, have wizards all over the
place. The Silverstaff Elves are in league with them. Undiscriminating,
that's all I can call it." Janril looked prim. A prim
elf is almost as odd-looking as a dignified lizard; I found
myself wishing Suz were still around so I could com- pare
them. "How
do we know you're telling the truth?" Shiara said. "I
suppose you don't," the elf said cheerfully. "But it doesn't
really matter. We'll still be glad to help you." Shiara
snorted. "The last elf who said he was going to help us
almost got Daystar killed." "I'm
sorry about that," Janril said politely. "But I simply can't
take responsibility for the Darkmoming Elves. Now, I must
be going; I have to let the rest of the Goldwing- Shadowmusic
Elves know what's going on. We'll see you in the
castle." "Just
a minute!" Shiara said. "What makes you think we're
going to let you go?" "Can
you think of anything else we could do with him?" I said. "I
could eat him, I suppose," the dragon said. He looked dubiously
at the elf. "I don't think I want to, though; elves don't
taste very good." I
decided not to ask how the dragon knew that. "I really don't
think you have to eat him," I said. "I think we should just
let him go." "But
Daystar—" Shiara stopped and thought for a mo- ment,
biting her lip. "Oh, all right. If you want to let him go,
let's do it." "Are
you sure?" I said, surprised. "I thought you didn't like
the idea." "I
don't," Shiara said, glaring at me. "But we'll be here all day
if we start arguing. Besides, it's your sword." I
wasn't quite sure what that had to do with anything, but I
didn't ask. "All right," I said to the elf, "I think you Talking
to Dragons 117 can go.
But I don't really think you'd better follow us around anymore." "But
of course!" said the elf. He bounced to his feet again,
bowed to each of us including Nightwitch, and whisked off.
Shiara scowled after him and opened her mouth, then apparently
decided not to say anything. "Well,
let's go," I said after a minute. We picked up our bundles
and started walking again. The dragon and I both watched
the trees for a while, but the elf apparently kept his
promise to quit following us. Shiara
walked just behind the dragon, looking thoughtful. "Do
you really believe that elf?" she finally asked me. "I'm
not sure," I said. "I don't think it makes much difference,
though. I'd still be going to see Kazul, no matter what he
said. I want to find out about this sword and what it does
and what's really going on around here." I must
have sounded sort of annoyed, because Shiara frowned
at me and said, "What's the matter with you?" "I'm
getting sort of tired of people chasing my sword," I said.
"I'd like to know why they want it so badly." I was also
beginning to realize that I didn't know nearly as much about
the Enchanted Forest as I thought I did, which made me very
nervous. I wasn't going to mention that to Shiara just
yet, though. "Oh."
Shiara looked thoughtful again. "Well, you could—" The
dragon looked backward over its shoulder. "You're slowing
down," it said. "Can't you talk and walk at the same
time?" We
started walking faster, which really did make it harder to
talk. I kept watching for elves or wizards, but I didn't see
any. In between, I thought about the sword, but I didn't
come up with anything new. We made
fairly good time for the rest of the afternoon, and we
were just beginning to think about stopping for the night
when we came to the clearing. The dragon stopped right
at the edge of it, very abruptly. Fortunately, Shiara and I
were back far enough to stop before we ran into it or stepped
on its tail or something. Bumping into a dragon is not a
particularly good way to end a day. 118
Patricia C. Wrede "What's
the matter now?" asked Shiara. "This
looks just like that last clearing," the dragon said. "The
one that had the castle in it." "You
mean we've been going in circles?" Shiara said. "No!"
said the dragon. "I know my way around the Enchanted
Forest better than that! I just don't like this." "I
don't see why you're worried," Shiara said. "You're not the
one who got turned into a statue." "Well,
if you think it's fun to go banging into something you
can't see, you go first," said the dragon. I put
my hand on the hilt of my sword, and felt a nice, strong
rumble, like a cart full of bricks on a bumpy road. There
was definitely something in the clearing, or at least close
by. I said so. "If
it's invisible, I don't want anything to do with it," Shiara
said decidedly. "Can't we just go around?" "No,"
said the dragon grumpily. "I want to know who's putting
all these invisible things in my shortcut. If there's another
one here, I'm going to find out about it." It stalked cautiously
out into the clearing, heading straight through the
middle. Nothing
happened. The dragon walked all the way across, then
turned and looked at us. "Are you sure there's some- thing
here? I can't find anything." I
touched the sword again. "It feels like there is," I said. I
looked at Shiara. She looked dubiously across the clearing. "Hurry
up," said the dragon. I
sighed and started forward. I kept one hand on the hilt of my
sword, just in case, and I walked across the same part of
the clearing the dragon had. Shiara shook her head and
started around the edge of the clearing. I got
about five steps. Then there was a whooshing noise and a
wall of flames shot up around me, very hot and bright. I
yelled, because I couldn't see where I was going anymore, and I
yanked at my sword. I think I had some vague idea that
the sword might be able to keep me from burning to death;
I certainly couldn't see to fight anything. Something
hit me in the middle of my back just as the sword
came out of its sheath. I felt something from the sword;
it wasn't a tingle, it was more like a wave of anti- Talking
to Dragons 119 cipation
followed very closely by a surge of disappointment. I was
so surprised I nearly dropped it. Then I realized that it
wouldn't matter if I did drop it, because I was lying on the
ground. I was also much cooler man I had been a minute ago,
and someone was pounding on me. "Stop
it!" I said. The someone sat back, and I saw that it was
Shiara. "Are
you all right?" Shiara said. "I
think so," I said. "Why were you pounding on me?" "Your
clothes were on fire," Shiara said. "I was trying to put
them out. If I'd known you were going to fuss about it, I'd
have let them bum." I
apologized and thanked her, then looked around. Shiara and I
were sitting on the ground just inside a ring of fire. In the
center of the ring was a short, round building with a pointed
roof; it wasn't quite tall enough to call a tower, but it
wasn't short enough to call a house, either. I moved away from
the flames, which were uncomfortably warm, and looked
at Shiara. "What happened?" "How
should I know? One second you were walking across
the clearing, and the next second there was all this fire
and you were yelling," Shiara said. "And when I tried to
shove you out of it, we both got in here instead, and that thing
was sitting there." She waved at the not quite tower. "At
least it isn't invisible," I offered. Shiara gave me a disgusted
look, but she didn't say anything. "Hello?"
called the dragon's voice from the other side of the
wall of fire. "Are you there?" "We're
here," I called back "Both of us." "How
did you do that?" the dragon shouted. "I
don't know," I said. "And I don't think I want to stay here to
find out." I picked myself up off the ground and put the
sword back in its sheath. "I think maybe we'd better go,"
I said to Shiara. "Before something comes out of that house." "It
isn't a house," Shiara said. "But I think I agree with you." "Achoo!"
said the dragon from the other side of the fire. "Just
a minute, here!" a voice said behind me. I
turned around. A medium-sized man was standing about 120
Patricia C. Wrede ten
feet away, leaning on a staff that was about three feet taller
than he was. He had black hair and three rings on each
hand, and he was frowning irritably at Shiara and me." "Oh,
rats," said Shiara disgustedly. "Another wizard!" "You,"
said the man, ignoring her statement completely, "are
trespassing. I don't know how you got in here, but it was a
great mistake for you to do so." "We
didn't exactly do it on purpose," I said. "We were just
trying to get across the clearing." "Young
man, there is a reason why I surround my home with a
wall of fire," the wizard said. "And the reason is that I
do not wish to be disturbed. I wish to know how you penetrated
it, or I would not be wasting my time talking with
you." "I'm
a fire-witch, that's how!" Shiara said. "And if you don't
want to be disturbed, you ought to be more careful with
your stupid wall. We would have gone right by if it hadn't
jumped up all over Daystar when he tried to cross the
clearing!" "A
fire-witch?" the man said. He gave Shiara an ex- tremely
odd look. "You haven't mislaid an invisible castle recently,
have you?" "No!"
said Shiara. "It isn't mine!" The
wizard looked even angrier. "You know of it!" "Well,
sort of," I said. "It isn't ours, but we ran into it this
morning." "Did
you," said the wizard. He sounded skeptical and very
dangerous. I decided I didn't want to talk about the castle
anymore. "I
think we ought to be going now," I said. "We're really very
sorry to have bothered you." "I'm
not!" Shiara said. "Shiara!" "Well,
I'm not," Shiara said. "I think he ought to apol- ogize
to us, not the other way around. And anyway, I'm not
apologizing to any wizard, especially not one that messes around
with invisible castles!" The man
with the staff frowned, but this time he looked more
thoughtful than angry. "What is your complaint against wizards?" Talking
to Dragons 121 "Ha!"
said Shiara. "You should know." "No,"
said the man, "I should not. I am not a wizard." "AcAoo/"
came the dragon's voice, and the wall of the fire
bulged inward on that side. "Excuse
me, but if you're not a wizard, why are you carrying
a staff?" I said. "And why is the dragon sneezing?" The man
looked startled. "Dragon? You travel with a dragon?" "No,
it travels with us," I said. "Does it make a differ- ence/
.f" "Perhaps,"
the man said. He looked at the wall of fire and
made a pass with his staff. The flames began to die, and a
moment later we could see the clearing again. THE
DRAGON WAS still sneezing in medium-sized puffs of flame.
The man with the staff looked at it closely and shook his
head. "That certainly is a dragon." He made another pass
with his staff. The
staff vanished, and the dragon stopped sneezing abruptly.
The dragon looked extremely surprised; it sniffed a
couple of times in an experimental way, as if it were expecting
to start sneezing again any minute. I was sur- prised,
too. I mean, wizards never let go of their staffs, not willingly,
anyway. The man
bowed politely to the dragon. "I must apologize for
inconveniencing you," he said. "I offer you greetings and
welcome to my home, and I wish you good fortune when
you leave." "What?"
said the dragon. The man
looked a little startled and peered at the dragon more
closely. "Oh, I see," he said after a moment. "Well, you're
welcome; come and make yourself comfortable." Shiara
scowled at him and bent to pick up Nightwiteh, who had
come running toward her as soon as the flames had
died. The dragon looked suspiciously at the man. "I
don't like wizards," it said. "And I don't like people 123 124
Patricia C. Wrede who put
invisible things in the middle of my shortcut." "I
am not a wizard," the man said with a sigh. "And my tower
has been here for years, and it isn't invisible. Now, come in
and talk. There hasn't been a dragon by for a long time,
and I'm a bit behind on the news." "If
you're not a wizard, who are you?" Shiara said, petting
Nightwitch and glaring at the man. "I'm
a magician," the man said. "And my name is Telemain." "Pleased
to meet you," I said. "Mrrow,"
said Nightwitch, and started purring loudly. Telemain
looked at the kitten, and suddenly he began to laugh.
He had a nice laugh, sort of deep and friendly. I started
thinking that I might be able to like him after all, even if
his firewall had nearly burned me to a cinder. "I
don't believe I have ever seen a group quite like this one,"
Telemain said when he finished laughing. "Please, tell me
who you all are." I introduced
everyone, and Telemain nodded courteously to each
of us. "Welcome to my home," he said. "Some
welcome!" Shiara said. "You nearly got Daystar killed,
and you started the dragon sneezing again. And how come
the dragon was allergic to you if you aren't a wizard?" "Dragons
aren't allergic to wizards," Telemain said, sounding
surprised. "What gave you that idea?" "I
did!" the dragon said. It came forward and sat down emphatically,
right next to me. "All dragons are allergic to wizards.
I should know: I sneeze every time I get near one." It eyed
Telemain belligerently. "Oh,
I don't doubt that at all," Telemain said. "But I am afraid
it isn't wizards you're allergic to; it's their staffs. You
stopped sneezing as soon as I got rid of mine, didn't you?" The
dragon looked startled. "I did, didn't I?" it said after a
minute. "If
you aren't a wizard, what are you doing with a wiz- ard's
staff?" Shiara asked. Telemain
raised his eyebrows. "What business is it of yours,
may I ask?" "We've
been having some trouble with wizards," I said Talking
to Dragons 125 before
Shiara could answer. I didn't want her to make him angry;
we had enough people mad at us already. "Really,"
Telemain said. He looked as if he were going to
laugh again. "All of you?" "Well,
mainly just Shiara and me," I said. "We've been sort of
worried about them. Most of them are after Shiara," I
added. "What
would the Society of Wizards want with a fire- witch?"
Telemain said. "I can see that I shall have to invite you in,
if only to hear your tale." "How
do you know about the society?" Shiara said an- grily.
"And why should we trust a wizard, anyway?" "Anyone
who knows much about magic can tell you're a
fire-witch, and the only reason I can think of for a fire- witch
to have several wizards after her is if she has done something
to offend the Society of Wizards," Telemain said. He
still sounded amused. "And for the third time at least, I am a
magician, not a wizard." "What's
the difference?" Shiara demanded. "Magicians
deal with many ways of magic," Telemain said.
"Wizards with only one. Now, will you come in and sit
down?" Shiara
was still looking at him doubtfully. Telemain smiled.
"Will an oath content you? If you mean no harm, I am
not your enemy, and I will do you no harm while you are my
guests, save in self-defense. I swear by the sword." I felt
a kind of popping at my side, even though I wasn't touching
the sword, and a ripple ran through the clearing, like a
shimmer of light in the air. I thought it kept on going, out
into the forest, but I couldn't be certain. Shiara started and
dropped Nightwitch, who landed on her feet with a yowl.
The dragon stretched its neck; it looked almost as if it were
trying to purr. Telemain suddenly looked very in- tense. "That
is the way of it, then?" he said when the ripple passed.
"I don't think I blame you for your caution." He looked
pointedly at my sword. Shiara
scowled again, but I thought she looked a little more
doubtful than the last time. "If you're so smart..." she
began, and stopped. Nightwitch was rubbing against 126
Patricia C. Wrede Telemain's
leg and purring. "Nightwitch?" said Shiara. "An
intriguing name for a cat," Telemain said, bending over to
pick up Nightwitch. "Even more interesting for a kitten.
Where did you come by her?" "She
was a present," Shiara said grudgingly. "From a witch
named—" "Morwen?"
said Telemain. Nightwitch started to purr. "I
suspected as much. Now, will you come in? Or do you wish to
continue this discussion where anyone may hear?" We went
in. The door of Telemain's home looked like an
ordinary, normal-sized door, but it couldn't have been because
the dragon fit through it without any trouble. The room
inside was made of stone and very bare. In the center of the
floor were two iron staircases that twisted around each
other in a spiral and disappeared into the ceiling. The whole
place seemed much taller from the inside; if I hadn't seen it
before we came in, I would have been sure we were in a
tower. As the
door closed behind the dragon, Telemain waved his
hand. A table and three chairs materialized beside the stairs.
"Sit down," said Telemain, "and tell me more about yourselves." We sat
down, except for the dragon, who sort of curled itself
around the outer edge of the room. I started explaining about
Mother and Antorell and everything that had happened in the
Enchanted Forest. I wouldn't have mentioned the Sword
of the Sleeping King at all if I hadn't been pretty sure
from the way he looked at it that Telemain already knew
something about it. Too many people seemed to be interested
in it; I didn't think it was a good idea to keep talking
about it. There
wasn't much I could do about Telemain, though. The
questions he asked made it pretty clear that I was right: he did
know something about the sword. Maybe more than I did;
he sounded like he knew exactly what answers he expected,
and when I told him about the voice that had said, "All
hail the Bearer of the Sword," he nodded in satisfaction. Then I
explained how Shiara and I had met, and why the
wizards were after her, and about the one who'd tried to get
us at the stream. Shiara frowned at me, but she didn't Talking
to Dragons 127 interrupt.
When I told him about meeting Morwen, Tele- main
seemed very interested. "I haven't seen Morwen in years,"
he said. "How is she?" "You
know Morwen?" Shiara said. "We
grew up together," Telemain said shortly, and if Nightwitch
hadn't started purring again, there would have been an
awkward silence. After a
minute, I cleared my throat and kept going. Tetemain
asked a lot of questions about the things the Sword of the
Sleeping King had done, but he didn't seem partic- ularly
interested in the wizards. He wasn't interested in the Princess
at all. Then I told him about finding the invisible castle
and the fire-witch. "So
that's how you knew about it," Telemain said. "I was
wondering about that." "That's
how we knew," Shiara said. "How didyow know?" "The
castle landed in my clearing sometime around noon," Telemain
said dryly. "I was understandably curious as to why
someone would go to all the trouble of making a castle invisible
and then drop it on top of a magician who can't help
noticing it." "It's
not there now," Shiara said. "Of
course not! What would I want with an invisible castle?
When I found no one home, I cleaned the place up a bit
and got rid of it." "Cleaned
it up?" I said, puzzled. "The
most recent owner had a number of unattractive habits,"
Telemain said even more dryly than before. 'Turn- ing
people into statues was one of them; there were others. I don't
believe you would be at all interested in the details." "Oh."
He was right; I didn't really want to know about it.
Telemain looked at Shiara again. "I
believe I owe you an apology," he said. "I knew that the
castle was the property of a fire-witch, and I'm afraid that
when you showed up, I thought you had some con- nection
with it." "Well,
I don't, but I suppose I can see why you might have
gotten mad," Shiara said. She sounded a lot friendlier than
she had before; I think she would have been friendly to
anyone who didn't like that other fire-witch. Then she 128
Patricia C. Wrede frowned.
"How did the castle get into your clearing, any- way?" Telemain
shrugged. "As far as I can tell, it was designed to move
around the Enchanted Forest more or less randomly. It's a
rather unusual spell to put on a castle, particularly an invisible
one; it's too easy to be outside when the castle moves,
and get left behind." "Then
why on earth would anyone put a stupid spell like that on
a castle?" "Presumably
this fire-witch didn't expect to have any problems
finding the castle again. I don't believe it occurred to her
that someone else might find it first." He smiled. "I left a
few surprises for her; somehow, I doubt that she'll be
pleased." "Oh,
that's all right," the dragon said. "Daystar got rid of
her." Telemain
looked at me. "Really. How did you manage that?" "She
threw some sort of spell at me, but Nightwitch scratched
her, so she missed," I said. "And after that, I had the
sword out." "You
used the Sword of the Sleeping King on a fire- witch?"
Telemain said. He sounded somewhere between shocked
and horrified. "I
couldn't think of anything else that might work," I said
apologetically. "And it did work, sort of. I mean, it got rid
of the fire-witch." "She
went up in smoke," the dragon said with consid- erable
satisfaction. "I watched." "She
went up in smoke," Telemain repeated in tones of fascination.
"And what were you doing while this was going on?" "I
was trying to hang on to the sword," I said. "It was glowing
red, and my hands felt like they were burning or something,
so it was sort of hard to do. But as soon as the fire-witch
was gone, it stopped." "You
are extremely fortunate," Telemain said. "I don't recommend
that you try that again. Stick to wizards; that's what
the sword was meant for." Talking
to Dragons 129 "It
was?" said Shiara. "How do you know? What else does it
do?" Telemain
looked at her. "Magicians know many kinds of
magic." He turned back to me. "Please, continue." I was
curious about what the sword did, too, but Telemain obviously
didn't want to talk about it, so I didn't ask. In- stead,
I explained about fixing Shiara and not finding the castle
and meeting the second elf. Telemain listened care- fully,
then shook his head. "So
the war is beginning again," he said, half to himself. "I
had best make my own preparations." "War?"
Shiara and I said together. Telemain
looked up, almost as if he had forgotten we were
there. "The war between the dragons and the wizards," he said
in the tones of someone trying to be patient. The
dragon, who had been falling asleep, suddenly came awake.
"War with the wizards?" "What
else can it be?" Telemain said a trifle crossly. "The
elves are choosing sides, the dragons are restless, the wizards
are coming into the Enchanted Forest in large num- bers,
and the Sword of the Sleeping King has returned. What
more do you need to know? It is obvious!" "What
does the Sword of the Sleeping King have to do with a
war between the dragons and the wizards?" I asked before
the dragon could take offense. "The
sword is what started the war in the first place," Telemain
said, and then refused to say any more. "If Cimorene
didn't see fit to explain, I certainly won't," he said.
"When you meet Kazul, I am sure she will tell you whatever
you need to know. I'm afraid I don't have time at the
moment; I must see to things at once, if we are to win
this war at last." "Who
do you mean, 'we'?" Shiara said suspiciously. "The
dragons," Telemain said, "and the rest of us who follow
the sword. Now, if you will excuse me?" He rose and
started for the stairs. "Wait
a minute!" Shiara said. "What about us?" "What?
Oh, of course," Telemain said. He waved his hand
again and muttered something, and suddenly the table 130
Patricia C. Wrede was
full of plates and bowls of food. I jumped. Telemain didn't
seem to notice. "Help yourselves while I am gone," he
said. "I don't expect to be long." He
turned away and went up one of the iron staircases. Shiara
and I looked at each other. "Now what do we do?" Shiara
said. "I
think I'm going to eat," I said. "Would you like some- thing?" Shiara
snorted, but she reached for one of the bowls. There
was plenty for all of us, including Nightwitch and the
dragon. About the time we finished, Telemain came back. "I
was right," he said to no one in particular. Then he looked
at me. "I think you should all stay here for the night," he
said. "It will be much safer for everyone, and it will give me
time to look into things a little more. You've been extremely
lucky so far; there's no reason to take any more chances
until you must." I
started to nod, then looked at Shiara. Shiara looked at me,
then looked at Nightwitch, who was curled into a small ball on
Telemain's chair. She looked back at me. "Let's stay,
then," she said. "You
will find rooms upstairs, on the second floor," Telemain
said. "Just pick one and go in." He turned to the dragon.
"I think you would be more comfortable down here." "I
think you're right," said the dragon, eyeing the iron staircases
a little dubiously. "And
thank you very much for your hospitality," I said. Telemain
nodded. Shiara and I started for the stairs. Shiara
got there ahead of me and started climbing, but she didn't
get anywhere. "What's the matter?" I asked. "There's
something wrong with this stupid staircase!" Shiara
said. "I keep trying to climb up, but I don't go anywhere!" Telemain,
who had been talking quietly to the dragon, turned.
"I'm sorry; I should have warned you. You'll have to take
the other staircase. The one you're trying to use only works
going down." Talking
to Dragons 131 "That's
ridiculous!" said Shiara. "How can a staircase only
work going in one direction?" "He's
a magician," I said. "Oh,
all right." We
didn't have any trouble getting up the other stairway. Telemain's
tower really was a lot taller than it looked from the
outside, because the stairs kept going after they got to the
second floor. Shiara and I didn't climb any farther, though.
We got off on the landing at the second floor and looked
around. We were
standing on a narrow circle of wooden floor around
the hole where the two staircases came through. Around
the edge were six identical wooden doors. It looked even
barer than the room below had when we arrived. "Well, he said
to just go in," Shiara said. Each of
us picked a door and opened it. The rooms on the
other side were identical; they looked very comfortable and not
at all bare. They each had a bed, a table, a lighted lamp in
a bracket on the wall, a padded chair, and a small set of
drawers with a mirror above it. Shiara looked thought- ful.
"I wonder if he keeps lights going in all these rooms?" "He
might," I said. "I mean, he is a magician. Does it matter?" Shiara
glared at me and went into the room she'd picked, slamming
the door behind her. I stood there for a moment, wondering
whether to knock on the door and apologize. I decided
not to; I didn't even know what to apologize for. I
decided to wait until morning to talk to Shiara, since by then
she probably wouldn't be mad anymore. I kept
the Sword of the Sleeping King with me all night. It was
a little uncomfortable sleeping that way, but I felt better
knowing where it was. It wasn't that I didn't trust Telemain;
I was just getting more and more worried about the
sword. Everyone I met seemed to know about it, or want to
know about it, or something. I spent a lot of time thinking
about it instead of sleeping. Telemain
served breakfast the next morning on his magic table.
He was very quiet while we were eating, but as soon as we
finished he looked at me and said, "I have watched 132
Patricia C. Wrede the
Enchanted Forest all night, and there are some things you
should know, but I do not wish to detain you against your
will." "What
things?" Shiara demanded. Telemain
smiled slightly. "I fear you will have some difficulty
in reaching the castle," he said. "I found no less than
twelve wizards searching the area between it and you." "Oh,
great," Shiara said disgustedly. "Just what we need: more
wizards!" "I
don't think it's very good," the dragon said. "Why do you?" "I
don't," Shiara said. "Then
why did you say so?" "What
can we do about them?" I asked Telemain. "I
think you can avoid them if you go through the Caves of
Chance," Telemain replied. WE ALL
STARED. "Ha!" Shiara said finally. "The Caves of Chance
are even more dangerous than the wizards!" "I
don't think so," Telemain said. "I have been through them,
and they're not as bad as most people think. Further- more,
there is an entrance to the caves within half a day's travel,
and an exit that is very close to the castle. And once you are
inside the caves, the wizards will not be able to find
you." "Why
not?" Shiara said. "The
Caves of Chance do not welcome wizards' magic," Telemain
said. "Can
you give us directions?" I said. Telemain nodded and
pulled a large map out of his sleeve. I was extremely curious;
I'd never seen a map of the Enchanted Forest be- fore.
Most people don't bother to even try making maps, because
things change so fast that an ordinary map is only good
for a few days. This one must have been magic, because
it seemed to be fairly accurate. At least, all the things
Shiara and I had seen were in the right places. Telemain
showed us where his tower was and where the castle
was, and he pointed out the places where he'd found wizards.
I didn't ask how he knew they were there. Then he
showed us where the entrance to the caves was. It really 133 134 Patricia C. Wrede did
look a lot closer and safer than trying to get by all those wizards.
Even Shiara looked less doubtful. Then
Telemain turned the map over, and on the back was a
map of the Caves of Chance. He went over the routes from
the entrance to the exit we wanted and what to do about
some of the things we might run into inside. I was very
interested; I knew that trolk are allergic to milk, but I
hadn't known that rock snakes like mirrors enough that they'll
stop squeezing someone in order to look at their reflections.
He also told us to hold anything we really didn't want to
lose in one hand until we were out of the caves. When
Telemain was satisfied that we knew our way as well as
he could make us, he rolled the map up and put it back in
his sleeve. We went outside to say good-bye. "When
you meet Kazul, tell her I will be coming for the battle,"
Telemain said. "She should be expecting you; I sent a spell
to her last night to let her know that you're on your way." "I'll
remember," I said. "And thank you again for your help." "Yes,"
said Shiara. I looked at her, a little surprised, but she was
watching Telemain with an odd look on her face. "I
think I ought to apologize to you," she said finally. "I wasn't
very nice last night." This
time I really did stare, but she didn't seem to notice. Telemain
bowed. "Neither of us was blameless," he said. "I
shall forget it, if you will." Shiara
nodded and turned to me. "Let's go, then." I shut
my mouth and picked up the bundle Morwen had given
me. Shiara already had hers. We waved good-bye to Telemain
and started off into the forest again. Nothing
much happened all morning. Shiara and I were both
nervous anyway, thinking of all those wizards ahead of us.
The dragon didn't seem bothered, though, and Nightwitch
certainly wasn't. We found the first few land- marks
Telemain had told us about, and we were fairly close to the
entrance to the Caves of Chance when the dragon stopped
and demanded lunch. As soon
as the dragon mentioned food, Shiara and I Talking
to Dragons 135 realized
that we were hungry, too. We started looking for a good
place to sit down and eat, and we found one almost immediately.
It was a small clearing with a huge tree lying on the
ground in the middle of it. The
dragon wrapped itself around a medium-sized tree in
front of us; it said it was much more comfortable than lying
on the ground. Nightwitch wandered around investi- gating
the interesting holes and crannies around the tree. Shiara
and I sat down and started eating. "How
much farther is it to the castle?" Shiara asked the dragon,
handing it a slice of gingerbread. "Oh,
not very far," the dragon said. "About another day, if we
weren't going through the caves. I've never been in the
caves, so I don't know how long that will take." "I
thought you said this was a shortcut," Shiara said. "It
is a shortcut," the dragon said in a hurt tone. "How was I
supposed to know a fire-witch was going to get in the
way? Not to mention an elf and a magician." "Do
you think Kazul will tell us anything about the sword when we
get there?" I said. I was beginning to wonder; nobody
else seemed willing to explain anything. "I'm
sure she will," the dragon said reassuringly. "That is, if
you're polite to her. Kazul is very particular about... about...
ahh... ach.. " Shiara
and I dropped our lunches and ducked hastily to either
side. "Achoo!" said the dragon. A large spurt of flame shot
across the clearing, just missing us, and the dragon's tree
shook. "Achoo! Oh, bother. Achoo!" "Daystar!"
Shiara shouted. "Over here!" I ran
around behind the dragon, who was now sneezing almost
continuously. I pulled out my sword as I went. When my hand
touched the hilt, I felt the same jangling that I'd gotten
from Antorell earlier. Then I came around the tree, and
even before Shiara pointed, I saw the wizards. There were
two of them right in front of Shiara, leaning on their staffs
and looking from Shiara to the dragon and back. "Hurry
up," one of them said nervously. "We don't want this to
get out of hand. "I'm
afraid you'll have to wait," another voice said from 136 Patricia C. Wrede behind
him. The first wizard jumped, and Antorell stepped out of
the bushes. "You see, I want him, too." "Urn,
can't we discuss this somewhere else?" said the nervous
wizard, eyeing the dragon. "Oh,
you needn't worry about that," Antorell said, fol- lowing
his gaze. He smiled nastily. "I came prepared." He held up
his free hand so that alt of us could see the spray of
spikey, saw-edged purple leaves he was holding. "Dragonsbane,"
he said unnecessarily. The
other wizards relaxed a little. "Such forethought," murmured
the tall one. He exchanged glances with his com- panion,
then bowed to Antorell. "Under the circumstances, we will
be happy to split the reward with you." "I
am afraid that is out of the question," Antorell said over
the dragon's sneezes. "The boy and his sword are mine." "The
boy!" said the nervous wizard. "But—" The tall one
frowned at him, and he stopped. The
tall wizard turned back to Antorell. "As you say, the boy
is yours. I trust you have no objection if we take the
girl?" Antorell
frowned. He turned toward Shiara and stared at her for
a minute, then shrugged. "She's no use to me. Of course
I have no objection." I
started moving very, very slowly toward Shiara, so that when
the wizards starting throwing spells at us I could try and
stop them with the sword. The wizards didn't notice, and
neither did Shiara. By the time the wizards finished deciding
what to do with us, I was almost over to her. "It's settled,
then," Antorell said. "We help each other. The girl first?" "Ah,
why not start with the dragon?" the nervous wizard said. Antorell
smiled condescendingly. "Very well." He stepped forward
and started muttering over the dragonsbane. Right away
the dragon started yelling. "Yow!"
it said. "Achoo! I hate wizards. Ouch! Achoo! Help!" "You
stop that!" Shiara said to Antorell. The wizards Talking
to Dragons 137 ignored
her, and Antorell kept mumbling. I
started forward; if I could knock the dragonsbane out ofAntorcll's
hand, the spell would stop. I wasn't sure whether it
would be completely broken, but at least he wouldn't be able to
hurt the dragon anymore. Unfortunately, I'd for- gotten
about the other wizards. I didn't even realize one of them
had done something until my feet stuck to the ground and
suddenly I couldn't walk forward anymore. I almost lost my
balance; it was very disconcerting. Antorell was still
out of reach. I took
a quick glance back over my shoulder. The dragon was
sneezing much too hard now to be able to say anything at all.
It was also starting to lose its hold on the tree; I could see its
coils going slack. Here and there, its scales were turning
pink around the edges. Even the tree was looking wilted. "Shiara!"
I yelled. "Get the dragonsbane!" I didn't think I could
get loose in time, but the wizards wouldn't be able to stop
a fire-witch. I didn't wait to see what she did. I leaned
forward a little and tried to lay part of the Sword of the
Sleeping King across my feet. It hadn't helped Shiara when
she was a statue, but this was a wizard's spell, not a fire-witch's
spell, and Telemain had said the sword was meant
to be used on wizards. Besides, I couldn't think of anything
else. It
worked. I straightened up just in time to see a little tongue
of flame shoot up from Antorell's hand. Antorell yelled
and dropped the dragonsbane, which was burning brightly.
Before it even hit the ground, there was nothing left of
the plant except ashes. I looked behind me. Shiara was
standing with a surprised look on her face and one finger
pointing at Antorell. The dragon was still sneezing, but the
green was already starting to come back to its scales. I
sighed in relief; I sort of liked the dragon. "This
is the assistance you give us?" the tall wizard said to
Antorell, who was brushing ashes off the front of his robe.
"The dragon still lives!" "Did
I say anything about killing it?" Antorell said. I got the
feeling he was trying to sound haughty; he only managed 138 Patricia C. Wrede to
sound annoyed. "You need have no more fear of it; it will
take some time to regain its strength, and by then we shall
be finished. What next?" "The
girl, I think," said the tall wizard. "That is, if you're sure
you can handle her?" Antorell
glared. "That is the least of my problems," he said
grandly. "Ha!"
said Shiara loudly. I moved back over to her, holding
the sword in front of me. The three wizards looked at us,
then at each other. "Let us begin," said the tall one. All
three of them raised their staffs, but instead of point- ing
them directly at us, they brought them together, so that they
made a kind of star about a foot from their ends. There was a
bright flash as the three staffs touched, and I felt a shock
from my sword. I jumped, and suddenly I realized that I
could feel the forest. The magic of the forest, I mean; it was
all around me, waiting. I felt almost as if the whole Enchanted
Forest were watching me. Right
in front of me, I could feel the wizards' power growing
and building. There was a kind of pattern in it that kept
getting clearer and more complicated, and I knew I had to
do something about it before the wizards finished. I stepped
forward and swung the sword right through the middle
of the pattern. I felt
a huge jolt of power from the sword, but it didn't hurt
the way the fire-witch's spell had; in fact, it didn't hurt at all.
The pattern collapsed in an invisible tangle. Antorell's eyes
started to narrow; the other two wizards just looked stunned.
And then something exploded. I
couldn't see anything. It wasn't that things had gone dark,
and it wasn't that the light had blinded me. It was more as
if the whole world had suddenly become invisible, so
there was nothing left to see. There was a rushing noise all
around me, and I felt as if I were floating. I heard a chorus
of voices cry, "All hail the Wielder of the Sword!" and
then the noise and the voices vanished, and I was stand- ing in
the clearing with the Sword of the Sleeping King shining
in my hand and three very surprised wizards in front of me. I
stared at the wizards. The wizards stared at me. Antorell 140
Patricia C. Wrede recovered
first. "Enough of this!" he cried. He started to raise
his staff, and right then the ground in front of him humped
up a little bit. A second later, a tree shot up about twelve
feet into the air. It reminded me of someone opening an
umbrella very quickly. A moment later, it burst into bloom
with a sound like a hundred little bells tinkling. Antorell
looked even more surprised than before; then he
scowled angrily and pointed his staff at me again. The tall
wizard next to him grabbed his arm. "Wait, fool! Don't you
know what that sword is?" "What
it is?" Antorell's eyes sparked at the other wizard. "It
is mine! I will have it!" "You
will be dead, you mean," the tall wizard said, but he let
go of Antorell's arm. "This is a matter for the whole Society
of Wizards; there may still be time to stop him if we can
bring them quickly enough." "More
wizards? Achooo! Oh, no you don't! Achoo! Oh, drat,
achoo!" said the dragon. It dove out from its tree, unwinding
itself like a spool of string, very quickly. Its head shot
past me, and I got a fleeting glimpse of green scales and
golden eyes and a very, very red tongue. One of the wizards
yelled, and the dragon sneezed again. I jumped forward
just in time to see all three of the wizards vanish hastily.
Antorell was in the middle; he looked a little white and he
had one hand clutched around a dark, wet-looking spot on
his other arm. I
looked at the dragon. It snapped its teeth together twice, swallowed
something, and sat back, looking very pleased with
itself. "Wizards," it announced, "taste much better than elves." I
swallowed hard and decided I didn't really want to finish
eating lunch. The dragon looked at Shiara. Shiara scowled. "Don't
you look at me like that!" she said. "I'm not a wizard,
I'm a fire-witch." The
dragon looked thoroughly shocked. "But I wouldn't eat
you!" it said. "You're my friend; it wouldn't be polite at
all!" Shiara
looked suspiciously at the dragon, then nodded. "I
just wanted to make sure you remembered," she said. Talking
to Dragons 141 "I
think we'd better get going," I said. "Those wizards sounded
like they were going to come back with more, and now
they're after both of us." "Oh,
terrific," said Shiara. "Let's go, then. Where's Nightwitch?" "Mrow,"
said a kitten-voice from somewhere above me. I
looked up. Nightwitch was perched on a branch of the tree
that had sprouted up in the middle of the fight. She was washing
her paws. She stopped and looked down at me for
a second, then went back to washing. "Nightwitch,
come down!" Shiara said. "Those wizards might
come back any minute!" Nightwitch
ignored her. The dragon came over and peered curiously
at the tree. "Where did this come from?" it asked. "It
grew," I said. "I think you were sneezing when it happened." "Kazul
is going to be surprised about this!" the dragon said
happily. 'Two new trees in a couple of days!" "What
are you talking about?" Shiara said. "It's just a tree!" "No,
it isn't," the dragon said in an offended tone. "It's a new
tree. And it's the second new tree I've seen in two days,
so it's important. The other one hit me on the nose," it
added in an aggrieved tone. "You
mean it's been a long time since there were new trees?"
I asked. The
dragon nodded. "Kazul mentioned it once; she sounded
worried about it. / think they're a nuisance, popping up like
that." "But
where do they come from?" Shiara said. "And why do they
show up when we—" She stopped short, and we looked
at each other. "Daystar,"
said Shiara finally. "It's the wizards." "It
can't be," I said. "What about the first one?" "What
are you talking about?" said the dragon. "The
trees," Shiara said. "Both of them grew in places where a
wizard tried to throw a spell at us. But there wasn't any
tree when the first wizard tried to drown us, so it can't be
wizards." I
looked down, trying to think, and saw the Sword of 142
Patricia C. Wrede the
Sleeping King in my hand. "It's the sword!" I said. "It stopped
Antorell's spell the first time, and a little while later a tree
sprouted. This time it stopped a bigger spell, and we got a
bigger tree. It didn't stop any spells when the first wizard
made that water monster, so no new trees grew. It has to
be the sword." "You
didn't get a tree when you fought the fire-witch," Shiara
said, but she sounded half-convinced. "Telemain
said the sword was meant for wizards," I said. "It
probably only does that for wizards' spells." "Your
sword grows trees?" the dragon said. "I
suppose it sounds a little silly," I said. "Mmmm-ow!"
said Nightwitch. We all looked up. The kitten
launched herself at Shiara, who just barely managed to
catch her. I remembered that the wizards were going to come
back, so I suggested that we leave. Shiara scowled until I
mentioned the wizards, then nodded. We picked up our
things and started off again. THE
ENTRANCE TO the Caves of Chance wasn't very difficult to
find. That worried me a little, partly because Antorell and the
other wizards would probably figure out where we had
gone, and partly because it isn't usually that easy to find
something in the Enchanted Forest. Especially if you're looking
for it. Not
that the way into the Caves of Chance looked as if it
could be moved around easily. It was a large, smooth, circular
hole in the ground, with moss growing right up to the
edge of it, and it was very dark. The dragon and Shiara and I
stood around the edge and stared down into it for a while. "How
are we going to get down there?" Shiara said finally.
"I can't even tell how deep it is." "We'll
have to use the blankets Morwen gave us," I said. "We
can tie them together and climb down." "What
about me?" said the dragon. "/ can't climb down blankets." "I
don't know," I said. "Maybe we'll think of something once we
know how far down it is." "What
if you can't think of anything?" "Hey!"
Shiara had opened her bundle to get the blankets 143 144 Patricia C. Wrede out,
and now she was staring down into it as if she'd never seen it
before. "Daystar, look at this!" The
dragon looked a little put out. It usually isn't a good idea to
interrupt someone's conversation with a dragon, but for
once I decided not to say anything, because I was glad Shiara
had yelled. I didn't know what was going to happen if I
couldn't think of a way to get the dragon into the Caves of
Chance, and I didn't really want to say so. I said, "Excuse me,"
to the dragon and went over to Shiara. "What is it?" "This,"
said Shiara. She pulled a coil of rope out of the top of
the bundle. "It wasn't here before." "Are
you sure?" I said. "Of
course I'm sure!" Shiara said. "Look in your pack; maybe
you have one, too." Shiara
was right: there was another coil of rope in my bundle,
along with a little silver lamp and a set of flints, and I
didn't remember seeing any of them in there before. We tied
the ropes together, then tied one end around the tree
closest to the hole. The dragon watched, grumbling the whole
time. When we finished, Shiara and I argued about who was
going to climb down first. We wound up tossing a coin,
and I won. I stuck
the flints and the lamp into my belt, right next to the
Sword of the Sleeping King, where I could find them easily.
Then I lowered myself over the edge of the hole and started
to climb down the rope. It wasn't easy; the rope kept twisting
around, which made me dizzy, and I kept bumping into
the side of the hole. I had to keep going, though, so I did.
I'd gotten about seven feet from the top of the hole when
the lights went out. I
stopped climbing for a minute and just hung there. I couldn't
see anything except a circle of sky right above me, and
that looked much farther away than it should have. Then I
realized that I had to start climbing one way or another
because my arms were going to get tired very quickly if I
didn't move. I looked up at the sky; I knew I'd only come
down a couple of feet, and it shouldn't be difficult to
climb back up. On the other hand, I knew it could be extremely
dangerous to start things and not finish them in the
Enchanted Forest. I started down again. Talking
to Dragons 145 Climbing
in the dark is not pleasant. I couldn't see where I was
going; I couldn't even see the rope. It seemed like years
before my feet finally touched something flat below me. I
felt around to make sure what I'd found wasn't just a
narrow ledge, then let go of the rope and called to Shiara that I
was at the bottom. The
next thing I did was to get out the lamp and light it. I
had a little trouble, since I was doing everything by feel,
but I finally got it going. At first all I could see was the
tiny yellow flame; then the lamp made a popping noise and
suddenly I could see the cave. Actually,
it was more like a tunnel. Where I was stand- ing,
the walls were a smooth, speckled stone, but as soon as the
tunnel got out from under the hole the walls looked rough.
It was cool and dry, and it looked as if no one had been
there in a long, long time. "That
doesn't look so bad," said the voice above me. I looked
up. The dragon was peering over the edge of the hole.
"I can jump that far." "I
think you should wait until Shiara climbs down," I said.
"Then you can untie the rope and bring it with you." Shiara's
head appeared beside the dragon's. "You're right;
it doesn't look nearly so bad when you can see the bottom." "If
you drop the bundles Morwen gave us, I can catch them,"
I said. "Then you can climb down and we can get started." "All
right," Shiara said. Her head vanished for a few seconds,
then reappeared along with a pair of hands and a bundle.
"Ready? Catch." Nightwitch
was more of a problem than the bundles; I got a
few scratches catching her. As soon as I had every- thing,
Shiara climbed down. We picked up our things and moved
into the tunnel while the dragon took care of the rope,
and then the dragon jumped down. "That was easy!" it
said. I
thought about sliding down a rope in the dark and didn't say
anything. Shiara looked from me to the dragon and back.
"Well? Are you going to stand there until the wizards show up
again?" Patricia
C. Wrede 146 "We
have to decide what we're going to hold on to first," I said. "Daystar,
we have to carry everything ourselves any- way,"
Shiara said. "What difference does it make?" "I
don't think that's what Telemain meant," I said. "There are all
sorts of ways to lose things in the Caves of Chance if you
aren't paying attention, but if you have something in your
hand all the time and never set it down, it's less likely to
disappear." "If
you really believe that, you'd better carry the sword," Shiara
said. "The only thing / don't want to lose is Nightwitch,
and she can take care of herself." "You're
right," I said doubtfully. I didn't really want to march
through the Caves of Chance with the Sword of the Sleeping
King in my hand, but I certainly didn't want to lose
it, either. Finally I decided to take the sheath off my belt
and carry the sword and sheath together. I had some trouble
doing it, though, and Shiara had to help. "Are
you sure this is necessary?" she said. "Why can't you
just wear it?" "Magic
things are particularly easy to lose here," I said. "And
Mother told me to take care of this sword." I tucked the
sheathed sword under my arm and picked up the silver lamp
and the bundle Morwen had given me. "Let's go." The
tunnel slanted down for a long way, then leveled. Every
now and then we came to a dark opening in the wall that
led to a side passage, but we ignored all of them. Telemain
had been very specific about that. Not that they were
particularly tempting; the silver lamp had no difficulty lighting
up our part of the tunnel, but it didn't penetrate into
the side passages at all. After a
while, the tunnel we were following jogged sharply left,
then right again, and suddenly it opened out into an enormous
cave. The walls were crystal, and they seemed to have
hundreds of different-colored lights shifting behind them. I
stopped abruptly, staring, and the dragon bumped into me
from behind. "Excuse
me," I said automatically. "You
shouldn't stop so fast," the dragon complained. It craned
its neck to see around me. "Hey! This is nice!" It Talking
to Dragons 147 stretched
upward, and a minute later it was clinging to the crystal
wall several feet above us. I backed away hastily; I didn't
want to be underneath if the dragon slipped. "Where
are we supposed to go from here?" said Shiara, ignoring
the dragon. "This
must be the Cave of Crystal Lights," I said. "Telemain
said to walk straight across. There ought to be three
passageways on the other side, and we want to take the
left one." "I
see them," the dragon said. It squinted across the cave, then
climbed down and sat beside us. "They aren't straight across;
they're over that way a little." It waved toward the right. I
looked at the dragon. "I think we should follow Telemain's
directions. The Caves of Chance are even trick- ier
than the Enchanted Forest; I don't want to risk getting in
trouble if we don't have to." I didn't mention that the last
time we had taken the dragon's advice we'd run into the
fire-witch and Shiara had gotten turned into a statue, but I
was thinking it. Shiara nodded in agreement. "All
right," the dragon said sullenly. "But I think you're being
silly." We
started walking again, trying to go straight across the
cave. The walls curved in and out, and the floor humped up in
low mounds and ridges; between that and the shifting colored
lights, it was hard to be sure we were going straight. Shiara
and I went back a couple of times, just to make sure, and
every time we did the dragon grumbled. Finally
we got to the other side and saw the three open- ings.
The dragon stared at them, then looked around sus- piciously.
"Where did these come from? These aren't the ones I
saw!" "Well,
then it's a good thing we followed Telemain's directions,"
Shiara said. "Otherwise, we'd be lost. Come on,
let's go." She scowled and headed for the left-hand passageway.
I started after her, and right away I tripped and
fell. "Ow!"
I said. Shiara looked around, then came back to help me
up. "What
happened now?" she asked. 148 Patricia C. Wrede "I
tripped," I said. "I've still got the sword, but I dropped the
lamp. Where is it?" "I
don't see it," Shiara said. She sounded a little worried. She had
reason. Without the lamp, we wouldn't be able to see
anything once we got out of the Cave of Crystal Lights. "It
can't be very far away," I said, and we started hunting. Shiara
went one way and I went the other. About half a minute
later, I saw something glittering. "There it is!" "No,
it's over here," said Shiara. She bent over and picked
something up from behind a rock. "It's still burning," she
said, sounding surprised. "It
lights up more space than it ought to, too," I said over my
shoulder. "Morwen probably put a spell on it or something." "Where
are you going?" Shiara said. "I
saw something over here, and I want to know what it is,"
I said. "Especially since it obviously wasn't the lamp." Shiara
started to object, but right then I saw the glittering thing
again and I bent to pick it up. "Here it is," I said. "See?"
My fingers touched metal, and a fountain of sparks shot up
from the floor of the cave where my fingers were resting. I
yelled and fell backward. The fountain hissed and siz- zled
angrily, getting bigger and brighter and hotter every minute.
I scrambled backward. Blue and white and purple sparks
started falling around us, and all of us ran for the left-hand
tunnel. Nightwitch yowled as one of the sparks hit
her, and Shiara scooped her up and kept on running. We made
it to the tunnel, but no one stopped until we were
well inside, not even the dragon. When we finally got far
enough to be out of reach of the falling sparks, we stopped
and panted for a while. Fortunately, Shiara had remembered
to hang on to the lamp as well as Nightwitch. When
she set Nightwitch down, the kitten glared back toward
the mouth of the tunnel, then sat down and began determinedly
washing a spot on her back where the fur was a
little singed. "What
was that?" Shiara asked as soon as she had her breath
back. "I
don't know," I said. "I was just trying to—" I stopped. Talking
to Dragons 149 I was
holding something in my right hand; I didn't even remember
grabbing it. "It went off when I picked this up," I said,
and opened my fingers. I had
three pebbles of various sizes, a little sandy dirt, and a
small gold key. A tingle ran down my back as I looked at it,
and I jumped. "Now what?" said Shiara. "I
felt something," I said. "Sort of like the sword when it's
finding magic, but not the same." "Is
it magic?" the dragon asked. "I
don't know." "Well,
find out!" Shiara said impatiently. "I thought that was
what the stupid sword was for." I
sighed a little and shifted all the things I was carrying around
until I could put my left hand on the hilt of the Sword
of the Sleeping King. I didn't feel any tingles, but the key
started to glow. We all
stared at the key for a minute. "I knew it was magic!"
the dragon said happily. "I
don't feel anything from the sword, though," I said. I took
my hand off the hilt, and the key stopped glowing. "So?
The sword makes it glow, doesn't it?" Shiara said. "It
has to be magic. What are you going to do with it?" "I'm
going to keep it, at least until we talk to Kazul," I said.
"She may know what it's for, or who it belongs to." "It
b-b-belongs in the c-c-cave," something said in a bubbly
voice behind us. I
jumped and turned around. There wasn't anyone there. Shiara
and the dragon and I all peered into the darkness. Nightwitch
looked up from washing her back long enough to
hiss, then continued washing. "Who said that?" Shiara demanded. "M-m-me.
You b-better put that k-k-key back right away," said
the same voice. I still didn't see anyone. "Why?"
I said. "B-because
it b-belongs there!" the voice said. It sounded like
water hitting a hot frying pan. "Gug-give it to me, and I'll
put it back." "If
you want it, you'll have to come out here where we can see
you," Shiara said firmly. There
was an unhappy bubbling noise from the dark part 150
Patricia C. Wrede of the
tunnel, then a series of unpleasant squishing sounds. A
moment later something wobbled into the light from the silver
lamp. It was about four feet tall, and it looked like a slightly
sloppy pillar of very dark blackberry jelly. "There!"
it said. "Now, gug-give me that key!" I was
so busy trying to figure out how it could talk when it didn't
have a mouth that I didn't answer. I was still trying when
Shiara said, "How do we know it's your key?" "It
isn't my key; I just take care of it. Gug-give it to me!"
The jelly was shaking angrily, and the top part was bobbing
up and down like the lid of a teakettle. Every time it
bobbed up, the pillar of jelly stretched thin underneath it, and
when it bobbed down, the jelly made a sort of flattened lump,
and every time it moved at all, it wobbled. The dragon,
who had been standing behind Shiara, poked its head
over her shoulder to see better. "That
stuff reminds me of something," the dragon said. "I
can't think what, though. What is it?" "/,"
huffed the jelly, "am a quozzel." It leaned forward as if
it were trying to peer at us and said haughtily, "What are
you?" "It's
a dragon," Shiara said, a little nastily. "Can't you tell?" The
pillar froze in midwobble. "There are n-n-n-no drag- ons
under-gug-ground," it said. "None!" It leaned cautiously in
Shiara's direction for a minute, then started bobbing again.
"You aren't a dragon. I want that k-k-key! It belongs in the
cave, and it's g-going to stay there!" "Of
course she's not a dragon!" the dragon said. "I'm a dragon.
And I've never heard of a quozzel before." The
quozzel bent a little, then froze again. "Glurb," it said. The
dragon tilted its head to one side. "I don't think you're
very polite," it said. The
jelly burbled unhappily to itself; it looked as if it were
boiling. The dragon kept staring at it, and suddenly its
eyes started to glow. "I know what it reminds me of!" it said
triumphantly. "Dessert!" The
quozzel shrieked and collapsed backward into the darkness
just as the dragon's head shot toward it. The dragon Talking
to Dragons 151 kept
going, knocking Shiara and me out of the way as it went
past. We heard several squishing noises, and an angry snort
from the dragon, followed closely by a small puff of flame
that lit up the dark end of the tunnel. I got a brief glimpse
of the dragon before the light died, but I didn't see the
quozzel anywhere. There was a disgusted-sounding growl,
and a moment later the dragon stalked back into the light
from the silver lamp. "It got away." "Well,
I'm glad it's gone," Shiara said. She frowned. "You
shouldn't go around trying to eat things all the time, especially
if you don't know what they are. I wouldn't be surprised
if quozzels were poisonous or something." "Dragonsbane
is the only thing that poisons dragons, and the
quozzel wasn't polite, and I'm hungry," the dragon said. It
shook its head sadly. "Wizards taste good, but they aren't very
filling." Shiara
started to object again, and I put the key in my pocket
and started rummaging in Morwen's bundle. I was sure I
still had some meat pies, and I didn't like the idea of
traveling with a hungry dragon. I found the food and offered
it to the dragon, who brightened up a little and accepted. "We
ought to keep going," Shiara said as the dragon sat back
against the wall of the tunnel and started eating. "Sup- pose
that quozzel thing comes back?" "I
don't think it could really do much to us," I said. "It didn't
look very dangerous." "You
can't always tell by looking," Shiara said darkly. "And
if that marmalade mess wants the stupid key badly enough,
it'll think of something." "The
quozzel looked more like jelly to me," I said. "And I still
don't really think it's going to come back. Not while the
dragon is around." "Well,
you'd better carry the key in your hand," Shiara said.
"I think it's important, and it might fall out of your pocket
or something." "All
right, but you'll have to keep the lamp," I said, digging
the key out of my pocket again. I still wasn't sure that
the key didn't belong to the quozzel, but the more I thought
about it, the less likely it seemed. And if it did have 152
Patricia C. Wrede something
to do with the sword, I wanted to hang on to it. "I
don't think I can manage the sword and the things Morwen gave us
and the lamp, and still hold the key." "You
wouldn't have to until we started walking again, anyway,"
Shiara said, but she kept the lamp. Just
then the dragon looked up. "I'm done," it said. "Where
do we go now?" WE
CLEANED UP the remains of the dragon's meal and started
walking again. I don't know how far we went or how
long it took us. The tunnel forked and we went right, then it
forked again and we went left. We went through a large
cave with walls like black mirrors, and a damp one that
dripped water on our heads, and an unpleasant slimy one
with grey moss on the walls. I was very glad that Telemain
had told us which way to go; we would have gotten
very lost very quickly without his directions. A few
times I thought I heard squishing noises behind us, but
I wasn't sure enough to say anything. I was also worrying
a lot more about remembering all the things Te- lemain
had told us than I was about the quozzel. I was beginning
to think we had taken a wrong turn somewhere, when we
came to another cavern. This
one was long and narrow, and the floor was about a
hundred feet straight down. It was full of orange light and very
hot. A narrow path ran along one wall from where we stood
to a dark opening on the other side. "Are
you sure we're going the right way?" Shiara said, eyeing
the path dubiously. "I
am now," I said. "This was the last cave Telemain 153 154 Patricia C. Wrede mentioned;
once we're on the other side, it shouldn't take long to
get to the castle." "We
have to get to the other side first," Shiara pointed out.
"That doesn't look very safe." "The
Caves of Chance aren't supposed to be safe," I said.
"I'm surprised we haven't run into something a lot more
dangerous than the quozzel." "I
suppose— Nightwitch!" Shiara shouted a minute too late;
the kitten was already halfway across the narrow path. Shiara
sighed. "Well, now we have to go across." Shiara
insisted on going first, because Nightwitch was her
cat. I didn't argue much. I went next, and the dragon came
last. I had to hug the wall to keep from losing my balance
and falling, which was hard to do with the key in one
hand, Morwen's bundle in the other, and the sword under
one arm. The dragon didn't seem to have as much difficulty
as I did, even though it was a little too large for the
ledge. Itjust dug its claws into the rock and kept coming. When we
finally made it to the other side, Shiara and I were
covered with black rock dust. We took turns brushing each
other off, while Nightwitch sat far enough back to avoid
getting any of it on her and the dragon looked superior. Evidently
rock dust doesn't cling to dragon scales, which was
very nice for the dragon but didn't do much to improve Shiara's
temper. "How
much farther is it?" Shiara asked as we started off. "I
don't know," I said. "But it shouldn't take much longer." "I
hope not," said the dragon. "I don't like this tunnel." "Why
not?" Shiara asked. "It
isn't finished," the dragon said. I
looked around. The tunnel was a lot rougher than the others
we'd come through, and there were rocks sticking out at
odd angles from the walls and the roof and even the floor.
Every now and then it narrowed into a crooked little passage;
if the dragon had been much bigger, it wouldn't have
been able to fit through some of them. We still saw side
passages once in a while, but they seemed smaller and farther
apart than they had in the first part of the tunnel. "It
does look sort of incomplete," I said. "I think—" 156
Patricia C. Wrede "Daystar,
look out!" Shiara yelled. A large rock fell out of the
ceiling, just missing my head, along with a shower of
pebbles that didn't. I heard a creaking noise and felt more pebbles. "Get
back!" I shouted. I dropped Morwen's bundle and shoved
Shiara. "Run!" Shiara
stumbled backward. Nightwitch yowled and made a
tremendous leap right onto the dragon's nose. The dragon jerked
in surprise, and Nightwitch made another jump and vanished
into the darkness behind it. I heard more rum- blings,
and I shoved Shiara again, just as the roof came down on
top of us. When I
woke up, it was very dark. Somehow I'd man- aged to
keep hold of the sword and the key. I could feel them,
one halfway under me and the other digging into my palm. I
could feel other things, too; I ached all over. I tried to
move, but my legs were pinned under something heavy, and I
couldn't drag them free. I pushed myself up a little and
tried to stare into the darkness. "Shiara? Nightwitch? Dragon?" No one
answered. They couldn't all have gotten caught in the
cave-in; I'd been the farthest forward, and I was just at
the edge of it. I started wishing I had the lamp, and
then I remembered that the key glowed when I touched the
Sword of the Sleeping King. I felt around for the hilt, and
something very moist and heavy hit me in the middle of my
back. I
slammed back into the floor and almost lost conscious- ness
again. I heard something above me bubbling, "The k-k-key!
Let go, drop it, gug-give it to me!" Instinctively, I
grabbed for the sword. My
fingers touched the hilt, and the key started to glow. It
wasn't quite as good as the lamp, but at least I could see. I heard
a muffled shriek, and the weight left my back very suddenly.
An instant later, I saw the quozzel bending over my
hand, and I tightened my grip on the key. The
quozzel bounced angrily. "You're still alive! I don't want
you alive. I want that k-k-key. That's why I fixed the rocks." Talking
to Dragons 157 I shook
my head to clear it. "You made the tunnel cave in?
Just to get a key?" "Ofc-c-c-course!"
the quozzel spluttered. "I'm supposed to take
c-care of it. I'll get it, too. All I need is m-m-more rocks." The
quozzel wobbled forward, toward the caved-in part of the
tunnel. I twisted, trying to see what it was doing, and a
medium-sized rock came crashing down beside me. The
quozzel made an angry whistling noise. "H-hold still!" "So
you can drop rocks on me?" I said. Out of the comer of my
eye, I saw a long pile of something that seemed to end in
a tangle of red hair. Shiara hadn't been buried under the
rocks, then. Unfortunately, she didn't look like she would
be able to help me with the quozzel any time soon, and I
still didn't know where Nightwitch or the dragon were. I
shifted the key into my left hand and started trying to get the
Sword of the Sleeping King out of its sheath with my right,
in case the quozzel decided to try coming closer. There
was a sizzling noise from somewhere behind me, and a
dozen or so rocks of assorted sizes came rolling down on top
of me. I yelled; some of them hit places that had already
been battered by the cave-in. The quozzel bubbled happily,
and a few more rocks went by on one side. I shoved myself
up on my hands as far as I could and yanked the sword
out of the sheath and out from under me at the same time. I
twisted around just as two more large rocks came rolling
down at me. I swung
at the rocks with the flat of the sword, trying to
deflect them a little. There was a bright flash as the sword hit
them, and the rocks went flying toward the far wall of the
tunnel. I heard a low humming sound that changed suddenly
into a rumble, and the light in the cave went out. For
some reason, I thought of the clearing where I'd said the
spell at the Sword of the Sleeping King, when everything had
gone dark and the voice had called me the Bearer of the
Sword. This
time I didn't hear any voice, but the rumbling got louder
and louder, and suddenly I realized that my legs were free. I
curled them up under me, so I wouldn't be trapped again
if the quozzel managed to start another cave-in or 158
Patricia C. Wrede something.
The rumbling started to die down, and I heard faint
shouts mixed in with it, and the bubbling noise that the
quozzel made, and someone groaning. Then the rum- bling
stopped, and I could see again. I stood
up and looked around. I could still hear the shout- ing; it
sounded faint and far away, and after a moment it faded
completely. Shiara was the person who had groaned. She was
starting to move a little, and suddenly I felt a lot better
about things generally. Then I heard squishing noises from in
back of me, and I whirled. Behind
me, the tunnel was completely blocked by a sloping
pile of rocks and dirt. At the base of the pile, where I
had been trapped, was an empty space that looked as if
something had sliced cleanly through the rocks and lifted
them out of the way. Midway up the slope was the quozzel.
It was wobbling hastily toward the tunnel floor. I
pointed the Sword of the Sleeping King at it, and it stopped
abruptly. "Just
a minute, you!" I said. "You have some questions to
answer." "I
d-d-d-didn't know," said the quozzel. "I still don't. K-k-keep
the k-key. Nice to m-m-meet you. Glug-gug-good- bye." "Oh,
no you don't," I said. I stepped in front of it, so that if
it wobbled forward any more, it would get stuck on my
sword. "I'm
gug-gug-gug-going," said the quozzel. It seemed to be
stammering a lot more than it had before. I found myself
hoping it was even more nervous than it looked. "You
aren't going anywhere until you explain why you want
this key so badly," I said. "And maybe not then. I don't
think I ought to leave something as sneaky and treach- erous
as you running around loose." I tried to sound intim- idating,
even though I had no idea what I was going to do with
the quozzel. I didn't think I could just kill it, and I certainly
didn't want to bring it along with me. I wasn't about
to tell the quozzel any of that, though; after what it had
tried to do, it wouldn't hurt it to worry a little. "Daystar?"
Shiara's voice distracted me from the quoz- Talking
to Dragons 159 zei,
which was bubbling and popping worriedly to itself. "Daystar,
what happened?" "The
quozzel made the tunnel cave in," I said. "It was trying
to kill me so it could get the key. Are you all right?" "Of
course I'm— Yow!" said Shiara. I looked quickly around
and saw her sitting up very carefully. She looked a little
pale. "I think I broke my arm," she said. "Can
I do anything to help?" I said. "You
can keep that stupid quozzel away from me!" Shiara said.
"I'm all right as long as I don't move much." I didn't
believe her, but I couldn't have done much to help
anyway. I didn't know anything about setting broken arms,
except that you can make things a lot worse if you don't
know what you're doing. I decided not to say anything; if
Shiara wanted me to keep watching the quozzel instead of
trying to help her, she would probably get mad if I didn't. Besides,
I didn't want the quozzel to get away and try dropping
the roof on us again. "Where's
Nightwitch?" Shiara said after a while. "And the
dragon?" "I
don't know," I told her. "I haven't seen them since the
tunnel fell in." "You
miserable little blob!" I
looked around in surprise and was very relieved to see Shiara
glaring at the quozzel and not at me. "If
anything's happened to Nightwitch because of your stupid
cave-in, I'll, I'll melt you into a puddle!" she went on. "You'd
better not try," the quozzel said, starting to bounce.
"The w-w-wizard will gug-get you if you do!" "What
wizard?" I said. The
quozzel bubbled unhappily. "I can't tell you." "Oh,
no?" Shiara said. She stood up slowly and came over
beside me, holding her right arm carefully in her left one.
"I guess I'd better just melt you, then, and save some time." "N-n-no/"
said the quozzel. Little ripples ran over it, and it
seemed to shrink a little. 160
Patricia C. Wrede "Then
you'd better tell us what wizard you're talking about,"
I said. "The
one who gug-gave me the key," the quozzel said unwillingly.
"He told me to take care of it until he came back
for it." "How
long ago was that?" I asked, ignoring Shiara, who was
rubbing her bruises and muttering to herself. "A
long time," the quozzel said. "He never came back, so it's
still m-m-my responsib-b-bility." "Not
if I melt you, it isn't," Shiara said, and the quozzel subsided
very suddenly. "What
is it the key to?" I said. "And why did the wizard leave
it here?" "D-d-don't
know," the quozzel said sullenly. "He said people
would come look for it and try to take it. That's why he
wanted m-m-me to look after it. You aren't supposed to take
it. No one's supposed to take it b-b-but the wizard!" "What
did this wizard look like?" I said. I had an un- pleasant
feeling that I knew already, and I was therefore extremely
relieved when the quozzel described someone who
didn't sound at all like Antorell. Shiara didn't recognize the
description, either, but she wasn't as relieved as I was. "How
do we know this stupid thing isn't lying?" she said.
"I think we should—What's that?" I could
hear something from far down the tunnel, but it echoed
too much for me to be able to tell what it was. It seemed
to be getting louder. "I think something's coming," I said
to Shiara, then, "You stay where you are!" to the quozzel,
who had been trying to wobble a little closer to the
bottom of the rock pile. The
quozzel froze again, and Shiara gave me a disgusted look.
"I know something's coming, but what is it?" I
didn't answer. The noise came closer, and I saw a flickering
light partway down the tunnel. I shifted position so I
could watch the quozzel and still see some of the rest of the
tunnel. The light got brighter, and a moment later about a
dozen people came through one of the side passages. They
were all short and sort of squashed-looking, bigger than
the elves we'd met, but considerably shorter than a Talking
to Dragons 161 normal
person. Most of them were carrying picks or shovels or
long, pointed iron poles; a couple of them had torches. They
seemed to be following something, but they were too far
away and the light was too bad for me to be sure. "Dwarves!"
I said. They must have heard the echo, be- cause
two of them looked up and saw us. One of them shouted
something, but I couldn't make out the words. Terrific!"
Shiara muttered as they started in our direc- tion.
"What'd you have to do that for?" "They'd
have seen us anyway," I said. "I mean, we'd be sort
of difficult to miss, with the key lighting up the tunnel
like this." "I
suppose so," Shiara said. She squinted into the dark part of
the tunnel between us and the dwarves. "What's that in
front of them?" I
didn't have to answer, because a second later Nightwitoh came
bounding out of the darkness with her tail held very high.
She looked extremely proud of herself. She went straight
to Shiara and started rubbing against her legs and purring. "I'm
glad to see you, too," Shiara said. She started to bend
over and winced. "Sorry, kitten; I'm afraid you'll have to wait
to get petted until somebody does something about this
stupid arm." Nightwitch
stopped rubbing and looked up. "Mmrew?" "Well,
I said I was sorry," Shiara said. "I didn't ask to break
it." The
dwarves had reached the edge of the key's glow, and the
whole tunnel was lit up by their torches. It made things
a lot more cheerful. I could see the dragon in back of the
dwarves, looking almost as smug as Nightwitch had. "Look!"
it said when it got close enough to talk without shouting.
"I found a whole lot of dwarves!" "I
see that," I said. I bowed to the dwarves as well as I could
while trying to watch the quozzel at the same time. "My
name is Daystar, and that's Shiara. We're very pleased to meet
you." "They're
going to dig through the part of the tunnel that came
down," the dragon said. 162 Patricia C. Wrede "Hold
on just a minute!" one of the dwarves said. "I didn't
say I'd help. Not exactly. I said I'd look at this cave- in of
yours." "Me
too," said another. "Proper mess it looks, too." "Not
natural," said a female dwarf. She looked at Shiara and me
suspiciously. "How
do you know?" Shiara said belligerently. "We
made this tunnel," still another dwarf said. "And dwarf-made
tunnels don't just fall in." "Not
ever," agreed the first one. "Of
course not," I said. "The quozzel made the tunnel cave
in; it was trying to stop us from getting out of the Caves
of Chance." "The
quozzel?" the dragon said, looking interested. "That dessert
thing is back again?" "You
can't eat it until we find out if it knows anything else,"
I said. "Besides, you had plenty of lunch." The
dragon sighed. "I suppose so. All right, I'll wait." I
looked at the dwarves. "We'd be very much obliged to you
if you would help us get through this, or show us a way
around it, or something," I said. "Now,
why should we do that?" one of them said. "I
don't see any reason," said another. "Lot
of work for nothing," added a third. "And
I don't like dragons!" said a voice from the middle of the
group. The dragon glared, but it couldn't pick out the
dwarf who'd spoken. "Could
you at least set Shiara's arm?" I said. One of
the female dwarves started to reply, but she was cut off
by a yell from Shiara. "Daystar! Behind you!" I
raised the sword and spun around just as the quozzel bunched
itself together and jumped at me. It came flying through
the air, and I ducked. Something dark and purple shot
out of it toward me, and I slashed at it with the sword. I got
most of the purple stuff and part of the quozzel as well. I
heard it shriek, and then it had landed and launched itself
again, straight for the wall of the tunnel. "I'll
kill all of you!" it whistled angrily. "Key stealers! Cannibals!
I'll kill you d-d-dead!" Talking
to Dragons 163 I
lunged for it, but I was too late. The quozzel hit the tunnel
wall, and instead of bouncing, it vanished into the rock
like water being absorbed by a sponge, only faster. An
instant later a shower of rocks fell out of the roof of the tunnel,
and I heard the walls creaking ominously. "Run!"
I yelled. I started to follow my own advice and saw a
large rock shifting in the wall of the tunnel just above Shiara's
head. I shouted again and swung the sword at it, hoping
it would be deflected like the other rocks the quozzel had
tried to drop on me. The
flat of the sword hit the rock, and everything seemed to slow
down suddenly. There was a lot of creaking, and the top
of the tunnel started to sag, as if it were trying to fall in
again but couldn't quite manage it. The sword got very
heavy for a minute or two, and then there was an angry-sounding
rumble and the whole tunnel shook. The rock
that had been heading for Shiara went bouncing off the
opposite wall of the tunnel, and all the creaking and rumbling
stopped very abruptly. I
didn't move for several seconds at least. I kept thinking that
something else was going to happen; the quozzel wasn't going
to give up this easily. Then I saw a thin trickle of dark
purple stuff dripping down the wall of the tunnel, where the
quozzel had disappeared. I watched it for a minute or two and
decided that we probably didn't have to worry about the
quozzel anymore. I looked at Shiara. "Are
you all right?" "That's
a stupid question," Shiara said. "My arm is bro- ken!" "I
mean, you didn't get any more hurt than you were already,
did you?" "No,"
she said. She looked at me for a minute. "Thanks." I was
so surprised that I couldn't think of anything to say for
at least a minute. "Um, you're welcome," I said finally.
I realized suddenly that my sword still had some wet
purple stuff on it from hitting the quozzel, and I started digging
in my pocket for my handkerchief so I could wipe off the
sword. I
couldn't find it. I sighed; it had probably fallen out of 164
Patricia C. Wrede my
pocket somewhere on the trip through the caves. I didn't really
mind losing it, except that now I didn't have anything to get
the purple goo off my sword with. I turned to the dwarves.
"Excuse me, but do any of you—" I
stopped. The dwarves were standing in a tight group, and all
of them were staring at the sword. "Now, why didn't you
think to mention you had that?" one of them said. SHIARA
AND I looked at the dwarves. "He's been holding it
since before you got here!" Shiara said finally. "Why should
he have mentioned it?" "It
would have saved a lot of bother," one of the female dwarves
said in an aggrieved tone. "Time,
too," said another. "Inconsiderate,
I call it." "Well,
not inconsiderate, exactly. A little thoughtless, maybe." "After
all, we aren't elves." "Of
course you're not elves," the dragon said. "Anyone can see
that! What difference does it make?" "Elves
can recognize that sword just by looking at it," one of
the dwarves said in a resentful tone. "So
can some other people," said another darkly. "But
not dwarves." "Unless
we get a good look at it, of course. Which we couldn't,
because of the light, not to mention the fact that you
were standing there talking and distracting our atten- tion." "Which
is why you should have mentioned it," a dwarf in the
back finished triumphantly. 165 Patricia
C. Wrede 166 "I
didn't mention it because there seem to be a lot of people
who want it," I said. "One of them is a wizard." About
six of the dwarves started talking so fast it was hard to
tell whether they were all speaking at the same time or
whether they went one after another. "Of
course there are a lot of people who want it!" "Particularly
wizards." "It's
the King's sword, isn't it?" "Maybe
it isn't; he hasn't said." "It
has to be the King's sword, silly. There aren't any other
swords that the earth obeys." "What
about Delvan's blade?" "That's
not a sword, it's an ax," "And
the earth doesn't obey it, it just shakes a lot." "So
this has to be the King's sword." "Wait
a minute!" I said. "What do you know about my sword?" "It's
the King's sword," one of the dwarves said indig- nantly.
Another dwarf shushed him, and a dwarf near the front
of the crowd stepped forward and bowed. "We
follow the sword," she said, as if it explained every- thing. The
other dwarves all smiled and nodded. I sighed and gave
up. Either none of them really knew anything else, or they
weren't going to tell me, and I didn't think it mattered much
which it was. "If you aren't going to tell me about my
sword, could one of you do something about Shiara's arm?"
I said. "And after that, we'll be going." "Going
where?" the dragon said. Some of the dwarves jumped;
evidently they'd forgotten the dragon was behind them. I
was surprised; if a dragon were standing behind me, I
certainly wouldn't forget it was there. "We
have to find another way out of the Caves of Chance," I told
the dragon. "I don't really think we can dig through this
one." "That
will not be necessary," said the dwarf closest to me.
"Had we known you were the Bearer of the Sword, we would
not have objected to your request." "Not
at all," said the dwarf next to him. She turned and Talking
to Dragons 167 waved
at the others. "Lord Daystar requires this tunnel cleared.
Begin!" I stood
and stared while the dwarves all grabbed then- picks
and shovels and things and started toward the rocks that
were blocking the tunnel. In a few minutes they were all
digging furiously except for one, who came over to Shiara
and bowed. "I am Darlbrin," he announced. "That's
nice," Shiara said sarcastically. I sighed, but I didn't
say anything. You can't really expect a fire-witch with a
broken arm to be particularly polite. Darlbrin
didn't seem to notice. "I have some skill at mending
things," he said, and bowed again. "If you will permit
it, I would like to look at your arm." Darlbrin looked at
Shiara a shade anxiously and added, "To see if I can mend
it." Shiara
rolled her eyes, but she walked over to the edge of the
tunnel and sat down so the dwarf could see better. Nightwitch
followed, alternately purring reassuringly and meowing
anxiously. I watched for a minute or two, then turned
away. I couldn't do anything to help, and I wanted to
think. I
didn't get the chance. As soon as I turned, the dragon stuck
its head over a couple of dwarves and said, "I didn't know
you were a lord. Why didn't you tell me?" "Because
I'm not a lord!" I said. I think I sounded a little
desperate; I know I felt desperate. I didn't have the slightest
idea what was going on, except that it had some- thing
to do with my sword. Everything seemed to have something
to do with my sword; I was getting tired of it and
more than a little worried. "Well,
if you aren't a lord, why did they call you one?" "Because
he has the King's sword," said a dwarf, who was
walking under the dragon's chin with a boulder more than
half as big as he was. The dragon pulled its head back far
enough to eye the dwarf, who ignored it and kept walk- ing. "Oh,"
said the dragon at last. The dwarf continued to ignore
it. "I
really wish you'd explain a little more," I said to the 168
Patricia C. Wrede dwarf,
and then I thought of something. "Why did you call me the
Bearer of the Sword?" "I
didn't call you anything," the dwarf said without stop- ping.
"That was Cottlestone." He set the boulder down and headed
back toward the pile of rocks, which was beginning to look
smaller already. "Excuse
me," I said loudly in the gsneral direction of the
crowd of dwarves, "but would one of you tell me which one of
you is Cottlestone? I'd like to talk to him, please." "Cottlestone!"
shouted half a dozen voices. For a minute I
thought the roof was going to cave in again, but all that actually
happened was that one of the dwarves stepped out of the
crowd and bowed to me. He looked as if he really meant
it, not as if he were just being polite. "Don't do that," I said. "As
you wish," the dwarf said, bowing again. "What do you
want to know from me?" "Why
did you call me the Bearer of the Sword?" Cottlestone
looked surprised. "It's obvious. When the Bearer
of the Sword holds the King's sword, the earth obeys it. So
when you held up the sword and the earth obeyed, we knew
you were the Bearer of the Sword." "Oh."
I thought for a moment. "Have you ever heard of the
Holder of the Sword? Or the Wielder of the Sword?" "Who?" "Never
mind," I said. "How do you get to be the Bearer of the
Sword?" "No
one knows," Cottlestone said, looking at me curi- ously. "Oh,"
I said again. I was trying to think of something else to
ask, when there was a shout from the top of the caved-in
section of the tunnel. Cottlestone bowed again. "If you
will excuse me, I think they've gotten through to the other
side. I ought to go help. It's my job." "All
right," I said uncomfortably. Cottlestone turned away,
and I watched him melt into the crowd of dwarves. I
wasn't sure what I'd found out, except that I didn't like people
bowing to me. I found myself hoping that the rest of the
dwarves wouldn't imitate Cottlestone. "Did
he say they're almost finished?" said Shiara's voice Talking
to Dragons 169 behind
me. "Wonderful! I can't wait to get out of here." I
turned. Shiara was standing, holding Nightwitch in the crook
of her left arm. Her right arm was covered from her fingers
almost to her shoulder in something smooth and grey and
shiny. She looked a little white, but it might have been the
torchlight. "Well, what are you staring at?" she de- manded. "I
wasn't staring," I said. "I was just checking to see if you
were all right." Darlbrin
stepped up beside Shiara and bowed. "Not quite all
right," he said. "But not bad; not bad at all." "I
wouldn't call a broken arm 'not bad,'" Shiara said sourly. "Oh,
I didn't mean that!" Darlbrin said hastily. "I was referring
to the mending." "I'm
sure you did a very good job," I said. "And I really appreciate
it." "I
suppose I do, too," Shiara said. "Thanks." "It
isn't really mending yet, you know," Darlbrin said with a
touch of anxiety. "People aren't as easy to fix as ax handles.
It'll be a month or so before you can take the sheath
off." "Yes,
I know," Shiara said impatiently. "I've had a bro- ken arm
before." "Then
you're very welcome!" the dwarf said, beaming. "Happy
to be of service!" Shiara
snorted, but quietly. Darlbrin didn't notice; he bowed
to each of us and went off to help the rest of the dwarves
finish clearing the tunnel. I looked at Shiara. "I didn't
know you'd broken your arm before." "That's
because I didn't tell you about it," Shiara said. She
looked at me for a minute, then sighed. "I was stealing apples
from the Prince's gardens and fell out of the tree, all
right?" "Oh.
What Prince, and why were you taking his apples?" "The
Prince of the Ruby Throne," Shiara said after a minute.
"He had a house and garden just outside town, and he
never picked any of the apples. He just left them to rot. And I
was hungry. So I sneaked over the wall and climbed the
tree, but there was a big snake in it, with wings. So I 170 Patricia C. Wrede fell
out of the tree and broke my arm, and the snake went away." "Shiara,"
I said, and stopped. She obviously had no idea what
she had almost done. I sighed and changed what I was going to
say. "Shiara, the Prince of the Ruby Throne raises magic
apples. All kinds of people have been trying to steal them
for years and years, but he's a very powerful magician, and
there are hundreds of spells protecting his gardens." "That
must be why he was so upset," Shiara said in a tone of
sudden enlightenment. "I'm pretty sure he was the one who
told the Society of Wizards about me. I thought it was
a lot of fuss to make about a few apples, but now I understand." I
looked at her for a minute. "I don't want to be nosy or anything,
but, if you wouldn't mind telling me, I'd really appreciate
knowing if there's anyone else who's mad at you." "I
don't think so," Shiara said, frowning. "I'm
glad," I said. "I don't think I want any more power- ful
magical people chasing us. It wouldn't be so bad if you could
use your fire-magic." "She
can!" said the dragon, and Shiara and I both jumped and
turned around. "She burned the dragonsbane, and she can
make her hair bum." "When
did you see Shiara's hair burning?" I asked. The only
time I'd ever seen Shiara's hair on fire was when she'd gotten
mad at me right after we'd met, and the dragon hadn't been
there then. "Just
a few minutes ago," the dragon said. "You were fighting
that dessert thing, so you might not have noticed." I
looked at Shiara, and she blushed. "I was trying to do something
to the quozzel," she said. "I thought it would work,
because it worked with the dragonsbane." "It
worked on the dragonsbane," I repeated slowly. "And remember
that first wizard, the one who made a water mon- ster
out of the stream? You did something to it while I was fighting
it! That's at least twice that you've made your fire- magic
do something you wanted it to. Can you think of any others?
Maybe we can figure out how it works." "She
used it at that invisible castle," the dragon offered. Talking
to Dragons 171 "The
one where that other fire-witch lived." "I
did not!" Shiara said. "I didn't have time. We ran into the
castle, and she came out, and bang! I was a statue." The
dragon sat back, looking smug. "You said you wanted to know
what the castle was, and then you did. That's fire- magic,
isn't it?" "I
suppose it is," Shiara said slowly. "Then
that's three," I said. "Can you think of any more? Before
you came to the Enchanted Forest, for instance?" Shiara
frowned and was silent for a while. "No," she said
finally in a very positive tone. "Those are the only times
I've ever gotten my magic to do what I wanted it to, ever." "So
it's only been happening since you came to the Enchanted
Forest," I said. "And
met you and got bitten by that stupid sword," Shiara added,
and stopped. We looked at each other for a minute. "Not
again!" I said. I thought for a minute. "It can't be the
sword alone, or you would have been able to do some- thing
to the quozzel. There has to be something else, too." "Like
what?" "I
don't know. Did you do anything differently when it worked?" "No." "Well,
then did you do anything differently right before it
worked?" I said. "There has to be some—" I stopped, remembering.
"Oh," I said. "What
is it?" "I
think I know what makes your magic work," I said. I
didn't think Shiara was going to like it much, but I couldn't just
keep quiet about it, either. "I think you have to be polite to
people." "What?
That's stupid!" "It
makes sense," I said. "You apologized to me after we got
out of the hedge, and then when the first wizard came
along your magic worked against the snake thing. You were
nice to the Princess because you felt sorry for her, and right
after that you knew about the invisible castle. And you said
thanks to Suz and apologized to Telemain, and then you
made the dragonsbane bum." 172
Patricia C. Wrede "But
that other fire-witch wasn't polite!" Shiara objected. "I
didn't say all fire-witches have to be polite to people before
their magic will work," I said. "I only said your magic
works that way. And I'm not positive. I mean, it could
be something else." "Well,
I'm not going to go around being nice to people just so
I can do magic!" "I
don't think it would work, anyway," I said unhappily. "I
mean, I don't think you can just say things, I think you have to
really mean them. You meant it when you apolo- gized
to me, and when you were nice to the Princess, and when
you were talking to Telemain." "Oh,
great," Shiara said disgustedly. "I bet this is all that
stupid sword's fault. It sounds like something it'd do." She
glared at me for an instant, then turned her back. I sighed. "Excuse
me. Lord Daystar," said a voice by my elbow. I
looked down; the dwarf bowed as soon as I turned. "Don't
do that," I said. "Certainly,
my lord," she said, and started to bow again, then
stopped and looked confused. "The tunnel is clear; you may
continue your journey whenever you wish." I
looked around. She was right; the pile of rocks that had been
blocking the tunnel was nearly gone. A few boulders were
left along the sides, but there was plenty of room to walk
through, even for the dragon. "Thank you very much," I said.
"But I really ought to tell you: I'm not a lord." The
dwarf smiled tolerantly. "Of course not, my lord. Is
there anything else we can do for you?" "I'd
appreciate it if we could borrow one of your torches," I said.
"Our lamp got lost in the cave-in." "We
would be pleased to offer you a torch," the dwarf said.
"You can leave it by the exit, and someone will get it
later. It isn't far." We
gathered up what was left of our things, and the dwarves
did some more bowing. One of them handed Shiara a
torch. She grumbled a little because she had to put Night- witch
down in order to take it, but she was the only one of us who
could carry it. I had the sword in one hand and the key in
the other, and the dragon couldn't hold a torch. Talking
to Dragons 173 Fortunately,
Nightwitch didn't seem to mind walking. We thanked
the dwarves and said good-bye, and they all bowed again,
and finally we started off. The
tunnel started slanting upward almost as soon as we were
past the cave-in, and shortly after that we stopped seeing
side passages. Eventually we came to a flight of stairs
that curled around and around until all of us were dizzy.
Just when I didn't think I could climb anymore, the stairs
ended against a hard, rocky surface, like a trapdoor made of
stone. I
shoved against it, but it didn't budge. "It's too heavy." "Really?"
said the dragon. "It doesn't look so bad." I
looked down at the dragon, who was last on the stairs because
neither Shiara nor I had wanted to be behind it if it
slipped. "It probably isn't too heavy for you. Why don't you try
it?" The
dragon agreed, and Shiara and I squashed ourselves against
the side of the stairs so it could climb past us. There were a
couple of minutes of grunts, and the dragon's tail whipped
back and forth, which made Shiara and me retreat farther
down the stairs. Finally there was a loud noise like extremely
rusty hinges, and the dragon started moving up- ward. A
moment later, it stopped. "Uh-oh," it said. "What's
the matter?" Shiara called. The
dragon didn't answer, but it moved out of the way so we
could climb up. Shiara and I got to the head of the stairs
at almost the same time and looked around. We were
standing at the top of a small rise. The sun was starting
to set, but there was still enough light to see the castle
clearly. It was quite close, not more than a few min- utes'
walk from where I was, and it fascinated me. At first, I
thought it was made of something shimmery, like mother- of-pearl;
then I realized that it wasn't the castle that was shimmering,
it was something around the castle, like a giant soap
bubble. I was still trying to figure out what it was when
Shiara poked me, and I looked down. There were approximately
two hundred dragons sitting on the ground around
the little hill we were standing on. Watching us. I
SWALLOWED HARD, and for a moment I wished I were wearing
my sword instead of carrying it under my arm. Every
dragon in the Enchanted Forest had to be there, and quite a
few from outside it. They were spread out in all directions,
so that I couldn't even see the ground, and I realized
suddenly that there was a lot of open space around the
castle. The forest circled the castle at a distance, and there
seemed to be something wrong about it. I couldn't tell what,
though, and besides, I had other things to worry about right
then. Two hundred dragons, for instance. I
stepped forward and bowed carefully in all directions. One of
the first things Mother taught me about dragons was that
dragons expect a new arrival to make the first move. They
always allow you one chance to convince them that you're
too polite or too important to eat. I was going to have to
rely on being polite; I didn't think I could convince two
hundred dragons that I was particularly important, es- pecially
since I didn't believe it myself. I took a deep breath. "Sirs
and madams, I apologize most profoundly for in- truding
upon you in this fashion, and I hope we have not inconvenienced
you in any way," I said, trying to talk loudly enough
for all the dragons to hear me and still sound polite. 175 Talking
to Dragons 177 "Nevertheless,
I offer you greetings in the name of myself and my
companions, and I wish you good fortune in what- ever
endeavors are most important to you." The
dragons stirred briefly, then settled back again. After a
moment, an old, grey-green male slid forward. "We greet ( you, and wish you well," he said.
"May we know your names?" I bowed
again, the half bow of respect for a dragon of great
age and uncertain status. "I thank you for your greet- ; ing," I said. "I am called
Daystar, and my companions are Shiara
and Nightwitch." I didn't ask for the dragons' names. It's
perfectly acceptable not to, and I didn't feel like standing there
through two hundred introductions, especially since the
dragons would expect me to remember them all. "Well
met, Daystar," the old dragon rumbled. "We've been
expecting you since early this afternoon; I'm glad you finally
got here." "I'm
sorry if I kept you waiting," I said. "We had prob- lems
with some wizards, and a cave-in, and a quozzel, and I
didn't really know you were waiting. I hope it hasn't been long." "Of
course not; Telemain only told Kazul yesterday that you
were coming. Silly way to do things, making everyone gather
in such a hurry." He looked at me for a minute, then I nodded approvingly. "Well, come
along; no sense wasting | any more time. You might as well bring
the girl and the ' cat, too; this way." Our
dragon lifted its head. "What about me?" it de- manded.
It looked much smaller next to the full-grown dragons
all around us, and it sounded considerably younger as
well. "You
had better keep quiet," the older dragon said in- dulgently.
"You're in quite a bit of trouble already; I wouldn't make it
worse if I were you." "I
don't have to keep quiet!" our dragon said. "I found a
Princess, even if I did decide not to keep her, and I fought a
knight and bit a wizard. I can talk if I want to!" The
crowd of dragons shifted again, very slightly. Shiara , shivered and held Nightwitch closer; I
thought about wiping , my hands on my tunic, then decided it
would be too no- 178
Patricia C. Wrede ticeable.
The older dragon ignored all of us; he just stood and
stared at our dragon, which finally shook its head and settled
back, watching the crowd below us with a sulky expression.
The old dragon smiled slightly and turned his head.
"What do you think?" he asked the crowd of dragons behind
him. All of
the dragons roared at once. I couldn't tell what they
were saying, or even if they were saying anything, but the old
dragon nodded again and looked at the little dragon. "You'll
get your wish, then. Well, don't just stand there." I
nodded and stepped forward as the old dragon turned. Shiara
followed behind me, very closely, and our dragon came
behind her. "Where are we going?" Shiara whispered to me. The old
dragon looked back over his shoulder, and his eyes
glinted with amusement. "You're going to see Kazul." "Oh,"
Shiara said. We stepped down from the little hill, and
there was a loud clattering and rumbling as the dragons moved
out of our way. I stopped short in shock. The
ground around the hill was dry and brown and bare. It
looked even worse than it would have normally, because I'd
spent several days looking at the rich moss in the Enchanted
Forest. Then I remembered that we were still in the
Enchanted Forest, and I started being worried as well as
shocked. I knew from experience how fast the moss grew, and how
hard it was to clear off even a small strip of ground; I
didn't like to think about what had stripped the moss from the
area around the castle. Shiara
poked me, and I started moving forward again. Fortunately,
the dragon ahead of us hadn't noticed my pause. A few
of the ones at the edge of the crowd had, but they seemed
more amused than anything. I decided not to worry about
it and walked a little faster, trying to ignore the large shapes
on either side of me. With two hundred dragons around,
I could waste a lot of time worrying if I wasn't careful. The old
dragon led us toward the castle. As we got closer, I could
see that there were two shimmerings in the air around the
castle, one a few feet inside the other. The outer one looked
like a shifting, green-and-silver veil, very thin and Talking
to Dragons 179 transparent.
The inner one seemed to be a pale golden glow, but I
couldn't be sure because of the way the one on the outside
shifted around; it seemed to interfere with my seeing the
inner one clearly. After a few minutes, I gave up on trying
to look at the shimmerings and tried looking through them
instead. The
shimmerings didn't seem to get in the way at all; I discovered
that I could see quite a bit of the castle. Part of the
reason was that there was no wall around it, only the shimmerings
and a water-filled moat just inside them. The castle
itself was a wonderful, rambling-looking place, with about
six towers of various sizes and large square windows and
four balconies. I could see several stairways running up to
oddly shaped doors or around the outside of the towers, and a
lot of walls that seemed to be there just to confuse people.
I was so busy studying the castle and the shim- merings
that I almost didn't notice when the dragon stopped; I was
lucky not to step on his tail. We were
about halfway around the castle, and there seemed
to be fewer dragons around. I was trying to guess which
one was Kazul, when the old dragon who had been leading
us stepped a little to one side and bobbed his head respectfully.
"King Kazul, these are the travelers who wish to see
you. That one's Daystar, the other one's Shiara, and the cat
is Nightwitch." Right
away I bowed very deeply, and so did Shiara. I was
relieved; I hadn't been completely sure she would do any of
the things I'd suggested. As I straightened up, I got my
first look at Kazul. Even
lying on the ground, she looked large for a dragon. Her
scales were just beginning to turn grey around the edges, which
surprised me; I'd expected someone older. Her eyes were
hypnotic, green-gold ovals. She was the most dan- gerous-looking
dragon I'd ever seen. Kazul smiled broadly. Dragons
have a lot of teeth. "So,"
she said, "you are the people Telemain sent through the
Caves of Chance, and you have the Sword of the Sleep- ing
King." "Yes,
Your Majesty," I said. I took the sword out from under
my arm and held it up so she could see it better. Talking
to Dragons 181 "Mother
gave it to me a few days ago, and I was told you would
want to know about it." "Ahhhhhh."
Kazul's eyes glowed as she looked at the sword.
Literally; the light from them was a little like fire- light,
except it didn't flicker. After a minute, she transferred her
gaze to me. "And you got it here safely. Well done, Cimorene's
son." "Thank
you. Your Majesty," I said. "You knew my mother?" Kazul
smiled again. "Cimorene was the best Princess I ever
had." Shiara
choked. My jaw dropped; the little dragon said, "That's
how she knew dragon magic!" in a pleased tone. I
closed my mouth, swallowed hard, and bowed to Kazul. "Excuse
me, Your Majesty. I was, urn, startled. Mother is a
Princess?" "She
certainly was once," Kazul said. She looked at the sword
again. "I'm glad she managed to keep it safe. We didn't
have a lot of choice at the time, but it's still worrying to have
to take a risk like that." I
wasn't certain what to say to that; Kazul didn't seem to be
talking to me, but it isn't a good idea to ignore a dragon.
I decided not to say anything and bowed again. Kazul
looked up from the sword. "You needn't bother being
quite so formal," she said. "I have a lot to tell you, and it
will make the conversation a lot easier if you're not quite so
stiff." Before
I could reply, Kazul turned toward the old dragon, who was
still standing beside me. "It will be tomorrow morning.
Let everyone know; the preparations must be fin- ished
by then." The old
dragon nodded and left. Kazul looked back at us.
"Come with me." She started to rise. "What
about me?" the little dragon demanded. Kazul
sighed. "Yes, you may come, too." She stood, which
made her look twice as big as she had before, and started
walking. Shiara and I looked at each other and fol- lowed.
There wasn't anything else we could do; after all, Kazul
was King of the Dragons. By this
time the sun was completely down, but there was 182
Patricia C. Wrede still
enough light in the sky that we could see where we were
going. Kazul led us a little farther around the castle, then
turned away from it. As we walked along, the other dragons
would slide out of the way for Kazul and bow their heads
respectfully to her; then Shiara and I would walk by and bow
respectfully to the dragons. It kept us too busy to see
much of where we were going. Kazul
led us to what looked like a jumbled pike of rocks a
little way from the castle. There was a dark opening at one
side of the pile, and Kazul went right in. Shiara and the
dragon and I followed. It was
very dark inside, almost as black as the Caves of Chance.
I stopped immediately; I didn't want to step on Kazul's
tail in the dark or run into her accidentally. Shiara bumped
into me, squeezing Nightwitch between us. Night- witch
said, "Mrowww!" in a complaining tone, and Kazul's voice
came out of the darkness. "I
suppose you human people need some light." "Only
if it won't be inconvenient," I said hastily. "Not
at all," Kazul replied, and added about five hissing words. Silvery
light sprang up all around us. I had to squint for a
minute; then I blinked. The inside of the pile of rocks looked
a lot like a cave. I looked for the source of the light and
realized with a shiver that the light was coming from the rocks. That
shook me. Dragons don't usually do magic casually; they
take it too seriously. In particular, the King of the Dragons
wouldn't normally work a spell just for a visitor's convenience.
I looked at Kazul, wondering exactly what was
going on. "Sit
down," said Kazul, nodding toward a row of rocks. We did.
The little dragon sat down by the entrance, looking half-sulky
and half-defiant. Kazul ignored it. "I
think you had better tell me your story first," she said, looking
at me intently. "Start at the beginning, when Cimorene
gave you the sword." "I'm
sorry," I said. "I'll start with the sword if you want me to,
but I think the beginning is the wizard." "Wizard?"
said Kazul. Talking
to Dragons 183 "His
name's Antorell; he came to our cottage the day before
Mother gave me the sword, and Mother melted him." "Oh,
him." Kazul shook her head. "Sounds like he hasn't learned
anything since the last time he tangled with Cimorene. Yes,
start with him, by all means." So I
told Kazul everything that had happened to me since Antorell
had walked up to our cottage and knocked the door in. It
took a long time, especially the part after Shiara and I met
the dragon, because the dragon kept adding things. Finally,
Kazul told it to either be quiet or go away. It looked terribly
offended, but it quit talking. Kazul
didn't ask any questions at all. Once, when I mentioned
finding the key in the Caves of Chance, she made a noise
that sounded like an astonished snort, but she apol- ogized
for interrupting and told me to go on. I did, once I got
over the shock of having the King of the Dragons apol- ogize
to me. When I
finished, there was silence for a minute or two. Then
Kazul stirred. "So. You have accomplished a great deal in
a short time, Daystar." "It
doesn't really seem like it to me," I said. "A
great deal," Kazul repeated. She sounded as if she were
talking to herself. Shiara
shifted restlessly. "Are you going to explain about Daystar's
sword?" she demanded. "Shiara!"
I said, horrified. Nobody talks to the King of the
Dragons in that tone of voice. Except
Shiara. "No," said Kazul. "Or at least, I'm not going
to tell you as much as you want to know. It's one of the
problems with that sword right now. The Society of Wizards
has more than a hundred spells hunting for it, and all of
them depend on finding someone who knows what he's
carrying; the sword itself is invisible to wizards' magic. If
Daystar knows too much about that sword too soon, we'll be up
to our wings in wizards right away. I don't want that to
happen yet." "I
don't like wizards," the little dragon said suddenly. "They
make me sneeze." Kazul's
head turned and she eyed the little dragon for a minute.
"I think it is time you made yourself useful," she 184 Patricia C. Wrede said at
last. "Go find Marchak and tell him to bring us dinner.
Then go back to your teacher and apologize for running
off, and after that you can start getting ready for tomorrow." "What
happens tomorrow?" the little dragon said sus- piciously. "We
have a war," Kazul said. "Which you might manage to live
through, if you're ready for it. So go!" "Yes,
ma'am!" The little dragon disappeared out the door of the
cave. Kazul
looked after it for a minute, then shook her head. "That
is undoubtedly the most irritating grandchild I have." "Who
are you going to be fight— Grandchild?" said Shiara. "Yes,
of course," said Kazul, looking mildly surprised. "It's
an annoying youngster, but precocious children fre- quently
are. I'm hoping it will grow out of it." "Oh,"
said Shiara. She stared out the entrance thought- fully. "I
enjoyed its company, most of the time," I said hon- estly. "I'm
glad," Kazul said. "Um,
if you wouldn't mind telling us, I'm sort of curious about
whom you expect to be fighting tomorrow," I said after
another minute. I was also wondering whether Kazul thought
Shiara and I were going to be included in this. I wasn't
particularly anxious to get involved in a war between dragons. Kazul
smiled; I got the feeling she knew what I was thinking.
"Wizards," she said. "There will be a few elves, of
course, and maybe some ogres and trolls, but mostly we'll
be fighting wizards." "Oh,"
I said. I was even less interested in getting involved in a
war between dragons and wizards. Dragons alone might overlook
Shiara and Nightwitch and me, but wizards cer- tainly
wouldn't. "I'm
afraid you already are involved," Kazul said. "Because
of the sword?" Shiara asked while I tried to remember
whether I'd said anything out loud about not wanting
to get involved. Talking
to Dragons 185 "Yes,"
said Kazul. "The sword, and other things. It's a long
story; I hope you're comfortable." We both
nodded, and Kazul smiled again. "Well, then. There
are two types of magic in the world: the kind you're born
with, and the kind you get from something else. Drag- ons"—Kazul
looked smug—"elves, unicorns, and fire- witches
are bom with magic, to name a few. Ordinary witches
and magicians get their magic from objects or from rituals
involving things that have magic; it works quite well and
doesn't upset things. "Wizards,
on the other hand, get their magic from every- thing
around them that happens to have magic. Those staffs of
theirs absorb little bits of it constantly and it gets worse every
time a wizard stores a new spell in his staff. That, by the
way, is why dragons are allergic to them; whenever those
staffs get near us, they start trying to soak up some of our
magic. It creates other problems, too." "You
mean those stupid wizards have been grabbing my magic
every time they come near me?" Shiara said indig- nantly. "Not
yours," Kazul said. "Wizards can't use fire-witches' magic;
it's too different. Their staffs explode if they try." "Good!"
said Shiara vindictively. Her face grew thought- ful.
"I wonder if I could leam to do it on purpose?" Kazul
looked as if she agreed with Shiara. "Wizards get most of
their magic from the Enchanted Forest, but if they absorb
too much magic in any one place, things die." "The
moss!" I said. "That's why it turns brown when a wizard's
staff touches it." "Yes,"
said Kazul. "The Kings of the Enchanted Forest had a
way of reversing the process, taking magic out of a wizard's
staff and putting it back in the forest, so wizards weren't
too much of a problem until about seventeen or eighteen
years ago, when one of the wizards managed to steal
some rather important items from the King's castle. One of
them in particular was critical to the King's control of the
wizards." Kazul paused and looked at me expectantly. "The
sword?" I said. 'Telemain said it was supposed to be used
on wizards." "Telemain
talks too much," Kazul said a little sourly. 186 Patricia C. Wrede "The
wizard who stole the sword didn't know exactly what he had,
at first, but he knew enough to convince the rest of the
wizards to attack the castle. They were trying to kill the
King and take his place, but before they succeeded, the sword
was stolen again. A few wizards managed to get inside
the castle, but without the sword they didn't have enough
power to actually kill the King. The best they could do was
find a way of keeping him out of action while they hunted
for the sword." "They
put the King to sleep?" I said doubtfully. It sounded a bit
unlikely. Sleeping spells are very effective on guards and
Princesses, and even a kingdom now and then, but they can't
usually do much against a good magician, and what- ever
else he was, I was sure the King of the Enchanted Forest
had to be a master magician. "We
don't know exactly what they did," Kazul admitted. "We
know the King isn't dead, because the Enchanted For- est
reacts very strongly when a King dies. We know they did
something, though, because the seal they have around the
castle wouldn't hold the King in by itself." "You
mean those shimmerings around the castle?" I said. "The
outer one is ours," Kazul said with a grim smile. "The
wizards put up a spell to keep everyone but themselves out of
the castle, so we put one to keep the wizards out. Without
the sword, there wasn't anything more we could do." "Then
how did Daystar's mother get hold of the sword?" Shiara
asked. Kazul
smiled again. "Cimorene was the one who stole it back
from the wizards in the first place. They've been trying
to get hold of it again ever since. They'll show up as soon
as we break through their barrier tomorrow, but by then we
should be ready for them." "Uh,
you expect Shiara and me to help you fight the wizards?"
I said. "Of
course not," Kazul replied. "You're going to get into the
castle and break whatever spell the wizards put on the King
seventeen years ago." THAT
TOOK SOME explanation. What Kazul meant was, the dragons
would lower the barrier they had put up around the castle.
Then I would draw the Sword of the Sleeping King and put
it into the wizards' barrier, which, according to Kazul,
would break their spell. The wizards would know immediately
that something was happening, and they would start
trying to get to the castle. The dragons and their various allies
would hold off the wizards and whomever they brought to help
them, while I ran into the castle, found the King, and
broke the spell. I
didn't like the sound of it at all, but I couldn't say much.
Mother had given me the sword, and I was pretty sure
this was what she'd wanted me to do with it. Besides, Kazul
seemed to think I was the only one who could use the
sword to break the spell, and how do you tell the King of the
Dragons that you won't do something she wants you to do? Shiara,
on the other hand, had a lot to say. She thought it
would be stupid for me to go into the castle by myself. Kazul
asked if she was volunteering, and Shiara said that she
wasn't going to be left out just when things were getting interesting.
Kazul pointed out that Shiara's arm was broken, 187 188
Patricia C. Wrede and
Shiara told her that being inside the castle with me sounded
safer than being outside with a lot of wizards and dragons
fighting each other. Finally,
Kazul said Shiara could go with me if she wanted to.
Shiara said good, and were the dragons going to be able to keep
all of the wizards out of the castle, or were some of them
going to sneak in after us? They kept on like that for
quite a while. I was very glad when a middle-sized dragon
arrived with dinner and interrupted. I couldn't see why
Kazul was being so patient with Shiara, and I was getting
worried that it wouldn't last much longer. Dinner
was excellent. Kazul didn't eat with us; she spent most of
the meal lying on the floor and watching us in- scrutably.
Dragons are very good at being inscrutable. I found
it a bit unsettling, but it didn't seem to bother Shiara or
Nightwitch much. After
dinner we talked some more. Kazul told us about the
castle and what the floor plan was. She also told us about a
lot of things to watch out for; most of them were magical
items that would only be dangerous if we acciden- tally
did something to them, but there were a few traps, too. "This
castle sounds awfully big," Shiara said after a while.
"How are we supposed to find this King, anyway?" "You
look for him," Kazul said. "I'm afraid I can't tell you
exactly where. The only people who knew where the King
was were the wizards who went in and put the spell on him,
and as far as I know they're all dead." "As
far as you know?" I said. "Some
of them didn't come out of the castle," Kazul said. "But
you're sure that the ones who did come out are dead?"
I said. "Positive,"
said Kazul. "So
what?" said Shiara. Kazul and I looked at her. "I don't
care about the wizards who came out," she said de- fensively.
"I'm worried about the ones who might still be in
there." "They
have to be either dead or enchanted," Kazul said. "Even
a wizard can't live seventeen years without food." Talking
to Dragons 189 "I
suppose so," Shiara said. "Well, what does this King look
like?" "You'll
know him when you see him," Kazul said. "Be- sides,
he's the only other person in there." "Oh,
great," said Shiara. "We have to hunt through an empty
castle for someone we don't even know, while a bunch
of wizards are trying to get in and stop us." "It
shouldn't be that bad," Kazul said. "The sword and the key
should both help considerably." "The
key?" I said. "Of
course the key!" Kazul said impatiently. "For one thing,
it'll make it a lot easier for you to get into the castle; you
could have done it with the sword alone, but it will be much
faster with the key as well." "Are
you saying I just picked up the key to the castle by accident?'
I said. "Accidents
like that happen all the time in the Caves of Chance,"
Kazul said dryly. "Where do you think they got their
name?" "How
do you know it's the right key?" Shiara demanded. "The
quozzel said some wizard put it there." "It
was one of the things that were stolen along with the sword,"
Kazul replied. "But if it will make you more com- fortable,
I can look at it." I dug
the key out of my pocket and held it out to Kazul. Kazul
glanced at it and started to nod, then stopped suddenly and
stared at the key very intently. "That
wizard's done something to it," she said after a moment.
She sounded outraged. "Wonderful,"
said Shiara disgustedly. "All we need is another
wizard to get mixed up in this." "He
isn't another wizard," Kazul said. "He's the same one who
stole the key in the first place, and he's dead." "You're
sure he's not one of the wizards who didn't come
out?" Shiara said. Kazul nodded, and Shiara frowned. "Can
you tell what he did?" Kazul
didn't answer. She stared at the key instead, and her
eyes started glowing again. The key began getting wanner and
wanner in my hands. Just before it got too hot for me to
hold, the key jerked in the direction of the castle outside; 190 Patricia C. Wrede a
second later, I dropped it. I stood shaking my fingers, while
Kazul and Shiara stared down at the key, and Night- witch
walked over and sniffed at it. "Nightwitch!"
said Shiara. "Stop that; you'll get en- chanted
or something." She bent over and grabbed awk- wardly
for Nightwitch with her left hand. The kitten jumped away,
and Shiara's fingers brushed the key. A look of sur- prise
came over her face, and she picked the key up. "It feels
like fire," she said. "I
know," I said. "It burned my fingers." "No,
I don't mean it's hot," Shiara said. "It just feels like
fire." "It
shouldn't," Kazul said, sounding interested. "Bring it over
here." Shiara
took the key to Kazul, who looked at it for a few minutes
and handed it back. "I thought so. It's part of what that
wizard did." "But
what's it for?" Shiara said. "I
don't know," Kazul admitted. "The spell is connected to
something inside the castle, but I can't tell what with the barriers
around the outside. He may have set a trap with it; he was
one of the wizards who got inside during the battle, you
know." "No,
I didn't," Shiara said. "And how could he use the key
inside the castle if it was sitting down in the Caves of Chance
the whole time?" "He
couldn't have," Kazul said calmly. "He probably left
the key there after he got out of the castle; he was the last
one of the wizards we caught, and he had plenty of time to
do it." "May
I have my key back, please?" I said. Kazul and Shiara
both looked at me, and Shiara handed me the key. "Thank
you," I said, and put it in my pocket. I wasn't quite sure
why I wanted it; I only knew that it felt right, somehow. "Is
there anything else we ought to know about right now?"
I asked after a minute. "I mean, we've walked a long
way today, and been in a cave-in, and Shiara has a broken
arm, and if we're going to do all of these things tomorrow,
I would sort of like to get some rest." Talking
to Dragons 191 "Mrrrroww!"
said Nightwitch emphatically. Kazul
chuckled. "It seems you aren't the only one who would
like rest. Very well. Marchak!" The
middle-sized dragon who had brought us dinner ap- peared,
and Kazul had him show us to our rooms. They turned
out to be normal, human-sized rooms, and quite comfortable.
I was surprised until it occurred to me that the King of
the Dragons would probably have occasional human visitors,
who would need a place to stay. I wondered how many
human magicians kept a special place for visiting dragons
in their castles and towers and things, and right in the middle
of wondering, I fell asleep. A loud
pounding noise woke me; someone, probably a dragon,
was knocking on the door of my room. "Just a minute,
please," I called, and the pounding stopped. I got
out of the bed, which I couldn't remember having gotten
into, and picked up my swordbelt. I checked my pockets
to make sure I had the key, started for the door, and
stopped suddenly in the middle of the room. If the dragons
expected me to do things with the Sword of the Sleeping
King. I wasn't going to carry it under my arm like a bag
of laundry. I put the swordbelt on and opened the door. "It's
about time," said the little dragon in the hall. Shiara and
Nightwitch were already there. "I'm
sorry," I said. "I didn't know you were in a hurry." The
dragon snorted and started off down the hall. "Come on." We went
after it. It didn't seem to be in a particularly good
mood, and I didn't understand why until Shiara told me that
it wanted to come into the castle with us, but Kazul wouldn't
let it. I couldn't see why it wanted to come; there weren't
supposed to be any wizards inside the castle, and I
thought the little dragon wanted to fight wizards. I didn't say
anything, though. Arguing with a grouchy dragon isn't safe,
even if it's a small dragon. The
dragon brought us back to the cave where we'd talked to
Kazul the previous night. Kazul wasn't there, but break- fast
was, and we sat down right away. We were almost 192 Patricia C. Wrede done
with it when Kazul arrived. "Go
on, finish," she said when she saw we were still eating. "Urn,
that's all right," Shiara said hastily. "I don't want any
more." "I've
had plenty, too," I said. "It's very good." Kazul
nodded absently. "Well, if you're finished, let us begin." I stood
up from the table, wishing suddenly that I hadn't eaten
quite so much. My stomach felt as if it were full of lead,
and my head was very light. "How do we start?" I said. "Follow
me." Kazul slid out of the cave without looking back at
us. Shiara and I followed, and Nightwitch and the little
dragon came behind us. Kazul
led us back across the hard, brown ground toward the
castle. All around us, dragons were polishing their teeth and
sharpening their claws; some of them were muttering spells
under their breath. A couple of times, I saw elves hurrying
through the crowd, and once I saw a group of intense-looking
red-haired people who had to be fire-witches. Everyone
was very serious and grim. None of
us said anything until we got to the castle. Kazul led us
around the outside of the shimmerings until we were at the
front of the castle; if I concentrated on looking through the
barriers, I could see a flat wooden bridge across the moat
and a large door with steps leading up to it. Kazul stopped
and turned to the little dragon. "You'd better go find
your place now," she said. "But
I want to—" "Go!" The
little dragon went. Shiara and I looked at each other, and
then at Kazul. Kazul smiled. "Are you ready?" I nodded
jerkily. Shiara bent and picked up Nightwitch. Kazul's
smile widened. "When I tell you 'now,' draw your sword
and run for the castle. Don't look back, and don't stop
for anything." I
nodded again, because I didn't trust my voice just then. Kazul
turned to the crowd of dragons, and suddenly every- thing
was completely silent. A shiver ran down my back, Talking
to Dragons 193 and I
put my hand on the hilt of the Sword of the Sleeping King. I felt
the bee-in-the-jar buzz that was Shiara's magic, and a
strong humming from all the dragons, but the strongest feeling
of all was the purring I'd felt from the first time the sword
made my arm tingle. It was coming from the castle. Not
from the shimmerings around the castle; they just got in the
way. What I was feeling was the magic of the castle itself. I took
a tighter grip on the hilt of the sword. The tingling from
the dragons got stronger and more positive, and abruptly Kazul
turned and shouted, "Now!" As she spoke, the silver- and-green
shimmering around the castle vanished. I
yanked the Sword of the Sleeping King out of its sheath and
swung it at the golden glow that was still left between me and
the castle. I felt a shock like a lightning bolt as the sword
hit, and then the shimmering vanished in an explosion of
golden light. I shook my head and heard Kazul shout, "Run!" I took
two steps and almost lost my balance. The ground wasn't
hard and bare anymore; it was covered with slippery green
fuzz. Shiara grabbed my arm just as I heard a series of
explosions from behind us. We ran.
I could feel the jangling from the sword that meant
there were wizards around somewhere, but I didn't stop to
look for them. I was too busy trying to keep up with Shiara,
hang on to the sword, and dig the key out of my pocket,
all at the same time. It didn't work very well. Shiara
was standing in front of the door, panting, when I got
up to it with the key. I didn't see a keyhole, but as soon as
my foot touched the top step of the stairs, the door swung
open. "Daystar,"
Shiara said, "are you sure—" Something
hit the stone of the castle next to the door and exploded,
showering us with little chips of rock. Shiara and I dove
through the door and landed on the floor inside with Nightwitch
on top of us. I sat up just as the door closed silently
behind us. "Hey!"
Shiara said. "Watch what you're doing with that sword!" 194
Patricia C. Wrede "I'm
sorry," I said. I stood up, stuck the key in my pocket
again, and held out a hand to help Shiara up. "Is your
arm all right?" "I
think so," she said absently. "At least, it doesn't hurt any
more than it did already. Now which way do we go?" "I
don't know," I said. The door shook as something hit it, and
a moment later there was a muffled explosion. "I think
we should get out of here, though." "Aren't
you going to put that stupid sword away first?" "No,"
I said. "I'd rather have it in my hand, in case some of
the wizards do get into the castle." Shiara
scowled, but she didn't object again, and we started hunting
through the castle. The
castle was even more confusing on the inside than it was
on the outside. Rooms opened into more rooms and then
suddenly into a hallway or a flight of stairs. All of them
were full of chairs and tables and books and suits of armor,
and everything was dusty. The wizards' spell seemed to have
kept spiderwebs and cobwebs out of the castle, but it
hadn't done anything at all about the dust. Nightwitch didn't
like it at all; she kept sneezing. Finally, Shiara picked her up
and carried her, which helped a little. It took
a lot longer to figure out where we were going than
I'd expected. I could feel the sword pulling me toward the
center of the castle, but it was very hard to just go in that
direction. In spite of Kazul's instructions, Shiara and I kept
getting into hallways that curved the wrong way and chains
of rooms that ended with nowhere else to go. It was very
discouraging. Finally,
we came to a large door at the end of a long hall.
It was about three times as wide as a normal door and much
taller, and it was made of gold with designs on it in relief.
There was a staff lying on the floor in front of it; I could
tell from the jangling of the sword that it was a wizard's
staff. When I stopped to look at it, the sword jerked impatiently
toward the door. "I think this is the place we've been
looking for," I said. Shiara
tried the door. "It's locked. Where's that key?" "Just
a minute," I said, and dug for it. "Hey!" I said. Talking
to Dragons 195 As soon
as I touched it, I felt the key pulling at me, the same
way the sword was. "What
is it?" Shiara said. "Come on, hurry up!" "It's
this key," I said as I unlocked the door. "It feels almost
like the sword, except—" I
stopped as the door swung open. The room inside was very
large and very high. It was fall of light and not dusty at all.
In the center of the floor was something like a shallow iron
brazier, about three feet high and nearly five feet across, full of
glowing coals. On the other side of the brazier was a
couch, and lying on the couch was a man. He was
dressed in expensive-looking clothes, but there were
tears in them, as if he had been in a fight. He didn't look
old, even though his beard was long and grey. His head
was bare, and at his side was a jeweled scabbard, empty.
He was asleep. Shiara
took a deep breath. "That must be him; come on, Daystar,
let's get this over with." I
stepped into the room and walked slowly toward the couch.
As I came around the brazier, I saw that there was another
wizard's staff lying beside the couch. I slowed down even
more; something felt wrong. I stopped, standing next to the
couch with the key in one hand and the sword in the other. "Well,
now that we're here, how do we break the spell?" Shiara
said, coming up on one side of me. "Something's
wrong," I said, and as I spoke I realized what it
was. The key was still pulling at me, but as soon as I
had stepped into the room, the pulling from the sword had
stopped. All I could feel from the sword was the jangling of the
magic in the wizard's staffs. "Maybe
if you lay the sword on him it'll work," Shiara said,
ignoring me. "Come on; you have to try something or
we'll be here all day." "I
wouldn't try anything at all, if I were you," said a voice
behind us. Shiara and I spun to look backward. The doorway
of the room was fall of wizards. I
STARED AT the wizards for an instant, then turned and jumped
for the couch, hoping I could break the spell before the
wizards could do anything. I didn't make it. As I brought the
flat of the sword down, the sleeping man vanished. The sword
clanged softly against the couch, and I spun back to face the
wizards. Something
hit me as I turned, and suddenly I couldn't move my
body at all. I could turn my head far enough to see
Shiara, but that was all. Shiara looked as if she were concentrating
on something, so I turned my head back to the
wizards. They were standing around the sleeping man, who was
now lying on the floor in front of the doorway. "Well
done," said one of the wizards to another. "Thank
you," the second wizard said. "It was a mere trifle." There
was a stir at the back of the group of wizards, and a
moment later Antorell pushed forward to the front. He had a
bandage around one arm, probably where the dragon had
bitten him. "I want the boy!" he said. "Now!" The
wizard in front, who seemed to be the leader of the group, looked
at Antorell coldly. "You were permitted to join us
in order to give you an opportunity to repair some 197 198
Patricia C. Wrede of the
damage you did seventeen years ago. Not to further your
private ambitions." "But
you said I could have the boy!" "Antorell,
you're a fool," the leader said. "You may have the
boy, but after we have possession of the sword, not before." "I'll
give you the sword, then!" Antorell said angrily. He
strode around the edge of the brazier and reached for the
hilt of the sword, just above my hand. I wanted to jerk away,
but I still couldn't move. There
was a flash of blue-and-gold light as Antorell touched
the sword, and he was flung backward onto the floor;
if he'd fallen a few inches to the other side, he'd have gone
into the brazier. I found myself wishing he had, then found
myself staring at the brazier. There was something about
it that nibbled at my mind, but I couldn't make it come
clear. I didn't have time to think about it, because the
wizards started talking again. Antorell
was picking himself up off the floor, and the leader
of the wizards smiled at him nastily. "You see?" "You
knew this would happen!" Antorell said furiously. "Of
course I knew," the leader said. "Had you spent your time
hunting that sword instead of trying to get some sort of
ridiculous revenge on Cimorene, you, too, would know." "Then
demonstrate the proper method for me," Antorell said
sarcastically. "If you know so much, you take the sword." "I
am not so foolish," the other wizard replied. "No one save
the King of the Enchanted Forest can take that sword from a
Bearer who is not willing to give it up, especially not
inside this castle." "Then
how do you expect to get it?" Antorell said even more
sarcastically than before. "We
kill the King," the wizard said, gesturing at the sleeping
figure on the floor in front of him. "When the line of the
Kings of the Enchanted Forest is ended, one of us can
take up the rule of the castle." "What
good will that do?" Antorell said. "The boy will still
have the sword. And, as you have reminded me so 199 Talking
to Dragons many
times in the past two days, he seems to be able to use
it." The
leader shrugged. "If your tale is true, I shall admit to some
surprise; I thought no one but the King could use the
sword. Which is why one of us must become King." "You
accuse me of lying?" "Why
should I bother?" Antorell
scowled and started to raise his staff, then seemed to
change his mind. "When the boy blows your own spells back at
you, perhaps you will see what I mean." "Nonsense!"
the leader of the wizards replied. "You ob- viously
know little of what you speak." "No,
of course not; I have only seen the boy in action," Antorell
said with awful sarcasm. The
leader shrugged again. "What the boy has learned matters
little. The power of the sword passes to the ruler of the
castle, and there is nothing he can do about it. He will be
easy enough to take care of then." Out of
the comer of my eye, I saw a flicker of movement; Shiara
was edging toward me. I had to force myself not to turn my
head. The wizards seemed to have forgotten both of us,
and I didn't want to remind them. I hoped they wouldn't
remember until after Shiara had done whatever she was
planning to do. I also hoped Shiara was planning to do
something; I certainly couldn't, and I didn't think Nightwitch
would be much help against all those wizards. "Stop
talking and let's get on with it," one of the wizards in the
back said. "An
excellent suggestion. That is, if you are quite sat- isfied,
Antorell?" said the leader. Antorell
glared and stalked over to the rest of the wizards. The
leader looked around and nodded. "Begin." Under
other circumstances, the spell-casting would have been
very interesting to watch. The wizards spent quite a bit of
time arguing about where each of them should stand, and
exactly what the correct angle was for each staff, and in what
order the spells should be said. The leader seemed particularly
concerned that things be done right; evidently there
was something about the castle that would cause prob- 200 Patricia C. Wrede lems if
everything wasn't perfect. Finally, they agreed on what
they were going to do, and they got started. As the
wizards started chanting, something touched my arm; if
I could have moved, I'd have jumped. It was Shiara. "Do
something before they finish!" I whispered. "I've
been trying!" Shiara whispered back. "But it isn't working." "Oh,
no." I was so upset that I spoke the words in a normal
tone of voice; fortunately, the wizards were too busy chanting
to notice. "You haven't been polite to anyone since you
apologized to Telemain, and you used that up on the last
bunch of wizards." Shiara
looked stricken. "Daystar, I'm sorry!" "There
isn't anything we can do about it now," I said. "If
you—" I
stopped, because the wizards had stopped chanting. Shiara
and I both looked at them, but the wizards didn't seem to
be finished with what they were doing. They looked more
like they'd been interrupted in the middle of things. The
leader was bending over the man on the floor, who was
still sleeping. A moment later the wizard straightened with an
exclamation and stretched his staff out over the man's
body. The
figure dissolved into sparkles, leaving a little blob of mud
on the floor, and the wizards stirred in surprise. "A simulacrum!"
said someone at the back of the wizards. I let
out my breath in relief. Simulacra are very hard to make;
like most major spells, earth, air, fire, and water have to be
properly mixed in order to get a good one, and that's fairly
tricky. A really good magician can make a simulacrum that
looks exactly like someone, but it doesn't have any connection
to the actual person at all. As a result, a si- mulacrum
can't be used against someone the way other types of
magic can; what they're mainly good for is confusing people. This
one seemed to have done an excellent job. The wizards
were glaring at each other accusingly. "If that was a
simulacrum," one of them said finally, "where's the King? Who put
it there, anyway?" "Old
Zemenar, probably," an older-looking wizard said. Talking
to Dragons 201 "It
looked like him, and setting up a decoy is just the sort of
thing he would do." "That
doesn't make sense! He started this whole affair in the
first place; why would he put a false King in the castle
to distract us?" "Zemenar
never trusted anybody. He probably wanted to do
this himself, so he made it as hard as he could for anyone
else to finish the job. Or maybe he was just being omery."
The older wizard shrugged. "Either way, I doubt that he
expected to get eaten by a dragon." "We
have wasted enough time here," the leader of the wizards
said with sudden decision. "Silvarex, take three others
and begin searching for the King at once. We cannot allow
him to escape again." He went
on giving instructions, but I stopped paying attention.
He wasn't talking to me, and I had other things to
worry about. I was still holding the key in my left hand, and as
soon as the simulacrum disappeared, the key stopped tugging
me and started getting warm. My other arm, the one
with the sword, was tingling under the jangling of the wizards,
and my head felt very light. I had a sudden, strong feeling
that there was something important I ought to re- member,
but the jangling of the wizards' magic kept dis- tracting
me just before I could figure out what it was. "Daystar!"
Shiara hissed, practically in my ear. I
jumped a little and realized that the wizard's spell hold- ing me
was beginning to weaken. I couldn't move very much or
very fast, though, and if the wizards noticed, they'd just
throw the spell at me again. I decided not to move at all
until I was sure I could move the sword fast enough to block
another spell if they threw one at me, then whispered to
Shiara, "Don't do that. They might notice." Shiara
snorted. "If you don't want them to notice, you'd better
try to notice sooner. That was the third time I called you." "I'm
sorry," I said. "So
am I. What are we going to do?" "If
you could— Nightwitch!" I broke off in midsentence as a
small black streak darted toward the group of wizards. One of
them raised his staff; Shiara cried out and Nightwitch 202 Patricia C. Wrede dodged.
The spell hit the marble floor in a ball of light, and a
moment later the kitten was among the wizards' feet. I couldn't
see what was happening, but I could hear the wiz- ards
shouting. "There
it goes!" "Stop
it!" "It
got away." "Find
it," the leader of the wizards commanded. "You, Grineran,
go after it; it may lead you to the one we seek." One of
the wizards nodded and left, and I blinked. There were
only three wizards left now: a short, round wizard, the
wizard who was giving orders, and Antorell. Antorell
was staring at Shiara and me. "What about them?" he said
suddenly. "They may know something." The
leader of the wizards looked thoughtful. "For once, Antorell,
you may have made a useful suggestion. Per- suading
them to explain what they know may be difficult, however." Antorell
grinned nastily. "I think I can manage it." "Really."
The leader sounded skeptical. "The girl is a fire-witch,
and the boy has the sword, remember." "Sword
or no, he cannot be immune to spells or Silvarex would
never have been able to bind him," Antorell said. "What
did you have in mind?" "Something
like this." Antorell
waved his staff casually in my direction as he spoke.
Even if I'd been able to move, I wouldn't have been able to
twist the sword into a position to block the spell before
it hit me, especially since I didn't realize what he was
doing until the pain struck. It felt as if I were fighting the
fire-witch again, only this time the pain was all through my body
instead of just in my arms. It was worse than anything
I'd ever felt. I think I screamed, but I'm not sure. Beside
me, Shiara shouted, and a long ribbon of fire shot through
the air in front of me, straight at Antorell. The pain stopped
abruptly and the key in my left hand got even hotter. Antorell
was on fire; he was slapping at his clothes and his staff,
trying to put out the flames. Neither of the other wizards
was helping; they were staring toward Shiara and me. Talking
to Dragons 203 The
ribbon of fire still hung in the air above the brazier, making
a curtain of flames between us and the wizards. Slowly,
reluctantly, it began to fade, and as it died, the heat from
the key in my left hand faded along with it. Fire, I thought.
Fire in the brazier, fire in the key; Kazul had said something
about the key and fire.... I
lifted my left hand, fighting the remnant of the wizard's spell,
and threw the key forward into the brazier. There
was a whoosh of flame that leapt all the way to the
ceiling, then died. I thought I saw something in it, but it
vanished before I could be sure. The brazier began to glow, and
the whole room was suddenly full of magic, the magic
of the castle and the Enchanted Forest. It seemed to be
getting ready for something, or perhaps waiting; I was sure
there was something else I should do, but I couldn't think
what. "Stop
them!" the leader of the wizards shouted. "Move,
Daystar!" Shiara cried, and ducked down behind the
brazier. I tried
to follow her, but I couldn't move fast enough because
of the remains of the binding spell and because I was
worrying about what else I was supposed to do in order to
finish the spell I'd started with the key. I saw Antorell and the
other wizards bring their staffs up, and I tried des- perately
to move the sword far enough to block whatever they
were throwing at me. I made it, but only just. There
was a flash as the wizards' spell hit the sword, and a
tingle ran through me. The spell that had been binding me
vanished; I could feel what was left of it flowing through the
sword along with the rest of the magic the wizards had thrown
at me. It felt a lot like the jolt of power I'd gotten in the
forest, when I'd used the sword on the spell the wizards
had tried to throw at Shiara, except that this time I could
tell where the power was going. The
power was flowing through me, into the magic of the
Enchanted Forest itself. Back where it had come from in the
first place, if Kazul was right about where wizards got
most of their magic. Back to... I felt
my eyes widening and almost missed blocking the next
spell. Then I saw more wizards appearing behind the 204 Patricia C. Wrede three m
the doorway; if I didn't do something soon, I wouldn' be able
to do anything except block spells. There was nu way to
find out whether I was right except to try. I
stepped up to the edge of the brazier, took a deep breath and
said loudly: "Power
of water, wind, and earth, Turn
the spell back to its birth. Raise
the fire to free the lord By the
power of wood and sword." As I
spoke the last word, I thrust the Sword of the Sleeping King
into the middle of the coals in the brazier. As the
sword touched the coals, I felt the magic of the forest
surge forward around me. Fire shot up to the ceiling, the
same way it had when I threw the key into the brazier, but
this time the flames didn't fade. They got brighter and brighter
until all I could see was fire. I heard a rumbling sound
like the roof of the Caves of Chance falling in, and the
floor shook under me. A voice said loudly, "All hail the
Waker of the Sword! Hail!" and voices all around me shouted,
"Hail!" Echoes
from the shout rolled around the room, like thun- der
rolling back and forth across the sky. I felt very light- headed;
I couldn't see anything except fire, I couldn't hear anything
except echoes, and I couldn't feel anything at all Then
something in my head seemed to snap into place, and the
noise stopped abruptly. I let
go of the sword and stepped back a pace. The light in my
eyes started to dwindle into flames again, but now I could
see things in them, outlined in fire: dragons fighting wizards
outside the castle, and dwarves fighting elves, and elves
fighting wizards and other elves. I couldn't tell who was
winning; sometimes it seemed to be one set of fiery little
shapes, and sometimes it seemed to be the other. As I
stared at the fire, I realized that I could feel the jangling
from all the wizard's staffs and the deep rumbling of the
magic of the Enchanted Forest and the purring of the castle
itself, even though I wasn't holding the sword any- Talking
to Dragons 205 more. I
could even feel the shape of the wizards' spells inside
and outside of the castle, including the one around and
over the brazier. I could feel the magic of the sword, too,
weaving a bright pattern through all the other types of magic.
I followed the pattern until I saw how it worked, and
then I reached out toward all the different kinds of magic
and twisted. The
jangling of the wizard's staffs stopped abruptly as the
power of the Enchanted Forest swallowed up the power of the
staffs. Immediately, the flames in front of me swirled and
pulled together, so that the pictures I'd been watching disappeared,
and I found myself staring at a crowd of very angry
ex-wizards through a shifting curtain of fire. At
least two of the wizards were wearing swords, and they
were reaching for them. The leader started to point in my
direction, and I ducked instinctively. Almost every wiz- ard
who's any good carries a spell or two outside his staff, just in
case the staff gets stolen. The wizards at the castle didn't
have any magic in their staffs anymore, but they might still
be able to make trouble with their spare spells. I got
behind the brazier just in time to avoid being hit by something
like a large lightning bolt. I swallowed, hoping these
wizards didn't have very many more spells like that. I heard
shouts, and I rolled to my feet, expecting to see the wizards
with the swords coming after me. Wizards
were running in several directions, but none of them
seemed to be heading for me. For a moment, I was puzzled;
then I saw Morwen, Telemain, and a couple of elves
charging into the room from the hallway. I didn't stop to
worry about how they had gotten there. I turned back to the
brazier, to pull the Sword of the Sleeping King out of it so I
could join the fight, and stopped. The
flames were still swirling in the air above the brazier, but
they were denser somehow, and brighter. All I could see was
a mass of white-and-yellow light, shot with power. Then
something flashed so brightly that I had to cover my eyes.
When I could see again, there was a door in the center of the
brazier, right on top of the place where I had thrown the key
and facing the point of the sword. The door was 206
Patricia C. Wrede hung
between two pillars that looked as if they were made of
solid light, and I couldn't see anything in back of it except
light and flames. I
stared at the door for a moment as it grew even more solid.
I wasn't sure I wanted to find out what was on the other
side. Doors like that are even worse than the one in Morwen's
house; they can go anywhere. I reached for the Sword
of the Sleeping King, but before my hand touched it, the
door opened and a man stepped through. He
didn't look at all like the simulacrum; he was taller, with
black hair and tired-looking grey eyes, and he didn't have a
beard. He was dressed in plain clothes, but there was a
feeling of strength about him, and power. Even with- out the
thin gold circlet he wore I would have guessed who he was.
I took a deep breath of relief as he stepped down from
the brazier and onto the marble floor in front of me. As he
did, the doorway behind him melted back into leaping
flames, which faded quickly until there was nothing there
except the brazier and the glowing coals. The room was
utterly silent. I looked up at the King of the Enchanted Forest
for a moment, then turned to the brazier and reached for the
hilt of the Sword of the Sleeping King. The
sword wasn't even warm from the fire, but the blade shone
even more brightly than it had the day Mother brought it out
of the Enchanted Forest and gave it to me. I looked at it
for a minute, then turned back to the King and held it out. "I've
come to return your sword, Father," I said. FOR A
LONG moment the King of the Enchanted Forest looked
at me over the hilt of the sword. Then he reached out and
took it. He held it up for a moment, then turned and
brought it down hard on the edge of the brazier. The
brazier split and fell apart, scattering embers. As soon as
it hit the floor, it started to melt and vanish, and in a
few seconds there was nothing left of it except the key. The
King bent and picked it up, then turned back to me and smiled.
"Thank you, Daystar." "You're
welcome," I said automatically. Then I noticed Shiara
sitting on the floor, where she had dived when the wizards
started throwing spells around. She was looking from me
to the King and back, as if she couldn't believe what
she was seeing. "Oh, I'm sorry," I said. "Shiara, this is the
King of the Enchanted Forest. Father, this is my friend,
Shiara. She's a fire-witch." Father
bowed. Shiara looked at him and cleared her throat, then cleared
it again and said, "Hey, urn, are you really Daystar's
father?" The
King smiled slightly and nodded. "Of course. Only the
Kings of the Enchanted Forest can use the sword." He raised
it so that the light flashing from the blade filled the 209 210 Patricia C. Wrede room,
then in one fluid motion he sheathed it. He looked at me
and smiled again. Shiara
blinked, then turned her head and glared at me "Why
didn't you tell me the King of the Enchanted Forest was
your father?" she demanded. "I'm
sorry, but I didn't know it myself until just now," I said. "Ha!"
said Shiara. "Why—" Before
she could finish her sentence, Nightwitch pounced on her.
I was just as surprised as Shiara; I hadn't seen the kitten
coming. "Nightwitch!" Shiara said. "Where did you come
from?" "I
believe she came with them," Father said, nodding toward
the doorway. Shiara
and I turned. A dozen wizards were sprawled on the
floor in a tangled pile. Some of them were wrapped in vines,
some of them seemed to be frozen, and some of them had
elves and cats sitting on them. As soon as we turned to look
at them, the elves all got up and bowed, then ^at down
again quickly before the wizards could get up and do anything.
The cats just sat and blinked at us. "I
don't think you need to be quite so careful," the King said to
the elves. "If you'll let them up one at a time, I'll decide
what to do with them." The
elves nodded, and one of them stood up and bowed politely
to the King. Father walked over to the wizard the elf had
been sitting on and started asking him questions The
wizard didn't answer. Finally, Father shrugged and waved a
hand. The wizard disappeared, and Father went on to the
next one. As soon
as they got off of the wizards, the elves started gathering
up the staffs into a big bundle; most of the cats just
sat down and washed their paws. None of the wizards would
say anything to Father, and he didn't waste much time on
any of them. In a few minutes, there were only three
wizards left. I was watching them when Shiara poked me. "Daystar,
where's Morwen?" she said when I turned around.
"Those are her cats; she has to be around some- where." Talking
to Dragons 211 "I
don't know," I said. "I remember seeing her right before
Father showed up, and Telemain was with her." I looked
toward the door, where the last few wizards were, and
blinked. "Shiara, where's Antorell?" "Didn't
he disappear already?" "No,
he didn't. I was watching," I said. Shiara and I looked
at each other for an instant, then headed for the doorway. No one
tried to stop us. One of the elves gave us an odd look,
but another elf grabbed his arm and whispered some- thing
to him, and he only bowed deeply as we passed. It made me
feel almost as uncomfortable as I felt when the dwarves
bowed to me; I didn't like it at all. Outside
in the hallway we found Morwen, kneeling on the
floor beside Telemain and wrapping long strips of black cloth
around his right shoulder. There were pieces of odd- looking
plants all over the floor, and a little way down the hall
was a puddle of something dark and slimy. The puddle had a
wizard's staff lying across it, and a wizard's robe was sort of
crumpled up under the staff; I got the distinct feeling that
the puddle used to be a wizard. "Morwen!"
Shiara said. "What happened? Can I help?" "What
happened was a battle," Morwen said. "I should think
that would be obvious enough." "But
how did—" Shiara stopped, because Telemain was stirring.
A moment later he opened his eyes and looked up at all
of us. "What
was that?" he said rather hazily. "That,"
said Morwen, "was a sword. They are usually long,
very sharp, and pointed. You're lucky it didn't take your
head off." Telemain
started to shake his head, then winced. "A plain sword.
No wonder I couldn't block it; I thought it was a spell." Morwen
snorted. "You may be one of the greatest mag- ical
theoreticians in the world, but you don't have a particle of
common sense," she said acidly. "Why, in heaven's name,
didn't you duck?" "I
did duck!" Telemain said, looking startled and indig- nant.
"He wasn't aiming for my shoulder, he was aiming 212 Patricia
C. Wrede for my
chest. And if you think I'm going to put up with you and
your—" "You,"
Morwen said firmly, "are going to put up with me
until that shoulder is healed. Which, may I remind you, means
that I will have to put up with you for the same period of
time. Fortunately, it shouldn't take very long; a few days, at
most." "A
few days!" Telemain said. "Woman, are you mad? It'll
take at least a week!" "Not
if I change herbs twice a day," Morwen said in an irritated
tone. "I should know; it's my field." "Well,
it's my shoulder!" "I'm
so glad you noticed," Morwen said. "Stop fussing, or
you'll make things worse and I will have to put up with you for
a week." Telemain
stopped talking and just glared. It didn't seem to
bother Morwen in the least. She dusted her hands and began
picking up some of the plants that were scattered all over
the floor. When he saw that Morwen wasn't even watching
him, Telemain stopped glaring and tried to sit up. Right
away, Morwen was beside him, pushing him back down on
the floor. "Didn't
you hear what I just said?" Morwen asked. "Stop jumping
around like that." "I'm
quite capable of sitting up," Telemain said. He didn't
look as if he were telling the truth; he was too pale, and he
was having a lot of trouble pushing himself upright even
before Morwen started pushing in the opposite direc- tion. "You
are too stubborn to know what is good for you," Morwen
informed him. Telemain
glared at her again. "This floor is cold, hard, and
extremely uncomfortable. Do you expect me to lie here all
day?" "That
would be far too much to ask," the King of the Enchanted
Forest said from the doorway behind us. "But I believe
I can do something about it." Morwen
stood up and nodded, then frowned at Telemain, who was
trying to sit up again. "I told you to stay there, and I
meant it, Kings or no Kings. Excuse me, Mendanbar," Talking
to Dragons 213 she
added, looking at the King. "Morwen,
you are incorrigible," Father said, smil- ing. He
looked at Telemain. "You may as well do as she says;
Cimorene's the only person I've ever met who has more
determination than Morwen. Which room do you want?" "The
brown one," Morwen said before Telemain could answer.
"He'll need a firm bed to support that shoulder." Father
laughed. "Of course." He started to lift his hand, and I
cleared my throat. "I
would like to ask them something before they go," I said
when Father turned toward me. He nodded, and I looked at
Morwen. "Did you happen to notice what happened to the
wizard who was halfway around the brazier when you came
in? I didn't see him afterward." "You
mean Antorell? Yes, I thought I saw him," Morwen said.
"I'm afraid I don't recall. He wasn't the one I melted, if
that's what you're asking." "Could
he have gotten away?" Shiara asked. Morwen
glanced at the King. "If you will allow me, I can
find out fairly quickly." Father nodded, and Morwen made a
chuckling sort of sound. Two of the cats poked their heads
around the comer of the doorframe. "Daystar
wants to know what's become of one of the wizards,"
Morwen said to the cats. "The one named An- torell." The
cats looked at each other, and one of them twitched its
tail. The other one looked back at Morwen and said, "Rroowww!"
and they both pulled their heads back out of sight. "He
got away," Morwen said, turning back to the King. "Scom
says he ducked down the hall while Telemain and I were
busy with the rest of them." Father
frowned in concentration. "Well, he isn't inside the
castle anymore," he said after a moment. "I suppose I'd better
go find him; he might still be able to cause trouble, and I
think it's about time we checked on things outside, anyway."
He looked at me. "Is there anything else you need to ask
right now?" "No,"
I said. There were still a lot of things I wanted to 214 Patricia C. Wrede know
about, but I couldn't really say I needed to know any of
them. Father nodded and looked back at Morwen. "The brown
room, I think you said?" Morwen
nodded, and Father waved his hand. Morwen and
Telemain disappeared. Father raised his hand for an- other
gesture, then paused and looked at Shiara and me. "I suppose
you want to come, too?" "Yes,
we do. That is, if it isn't going to cause problems," I said. I hadn't
quite finished my sentence when the castle dis- solved
into mist around us. The mist cleared immediately, and we
were standing on springy green moss with the trees of the
Enchanted Forest all around us. At first I thought Father
had taken us to a place a long way from the castle; then I
saw all the dragons and elves among the trees. I looked
back over my shoulder and saw the castle right behind
us. "Hey,
where did all the trees come from?" Shiara said. "They
came from the wizards' magic," Father said. "When Day
star released the magic they had stored in their staffs, it went
back into the forest, and things got back to normal in a
hurry." "When
Daystar did what?" Shiara said. "It
was part of the sword and the fire and the brazier," I said
hastily. "I think you were busy ducking." "Oh,"
said Shiara. By that
time the dragons and elves had seen us, and everyone
started cheering and bowing. In the middle of the cheering
and bowing, one of the dragons came over. "It is good to
see Your Majesty again," she said. "It
is good to be here again," the King replied. "How goes
the battle?" "It
is quite finished," the dragon said. "There are a few still
out herding prisoners together, but that's about all. Oh, yes, we
won," she added. "Excellent!"
the King said, but he was watching the trees out of
the comers of his eyes, and there was a tiny crease between
his eyebrows. "If King Kazul is about, I would like to
speak with her." Talking
to Dragons 215 The dragon
smiled and her eyes glittered as if she were enjoying
a private joke. "Kazul will be here in a moment." Father
nodded, managing to look impatient and polite at the
same time. Suddenly the cheering got much louder, and then
the dragons drew apart and Kazul came through the trees
toward us. She was smiling, and she looked very large and
green and shining. She was so magnificent that none of us
saw the figure with her until they were both quite close
to us. I was
the first to notice that Kazul had someone with her.
When I saw who it was, I blinked and swallowed hard. "Mother?" "Cimorene!"
shouted Father. He took three strides for- ward
and took her in his arms. Kazul smiled and sat back, looking
smug. Mother
was laughing and crying at the same time; I'd never
seen her react like that to anything before. Not ever. I was
still staring when Shiara poked me. "Don't
stare," she whispered when I turned. "It's not polite." I
looked at Shiara for a minute, and my face got hot. I couldn't
really say anything, though; she was right. I felt very
peculiar, but fortunately Mother and the King stopped hugging
each other just then and started paying attention to the
rest of us instead. Father
went to talk to Kazul, and Mother came over to us. She
looked at me for a moment, then put her hands on my
shoulders and said, "You've done very well, Daystar. For the
most part, that is." I
didn't say anything, because I was sure she meant the way I
had almost lost the Sword of the Sleeping King to the
Princess. Then Shiara shifted uncomfortably, and I re- membered
that I hadn't introduced her. "Mother, this is my friend,
Shiara," I said. "She's a fire-witch." "I
can tell that by looking at her," Mother said. She smiled
at Shiara. "You'll stay with us for at least a few days,
won't you?" Shiara
nodded. "Good," Mother said. "Now, if you will excuse
me, there are still a few things I have to attend to." Talking
to Dragons 217 "Mother,"
I said, and she turned. "That wizard, Antorell. He was
in the castle, but he got away; I thought you should know." "He
did not get away!" said a familiar voice behind me. "I
caught him myself. Do you want him for anything, or can I
eat him?" We all
turned. The little dragon was sitting on the other side of
the bridge, holding on to one of Antorell's arms. Antorell's
robe was dirty and he didn't have his staff any- more.
He looked very tattered and very unhappy; the dragon looked
extremely pleased with itself. "Well?" it said. "Can I eat
him?" I
looked at Mother, and she shook her head. "I don't think
you should eat him," I said to the dragon. "The King talked
to all the other wizards, and he'll probably want to talk to
this one, too." "Well,
I want him back when the King gets finished with him,"
the little dragon said. "I caught him, and I'm going to eat
him." "He'll
probably give you a stomachache," Shiara said. I
stopped listening to the conversation, because Antorell had
straightened and was glaring past me, at Mother. He looked
more powerful, somehow, but no one else seemed to have
noticed anything unusual. I looked uneasily over my
shoulder and saw Father, still talking to Kazul. I looked back,
wondering whether I really had anything to worry about
Without his staff, all Antorell had were his extra spells,
and he'd probably used them up in the battle. At least,
I hoped he had. Shiara
and the dragon were still arguing. Suddenly, An- torell
twisted and made a throwing motion with his left hand. The
dragon shrieked in pain and let go of him, and he ran toward
the bridge, waving his hands and shouting. I felt a sudden,
intense surge of magic around him, and an instant later
the demon appeared. It
materialized right in front of us, all purple scales and orange
claws and silver-green teeth. Fortunately for them, demons
are color-blind. Antorell shouted again, in a lan- guage I
didn't understand, and pointed at Mother. The de- 218 Patricia C. Wrede mon
nodded, and on" arm darted out. I
grabbed something I couldn't see out of the air in front of me
and pulled. The demon vanished, and Antorell cried out in
surprise. I yanked at the something again and sent Antorell
after the demon; after what he'd been trying to do, I didn't
care whether the King wanted to talk to him or not. Then I
saw that the little dragon was turning pink around the
edges again. I let go of whatever it was, grabbed a different
one, and twisted. The dragon gave a surprised- sounding
squeak and turned green again, all at once. I
dropped the piece of nothing I'd been holding and turned.
Mother was shaking her head. "That was a bit ex- treme,
Daystar," she said, but her expression was proud. "Daystar,
what did you... I mean, how did you..." Shiara
gave up and just stared at me. "I
don't know," I said. I was at least as surprised as she was.
"I'm not even sure what I did." "What
happened?" the little dragon asked. It looked around
suspiciously. "Is that wizard dead?" "No,
but he probably wishes he were," Mother said. "Demons
do not like surprise visitors." "Oh,
is that what Daystar did with him?" said Father's voice
from behind me. "I was wondering." I
jumped and turned around to see the King and Kazul standing
there. The King was looking at Mother; Kazul was looking
at the little dragon. "Where have you been?" Kazul said in
a resigned voice. "I've
been catching wizards!" the little dragon said proudly.
"Well, one of them, anyway. He threw dragons- bane at
me again and called a demon and Daystar got rid of both
of them. I didn't even get to eat him," the dragon finished
sadly. "I
see," Kazul said, shaking her head. "I think you'd better
spend the rest of the day with me. It may, just pos- sibly,
keep you out of trouble." "I
don't understand!" Shiara burst out. "How could An- torell
do any magic without his staff? And how could Daystar
do any magic at all? And what did Antorell have to do
with the sword and everything?" Talking
to Dragons 219 The
King smiled at Mother, then looked at Shiara and me.
"As long as things seem to be quiet out here, why don't we go
inside? That way, we can be comfortable while I explain." Shiara
and I nodded. Father waved his hand, and the Enchanted
Forest dissolved into mist around us. -»& ','A* '» i» WE
APPEARED IN one ofthe rooms inside the castle, a small, cozy-looking
place with lots of bookshelves It was just as dusty
as all the other rooms Shiara and I had been through, but
when Father waved all the dust vanished Mother mut- tered
something about instant cleaning being no excuse for letting
things get into such a state, and we all sat down The
King looked at us "I
believe this should begin with you, Cimorene," he said
Mother looked thoughtful for a moment, then nodded and
started talking Apparently,
Mother really was a Princess She was the youngest
daughter of the ruler of a very large kingdom on the
other side of the Mountains of Morning It sounded like a nice
place, unfortunately. Mother thought it was bonng So,
when she was about sixteen, she ran away She went straight
to the Mountains of Morning, to the Pass of Silver Ice
that the dragons guard, and demanded that the surprised dragons
make her a prisoner The dragons
weren't quite sure what to do, but finally Kazul
agreed to take her Although Kazul wasn't King of the
Dragons then, she was fairly important, and she and 221 222 Patricia C. Wrede Mother
got along very well. A couple of knights from her father's
court showed up after a while, but Mother told them in no
uncertain terms that she didn't want to be rescued. The
knights went away, and Mother stayed with the dragons. Mother
spent a long time as Kazul's Princess. After a while,
Kazul started teaching her dragon magic, and Mother got
very good at it. She made quite a few friends in the Enchanted
Forest, too, because Kazul traveled a lot. And then
the old King of the Dragons died, and all the dragons went to
the Ford of Whispering Snakes to try and move Colin's
Stone, and Kazul was the one who did. That
was how Mother met my father. The dragons had been
friends of the rulers of the Enchanted Forest for cen- turies,
so when he heard that the dragons had a new King, the
King of the Enchanted Forest came to pay his respects. He also
wanted to talk to Kazul about the Society of Wiz- ards;
they were getting a little out of hand, and he was trying to
decide whether to use the sword on them. "The
sword can do quite a few different things," Father explained.
"One of them is to drain off the power in a wizard's
staff gradually, over a period of time; another is to
empty a staff of magic all at once. Most of the time, I used
the sword to keep wizards from draining too much magic
out of the Enchanted Forest, not to destroy their staffs completely,
but the Society of Wizards was becoming a problem
in spite of what I was doing with the sword." "Then
why didn't you empty their staffs?" Shiara de- manded.
"It would have saved us an awful lot of trouble." "It
would have saved me some trouble, too," Father said. "But
I couldn't destroy their magic completely like that without
a very good reason. Which was why I went to talk to
Kazul." Mother
and Kazul both liked Father very much, and he started
visiting them more often. The wizards kept making problems,
so he had lots of reasons. Finally, he and Mother decided
to get married, but before they could even announce it,
someone stole the sword. The
King and Mother dropped everything else to find out who
had it and where it was. It didn't take long; evidently the
sword does strange things when it's taken outside the Talking
to Dragons 223 Enchanted
Forest, so it wasn't hard to locate. One of the wizards
had it, of course, and he'd put it in a tower well away
from the forest, with a lot of spells around it to keep the
King from getting to it. That
was when the argument started. Father and Mother both
wanted to go steal the sword back, and neither of them wanted
the other to go. Kazul was the one who settled it; she
said that the wizards were expecting Father to try to get the
sword back, but they weren't expecting Mother. The King
still objected. He said the sword might do something awful to
Mother, because she wasn't one of his family. Kazul
told him that if that was all he was worrying about, he
should many Mother right away, so she'd be a member of his
family. Apparently, he still didn't like the idea of Mother
going off to steal the sword back, but he could see that he
wasn't going to be able to out-argue Mother and Kazul.
So he and Mother got married. Kazul
performed the ceremony, and a few days later Kazul
and Mother flew off to the tower where the sword was. It
took them nearly three days to get there. By the time
they arrived, most of the wizards had left for the En- chanted
Forest, but the sword was still there. The only wizard
in the tower was Antorell. Mother
knew Antorell fairly well. He was the son of Zemenar,
the wizard who'd stolen the sword, and he'd been courting
her for several years. Mother found out that he didn't
know what the sword was; he'd been left to watch it
without being told anything, and he was very sulky about it.
Mother managed to talk him into letting her inside the tower
to see the sword, then she broke the last of the spells guarding
it and took it. Right away, Antorell tried to kill her and
take the sword himself; evidently, he'd let her into the
tower because he knew she could break the last warding spell
and he couldn't. So Mother melted him. On
their way back to the Enchanted Forest, Kazul and Mother
were met by one of the dragons, who told them about
the wizards' attack on the castle. Kazul flew straight there,
but by the time they arrived the battle was over, and the
dragons had put their own shield up around the castle. Kazul
sent some of the dragons out to look for the wizards 224
Patricia C. Wrede who had
gotten away, and then she and Mother had a long talk
about what to do next. Both of
them were sure that the wizards had put a spell on the
King, and they were just as sure that the sword could break
the spell. Unfortunately, the sword could only be used by one
of the Kings of the Enchanted Forest or his children, and
then only when the earth, air, and water of the En- chanted
Forest and the fire of the sword itself had recognized the
person holding it as a rightful heir of the sword. And the
only way to be recognized was to go out in the Enchanted Forest
and hope you would do the right things at the right times. Mother
and Kazul spent a lot of time trying to figure out a way
to get the sword to work for someone besides the King,
but they never did. Then Mother found out she was going
to have a baby, and about that time Antorell found her. He
blamed her for his father's death, because she'd taken
the sword, and he tried to kill her. Mother had to melt him
again. After
that. Mother decided that she'd better find some- where
to hide until I was old enough to use the sword. The wizards
were hunting for the sword, but as long as it stayed inside
the Enchanted Forest it was invisible to them. Mother, however,
wasn't, and she knew that if she stayed in the Enchanted
Forest, one of the wizards' spells would find her eventually.
On the other hand, she couldn't take the sword out of
the forest and still keep it hidden, any more than the wizards
could. So
Mother hid the sword inside the forest, then left and never
went back until the day she gave the sword to me. She put
up some good spells to keep Antorell from finding us,
then waited. She taught me very carefully, without ever telling
me anything about the sword or the King of the Enchanted
Forest or the war with the wizards, so that I would
have a chance of being recognized by the sword and reaching
the castle without getting caught by one of the wizards'
spells. "I'm
afraid it was rather hard on you, Daystar," she said. "But
we couldn't think of anything else that had a chance of
working." Talking
to Dragons 225 "Well,
/ think we were lucky," Shiara said. The
King smiled at me. "Kings of the Enchanted Forest are
supposed to be lucky." Shiara
blinked. "You weren't very lucky, were you? What
did those wizards do to you, anyway?" The
King shook his head. "Zemenar made a bad mistake when he
attacked the castle without bringing the sword with him. He
and about ten others broke into the castle during the
battle. I got a couple of them, but without the sword I was
outnumbered a little too badly. They wanted to kill me, but
they couldn't do it inside the castle without the sword, and
they couldn't take me outside the castle because of the dragons.
So Zemenar decided to put me in storage, in a manner
of speaking, while he went back for the sword. The simulacrum
was a decoy, in case someone managed to get into
the castle while he was gone." "But
where were you for seventeen years?" Shiara said. "There
are... places that can be reached through the proper
doors, places that can't be gotten into or out of except through
such a door. Some of them are very large; some aren't.
Zemenar found one that suited him and put me in it,
then hid the door. Without the sword or the key, I couldn't get out
until someone put the door back up." "But
I still don't understand about Antorell. He acted as if he
wanted to do something to Daystar a lot more than he wanted
the sword." "Antorell
never knew what the sword was," Mother said. "Zemenar
and the Head Wizard were the only ones who knew
the whole story, and after the way Antorell failed to guard
the sword, the Head Wizard wouldn't tell him any- thing." "Ha!"
said Shiara. "Served him right. But what did Day- star do
to Antorell, anyway? And how? He never did any- thing
like it before." "He
couldn't do it before," Father said. "The Kings of the
Enchanted Forest can use the magic of the forest directly, but
only after the sword has acknowledged them. Daystar wasn't
acknowledged until he put the sword into the fire." "Oh."
Shiara sat back, looking thoughtful. There
was a moment's silence, then I thought of some- 226
Patricia C. Wrede thing
else I wanted to ask about. "Mother," I said, "do you know
anything about fire-witches' magic?" "Yes,
of course," she said. "Why do you want to know?" "Could
you teach Shiara how to do things?" I said. "She helped
me a lot, and I think she ought to have some sort of
reward, and that's why she came to the Enchanted Forest in the
first place." "I
didn't do very much," Shiara objected. "You kept me from
staying a statue, and I think you saved my life when the
roof of the Caves of Chance fell in. You're the one who deserves
a reward." "I
think," Mother broke in before I could answer Shiara, "that
it is time you told us what you have been doing these past
few days. I have a general idea, but I would like a few more
details, and Mendanbar hasn't heard anything about it
yet." I
looked at Father, and he nodded, so Shiara and I went through
our story again. I did most of the talking, with Shiara
putting in a comment now and then when she thought I was
leaving something out. I finished by explaining about Shiara's
magic. Both Mother and the King looked rather startled,
and then the King began to smile. "A
polite fire-witch," he said thoughtfully. "Very un- usual." "I
don't want to have to be polite to people!" Shiara said angrily. "Why
not?" I said. "You're getting much better at it." "Especially
not to youF Shiara said. "I
can understand that," Father said. "It's his fault, after all." "What?"
said Shiara and I together. "It's
Daystar's fault that you have to be polite," Father repeated.
"His and the sword's. One of the things the sword does
besides controlling wizards is unlocking people's tal- ents,
particularly magical talents. When you met Day star, both of
you touched the sword at the same time. You wanted to be
able to use your magic and Daystar wanted you to be more
polite; I think the sword did the best it could, under the
circumstances." "I
knew it!" Shiara glared at me. "I said it sounded like Talking
to Dragons 227 something
that stupid sword would do!" "I'm
sorry," I said. "I didn't know. But at least you can use
your magic now, sometimes; isn't that better than not being
able to use it at all?" "No!"
said Shiara. "It's worse! I have to go home and be nice
to people, and it probably won't work most of the time
because I have to mean it, and how can I mean it if I'm
always thinking about being able to do magic? And it's boring
at home, and people will still keep expecting me to do
things I can't do. I don't even know anyone who could teach
me about magic even if I could get it to work all the time.
I'll never leam anything!" Little
flickers of flame started running down Shiara's cheeks.
It took me a minute to realize that she was crying fire,
and when I did, I didn't know what to do about it. "That
is quite enough of that," Mother said while I was still
thinking. Shiara looked up. "You
don't know what it's like! It's horrible." "On
the contrary, I know quite well what it's like," Mother
said. "And the solution is quite obvious. In fact, it's
the same one I used." "What?"
Shiara blinked, and the flame-tears stopped run- ning
down her face. "What do you mean?" "You
can become Kazul's Princess," Mother said. "She doesn't
have one at the moment. It would have a great many advantages
on both sides. You will leam considerably more about
magic, dragons, and the Enchanted Forest than you would
anywhere else, and Kazul will get a Princess who can't
be accidentally roasted if one of the other dragons gets out of
hand. And you'll be living nearby, which will give Daystar
and Mendanbar a chance to figure out how to re- verse
that ridiculous politeness spell." "But
I'm not a Princess!" Shiara said. "If
Kazul says you are a Princess, then you are a Prin- cess,"
Mother said firmly. "Besides, it will be excellent experience
for you later." I opened
my mouth to ask what Mother meant by that, and
Shiara said, "But are you sure Kazul would be willing to do
it?" "Kazul
will have no objection whatever to training the 228
Patricia C. Wrede next
Queen of the Enchanted Forest," Mother said calmly. "You
don't need to worry about that." I
closed my mouth very quickly and looked at the floor, feeling
my face getting hot. I heard Shiara say, "Oh," in a small
voice, and then the King laughed. "Cimorene,
I think you're going a little fast," he said, still
chuckling. "If Shiara wants to go live with Kazul, I'm sure we
can make the arrangements, but there's no reason to
hurry. She can stay here until she decides; there's plenty of
room. Now, if you don't mind, I think we should go back
outside; Kazul said something about a feast, and I haven't
had a good meal in seventeen years." Mother
didn't object, so the King moved us all to the feast
with another wave. Everyone was there: dwarves and dragons
and elves and cats, and even a few wizards who had
been on the King's side. Morwen was there, too, but she
spent quite a bit of time popping back to the castle to make
sure Telemain wasn't doing anything she disapproved of. Mother
and the King sat at one end of a long table, and Kazul sat
at the other. Shiara and I sat in the middle. The people
in between us kept changing, and all of them wanted to hear
about how the King and Mother had gotten married, and how
Mother had stolen the sword back, and how Shiara and I
had gotten into the castle and broken the spell on the King. "I'm
getting tired of this," Shiara whispered to me while some of
the people next to us were changing seats. "Let's go
someplace else for a while, and let them tell each other about
the stupid wizards. I don't want to talk about it any- more." "I
don't, either, but I don't think we should leave," I said. "You
don't? No, of course you don't. How very tire- some,"
said a squeaky voice from the ground by my left foot. "Suz!"
I said, looking down. "Where did you come from?" "The
forest, of course," said the lizard. He ran up the leg of
the table in a thin gold streak, then stopped and looked around
nervously. "Is that—that kitten anywhere close by?" Talking
to Dragons 229 "No,
she's inside," said Shiara. "I don't think she likes the
crowd. Why?" The
lizard looked at her. "If you'd ever been jumped on by
something four times as big as you are, and been rolled around
until you were dizzy, not to mention bruised, you wouldn't
have to ask." He balanced on his tail and peered over
the edge of a bowl of nuts. "Would
you like something to eat?" I said. "I
believe I would," said Suz. He made a very fast bounc- ing
motion, and a moment later he was holding one of the nuts.
"What are you going to do now that the wizards are gone?" "They
aren't all gone," I said. "Some of them were on our
side, and I think some of the others actually got away." "They
did?" Suz considered for a moment. "I suppose they
did. How very annoying. But what are you going to do?"
He looked from me to Shiara and back. "I'm
going to be Kazul's Princess," Shiara said before I could
answer. Suz
fell over backward, just missing a silver bowl full of
cranberry jelly. "Oh my gracious goodness my oh!" he squeaked.
"However did that happen?" "Mother
suggested it," I said. I looked at Shiara. "But I
thought you hadn't made up your mind yet." "I
just decided," Shiara said. "Home is boring, and this way I
can leam things, and maybe even stop having to be polite
to get my magic to work." I
suspected Shiara was more interested in not having to be
polite than she was in learning things, but I didn't say so.
"I'm glad you're going to be staying," I said instead. "You
are?" Suz said skeptically. He peered up at me. "Why,
you really are! How amazing." I
didn't know what to say to that, but fortunately I didn't have
time to think about it. Father and Mother and Kazul all
stood up just then and everyone else got very quiet. Father
looked around for a moment, smiled, and started speaking. First
he thanked everyone for coming to help with the wizards,
and then he introduced Mother formally as "my wife,
Cimorene." All the dragons and elves and other people 230 Patricia C. Wrede shouted
and applauded; the din was tremendous. Then he introduced
me, and I had to stand up and be clapped at. After
that, Kazul said that the dragons were pleased to be of
assistance, and everyone sat down and started talking again.
The whole thing didn't take very much time, which surprised
me. I'd thought speeches at feasts were supposed to be
longer. Even
with short speeches, the feast lasted longer than I expected.
Shiara left after a while, to go find Nightwitch and
talk to the little dragon. I stayed at the table. I didn't have
much choice; every time I tried to get up, someone new
would pounce on me and start asking questions. I got very
tired of it after a while, but I couldn't seem to get away. I
was glad when it was finally over. The
next few days were a little hectic, but then the elves and
dragons who'd been in the battle went home and things started
to settle down a little. Morwen and Telemain were almost
the last to leave, because of Telemain's shoulder. Morwen
had to stay to take care of it, and she wouldn't let Telemain
go anywhere until he was well. "It's
simply ridiculous," Telemain grumbled at breakfast on the
third morning after the battle. "I am quite capable of
traveling with my arm in a sling." "Yes,
and the first time you ran across a slowstone or a pool of
transformation-water you'd take your arm out of the sling
and start tinkering with it," Morwen said. "Which would
not be good for that shoulder." Telemain
glared at her. "I disagree." "You
may disagree all you wish, but you aren't leaving the
castle for another two days," Morwen said. She picked up a
basket of muffins, took one, and passed the rest to Mother. "Two
days!" Mother
raised an eyebrow. "Is our hospitality unwel- come?" "No,
of course not, but... Cimorene, I have a tremen- dous
amount to do if I'm to be ready for the wedding in time." I
hadn't heard about any weddings being planned, but I Talking
to Dragons 231 was
carefully not looking at Shiara anyway. Then Father looked
up. "Wedding?"
he said. Morwen
smiled. "Telemain and I are getting married." Shiara
and Father and I all said, "What!?" at the same time,
but we were nearly drowned out by a chorus of startled meows
from Morwen's cats. "Yes,
married," Morwen said to one of them. "And it has
nothing to do with you, so you may as well be quiet and
accept it." The
cats made unhappy noises for another minute, until Morwen
frowned at them. Then they all got up and went over to
a comer of the room, where they sat muttering to each
other with their tails twitching. Morwen watched for a
moment before she nodded and turned back to the table. "They'll
get used to the idea," she said. "Urn,
congratulations to both of you," I said. Father
was looking at Mother. "Cimorene, did you know about
this?" "Not
exactly," Mother said, and smiled. "I
see." Father shook his head. "Well, congratulations." "Thank
you," Telemain said. He started to reach for a plate
of sausages with his bad arm, and Morwen stopped him. Two
days later, Morwen announced that Telemain's arm was
well enough for him to travel. She promised to invite all of
us to the wedding, even the dragons, and then she and
Telemain left the castle, followed by a string of dis- approving
cats. Shiara
and Kazul were the last to leave. I was a little taken
aback when I heard. It hadn't occurred to me that Kazul
lived in the Mountains of Morning, and that if Shiara was
going to be Kazul's Princess, she would have to live there,
too. I didn't say anything about it, though; I felt too silly
for not having realized it before. Father
and Mother and I went out to see them off. Mother gave
Shiara some advice about princessing, and Father told her
that if she was going to glare at dragons, she'd have to leam to
glare politely. Then they both went to talk to Kazul. 232 Patricia C. Wrede Shiara
looked at me. "I'm
beginning to wonder whether I really want to do this or
not," she said. "Does he really expect me to practice glaring
at people?" "No,
just at dragons," I said. "If he wanted you to glare at
everyone, he would have said so." "Well,
I think it's— Nightwitch!" Shiara bent to retrieve the
kitten, who had been investigating one of Shiara's bun- dles a
little too vigorously. "Where
did you get all of this, anyway?" I asked as she straightened
up. There were at least three bundles in the heap
Nightwitch had been climbing, and I knew Shiara hadn't
had any of them when we'd arrived at the castle. "Morwen
gave me that one, and Cimorene gave me the others,"
Shiara said. "She said I would need them if I was going
to live with Kazul. I don't even know what's in all of them
yet." "Oh."
I couldn't think of anything else to say because just
then I realized how much I was going to miss having Shiara
around. The Mountains of Morning weren't exactly close
to the castle, and I didn't think Kazul would be in- terested
in flying back and forth every day. Shiara
frowned. "What's the matter with you?" "I
was just wishing you were going to be living a little closer
to the castle," I said. "I
don't see why. I'm going to have to come here a lot anyway,
at least until you get that stupid politeness spell off of
me so I can use my fire-magic. So what difference does it
make? I'm the one who has to do all the traveling back
and forth." Shiara looked toward Kazul. "I think they're ready
to go. Come on, Daystar." She
picked up one of the bundles and started walking. I didn't
say anything, but I felt a lot happier than I had a few minutes
earlier. Getting rid of that spell didn't sound easy, and
until it was gone Shiara would have to spend quite a bit of
time at the castle. I was sure that if I had enough time, I
could think of some reason for her to keep visiting after
the spell was gone, and even if I couldn't, Mother would
be able to. Smiling, I picked up the other two bundles and
started after Shiara. |
|
|